DISCLAIMER

Developers and sponsors assume no responsibility for the use of MIDAS Family Program (FEA NX, SoilWorks, midas GeoXD,
GTS NX, midas Civil, midas FEA, midas UMD, midas Gen, midas Design+, midas SDS, midas ADS, midas Set, midas Modeler,
midas Drawing, midas NFX(Nastran FX) ; hereinafter referred to as “MIDAS package”) or for the accuracy or validity of any results
obtain from the MIDAS package.

Developers and distributors shall not be liable for loss of profit, loss of business, or financial loss which may be caused
directly or indirectly by the MIDAS package, when used for any purpose or use, due to any defect or deficiency therein.
Accordingly, the user is encouraged to fully understand the bases of the program and become familiar with the users
manuals. The user shall also independently verify the results produced by the program.
Advanced Nonlinear and
Detail Analysis System

User
Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

01
Chapter 1. Introduction

03
Chapter 2. General Information

39
Chapter 3. Geometry

125
Chapter 4. Mesh

361
Chapter 5. Analysis Method

461
Chapter 6. Analysis

503
Chapter 7. Result&Tools
Chapter 1
Introduction

Section 1. Introduction 1
Chapter 2
General
Section 1. Start File 3
1.1 Create File and Save 3
1.2 Import 5
1.3 Export 10
1.4 Close 12

Section 2. View Toolbar 13

2.1 View Toolbar 13
2.2 Display Mode(Geometry) 16
2.3 Display Mode(Mesh) 17

Section 3. Modeling Guide Toolbar 18

3.1 Modeling Guide Toolbar 18
3.2 Show/Hide GCS 19
3.3 Move Work Plane 20
3.4 Define Grid 21
3.5 Define Snap 21

Section 4. Select Toolbar 22

4.1 Select Toolbar 23
4.2 Select Screen 24
4.3 Selection Filter 26
4.4 Intersect 32
4.5 Select Node/Element by ID 32

Section 5. Advanced View Control Toolbar 33

5.1 Clipping Plane 33
5.2 Mirror Plane 34
5.3 Iso Value Surface 34

Section 6. Node /Element Toolbar 35

Section 7. Run Analysis Toolbar 37

Chapter 3
Geometry
Section 1. Point and Curve 39
1.1 Point 39
1.2 Line 40
1.3 Arc 41
1.4 Circle 43
1.5 Polyline 44
1.6 Rectangle 45
1.7 Ellipse 46
1.8 B-Spline 47
1.9 Profile 48
1.10 Polygon 49
1.11 Helix 50
1.12 Tunnel 51
1.13 Filet Curve & Chamfer 53
1.14 Make Wire 54
1.15 Extend Curve 56
1.16 Intersect 57
1.17 Trim Curve 58
1.18 Break Curve 59
1.19 Merge Curve 61
1.20 Offset Curve 62
1.21 Shortest Path Line 63

Section 2. Surface and Solid 64

2.1 Cylinder 64
2.2 Cone 65
2.3 Box 67
2.4 Wedge 68
2.5 Sphere 69
2.6 Torus 71
2.7 Make Face 72
2.8 Filet and Chamfer 75
2.9 Offset 76
2.10 Imprint 77
2.11 Auto Connect 79
2.12 Merge Face-Edge 80
2.13 Bedding Plane 81
Chapter 3
Geometry
Section 3. Boolean 83
3.1 Solid 83
3.2 Surface 85

Section 4. Divide 88
4.1 Solid 88
4.2 Surface 89

Section 5. Protrude 91
5.1 Extrude 91
5.2 Revolve 93
5.3 Loft 94
5.4 Sweep 96

Section 6. Transform 97
6.1 Translate 97
6.2 Rotate 98
6.3 Mirror 99
6.4 Scale 100
6.5 Sweep-Translate 100
6.6 Project 102
6.7 Attach 103

Section 7. Sub Shape 105

7.1 Super Shape 105
7.2 Remove 106
7.3 Extract 107
7.4 Explode 108

Section 8. Remove 110

8.1 Face/Edge 110
8.2 Remove Manual 112
8.3 Imprinted Object 114

Section 9. Tools 115

9.1 Options 115
9.2 Terrain Geometry Maker 118
9.3 Frame to Solid 120
9.4 Check Geometry 121
9.5 Measure 124
Chapter 4
Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function 125

Mesh 1.1 Material

1.2 General Material(Behavioral Properties)
1.3 Material Properties
1.4 Property
125
127
188
200
1.5 Section Property 202
1.6 Complex Cross-Section Property 213
1.7 Coordinate System 214
1.8 Function 215
1.9 Hinge 248

Section 2. Control 261

2.1 Size Control 261
2.2 Default Size Control 264
2.3 Property Control 264
2.4 Match Seed 265
2.5 Layer Control 266

Section 3. Generate 267

3.1 1D 267
3.2 2D 269
3.3 3D 274
3.4 Remesh 278

Section 4. Mesh Set 279

4.1 Rename 279
4.2 Copy 280
4.3 Create 281

Section 5. Protrude 282

5.1 Extrude 282
5.2 Revolve 287
5.3 Fill 292
5.4 Sweep 295
5.5 Project 299
5.6 Offset 302
Chapter 4
Mesh
Section 6. Transform 305
6.1 Translate 305
6.2 Rotate 306
6.3 Mirror 308
6.4 Scale 309
6.5 Sweep 310

Section 7. Node 311

7.1 Create 311
7.2 Delete 313
7.3 Merge 314
7.4 Project 315
7.5 Align 316
7.6 Modify 317
7.7 Coordinate System 318

Section 8. Element 319

8.1 Create 319
8.2 Delete 327
8.3 Modify 328
8.4 Modify Topology 329
8.5 Parameters 329
8.6 Connection 336
8.7 Extract 336
8.8 Divide 337
8.9 Measure 340
8.10 Interface 340
8.11 Pile/Pile Tip 344
8.12 Free Field Element 345
8.13 Hinge 347
8.14 Infinite Element 348
8.15 Seepage Cut Off Element 349

Section 9. Tools 352

9.1 Renumber 352
9.2 Check 352
9.3 Table 357
Chapter 5 Section 1. Contact
1.1 Define Contact
361
361

Analysis Section 2. Construction Stage

2.1 Stage Definition Wizard
2.2 Construction Stage Set
364
365
369

Method 2.3 Simulate Construction Stage

2.4 Auto Set
2.5 Volume Data Export
374
375
376

Section 3. Boundary Condition 378

3.1 Define Set 380
3.2 Constraint 381
3.3 Constraint Equation 383
3.4 Change Property 384
3.5 Slip Circular Surface 386
3.6 Slip Polygonal Surface 387
3.7 Water Level 388
3.8 Nodal Head 390
3.9 Nodal Flux 393
3.10 Surface Flux 395
3.11 Review 397
3.12 Draining Condition 398
3.13 Non-consolidation 499
3.14 Create Boundary from Results 400
3.15 Boundary Table Import / Export 400
3.16 Transmitting 400

Section 4. Load 404

4.1 Self Weight 405
4.2 Force/Moment 405
4.3 Displacement 407
4.4 Pressure 408
4.5 Water Pressure 409
4.6 Beam Load 410
4.7 Temperature Load 411
4.8 Prestress 413
4.9 Initial Equilibrium Force 414
4.10 Load Set 415
4.11 Combined Load Set 416
4.12 Response Spectrum 416
4.13 Contraction 417
4.14 Load Table Import / Export 418
4.15 Response Spectrum 419
4.16 Ground Acceleration 421
4.17 Time Varying Static 423
4.18 Dynamic Nodal(Surface) 425
4.19 Load to Mass 426
4.20 Train Dynamic Load Table 427
 4.21 Heat Flux 428

Chapter 5 4.22
4.23
4.24
Heat Source
Prescribed Temperature
Convection
429
430
430

Analysis Section 5. Wizard and Tools

5.1 Tunnel Modeling
432
432

Method
5.2 Anchor Modeling 438
5.3 Soil Test 439
5.4 Seismic Data Generator 442
5.5 Dynamic Load Data Generator 444
5.6 Free Field Analysis 447
5.7 Artificial Earthquake Generator 457
Chapter 6
Analysis
Section 1. Analysis Case 461
1.1 General 461
1.2 Solution Type 463
1.3 Analysis Control(Option) 477
1.4 Time Step 485
1.5 Output Control 496
1.6 Analysis Setting 497
1.7 Parametric Analysis 498

Section 2. Analysis 499

2.1 Perform/Batch Analysis 499

Section 3. History 500

3.1 History Output Probes 500
Chapter 7
Result and
Section 1. Result 503
1.1 Combination 503
1.2 Calculation 504

Tools Section 2. General

2.1 Contour
2.2 Vector
2.3 Diagram
505
505
507
511
2.4 Smooth 513
2.5 Fill 514
2.6 Edge Type 515
2.7 Deform 516
2.8 No Results 519

Section 3. Advanced Function 520

3.1 Probe 520
3.2 Multi Step Iso Surface 521
3.3 Extract 522
3.4 Local Direction Force Sum 523
3.5 Cutting Diagram 524
3.6 Others – Elementary Contour Plot 525
3.7 Others – Summation of Reaction 525
3.8 Others – Convert to Decibel 526
3.9 Others – 3D-2D Wizard 527
3.10 Others – Multi Step Graph 529

Section 4. Special Post 530

4.1 Seepage 530
4.2 Slope Stability(SAM) Result 532
4.3 History 534

Section 5. Etc. 536

5.1 Image File 536
5.2 Initialize 537

Section 6. Geometry 538

6.1 Change Color 538
6.2 Color Type 539
6.3 Random Color 539

Section 7. Node/Element 540

7.1 Query 540
Chapter 7 Section 8. Export to 3D PDF 541

Result and 8.1 Export to 3D PDF

Section 9. Flight Simulation

541

542

Tools
9.1 Flight Simulation 542
Advanced Nonlinear and
Detail Analysis System

Chapter 1
Introduction

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1. Introduction
User Manual Chapter 1. Introduction

Section 1 Introduction
FEA NX is a simulation program developed for the simulation of advanced nonlinear and detail analysis for
civil and structural engineering applications based on the finite element method. FEA NX helps engineers
to perform step-by-step analysis of structure placement, loading and other factors that directly affect design
and construction. The program supports advanced geometric modeling functions, powerful mesh
generation algorithms and various analysis conditions to simulate real phenomena.

Settings for all types of field conditions can be simulated using non-linear analysis methods (such as
linear/non-linear static analysis and linear/non-linear dynamic, linear buckling and heat transfer analysis)
and various geotechnical analysis (such as seepage, consolidation, seepage-stress coupled, stress-slope
coupled, seepage-slope coupled and nonlinear dynamic-slope coupled analysis).

The interface of FEA NX provides easy summoning of modeling and analysis tools, creating an intuitive
working environment for general and novice designers. The 64-bit OS supported next-generation platform
base and new graphic engine allows the best modeling performance for object calculation and element
generation, while the 64-bit integrated solver considerably reduces the analysis time for large models.

▶FEA NX Framework

Section1.Introduction |1
 User Manual Chapter1. Before we start

This manual gives detailed instructions for each menu function in FEA NX.
All functions are arranged in order of modeling, analysis setting, result analysis and output process for each
analysis method and helpful tips are included. The function descriptions and tips can also be accessed
through the Online manual(F1 key) within the program.

The contents of each chapter are as follows.

Chapter1. Introduction
This chapter gives the program outline and manual composition.

Chapter 2. General Information

This chapter explains the basic menu and various tools for starting the program. Details on the toolbar for
task screen settings and the tools required for program operation, such as view/selection/model guide, are
included. Complete understanding of the modeling and result confirmation functions is required before
learning about the main menu and other functions.

Chapter 3. Geometry
This chapter explains the functions for geometric shape (line, surface, solid) creation and modification, i.e.
the first step of modeling. Explanations are given for the calculating functions that are necessary to
complete the geometry by modifying/editing shapes created on other CAD-based programs. There is also a
feature that can search and correct shape errors automatically.

Chapter 4. Mesh
This chapter explains the functions for creating and editing elements based on their geometric shape. A
detailed description of the behavioral characteristics and material parameters assigned to an element that
affects the analysis is included. This step is the most important modeling step and hence, it is necessary to
understand the sections on element quality and material properties of the structure. More details on
structure material properties can be found in the ‘Material’ section of the ‘Analysis’ manual.

Chapter 5. Analysis Method

This chapter explains the functions for setting boundary and load conditions during the final stage of
modeling. Construction stage setting functions for step-by-step interpretation of the construction process is
also included. Setting of boundary and load conditions corresponding to the analysis type is vital for correct
result analysis.

Chapter 6. Analysis
This chapter explains the important options for controlling analysis method as per real phenomenon after
the modeling is completed. Analysis conditions and controlling options have a significant impact on the
results. Options and their impact on results for each analysis method are described in detail. The detailed
algorithm for each analysis method can be found in the ‘Algorithm’ section of the ‘Analysis’ manual.

Chapter 7. Result & Tools

The interpretation and extraction of results are as important as the actual analysis process. Efficient
checking of outputs for design applications are described in detail.

2 | Section1.Introduction
Advanced Nonlinear and
Detail Analysis System

Chapter 2
General
Information

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1. Start File

Section 2. View Toolbar

Section 3. Modeling Guide Toolbar

Section 4. Select Toolbar

Section 5. Advanced View Control Toolbar

Section 6. Node/Element Toolbar

Section 7. Run Analysis Toolbar

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Section 1 Start File

▶Start file

New
1.1 This tab creates a new file.
Create File and
Save When creating a new file, the user can set the initial variables necessary for analysis (model type, direction
and strength of gravity, system of units).
The required Model Type can be selected from 3 dimensional (3D)/ 2 dimensional (2D)/ axially symmetrical
(Axisymmetric) models. For 2 dimensional models, the direction of gravity is the Y axis. For 3 dimensional
models, the direction of gravity can be set as either the Y axis or the Z axis.

▶Analysis condition setting

The physical quantities required for modeling, such as structure size or material property, are generally
defined by specific unit systems. Because FEA NX allows conversion of force/ length/ energy/ time units
any time during modeling, the user can easily change the unit system as and when needed thereby
facilitating the modeling process. The unit systems supported in the FEA NX are as follows.

Section 1. Start File | 3

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

▶Table. Unit systems Force Length Energy Time

supported on FEA NX kgf mm cal sec
tonf cm kcal min
N m J hr
KN in Btu day
lbf ft kJ
Kips Um

Open
This tab opens an existing saved file. The user can open both the old FEA and the new FEA NX file in FEA
NX.
Depending on the file format, the user can check the image and basic information of the analysis model.

▶Open file

Save
This tab saves the current project file. Checking ‘Auto Save File’ and setting the time interval in the options
tab automatically saves the file for every interval.

▶Save file

Save as
This tab saves the current project file under a new name. The user can undo/redo any operations during
the modeling process, but saving the finalized model for each stage can make error correction and
condition modification easier.

4 | Section 1. Start File

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Import CAD File

1.2
Import
▶Import geometry or FE
model

Using the Import CAD File automatically deactivates the analysis information of the current model.
The user can use this function even when a file is not open and can import as many CAD geometries as
they wish without limits. Parasolid (Parasolid(9 to 28) (*x_t;*.xmt_txt;*.x_b;*xmt_bin) file formats and
optional CAD file formats as below are supported.

Because CAD geometries do not have a length unit, the user must set the length unit when importing. The
set units decide the size of the CAD geometry and both the meter and feet units are supported.

▶Import CAD geometry

Section 1. Start File | 5

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

DXF 2D (Wireframe)

▶Import DXF(2D)

Overview

This function imports a DXF file created on a higher version of AutoCAD than R13. The user can import 2D
surfaces as well as wireframes (a model consisting of edges).

Methodology

DXF files created on AutoCAD do not have tolerance that can determine the connectivity between
endpoints. Although edges may seem connected to the naked eye, they maybe intersected or not
connected after import. It is recommended that the user check the edges of the AutoCAD DXF file before
importing.

▶When the endpoints do

not coincide

If a line is joined by multiple polylines, it may not be imported properly. It is recommended that these lines
be exploded on AutoCAD before importing.

▶Example of joined poly

lines

When importing a 2D DXF file, the user can simultaneously input distance from origin along x axis and y
axis to move or rotate about z axis the imported file in order to place it at the desired location in the model.

Wireframes can be imported in FEA NX as a single composite line for easy management or as individual
lines.

Imported intersected edges can be cut and registered using the [Break Intersected Edges] function.

6 | Section 1. Start File

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

DXF 3D(Wireframe)

▶Import DXF(3D)

Overview

This function imports a DXF file created on a higher version of AutoCAD than R13. It imports a 3D model
on to the work space. The user can call up DXF file as a wireframe (a model consisting of edges).

Methodology

DXF files created on AutoCAD do not have tolerance that can determine the connectivity between
endpoints. Although edges may seem connected to the naked eye, they maybe intersected or not
connected after import. It is recommended that the user check the edges of the AutoCAD DXF file before
importing

When importing a 3D DXF file, the user can simultaneously input distance from origin along x axis, y axis
and z axis to place the imported file at the desired location in the model.

Wireframes can be imported on to the FEA NX as a single composite for easy management, or as
individual lines.

Imported intersected edges can be cut and registered using the [Break Intersected Edges] function.

Section 1. Start File | 7

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Import DWG

▶Import DWG(2D)
▶▶Import DWG(3D)

Overview

This function imports a DWG file created on a higher version of AutoCAD than R13. It imports a CAD model
onto the 2D space or 3D space.

Methodology

Like the Import DXF file function, DWG files created on AutoCAD do not have tolerance that can determine
the connectivity between endpoints. Although edges may seem connected to the naked eye, they maybe
intersected or not connected after import. It is recommended that the user check the edges of the AutoCAD
DWG file before importing

When importing a 2D DWG file, the user can simultaneously input distance from origin along x axis and y
axis to move or rotate about z axis the imported file in order to place it at the desired location in the model.
While when importing a 3D DWG file, the user can simultaneously input distance from origin along x axis, y
axis and z axis to place the imported file at the desired location in the model.

Imported edges can be registered on the geometry set for each layer using the [Create geometry set for
layers].

8 | Section 1. Start File

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Import Midas Mxt file

Model information and loading/ boundary condition/analysis data from the 'Gen, Civil, nGen' program, other
Midas family programs, can be synchronized on the FEA NX. Element types, load/ boundary conditions,
analysis methods not supported on the FEA NX are excluded.
The compatibility range for midas Mxt files is shown below.

FEA NX Gen/Civil Restrictions

Unit System Unit System Cable → Truss,
Project Setting Structure Type
Node Node Wall → Plate element
Element Element compatible, SRC excluded
Mesh Set Group PSC, Composite excluded
Material Plastic Material, Material
Property Section, Thickness
Supports Supports
Point Spring Point Spring
Elastic Link Elastic Link
Beam End Release Beam End Release
Plate End Release Plate End Release
Rigid Link Rigid Link
Load Set Static Load Case
Nodal Mass Nodal Mass
Self-Weight Self-Weight
Force, Moment Nodal Loads
Prescribed Displacement Specified Displacement of Supports
Element Beam Load Element Beam Load
Prestress Pretension Load
Pressure Load Pressure Load
Nodal Temperature Nodal Temperature
Element Temperature Element Temperature
Temperature Gradient Temperature Gradient
Response Spectrum Function Spectrum Function
Spectrum Load Set Spectrum Load Case
Time History Function Time History Function
Time History Load Case Time History Load Case
Dynamic Nodal Load Dynamic Nodal Load
Ground Acceleration Ground Acceleration
Time Varying Static Load Time Varying Static Load
Time History Result Function Time History Result Function

Import FPN file

This format links the model information file created on Midas family programs (FEA, GTS NX, GTS, NFX,
SoilWorks, GeoXD) to the FEA NX. This file format also enables user to exchange information between
different programs using text format.

Import Nodal Results(*txt) file

This function allows users to import nodal results from midas Gen and Civil into FEA NX.
Displacement results will be imported as prescribed displacement (Tx, Ty, Tz).
Reaction results will be imported as nodal loads in the opposing direction (FX, FY, FZ, RX, RY, RZ).

Section 1. Start File | 9

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Overview
1.3
Export This function can capture the work plane or export geometric shapes and meshes.

▶Export work model

Methodology

The work plane can be saved using [Screen Shot file]. [Screen Shot Select All], [Screen Shot Selected
Area] tabs.

The [Screen Shot file] tab only saves the work plane and the [Screen Shot Select All] tab saves the whole
image. The [Screen Shot Selected Area] tab saves the area selected by the user. PNG, JPG, BMP, GIF
image file formats are supported.

CAD geometric shapes and meshes on the work plane can be exported. CAD geometric shapes are
exported as Parasolid files (*.x_t, *.x_b) and meshes can be exported as a STL file (*.stl) or a neutral file
(*.fpn) supported on other Midas programs (FEA/GTSNX/GTS/NFX/SoilWorks) and non-Midas programs.

Export FPN file

This format links the model information file created on FEA NX to Midas family programs (FEA, GTS
NX,GTS, NFX, SoilWorks, GeoXD). This file format also enables user to exchange information between
different programs using text format.

Export Nodal Results

Export Nodal Results feature from FEA NX model to midas Gen / Civil allows for outputting the results of
the reaction / displacement results calculated from the existing constraints as well as the load-displacement
results of the nodes subjected to the nodal load.

10 | Section 1. Start File

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Target Nodes
All (By Supports) – reactions and displacements will be exported at only the nodes with constraint boundary
conditions defined according to the analysis set and step chosen by the user.

Selected Nodes – allows users to select specific nodes for output. Reactions will be exported at only the
nodes with constraint boundary conditions defined according to the analysis set and step chosen by the
user. Displacements will be exported at all selected nodes.

Load Sets (by Force) - reaction force / displacement will be exported at only the nodes where Load Set has
been defined (as Force type only) according to the analysis set and step chosen by the user. User defined
choice for specific load set is allowed.

In addition to the reaction force / displacement results, the "load-displacement" type was added to the
output result type. The 'Load-displacement' type will simultaneously output the value of the nodal load
considered in the load set and the displacement result calculated at the corresponding node after the
analysis and will be loaded in Gen / Civil as Multi-Linear Point Spring (Unsymmetric) type.

The 'load' value is calculated as Σ (node load / load increment number) entered, and the cumulative
displacement generated at the stage where the 'load' is applied is transferred to the 'displacement' data.

※ Precautions

1) Gen / Civil> The Multi-Linear Point Spring (Unsymmetric) type requires a minimum of 3 data. Therefore,
when outputting 'load-displacement' type in FEA NX, please perform analysis to satisfy the number of data.

2) Gen / Civil> The Multi-Linear Point Spring (Unsymmetric) type is designed to receive increasingly larger
values of the load / displacement data. Therefore, if the displacement result calculated by the FEA NX is
output as a decrease rather than as an increase, the Gen / Civil will not be able to recall the value.

Output Data
Analysis Set – select the analysis case for output.
Step – select the construction stage set for output.
Results Type – opt output reactions or displacement.

Section 1. Start File | 11

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Results Component – select the components for output. Reactions (All, FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ).
Displacements (All, DX, DY, DZ)

Overview
1.4 Close an activated file.
Close
Close
This function closes the active project. If there are any changes to the model information within the project,
a message will appear.

Close all
This function closes all open project files and a message will ask whether to save changes if there are any.

12 | Section 1. Start File

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Section 2 View Toolbar

For general CAD programs, the y axis of the global coordinate system points upward. To view an imported
geometric model created in CAD, the user can use the ‘Two-point Isometric View’ perspective to view the
model in the same perspective as CAD.

Top

Left
Back

Right
Front

Bottom

2.1 Zoom All

View Toolbar Zoom in/out to fit the whole model on the screen.
Zoomfit Grid
Zoom in/out to appropriately to fit both the model and the work plane grid.
Zoom Window
Zoom in to the designated rectangular area.
Zoom in/out
The user can click on the icon menu and use the left mouse button or the mouse
wheel to zoom in/out.
Dragging right while holding the left mouse button expands the model; dragging left
shrinks the model. Scrolling upward zooms in and scrolling downward zooms out.
Holding the Ctrl key allows the user to expand and shrink the model without having to
select the zoom in/out icon.
Rotate
Click this icon menu and dragging the left mouse button on the task window rotates
the model in the drag direction.
For continued rotation, hold the Ctrl key and drag with the right mouse button.

Section 2. View Toolbar | 13

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Rotate center
Specify a reference point and rotates the model around that point. In the work plane,
dragging with the middle mouse button held rotates the model around the specified
reference point.
Pan
Move the model to desired location.
In the work plane, dragging with the left mouse button held moves the model in the
drag direction.
Holding the Ctrl key and dragging with the middle mouse button held allows the user
to move the model without having to ‘Pan’ icon.
Normal
Move the perspective in the normal direction of the working plane. (Perspective
changed to a 2 dimensional view with the X-axis to the right and the Y-axis to the top
of the screen.)
Isometric 1
Change the perspective to the isometric view. (Z-axis of the global coordinate system
points up.)
Isometric 2
Change the perspective to the isometric view. (Y-axis of the global coordinate system
points up.)
When importing a geometric model created in CAD, use this perspective to view the
model in the same perspective as CAD.
Front
Change the perspective to the front view.
It is the Y, Z plane of the global coordinate system rotated 180 degrees about the Z-
axis.

Back
Change the perspective to the back view. It is the Y, Z plane of the global coordinate
system.

Top
Change the perspective to the top view.
It is the X, Y plane of the global coordinate system rotated 90 degrees about the X-
axis and the Y-axis.

Bottom
Change the perspective to the bottom view.
It is the X, Y plane of the global coordinate system rotated 90 degrees about the Y-
axis and the X-axis.

Left
Change the perspective to the left view.

14 | Section 2. View Toolbar

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

It is the X, Z plane of the global coordinate system rotated 180 degrees about the Z-
axis.

Right
Change the perspective to the left view.
It is the X, Z plane of the global coordinate system.

Display mode [Geometry]

Provides various view modes to display the model.
For more information, refer section 2.2
Display mode [Mesh]
Set the display modes for the created mesh object.
For more information, refer section 2.3
Perspective view
Assign perspective to the model and presents it as a three-dimensional picture.
Geometry shadow
Show a shadow of the model on the XY plane. The shading rotates along with the
model.
Bounding box
Show the bounding box that circumscribes the model.

Section 2. View Toolbar | 15

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

FEA NX provides various display modes that help the user easily understand the work state and display the
2.2 model as they please.
Display Mode The display mode can be called up by selecting the geometric shape and clicking the right mouse button.
[Geometry]

Shading + Line
Display the geometric shape using faces and outlines.

Shading
Display the geometric shape using only faces.

Line
Display the geometric shape using only outlines.

Bounding box
Display the geometry object by its bounding box than its actual shape.

When displaying the geometric shape using the [Shading] or [Shading and Line] method, the user can
specify the shading transparency to display the interior of the object.
The transparency can be specified by selecting the geometric shape and clicking the right mouse button >
Contents menu > Transparency.
Complex geometric shapes can be effectively represented by applying different display modes to
individual geometric shapes.

16 | Section 2. View Toolbar

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

The units for mesh display are mesh sets.

2.3 The assignment of display modes for meshes is the same that for geometric shapes; the mesh set is
Display Mode selected first and the display mode sub-menu is brought up from the pop-up menu.
[Mesh]

Just like for geometric shapes, various display modes can be assigned to individual mesh sets. Color
coding is especially useful when sorting and checking model information such as the object characte ristics,
materials or coordinate system.
Various mesh set display modes are listed below.

Wireframe
Display the mesh set as a wire frame, showing only edges and no faces.

Shading
Display the mesh set using faces and edges of all elements.

Feature Edge
Display the mesh set using its feature edges. A feature edge is an element edge whose angle (created by
the two free faces making up that edge) is larger than the specified angle.

Feature Edge with Shading

Display the mesh set using faces (without the sides) of elements and feature edges.

Free-Face Wireframe
Display the free faces of the mesh set as wire frames. All internal elements are hidden.

If an angle is larger than Mesh Face (Free Face)

the specified angle, it is
Feature Edge. Mesh Edge

Section 2. View Toolbar | 17

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Section 3 Modeling Guide Toolbar

3.1 Show/Hide Grid

Modeling Guide Show or hide the grid on the screen.
Toolbar
Show/Hide Datum Axis/Plane
Show or hide the datum axis/plane on the screen.
Show/Hide WCS
Show or hide the WCS on the screen.
The WCS (Work-plane Coordinate System) is the coordinate system of the work-
plane. Work-plane is user-defined plane to facilitate modeling
Show/Hide GCS
Show or hide the GCS on the screen.
The GCS (Global Coordinate System) is the fixed global coordinate system.
For more information, refer section 3.2
Move Work Plane
Move the work-plane to the desired location. This can be done by [Reference plane],
[3 point plane] or [Normal direction] methods. For more information, refer section 3.3
Define Grid
The grid is always located on the XY plane of the work-plane to ease the modeling
process. When modeling with the grid, the grid snap ( ) function can be used to
specify the desired location and easily estimate the approximate model or element
sizes.
The grid setting can be set according to the convenience of the user and the
dimensions of the model. For more information, refer section 3.4
Define Snap
The user can specify the location of the point using various snap options shown in
the table below. For more information, refer section 3.5

18 | Section 3. Modeling Guide Toolbar

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

The user can show or hide the GCS.

3.2 The GCS (Global Coordinate System) is the fixed global coordinate system.
Show/Hide GCS

There are two basic coordinate systems used in the GTX NX; The Global Coordinate System (GCS) and
the Work-plane Coordinate System (WCS).

The GCS (Global Coordinate System) is the fixed global coordinate system expressed in the bottom
right-hand corner using red (X-axis), green (Y-axis) and blue (Z-axis) arrows.
The WCS (Work-plane Coordinate System) is the coordinate system that moves with the work-plane and
can be found at the center of the work screen. Because the work-plane is used for entering the 2-
dimensional coordinates of a shape, the WCS changes along with the workplace. The absolute 3-
dimensional coordinates are necessary to create a shape in space, but in most cases the only the
relative coordinates such as the model length are given. In this case, modeling can be done easily by
moving the work-plane to an appropriate position and then entering the 2-dimensional coordinates (the
XY plane on the WCS).

Please note that when extruding the geometric shape, the load/boundary conditions and extrude
direction follows the GCS.

< Global Coordinate System(GCS) and Work-plane Coordinate System(WCS)>

Section 3. Modeling Guide Toolbar | 19

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

3.3 Move work plane

Move Work Plane

This function moves the current work-plane to the desired location. This can be done by [Reference plane],
[3 point plane] or [Normal direction] methods.

[Reference plane]: This function moves the grid to a plane parallel to the reference plane. Clicking the
[Normal ] after moving the grid helps the user work more easily. This function is convenient when
working on a plane different from the specified work-plane.
FEA NX provides 7 basic work-planes: XY(0,0,1), XZ(0,-1,0), XZ(0,1,0), YX(0,0,1), YZ(1,0,0), ZX(0,1,0),
ZY(1,0,0).
If the workspace is a certain distance from the plane, the user can specify the grid origin using the [Offset]
function.

[3 point plane]: This function moves the work-plane by selecting 3 points. The work-plane moves to the
plane define by the selected points, with the vector created by the first and second points the X-axis and
the vector created by the first and third points the Y-axis.

[Normal direction]: This function moves the work-plane by selecting a vector and a reference point. The
reference point is defined as the origin and the normal direction to the vector is defined as the vertical axis.

Reverse Normal

Reverse the vertical direction (the Z-axis of the WCS) of the plane.

Reset to GCS

Return to the initial grid position.

Save

Check the [Save] button and enter a name to register the workplace under Work tree > Work-plane.

20 | Section 3. Modeling Guide Toolbar

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Define grid
3.4
Define Grid The grid is always located on the XY plane of the work-plane to ease the modeling process. When
modeling with the grid, the grid snap ( ) function can be used to specify the desired location and easily
estimate the approximate model or element sizes.

The grid setting can be set according to the convenience of the user and the dimensions of the model.
3.5
Define Snap Grid snap Positions the mouse snap on a grid point in the work-plane.
Point snap Positions the mouse snap on a point.
End snap Positions the mouse snap on the closest endpoint of an edge.
Middle snap Positions the mouse snap on the midpoint of an edge.
Perpendicular snap Positions the mouse snap on the perpendicular point of an edge.
Center snap Positions the mouse snap on the center point of a circle/arc.
Quadrant snap Positions the mouse snap on the four circle/arc quadrant points.
Intersection snap Positions the mouse snap on the intersection point between two edges.
Tangent snap Positions the mouse snap on the tangent point.
Arbitrary snap Designates an arbitrary snap.
Node Positions the mouse snap on a node.

When using a snap related to a particular edge, such as end snap or middle snap, the user needs to
position the mouse above the target edge of the snap, rather than on the position of the target (end,
middle).

Section 3. Modeling Guide Toolbar | 21

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Section 4 Select Toolbar

The select tools are essential for the overall modeling process and are used to specify the target for various
functions. When working with large and complex models, selection of geometry or model components can
be made very simple by using appropriate select tool. FEA NX provides the user with a variety of effective
selection methods for efficient work progress.

All select methods in the FEA NX are provided in the select toolbar.

When selecting an object in the work-plane using the mouse, the boundary of the detected object is
displayed in green and the user can check in advance whether the target object is correctly detected. The
selected target is then highlighted in green.

22 | Section 4. Selection Toolbar

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

4.1 Pick/Rectangle Select

Select Toolbar Sets the mode to select the specified object
Unselect Mode
Sets the mode to unselect the specified object
Select Screen
Selects/Unselects individual objects or objects within an area set by dragging the
mouse. There are four ways to select an area; rectangular, ellipse, polygon and
polyline. For more information, refer section 4.2
Selection Filter
Primarily filters the selected objects by their specified types.
For more information, refer section 4.3
Select All Neighboring Edges or Surfaces
Automatically selects adjacent elements (faces/lines) after selecting a face or line.
Select Neighboring Edges or Surfaces with Feature Angle
Automatically selects adjacent elements (faces/lines) within the feature angle after
selecting a face or line.
Limit Feature Angle
Limits the feature angle for selecting adjacent lines or faces.
Intersect
Includes objects within the borderlines of an area created by a rectangle, circle or
polygon.
Front Selection Only
Selects only the objects at the front in the current view. It is used when the object
consists of multiple layers and the user wants to select one face.
Select All
Selects all objects in the current work space.
In the view all perspective, all objects in the current work space are selected.
Unselect All
Unselects all objects in the current work space.
In the view all perspective, all objects in the current work space are unselected.
Select Node/Element by ID
Selects or unselects objects by entering the ID in the node, element select mode.

Section 4. Selection Toolbar | 23

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

This function selects/unselects individual objects or objects within an area set by dragging the mouse.
4.2 There are four ways to select an area; rectangle, circle, polygon and polyline.
Select Screen
Rectangle (Pick/Window)

Select/unselect all current selected objects.

Individual objects or objects within an area set by dragging the mouse can be selected or unselected.
The ‘Pick’ and ‘Window’ are distinguished only by mouse click or mouse drag.

[Pick Select]
Select/unselect objects by individual clicks.
In the select mode, an already selected object can be unselected by selecting pick again.

[Window Select]
The direction of the Select/unselect objects within a rectangular area created from a diagonal movement by mouse drag. 
mouse drag during The Esc key cancels the definition of the rectangle during mouse drag.
Window Select is not
important. To
Circle
include/exclude objects is
determined only by the
Include Intersected option. Select/unselect objects within a circular area.
The area is defined by a left mouse click at the center of the circle and a mouse drag that determines the
size of the radius. The Esc key cancels the definition of the circle during mouse drag.

Click at클릭한
중심을 the center
후, 마
of the드래그하여
우스를 circle and
drag the
반지름 크기를mouse지정to
specify the radius
합니다.

Example of specifying constraints of nodes around the hole by using Circle Selection.

24 | Section 4. Selection Toolbar

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Polygon

Selects/unselects objects within a polygon.

The polygon is defined by clicking consecutive points and double-clicking the left mouse button at the final
point. The area is defined by the connected start and end points.
Clicking the right mouse button cancels the definition of the polygon.

중심을 클릭한 후 , 마
Select the corner points in
우스를 드래그하여
order,
반지름
and double click at
크기를 지정
합니다 the. final point.

Example of selecting nodes around the tunnel by using Polygon Selection.

Polyline

Selects/unselects objects intersected by a polyline.

To define multi-line, the user can specify the polyline by clicking consecutive points and double-clicking the
left mouse button at the final point. Clicking the right mouse button cancels the definition of the multi-line.

중심을 클릭한 후, 마
Click the point of each line in
우스를 드래그하여
order,
반지름 and double-click
크기를 지정 the left
mouse
합니다. button to end selecting

Example of selecting lines representing rock bolt by using Polyline Selection

Section 4. Selection Toolbar | 25

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

The Selection filter primarily filters the selected objects by their specified types.
4.3 The Selection filter is composed of an object type predetermined by the current work status and the
Selection Filter summoned command types. The user can specify a particular object type in this configuration.

The Selection filter-related work status is basically classified by the command execution viability.

Main selection filter

The Main selection filter has the most basic default composition.
The datum is the
reference point, axis, or Only geometric elements (sub-objects not selected), mesh sets and datum  registered on the shape set
plane for modeling. can be selected in the Main selection filter.
 Because the selection
filter composition is Sub selection filter
different for every
command, it is The Sub selection filter is restructured into types based on command execution viability.
recommended that the
user check the select filter
composition when using a Geometric elements registered in the shape set can be selected, as well as the sub-objects of the shape
command for the first time. (point, edge, face etc.), loadings, boundaries and individual joints and elements. 

▶Table. The selection Shape Type

difference between the
Main select filter and the Face (Four Subdivision
Sub select filter F-1
Edges)
E-1 Edge
Shape Selection filter Selectable objects
Face Main selection filter 1 (F-1)
Sub selection filter 1 (F-1)
Line Main selection filter 1 (E-1)
Sub selection filter 5 (E-1, E-a, E-b, E-c, E-d)

26 | Section 4. Selection Toolbar

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

The Selection filter composition is as follows.

▶Table. Selectable Selection filter Selectable objects

elements in the Main Select the data axis.
selection filter Data axis (X) Used to specify the direction (Translate/Extrude/Project), rotation axis
etc.
Select the data plane.
Data plane (U)
 Used to specify the work/reflect/divide/mirror plane etc.
Geometry related
All geometric shape (P) Select the “Shape”, the highest ranking geometry.
Solid (D) Select a solid.
Shell (J) Select a shell.
Face (A) Select a face.
Wire (W) Select a wire.
Edge (G) Select an edge.
Point (B) Select a point.
Complex object (C) Select a complex object.
Mesh set / joint / element related
Select a mesh set
Mesh set (M)  Used to select a mesh set itself or the joints and elements in the mesh
set.

▶ Table. Selectable Geometry related

elements in the Sub Face (F) Select a face, a lower ranking geometry of the "Shape".
selection filter Line (E) Select a line.
Point (V) Select a point.
Load/Boundary (L) Select the load/boundary conditions applied on the geometry.
Mesh set / joint / element related
Node (N) Select a node.
Element (T) Select an element.

Section 4. Selection Toolbar | 27

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

* Difference in selection between the Main selection filter and the Sub selection filter
The user may be unfamiliar to the difference in selected objects between the Main selection filter and the
Sub selection filter, where only the highest ranking geometry “Shape” is selected for the Main selection
filter, but this function is useful during modeling.

The following example will explore the convenience of using the Main selection filter.

The figure below shows a Face, interpolated by Edges created from the cross sections of a random 3-
dimensional curved face.
To hide (or remove) the eight Edges that are no longer useful after the face has been created, let us
consider case when only the eight Edges are selected.

1) When the selection of all geometry is allowed in the Main selection filter (not just "Shape")
Manual selection is When using the [Rectangle selection] with the selection filter set at 'all geometric shape', nine
possible, but because the "Shapes" (one Face, eight Edges) are selected.
“Shape” Edges and the
lower rank Edges of the
Face exist in the same 2) When using the [Rectangle selection] with the Main selection filter set at <Edge> 
position, it is not easy to A total of twelve Edges are selected, four of which are the lower rank Edges of the Face and cannot be
manually select individual hidden individually.
edges.
3) When allowing only the “shape” selection in the Sub selection filter
 In practical use, the When using the [Rectangle selection] with the selection filter set at <Edge>, the eight Edges can be
user can take advantage easily selected and can be hidden directly.
of the work tree to make
this work much easier.
Thus, the Main selection filter and Sub selection filter are separated to provide convenient selection during
actual work.

28 | Section 4. Selection Toolbar

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

* Selection filter use

 Command execution mode using the Sub selection filter

 To select nodes or The direct constraints and loading conditions can be defined on the work screen using Sub selection
elements based on filters. Also, the parts can be specified as selection elements, making it possible to assign materials
geometric shapes, the or mesh sets. The Sub selection filter selects the sub-objects of a shape (point, edge, face etc.), as
object must be shown on well as joints and elements. Application of the Sub selection filter on the work screen helps the user
the screen.
easily define properties using geometric features without a separate command execution mode
process.

 Specifying the direction and axis of rotation

Setting the direction for Translate, Extrude or Project, as well as the axis of rotation for Rotate and
Revolve, is often needed during the modeling process. In this case, the direction and axis of rotation
can be specified by various methods using the Datum and the geometric features of the shape.

The following is a summary of the methods used to specify the rotation axis direction.

Available object Used geometric features Selection filter

Datum axis ① Direction of Datum axis Datum axis
“Normal” direction to the Datum Plane
Datum plane Datum plane

Edge (Straight line) Direction of straight line Edge

“Normal" direction to the plane where the
circle/arc and its center point exist
Edge (Circle or arc) Edge


“Normal” direction to the plane

Plane surface Face

Central axis of the rotated body (cylinder

Rotated body face Face
etc.)

Section 4. Selection Toolbar | 29

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

2 point vector User specified 2 point vector N/A

Normal line to the "Normal" direction to the Profile, whose
N/A
profile ② "plane" definition allows Extrude etc.

① The selection filter for specifying direction, axis of rotation is fundamentally set as <Datum axis>.
② This is only restrictively supported for some functions such as Extrude.

The use of such selection methods that utilizes the geometric features of objects allows the convenient
specification of direction and axis of rotation, even for very complex models.

 Selection using the concept of hierarchy for geometric shapes

When selecting lower rank objects using the concept of hierarchy, selecting a higher rank object
provides the selection functions for all lower rank objects (sub-objects that correspond to the type in
selection filter) within it.
In the figure below, the lines need to be selected individually when the Sub selection filter is set as
Edge (E). However, setting the Sub selection filter as a Face (F) and selecting the face selects all 4

30 | Section 4. Selection Toolbar

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

lower rank lines.

In other words, when selecting all the lower rank objects in a particular object, it is convenient to select
the higher rank object first and then set the [Sub selection filter] to that higher rank object type.

 Node, Element Selection

Similar to the concept of hierarchy, when selecting nodes or elements, setting the selection filter to
Mesh Set (M) and selecting the Mesh Set selects all the nodes and elements within the mesh set.
If the mesh is created on a geometric model, the user can choose the nodes and elements based on
the geometric shapes (line, face) that form the mesh.

 To select nodes or
elements based on
geometric shapes, the
object must be shown
on the screen.

 Free face / free end-node selection function using the feature angle for nodes and elements
The loading, boundary condition dialog box provides additional functions that consider individual
loading and boundary conditions for easier selection.
The most useful selection functions are for the adjacent Free Face of a 3D element and adjacent Free
End of a 2D element.

Select a standard meshes to

calculate free face
Because this selection (possible to select entire mesh)
method is not related to
the geometric shape, it is
more convenient for starting from Seed Node,
meshes created by hand choose nodes which has smaller
than those created using angle then Feature angle.
geometric shapes.

Section 4. Selection Toolbar | 31

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

This function selects objects that are within the borderlines of an area created by a rectangle, circle or
4.4 polygon.
Intersect
 The borderlines of the
area are displayed in dotted A A
lines for the Intersection C C
selection function. Pressing
and releasing the Ctrl key B B
when drawing the rectangle,
circle or polygon switches to Window Selection(include intersected: off) Window Selection(include intersected: on)
the Intersection selection ▶Selected Object: A (Fully included) ▶Selected Object: A, B (B is intersected)
option.

This function selects/unselects objects by entering the ID in the node, element select mode.
4.5
Select This selection method can be coupled with other selection methods. The node or element select mode is
Node/Element significant when the selection filter is set as "Node (N)" or "Element (T)" and can only be used in the node,
by ID element control functions (functions that require direct selection of the node/element). When ID selection is
called up, a dialog box appears on the upper right corner of the work screen and the selection process is as
 The ID selection dialog
box acts as a middleman follows.
between the Selection
manager and the ① Select individual nodes and elements by directly entering their ID in to the ID selection dialog box.
Command dialog box.
② Selecting nodes and elements using other methods (Pick/Window, Circle etc.) in the work-plane
transfers the node/element ID in to the ID selection dialog box. The user can check the transferred ID and
edit to select the desired nodes and elements. It is useful to use the ID selection function when selecting
some of the overlapping nodes or elements.

When you select a node, its ID is transferred Directly enter the ID or modify the ID Which is
directly to the ID selection dialog box. transferred to the ID selection dialog box.

Does not transfer

directly

Command dialog box

Example of selecting specific node by using ID Selection, at where nodes are overlapped

The ID selection dialog box buttons are as follows.

 When selecting new Add Adds a new node, element ID to the selection.
nodes, elements from the Change Releases all of the existing selection and only selects the nodes, elements with
work-plane after deleting all
content in the ID field, the new ID. (Select substitution)
existing selection is still Delete Deletes all content in the ID field.
shown in the ID selection Close Closes the ID selection dialog box.
dialog box.

32 | Section 4. Selection Toolbar

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Section 5 Advanced View Control Toolbar

▶Advanced view control
toolbar

Geometric shapes can be cut by a specified plane direction and the section can be viewed. Necessary
5.1 sections can be saved by pressing the [Add] button. Clicking the icon shows the clipped section.
Clipping Plane This function can be used to understand the interior shape of the geometry during pre-processing and is
also useful in displaying particular cross sections during post-processing.

▶Cutting plane & Clipping

Plane Direction
[X]: Cuts the shape in the plane normal to the X-axis. It is possible to edit the distance and move the plane.
[Y]: Cuts the shape in the plane normal to the Y-axis. It is possible to edit the distance and move the plane.
[Z]: Cuts the shape in the plane normal to the Z-axis. It is possible to edit the distance and move the plane..
[3 point definition]: Defines 3 points in the work-plane to form a cutting plane. The shape is cut in this plane.
[2 point definition]: Defines 2 points in the work-plane to form a cutting plane. The shape is cut in this plane.
[Element face]: Cuts the shape in the plane containing the element face.

Distance
Display the distance between the plane and the origin.

Degree
Cross-section can be defined by Angle from selected axis.

Reverse
Show the section by changing the normal direction.

Display Capped Part

Uncheck to display the section only.
Display Mesh Shape on Plane

Section 5. Advanced View Control Toolbar | 33

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Check to display the mesh formed on the section.

Always Show Edges

Check to view the edges that make up the geometric shape.

Plane Color
Specify the color of the section.

Plane Composite

[Union]
Displays all sections and shapes on the screen.
[Intersection]
Displays the intersection between sections and shapes on the screen.

Displays the symmetrical model centered on a specified plane or planes normal to the X, Y, Z axis. The
5.2 distance between the original model and the symmetrical model can be adjusted.
Mirror Plane

▶ View symmetric model

(Axis)
▶▶ View symmetric model
(Plane)

When configuring planes 1, 2, 3 individually, clicking the [Max] button displays the furthest symmetrical
model with respect to the original model, while clicking the [Min] button displays the closest symmetrical
model with respect to the original model.

5.3
Iso Value Surface

▶Set equipotential surface

Sets a criterion for the resulting value and displays an area inside/outside of a specified value range.
Checking the 'Surface Style' displays an area with the same result value as a face.

34 | Section 5. Advanced View Control Toolbar

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Section 6 Node/Element Toolbar

▶Node/Element Toolbar

Show/Hide Element Free Edge

Shows/hides the B-Spline.
A B-Spline is where the node is not shared between 2D elements.
Show/Hide Element Coordinate System
Shows/hides the element coordinate system.
Because the element coordinate system is determined by the order and direction of
the element, a unified coordinate system is necessary for a consistent load output.
The element coordinate system can be modified at Mesh > Element > Parameter >
Change CSys
Show/Hide Material Coordinate System
Shows/hides the material coordinate system.
The user can also view the material coordinate system by selecting the mesh at
Work tree > Mesh and then right mouse click > Display > Material CSys.
Show/Hide Node ID
Shows/hides the node ID.
This function is useful when checking the results at a particular node.
Show/Hide Element ID
Shows/hides the element ID.
This function is useful when checking the results at a particular element.
Query Node/Element
Checks the information of a specified node/element. The user can input the particular
node/element number or click the node/element on the screen. The information is
displayed in the output window.
Active Element
Shows/hides desired meshes that make up the total model.
This function if effective when working with large complex models because it shows
partial models.
Selecting [All] shows all elements and the [Previous] button undoes the
enabling/disabling of the element.
Active All Elements
Returns to the original state (view all elements) after Activating partial elements.
Measure Distance
Measure the distance or angle between two points.
This function plays the same role as Geometry > Tools > Measure.

Section 6. Node/Element Toolbar | 35

 User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

The user can set the display of nodes/elements of the model by selecting the mesh from Work tree >
Mesh and then right mouse click > display to check the desired option.

36 | Section 6. Node/Element Toolbar

User Manual Chapter 2. General Information

Section 7 Run Analysis Toolbar

▶Run Analysis Toolbar

Perform

Run the analysis. The check button can be used to perform partial analysis of the case.

▶Analysis execution
manager

Pre-mode

Switch to the pre-processing mode. <Unlock Icon>

Information of geometry, mesh, loading and boundary conditions etc. are displayed in real time in a tree
structure form similar to that of Microsoft Windows Explorer. A pop-up menu provides various control
functions for object select and modification, show/hide etc.

Post-mode

Switch to the post-processing mode. <Lock Icon>

After the analysis has successfully finished, the program automatically loads the analysis results and the
verifiable results are displayed in a tree structure form. The user can perform various functions such as
graph output, table output, save post-processing graphic state etc.
When performing additional work on geometric shapes or meshes, the user needs to switch back to the
[Pre-processing mode] and reanalyze after the work has finished.

Section 7. Analysis Toolset | 37

Advanced Nonlinear and
Detail Analysis System

Chapter 3
Geometry

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1. Point and Curve

Section 2. Surface and Solid

Section 3. Boolean

Section 4. Divide

Section 5. Protrude

Section 6. Transform

Section 7. Sub Shape

Section 8. Remove

Section 9. Tools
User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Section 1 Point and Curve

Overview
1.1
Point Create an independent point on a 2D or 3D space.

▶Create point(coordinate)
▶▶Create point(Tabular
input)

Create

There are 5 ways to create a point.

[Coordinate] : Directly input the coordinate. The user can create a point by directly clicking on the work-
plane or typing in the coordinate values.
[Conic center] : Create a point at the center of an existing conic.
[Center of points] : Create a point at the center of an existing group of points.
[Curve-curve intersection] : Create a point at the intersection between two curves.
[Curve-surface intersection] : Create a point at the intersection between a curve and a face.
[Convert Node] : Create a point at the node of a created mesh.

Geometry set
Register the created point on the Geometry Set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry Set.

Tabular input

Directly inputs the 3D coordinate values in a table. The user can also select the import coordinates function
to import a .txt file with the coordinate values. When creating a .txt file, the point coordinates are in the
order of x,y,z and distinguished by a space in between.
The following example shows an input file to create points at (0,0,0), (1,1,2), (2,2,2) and (5,5,5).

Section 1. Point and Curve | 39

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

▶ Tabular input

When entering the exact coordinates of a line intersection or center of a circle, it is also possible to use
the center snap, intersection snap or point snap methods of the define snap ( )function.

Overview
1.2 Create an edge type straight line on the work-plane.
Line
▶Create line – 2D
▶▶Create line – 3D

2D
Input the coordinate of the start point and the end point to create a line. The start point input is in the
absolute coordinate(x,y) form. For the end point, the user can select one of the following 3 methods:

1. [Absolute (x,y)] : Input the absolute 2D coordinate value in the work-plane.

2. [Relative (dx,dy)] : Input the relative distance from the point entered in the previous stage.
3. [Length,Angle] : Input the length and angle from the point entered in the previous stage. The angle is the
rotation angle in the counter clockwise direction relative to the x axis of the work-plane.

3D
Input the coordinate of the start point and the end point to create a line. The start point input is in the
absolute coordinate(x,y,z) form. For the end point, the user can select one of the following 2 methods:

1. [Absolute (x,y,z)] : Input a 3D absolute coordinate value in the work-plane.

2. [Relative (dx,dy,dz)] : Input the relative 3D distance from the point entered in the previous step.

The user can click on the work-plane or a geometry shape and directly assign the next point. The y-axis
values are not entered because the work-plane is two-dimensional.

Geometry set
Register the created line on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

40 | Section 1. Point and Curve

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.3
Arc Creates an edge type arc on the work-plane

▶Create arc – 2D
▶▶Create arc – 3D

2D

Methodology

As shown below, there are 3 ways to create an arc. The points used in each method can be specified
directly by clicking on the work-plane of the work screen. The arc is created in a counterclockwise direction
relative to the vertical direction of the work-plane.

: Center point, Start point and End point

Creates an arc using the Center point [(Absolute x,y)], Start point [(Absolute x,y), (Radius, Start angle)] and
End point [(Absolute x,y), (Included Angle), (End angle)] inputs in order.

: Start point, Secondary point and Endpoint

Creates an arc using the Start point [(Absolute x,y)], a Secondary point on arc[(Absolute x, y)] and End
point [(Absolute x,y)] inputs in order.

: Edge and Curvature

The curve starts from the end of an existing edge and ends at a random point [Radius and Angle between]
to draw an arc. The edge and curve are continuous, but are separate edges. The start point of the arc is set
at the closest end point of the existing edge with respect to the mouse click.

Section 1. Point and Curve | 41

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

3D

Methodology

There are 2 ways to create an arc, as shown below. The points used in each method can be specified
directly by clicking on the work-plane of the work screen. The arcs are created in a counterclockwise
direction relative to the vertical direction of the work-plane.

: Center point, Start point and End point

Creates an arc using the center point [(Absolute x,y,z)], start point [(Absolute x,y,z)] and end point
[(Absolute x,y,z)] inputs in order.

: Start point, Secondary point and Endpoint

Creates an arc using the [(Absolute x,y,z)], a secondary point on arc[(Absolute x,y,z)] and end point
[(Absolute x,y,z)] inputs in order.

Geometry set

Register the created arc on the Geometry Set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry Set.

42 | Section 1. Point and Curve

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.4
Circle Create an edge type circle on the work-plane.

▶Create circle

Methodology

There are 4 ways to draw a circle. The points used in each method can be specified directly by clicking on
the work-plane of the work screen.

: Center coordinates and radius

Create a circle using center point coordinates [(Absolute x,y)] and radius.

: End points of diameter

Create a circle using one end point of the diameter [(Absolute x,y)] and the other end point [(Absolute x,y),
(Relative dx,dy), (Length, Angle)].

: Three points on the circle

Create a circle using the coordinates of three arbitrary points on the circle [(Absolute x,y)].

: Within and adjacent to two edges

Create a circle that is within and adjacent to two existing edges. The user needs to input the radius and
select two edges.

Make face

Creates the circular plane used to outline the circle.

Geometry set

Register the created circle on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry set.

Section 1. Point and Curve | 43

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.5
Polyline Create an edge type polyline on the work-plane.

▶ Polyline – 2D
▶▶ Polyline – 3D

2D

Input the coordinates of the start point and the end point to create a polyline. The start point input is in the
absolute coordinate(x,y) form. For the end point, the user can select one of the following 3 methods. The
points used in each method can be specified directly by clicking on the work-plane of the work screen. The
right mouse click stops the interpolation and creates the polyline.

1. [Absolute(x,y)] : Input an absolute 2D coordinate value in the work-plane.

2. [Relative(dx,dy)] : Input the relative distance from the point entered in the previous step.
3. [Length/Angle] : Input a length and angle from the point entered in the previous step. The angle is the
rotation angle in the counterclockwise direction relative to the x axis of the work-plane.

3D

Input the coordinates of the start point and the end point to create a polyline. The start point input is in the
absolute coordinate(x,y,z) form. For the end point, the user can select one of the following 2 methods. The
user can click on the work-plane or a geometry shape and directly assign the next point. But because the
work-plane is two-dimensional, the y-axis values are not entered.

1. [Absolute(x,y,z)] : Input a 3D absolute coordinate value in the work-plane.

2. [Relative(dx,dy,dz)] : Input the relative 3D distance from the point entered in the previous step.

Make Face
Create a plane that has the closed polyline as its boundary.

Link Start and End Point

Automatically connects the end point and the start point. The right mouse click on the work screen
automatically connects the end point to the start point, closing the polyline.

Geometry set
Register the generated polyline on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry set.

44 | Section 1. Point and Curve

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.6 Create a wire type rectangle on the work-plane.
Rectangle
▶Create rectangle

Methodology

: Diagonal End points

Creates a rectangle using one end point [(Absolute x,y)] and the other diagonal end point [(Absolute
x,y),(Relative x,y)].

: 2 End points and length

Creates a rectangle using one End point [(Absolute x,y)], a second end point [(Absolute x, y),(Relative x,y)]
and the length inputs in this order.

The user can directly click on the workspace of the work screen to specify points.

Make Face

Create a rectangular plane that has the rectangle as its boundary. In this case, it does not create a border
of rectangular wire.

Geometry set

Register the generated rectangle on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry set.

Section 1. Point and Curve | 45

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.7
Ellipse Create a wire type ellipse on the work-plane.

▶Create ellipse

Methodology

Creates an ellipse using the center point coordinates [Absolute (x,y)] and the major and minor axis radius.
The major axis input can be in the form of [Absolute (x,y)] or [Length, Angle]. When using the [Length,
Angle] form, input the length and angle relative to the previous point.

The user can directly click on the workspace of the work screen to specify points.

Make Face

Create an elliptical plane that has the ellipse as its boundary line. In this case, it does not create a border of
edge type wire.

Geometry set

Register the generated ellipse on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry set.

46 | Section 1. Point and Curve

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.8
B-Spline Create an edge type B-Spline on the work-plane.

▶B-Sline – 2D
▶▶B-Spline – 3D

2D
Input the coordinates of the start point and the end point to create a B-Spline. The start point input is in the
absolute coordinate(x,y) form. For the end point, the user can select one of the following 3 methods:

1. [Absolute(x,y)] : Input an absolute 2D coordinate value in the work-plane.

2. [Relative(dx,dy)] : Input the relative distance from the point entered in the previous step.
3. [Length/Angle] : Input a length and angle from the point entered in the previous step. The angle is the
rotation angle in the counterclockwise direction relative to the x-axis of the work-plane.

The points can be specified directly by clicking on the work-plane of the work screen. The right mouse click
stops further interpolation and creates the B-Spline.

3D
Input the coordinates of the start point and the end point to create a B-Spline. The start point input is in the
absolute coordinate(x,y,z) form. For the end point, the user can select one of the following 3 methods.

[Absolute(x,y,z)] : Input a 3D absolute coordinate value in the work-plane.

[Relative(dx,dy,dz)] : Input the relative 3D distance from the point entered in the previous step.

The user can click on the work-plane or a geometry shape and directly assign the next point, but because
the work-plane is two-dimensional, the y-axis values are not entered. The right mouse click stops further
interpolation and creates the B-Spline.

Make Face
Create a plane that has the closed B-Spline as its boundary.

Define Two End Tangent Vectors

Use the tangent vectors of the start and end points to modify the shape of the overall B-Spline after it has
been finished.

Geometry set
Register the created B-Spline on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry set.

Section 1. Point and Curve | 47

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.9
Profile Create a wire type profile that consists of lines and arcs on the work-plane.

▶Create profile

Methodology

The user can directly click on the work-plane in the work screen or input the coordinate values. When
specifying the points using the mouse, the right mouse click stops further interpolation and creates the
profile.

: Three point straight line profile

Creates a connected straight line using the start point coordinates [(Absolute x,y)] and continuously
inputting the next point’s coordinates [(Absolute x,y),(Relative dx,dy),(Length, Angle)].

: Two point arc profile

Creates an arc that is adjoined to the previous line. Because the start point of the arc is automatically
assigned to the end point of the previously created line, only the end point coordinates of the arc [(Radius,
Angle)] are needed. It is not possible to draw an arc connected to a line and is it only possible during the
create profile process.

: Three point arc profile

Creates an arc using the coordinates of three points. When using this function during the create profile
process, the end point of the previous line becomes the first point and only the coordinates for the other two
points [(Absolute x,y),(Relative dx,dy)] are needed. However if this function is used first in the profile, the
user must input all three points in order to create an arc.

Make Face

Create a plane that has the closed polyline as its boundary. In this case, it does not create an wire type
profile.

Geometry set

Register the created profile on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry set.

48 | Section 1. Point and Curve

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.10
Polygon Create a wire type polygon on the work-plane.

▶Create Polygon

Methodology

: Inscribed regular polygon

Input the number of sides of the regular polygon. Input the center coordinates of the inscribed circle
[(Relative x,y)] and select one of the 3 input methods for the coordinate values of the radius and direction.
(Absolute coordinates x,y)
(Relative coordinates dx,dy)
(Length, Angle)
The vertex of the polygon will be located on the second input point.

: Circumscribed regular polygon

Input the number of sides of the regular polygon. Input the center coordinates of the inscribed circle
[(Relative x,y)] and select one of the 3 input methods for the coordinate values of the radius and direction.
(Absolute coordinates x,y)
(Relative coordinates dx,dy)
(Length, Angle)
A tangent point will be located on the second input point.

: Edge length, Center point and angle between X axis

Input the number of sides of the regular polygon. Input the center point coordinates of the polygon
[Absolute (x,y)]. Input the angle between a vertex and the x axis to create a polygon.

Make Face

Create a plane that has the closed polyline as its boundary. In this case, it does not create a wire type
polygon.

Geometry set

Register the generated polygon on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry set.

Section 1. Point and Curve | 49

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.11
Helix Create a wire type helix on the work-plane.

▶Create Helix

Direction

Determine the helix direction by selecting the reference axis direction or a two-point vector.

[Select direction] : Determine the direction vector that is to be used as the reference axis of the helix. The
user can select the datum axis, datum plane, plane or edge.
[2 points vector] : Determine the direction vector that is to be the reference axis of the helix by entering the
coordinates of its start and end points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify the
Start and End points.

Other inputs

Create a spiral by entering the Start XYZ, Pitch, Turn and Taper angle.

[Start XYZ] : Input the 3D absolute coordinates for the start point of the helix. The user can also directly
click on the work screen to specify the point.
[Pitch] : Defined as the height increase in the axis direction per one rotation period.
[turn] : The number of revolutions in the helix.
[Taper angle] : The angle between the reference axis and side slope of the helix.

Some errors can occur when creating a helix; so the input value and the angle between the reference axis
and side slope may not match exactly.

Geometry set

Register the generated helix on the geometry set. The user can specify the name of the geometry set.

50 | Section 1. Point and Curve

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.12
Tunnel Create a wire type tunnel section on the work-plane.

▶Create Tunnel section

Tunnel type

There are 4 types of tunnels: [3 Center Circle], [3 Center Circle + Invert], [5 Center Circle] and [5 Center
Circle + Invert]. There are 3 types of sections: [Full], [Left Half], [Right Half].

: 3 Center Circle
Create a tunnel using 3 arcs, all with different center points and diameters.

: 3 Center Circle + Invert

Create a tunnel using 3 different arcs and an invert.

: 5 Center Circle
Create a tunnel using 5 arcs, all with different center points and diameters.

: 5 Center Circle + Invert

Create a tunnel using different 5 arcs and an invert.
Size

Section 1. Point and Curve | 51

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Input the Radius (R1~R4) and Angle (A1~A4) of the tunnel section. If the section is not horizontally
symmetrical, check the axis symmetry section to create a non-symmetric tunnel shape. In this case, the
Inputs A1’~A3’, R2’~R3’ represent the shape on the left half section.

Invert

This function is only active when the tunnel type is [3 center circle + invert] or [5 center circle+invert]. The
invert can be drawn in an arc form when the bottom of the tunnel is not flat. The invert shape can be
created with one of the following 3 methods:

1. [Tangential] : Creates an invert shape based on the Radius (R) and Angle (A) input and the 3 center
circle (or 5 center circle) information.
2. [Radius] : Creates an invert shape based on the 3 center circle (or 5 center circle) information and the
appropriate Angle (A) calculated by the Radius (R) input.
3. [Angle] : Creates an invert shape based on the 3 center circle (or 5 center circle) information and the
appropriate Radius (R) calculated by the Angle (A) input.

Rock bolt

If the tunnel section contains rock bolts, check [Include Rock Bolts] to place the edges. Input the number of
rock bolts and their length. The user can align the bolts by using two methods: [Tangential Pitch] or
[Rotation Angle].

Location

Input the center point location of the created tunnel section.

The user can input the center point coordinates on the work-plane by either checking the [Screen Snap]
and using the mouse, or directly entering the coordinates.

Make wire

Create the tunnel section shape using a single wire. If the user does not check the option, it creates the
tunnel section shape using multiple edges.

Geometry set

Register the created tunnel section on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry
set.

52 | Section 1. Point and Curve

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.13
Fillet Curve Applies fillet and chamfer to the intersection between two edges. This function is only applicable when the
& Chamfer edges exist on the work-plane.

▶Fillet Curve
▶▶Chamfer

Fillet

Methodology

Select the two edges that need to be filleted and input the radius. The applied fillet curves become a single
wire type.

Trim Off Original Entities (Only Lines)

Remove the exterior edge protruding from the filleted area. If the selected edge is an arc or circle, it is not
removed.

Section 1. Point and Curve | 53

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Chamfer

Methodology

Select the two edges that need to be trimmed and input the radius. The applied line trim becomes a single
wire type.

Trim off Original Entities (Only Line)

Remove the exterior edge protruding from the trimmed area.

Geometry set

Register the filleted or trimmed edge on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry
set.

Overview
1.14
Make Wire Create a single wire from selected edges on the work-plane.

▶Make wire

Methodology

Create a single wire from edges within the Tolerance.

[Tolerance] is the allowed error criterion that determines whether the edges are connected. For example
when the distance between the edges is 2.0e-006, although the value is not zero, it can be made into a
single wire by setting the error as 0.0001 (distance larger than the value between edges).
After the operation is performed, a single wire remains and the selected edges are deleted.

54 | Section 1. Point and Curve

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Geometry set

Register the wire on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

A wire is a concept of collective edges and has these edges as its sub-shape. Because the wire is a set of
edges, the user can use commands such as Extend to create shells, a set of faces created by individual
edges. For these reasons, it is not appropriate to use the create wire function when creating a face by
extruding multiple edges. The geometry shape hierarchy is as follows.

Section 1. Point and Curve | 55

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.15
Extend Curve Extend the length of existing edges or trims edges to match the end points on the work-plane.
▶Extend Curve
▶▶2D Coinciding Ends

Extend Curve

Methodology

Select the reference edge to which the target edge will extend.

The function does not work for edges that would not meet even if they were extended. The extend function
is unavailable for B-Spline type edges.

2D Coinciding Ends

Methodology

Select end points that need to be matched. After the operation, the selected edges are removed and only
the extended edges remain.
When one of the edges is long enough and only the short edge needs to be extended, the short edge is
extended to and the long edge is cut until the intersection point.

56 | Section 1. Point and Curve

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.16
Intersect Cut the intersecting edges at the intersection point.

▶Intersect

Methodology

Select the edges to cut at the intersection.

After the operation, the selected edges are removed and only the cut edges remain.

Geometry set

Register the generated edges on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Section 1. Point and Curve | 57

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.17
Trim Curve Cut the intersecting edges the based on the intersection point. This function is only applicable when the
edges exist on the work-plane. After the operation, the selected edges are removed and only the cut edges
remain.

▶Cut line

Methodology

Select the reference edge for the cut and then select the target edge. The user can select multiple
reference edges. The edges will remain unchanged after the operation.

58 | Section 1. Point and Curve

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.18
Break Curve Divide an edge in the 3D space.
▶Break curve–Percentage

Percentage

Methodology

Divide the edge using a ratio. Multiple edges can be selected and divided. The original length is viewed as
1 and the ratio is set at a value between 0 and 1.

Point

Methodology

Divide the edge using points. If there is no geometry shape to divide, the user can specify the object on the
work-plane using the snap option or directly enter the coordinate values. The selected point is projected
onto the edge at the shortest distance and that point is the reference point for the division.

Section 1. Point and Curve | 59

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Edge

Methodology

Divide edges using another edge. Select the reference edge and divide the target edge. The selected edge
is projected onto the edge at the shortest distance and that point is the reference point for the division.

Face

Methodology

Divide the edge using a face. The selected face is projected onto the edge at the shortest distance and that
point is the reference point for the division.

60 | Section 1. Point and Curve

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.19
Merge Curve Select edges that exist on the work-plane and connect the end points using appropriate extend or trim
operations.

▶Merge curve

Methodology

Create a single edge from edges within the error limit. The error is the allowed error criterion that
determines whether the edges are connected. For example when the distance between the edges is 2.0e-
006, although the value is not zero, it can be made into a single edge by setting the error as 0.0001
(distance larger that the value between edges).
After the operation, the selected edges are removed and only a single joined edge remains.

* Join line and wire

Join line and wire are both ways to join multiple edges into a single line. The middle points used to create
the edges are removed but for join line, but not for wire. So if the small points can be ignored, it is best to
use the join line function. If not, it is best to use the create wire function.

Section 1. Point and Curve | 61

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.20
Offset Curve Create a new line by offsetting an existing edge by a certain distance. The offset is created only when the
edges exist on the work-plane.

▶Offset curve

Methodology

Select the edge and line to offset on the work-plane. Circles or arcs can also be selected. Because the
offset is always in the normal direction of the target edge, there is no need to set the direction. The user
only needs to input the distance to automatically offset. Checking the [Make Face] option creates a plane
that contains the offset edges.

Geometry set

Register the generated edges on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

62 | Section 1. Point and Curve

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
1.21
Shortest Path Create a shortest distance line between two shapes or an intersection curve between two intersecting
Line shapes.

▶Shortest path line

▶▶Surface intersection
curve

Shortest path line

Methodology

Create the shortest possible line between two shapes by selecting them in order.

Surface Intersection Curve

Methodology

Selecting two shapes create an edge type line at the intersection. If the intersection is a single edge, a
single edge is created but if there are more intersections, a compound shape consisting of edges is created.

Geometry set

Register the generated edges on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Section 1. Point and Curve | 63

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Section 2 Surface and Solid

Overview
2.1
Cylinder Create a shell or solid type cylinder.

▶Create cylinder

Methodology

Create a cylinder from the Origin Point(OP), Radius(R), Height(H) and Angle(A) input.

[Origin Point (OP)]

The Origin point consists of the Center point coordinates of the bottom face of the cylinder. The user can
directly specify the center point of the work-plane or geometry shape by selecting the points with the mouse.
Because the workspace is 2-dimensional, the y axis value is not entered.

[Angle (A)]
The angle is the rotation angle of the circle between the top and bottom face of the cylinder. If the user
enters 360, it creates a generic cylinder with circular top and bottom faces.

64 | Section 2. Surface and Solid

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Make Solid

Check this option to create a solid type cylinder with a volume. Un-checking the option will create a shell
type cylinder.

• GCS
For GCS (Global Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Global coordinate system. In this case, the center
coordinate system) and
WCS (Work-plane coordinates are input in 3D space.
coordinate system),
please refer to General • WCS
information-Manage Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Work-plane coordinate system. In this case, the center
modeling toolset.
coordinates are input in 2D space.

Geometry set

Register the created cylinder on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Overview
2.2
Cone Create a shell or solid type cone.

▶Create cone

Methodology

Create a cone from the Origin point (OP), Top Radius (TR), Bottom Radius (BR), Height (H) and Angle (A)
input.

[Origin Point (OP)]

Section 2. Surface and Solid | 65

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

The center point consists of the Center point coordinates at the bottom face of the cone. The user can
directly specify the center point of the work-plane or geometry shape by selecting with the mouse. Because
the workspace is 2-dimensional, the y-axis value is not entered.

[Angle (A)]
The angle is the rotation angle of the circle between the top and bottom face of the cone. If the user enters
360, it creates a generic cone with circular top and bottom faces.

Make Solid

Check this option to create a solid type cone with a volume. Un-checking the option will create a shell type
For GCS (Global cone.
coordinate system) and
WCS (Work-plane
coordinate system), • GCS
please refer to General Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Global coordinate system. In this case, the center
information-Manage coordinates are input in 3D space.
modeling toolset.

• WCS
Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Work-plane coordinate system. In this case, the center
coordinates are input in 2D space.

Geometry set

Register the created cone on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

 When creating a solid or 2D mesh on a cone, the user can observe mesh deformation at the vertex.
This phenomenon happens near the pole, which is created near the revolution axis of the rotated
body.
 Mesh deformation can also happen during the general modeling process when a vertex is created on
a curved face. This phenomenon may negatively effect on the analysis results. This problem cannot
be solved on the geometry shape and it is best to use move node or merge node functions after
creating the mesh for any modifications.

66 | Section 2. Surface and Solid

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
2.3
Box Create a shell or solid type box.

▶Create box

Methodology.

Create a box from the Origin Point(OP), Width X(WX), Width Y(WY) and Height(H).

The Origin Point(OP) consists of the corner point coordinates of the bottom face of the box.
The user can directly specify the center point of the work-plane or geometry shape by selecting the points
with the mouse. Because the workspace is 2-dimensional, the y-axis value is not entered.

Make Solid

Check this option to create a solid type box with a volume. Un-checking the option will create a shell type
box.

• GCS
For GCS (Global Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Global coordinate system. In this case, the center
coordinate system) and
WCS (Work-plane coordinates are input in 3D space.
coordinate system),
please refer to General • WCS
information-Manage Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Work-plane coordinate system. In this case, the center
modeling toolset.
coordinates are input in 2D space.

Geometry set

Register the created box on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Section 2. Surface and Solid | 67

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
2.4
Wedge Create a shell or solid type, wedge-shaped atypical hexahedral.

▶Create wedge

Methodology
Create a wedge shape from the Origin Point (OP), Length (DX, DY, DZ) and Shape width (Xmin, Xmax,
Zmin, Zmax).

The Origin Point (OP) is the corner point coordinates of the bottom face of the hexahedral. The user can
directly specify the center point of the work-plane or geometry shape with the mouse. Because the
workspace is 2-dimensional, the y-axis value is not entered.

DX, DY, DZ represent the bottom face x direction length, height and bottom face width of the hexahedral
respectively.
X min, X max is the relative distance of the Start and End point coordinates of the top face in the x-axis.
Z min, Z max is the relative distance of the Start and End point coordinates of the top face in the z-axis.

The hexahedral is created as follows. If the Corner coordinates are (X,Y,Z), The bottom face is the
rectangle that starts at (X,Y,Z) and ends at (DZ,DY,DX). The top face is the rectangle that starts at (X+X
min,Y,Z+Z min) and ends at (X+X max,Y,Z+Z max). The hexahedral is set based on the two rectangles.

Make Solid
Check this option to create a solid type hexahedral with a volume. Un-checking the option will create a shell
type hexahedral.

• GCS
For GCS (Global Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Global coordinate system. In this case, the center
coordinate system) and
WCS (Work-plane coordinates are input in 3D space.
coordinate system), • WCS
please refer to General Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Work-plane coordinate system. In this case, the center
information-Manage coordinates are input in 2D space.
modeling toolset.

Geometry set
Register the created hexahedral on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

68 | Section 2. Surface and Solid

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
2.5
Sphere Create a shell or solid type sphere.

▶Create sphere

Methodology

Create a sphere from the Origin point (OP) and Angles (A1, A2, A3).

Origin point (OP)

The center point coordinates of the sphere. The user can directly specify the center point of the work-plane
or geometry shape by selecting the points with the mouse. Because the workspace is 2-dimensional, the y-
axis value is not entered.

Angle (A1, A2, A3)

The angle input to create a sphere. The values represent:

A1: Rotation angle of the sphere's vertical plane
A2: Start angle of the sphere's vertical plane (0<A2≤90)
A3: End angle of the sphere's vertical plane (-90≤A3≤0)

Section 2. Surface and Solid | 69

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Make Solid

Check this option to create a solid type sphere with a volume. Un-checking the option will create a shell
type sphere.
 GCS
For GCS (Global Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Global coordinate system. In this case, the center
coordinate system) and coordinates are input in 3D space.
WCS (Work-plane
coordinate system),
please refer to General  WCS
information-Manage Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Work-plane coordinate system. In this case, the center
modeling toolset. coordinates are input in 2D space.

Geometry set

Register the created sphere on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

 When creating a solid or 2D mesh on a sphere, the user can observe mesh deformation at the
vertex. This phenomenon happens near the pole, which is created near the revolution axis of the
rotated body.
 Mesh deformation can also happen during the general modeling process when a vertex is created on
a curved face. This phenomenon may have a negative effect on the analysis results. This problem
cannot be solved on the geometry shape and it is best to use move node or merge node functions
after creating the mesh for any modifications.

70 | Section 2. Surface and Solid

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
2.6
Torus Create a donut shaped rotated body. Using a closed section creates a shell or solid type torus. Using an
open section creates a rotated body with a blocked center. The sectional shape is a circle or an arc.

▶Create torus

Methodology

Create a torus from the Origin Point (OP), Outer Radius (OR), Inner Radius (IR), Height (H) and Angle (A)
input.

[Origin point (OP)]

The center point coordinates of the torus. The user can directly specify the center point of the work-plane or
geometry shape by clicking. Because the workspace is 2-dimensional, the y axis value is not entered.

[Outer radius (OR) and Inner radius (IR)]

The outer circumference radius and inner circumference radius respectively. 0<IR<OR needs to be
satisfied.

[Angle (A)]
The angle is the start angle of the sectional shape (circle or arc) of the rotated body.

Make Solid

Check this option to create a solid type torus with a volume. Un-checking the option will create a shell type
torus.

Section 2. Surface and Solid | 71

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

• GCS
GCS (Global coordinate Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Global coordinate system. In this case, the center
system) and WCS (Work-
plane coordinate system), coordinates are input in 3D space.
please refer to General • WCS
information-Manage Enter the center coordinates with reference to the Work-plane coordinate system. In this case, the center
modeling toolset. coordinates are input in 2D space.

Geometry set

Register the created torus on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Overview
2.7
Make Face Create a plane from multiple closed edges. The edges are the outline of the plane.

▶Make Face

Face

Create a face by selecting the edges that form its outline. There is no limit to the numbers of edges the user
can select, but there should be no overlapping outlines in order to create a normal plane.

[Tolerance]
The criterion that determines whether an edge is connected. For example when the distance between the
edges is 2.0e-006, although the value is not zero, it is determined to be connected with a tolerance of
0.0001 (distance larger that the value between edges).

If there is an outline inside an area formed by another outline, it is still possible to create a plane that
considers both the exterior and interior outlines. However, if the exterior and interior outlines are not on
the same plane, the interior face is projected onto the exterior face.

72 | Section 2. Surface and Solid

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Coons face

Create a 3D curved face using 2 or 4 outline edges.

When using 4 edges, the selected outline needs form a closed area to generate a normal curved face.

When using 2 edges, the curved face is created by the two outlines and the closest distance between them.
When creating a Coons face using 2 edges, the face is formed by connecting the selected edges in a
straight line. Because the face is created by connecting the Start points and End points of the two edges, it
creates a twisted face if the edge directions do not match. In this case, use the reverse direction option to
connect the Start and End points of each edge to create a normal face.

A Coons face is a curved face that has small errors and a fast production rate. However, using more than
4 outlines to create the face is inconvenient. When using 4 edges to create a Coons face, use the join line
function to reduce the number of outlines to at most 4.
The face is not created if the shape is not shaded in the preview window after the edges have been
selected. A face that cannot be shaded is one that has a problem in its configuration and has an effect on
future modeling processes. In this case, it is recommended that the edges be modified or recreated or
rejoined before creating the Coons face again. If there is no appropriate solution, it is safe to remodel the
abnormal face using the shape modification function in the modification toolset.

Section 2. Surface and Solid | 73

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Grid Face

Set an imaginary grid on the XY plane of the GCS and input the height information for each grid point to
create a compound shape-curved face.
M(X direction number), N(Y direction number) represent the number of grid lines in each axis direction.
Origin X and Origin Y are the X, Y coordinates of the grid start point. LX and LY are the length in the X and
Y direction of the plane.
The height information can be directly entered into a table dialog box or input from a .txt file.

Point

Create a curved face in the space that contains all selected points.
The points can be selected on the screen or their coordinates directly entered into a table dialog box.
When using a table to input the coordinates, the [Make Points] becomes active. Check this option to create
the input point and un-check this option to create the face only. Check [Make Points As Compound] to
create points that are grouped as a compound shape.

Geometry set

Register the created face on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

74 | Section 2. Surface and Solid

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
2.8
Fillet and chamfer Create a fillet or chamfer shell on a shell or solid type edge.

▶ Fillet and Chamfer (Fillet

curve)
▶▶ Fillet and Chamfer
(Chamfer)

Fillet Curve

Methodology

Select the edge to fillet. Only a sub edge of the solid or shell can be selected.
Input the fillet radius (R1) at the Start point and the fillet radius (R2) at the End point of the edge to be filled.
The edge direction is not shown, but the user can check the preview button ( ) to preview the shape.

Chamfer

Methodology

Select the edge to chamfer. Only a sub edge of the solid or shell can be selected.
Input the length (L1) at the Start point and the length (L2) at the End point of the edge to be chamfered.
The edge direction is not shown, but the user can check the preview button ( ) to preview the shape.

Section 2. Surface and Solid | 75

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
2.9
Offset Create a shell by offsetting the whole or parts of a solid or shell.

▶Whole shape
▶▶Partial face

Whole shape

Methodology

Offset all the shapes (Solid, Shell, Face) of the selected object by the same distance (Offset Distance (OD)).

Check the [Round Extended Bound] to connect any disconnected offset faces of the object using curved
faces. The offset distance (OD) is the radius used for the fillet.

Check the [Delete original] to remove all target objects used in the offset process, leaving only the final
shape.

Partial Face

Methodology

Offset parts of the selected object.

Check the [Offset Each Face independently] to offset each face separately. Un-checking this option and
selecting multiple connected faces creates a shell type offset face.

When offsetting only some shells of a compound shape from the select face tab, the faces diverge when

76 | Section 2. Surface and Solid

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

offset.
Entering a positive offset distance, the offset is performed in the normal direction to the face. So when
offsetting individual faces separately, it is good to use the preview function for each face to check whether
it has been offset properly. If the shell has been created by joining or connecting faces, the program
adjusts the different normal directions into one direction to ease the operation.

Overview
2.10
Imprint Create a curve or point on a specified face based on the projected shape.

▶Imprint – Point
▶▶Imprint – Curve

Imprint Point

Methodology

Select the imprint face and point. The imprint direction can be set using the following 2 methods.

[Select Direction] : Determine the direction vector for imprint. The user can select the datum axis, datum
plane, face or edge.
[2 point vector] : Determine the direction vector that is to be the reference axis of the imprint by entering the
coordinates of its Start and End points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify the
Start and End points.

Check the [Connect two points by Line] option to draw a line connecting the origin point and the projected
point.

Imprint Curve

Methodology

Section 2. Surface and Solid | 77

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Select the imprint face and point. The imprint direction can be set using the following 3 methods:

1. [Select Direction] : Determine the direction vector for imprint. The user can select the datum axis, datum
plane, face or edge.
2. [2 point vector] : Determine the direction vector that is to be the reference axis of the imprint by entering
the coordinates of its Start and End points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify
the Start and End points.
3. [Direction of the Shortest Path Line] : Project in the shortest distance direction between the tool shape
and the target shape.

Imprint Auto

Methodology

Select the imprint faces, lines and points to automatically perform imprint.
If the line passes through multiple solids, using the automatic imprint function divides the line for every solid
and the intersections are automatically imprinted.

Geometry set

Register the created lines or points on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry
set.

78 | Section 2. Surface and Solid

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
2.11
Auto Connect Automatically creates a shared face between objects.

▶Automatically creates
shared face

Methodology

Select objects to automatically correct a shared face between them. This function facilitates the crossover
operation between solids and one of the following operations is automatically performed.

 Imprint : In case of solid and solid in contact

 Boolean : Solid within a solid(embed( or partially included - Intersection set

For the set intersection function, the solid shape changes with the selection order. However, in the case of
automatic connection, the program determines and creates the shared face so that the selection order
does not change the shape. Hence, it is useful to use the Geometry > Boolean > Solid > Cut function if the
user wants to include sections that are not in contact.

Section 2. Surface and Solid | 79

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
2.12
Merge Face-Edge Merge the outline of a selected face into one edge while keeping the face.

▶Merge face-edge

Methodology

Perform the merge face-edge operation on a single or multiple shapes. For a single shape, the merge
operation is only available for a single face; for multiple shapes, the operation is automatically available for
all edges included in the selection criteria.

The merge operation is performed only when the angle between the selected edges are within the criteria.
The merging edges need to be connected to other edges for the operation.

The merge face-edge operation does not work on edges existing on a node (an edge of length 0). These
edges are not common but can happen during the modeling process. In this case, the join edge function is
impossible and needs to be modified using Create mesh and manual operations such as Move node.

If the merging edge is composed of 2 short edges on one side and one long edge on the other side in the
suturing process, the long edge is divided to fit in with the 2 short edges, such that all the shared edges
are in the same phase for the fuse operation. Hence, when performing the merge face-edge operation
after the fuse process, the shell edge can be formed too short by mistake is the adjacent edge is short.
To prevent this problem, it is possible to perform the fuse process before the merge face-edge operation.
For large shell models, the merge face-edge operation may be slow and hence it is efficient to perform
partial fuse and merge face-edge operations at the same time.

The Start point of the object is shown as a red circle and the End point a blue circle.

80 | Section 2. Surface and Solid

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
2.13
Bedding Plane A Wizard that can be used to create multiple planes on the 3D space.

▶ Bedding plane

Methodology

Define the plane name and specify the name and position of the irradiation hole. Each irradiation hole can
be added by clicking the Add button, and the depth for each plane is directly input. The depth is input with
reference to the GCS and is cumulated under the ground surface. For example, inputs of -10m ground
surface, 30m soil plane and 60m weathered rock indicate that the soil layer is located 40m below the
ground surface and the weathered rock layer 70m below the ground surface.
The position and number of irradiation holes need to be larger than 1 and 3 respectively to create a
bedding plane and hence, 3 or more columnar sections need to be input when creating a surface using
multiple columnar sections.
The separation distance creates bedding planes by separating the columnar sections by a certain distance.

Import

The information of bedding planes can be defined with an Excel file in the ‘Bedding Plane Wizard’. The
information of several boreholes can be imported at one time. The bedding planes will be created by
correction of borehole depth based on the ‘Plane Name’.

Section 2. Surface and Solid | 81

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Geometry set

The created bedding planes and columnar sections are registered on the Geometry set, under the model
works tree, as a face and line shape respectively. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

82 | Section 2. Surface and Solid

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Section 3 Boolean
Overview
3.1
Solid Perform boolean operations on selected shapes.

▶Boolean

Fuse

Methodology

Merge shapes using the [Fuse] function. It is mostly applied to solids and solids and the outer boundary
lines of each shape remains. However, if the [Merge faces] option is on, the objects are defined as a single
face and the outlines are automatically removed.

For general cases, the [Fuse] function is applied to solids.

 Fuse of line(edge, wire) and line(edge, wire) : All lines are cut at the intersection points and form
a single wire. If the lines are not connected, the operation forms a compound shape.
 Fuse of face(face, shell) and face(face, shell) : Does the same function as Geometry > Boolean
> Surface > Sew

Cut

Methodology

Section 3. Boolean | 83
 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Remove the overlap between the target shape and tool shapes using a [Cut] function. It is mostly applied to
solids and solids.

For general cases, the [Boolean > Cut] function is applied to solids.

 Cut of master line (edge, wire) and tool shape (face, shell) : Divide the edge at its intersection
with the shape, creating wires.
 Cut of master shape (face, shell) and tool shape (face, shell) : The overlapping shape is
removed from the master shape.
 Cut of master shape (edge, wire) and tool shape (solid) : The intersection with the solid is
removed from the shape.

Common

Methodology

Remove everything but the overlap between the target shape and tool shapes from the [Common] function.
It is mostly applied to solids and solids. If the [Common] is applied to two faces, it may create an
inappropriate shape.

For general cases, the [Boolean > Common] function is applied to solids.

 Common of line (edge, wire) and shape (face, shell) : Divide the edge at its intersection with the
shape, creating wires.
 Common of shape (face, shell) and shape (face, shell) : Only the overlap between the shapes
remain as a shell.
 Common of shape (edge, wire) and shape (solid) : The overlap between the shape and solid
remain as a shell.
For all cases, the results are the same

84 | Section 3. Boolean
User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Embed

Methodology

Embed the target shape on the tool shape. It is often used when modeling a solid element that has another
solid element with a different material embedded in it. The [Common] function is done between the target
shape and the tool shape and the results are embedded into the target shape.

Delete Tool

Remove the tool shape after each operation.

1. Using this function on Points or Compounds can create an incorrect shape and it is not recommended.
2. [Fuse], [Cut] and [Common] functions are greatly affected by shape error. The shape error determines
whether a shape is intersecting an adjacent shape and, as the compound modeling process continues,
the errors that may cumulate and cause problems. If the [Fuse], [Cut] and [Common] set operations do
not function properly, use the Boolean > Surface > Sew function to correct for errors and then re-
perform the operation.

Overview
3.2
Surface Select independent faces to create a single shell.

▶Boolean – Fuse
▶▶Boolean – Sew

Section 3. Boolean | 85
 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Fuse

Methodology

Merge the faces (shell, face) that overlap, pass through or have no fuse operation into a single shell using
the [Fuse]. Check the [Merge faces] option to merge outlines to create a face when possible. The outlines
are deleted afterwards.

It is possible to create a shell using the Fuse function for adjoined faces, but this method may take too
long and using many Fuse commands makes the shape unstable. It is recommended to use the Sew
function for modeling. However, for cases where two shapes are not adjacent and do not overlap nor pass
through each other, the Sew operation is not possible. In such case the shell needs to be created using
the Fuse function.

Fuse is a simple union set operation that cannot be used when two faces are apart. When two faces pass
through each other, the faces are divided with reference to the intersection line and each face becomes a
sub-shape of the shell. Hence, if two faces pass through slightly, a very long and thin face maybe included
in the shell after the Fuse operation. It is best to use the delete sub-shape menu and delete faces from the
shell that are below a certain size.

Sew

Methodology

Combine independent faces (shell, face) into one shell. This function is used when the faces (shell, face)
meet at the boundary edge with no overlap.

[Tolerance]
The allowable limit used in the Sew operation. If the gap between the face outlines is less than the
tolerance, it creates a single shell without a free edge.

Checking the [Non-Manifold] option sews non-manifold faces that have three or more faces meeting at a
single edge. Uncheck the option to not fuse Non-manifold faces.

Checking the [Make Solid] option automatically changes a perfectly closed shell into a solid.

86 | Section 3. Boolean
User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Press the preview button [ ] to see the results of the Sew operation on the selected shape (shell, face).
The areas displayed in dark red lines are the B-Spline sections that have not undergone the sew operation
because they are not within the allowable limit. In this case, gradually increasing the limit and previewing
the results repeatedly can prevent B-Splines from being displayed. Pressing the confirm or apply button
with the B-Spline included creates a shell with a B-Spline included.

Be aware that a very large tolerance can create an abnormal shape.

<When fuse does not occur even with tolerance adjustment>

 Check to see if the face overlaps at that position.
 If a face is not sewed, sew the other faces first and then reconstruct the edges of the un-sewed face
for another sew operation.
 It is possible to perform the sew operation without removing a local B-Spline. In this case, a seed is
assigned to the B-Spline to create a mesh and the fuse node operation is performed in the
subsequent mesh creating process.
 Modify the faces such that adjacent faces meet at the edges with the same length using Geometry
> Surface&Solid > Merge Face-Edge. If a mesh is created with the same mesh size without fuse,
the positions of the nodes are very similar. This process combines all the shared nodes of the
created mesh into one using the merge node function.

Some faces are not shaded after the sew operation. This happens when there are problems in a face's
configuration that create erroneous relationships with adjacent faces in the sew process, resulting in an
incorrect shell. These errors can be corrected by modifying the incorrect face and then performing the sew
operation. If there are problems after the suturing, the incorrect face can be removed from the shell by
using the sub-shape remove function.

Section 3. Boolean | 87
 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Section 4 Divide
Overview
4.1
Solid Divide a solid into faces.
▶Solid – Divide into faces

Methodology

Select the target solid and divide it using the tool faces.
The division tool face can be set in 3 ways.

[Select tool surface] : Select the target surfaces directly for division. If the tool shape consists of multiple
faces, it is recommended to group the faces into a single shell to obtain accurate results.
[3 points vector] : Divide the solid using an infinite face defined by specifying three points. The user can
also click directly on the work screen to input the coordinates of the three points.
[Dividing plane] : Divides the solid using an infinite face created with reference to the Global Coordinate
System (GCS).

Divide Touching Faces

When multiple solids are adjacent with faces in contact, diving parts of the solid can also divide the
adjacent solid and their contact face. This allows the sharing of face nodes when creating a solid.

Delete Original, Delete Tool

Check this option to delete the original target shape and tool shape after the division operation.

88 | Section 4. Divide
User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Geometry set

Register the created solid on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Overview
4.2
Surface Divide multiple faces using arbitrary lines or faces.
▶Surface – By curve
▶▶Surface – By surface

By Curves

Methodology

Select the target surface (shell, face) and the tool curves for division. If the tool shape consists of multiple
edges, it is recommended to merge the edges into a single edge instead of selecting multiple edges.
If the tool curves do not exist in the same plane as the target surface, the tool edge is projected onto the
target surface and then divided. In this case, the projection direction needs to be specified. The direction
can be set in the following 4 ways:

1. [Projection Direction] : Determine the projection direction vector of the tool edge. The user can select the
datum axis, datum plane, plane or edge.
2. [2 point vector] : Determine the direction vector by entering the coordinates of its Start and End points.
The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify the Start and End points.
3. [Point on Curve] : Project an arbitrary point on the tool edge in the shortest distance direction to the
target surface. The arbitrary point can be specified by a ratio of 0 to 1 from the Start point to the End point
of the tool edge.
4. [Direction of Shortest Path Line] : Project in the shortest distance direction from the tool edge to the
target shape.

Section 4. Divide | 89
 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Separate divided faces

Check this option to separate the shell into face units.

By Surface

Methodology

Select the target surface (shell, face) and the tool faces for division. The tool faces can be directly selected
or an infinite tool face can be created by defining the coordinates of three points.

Divide Touching faces

When multiple solids are adjacent with faces in contact, diving parts of the solid can also divide the
adjacent solid and their contact face. This allows the sharing of face nodes when creating a solid.

Delete Original, Delete Tool

Check this option to delete the original target shape and tool shape after the division operation.

Geometry set
Register the created face on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

When working with an imported geometry data file, the shape may not divide well. The methods for
dividing a face with a line are as follows:
 When the tool line cuts across the target shape completely, it has a similar effect as the imprint
operation.
 Create a temporary solid by extruding the target surface using an arbitrary value and create a
temporary face by extruding the tool curve. Dividing the created solid by using the created face
leaves only the desired face. Using the sub-shape extend command deletes the temporary solid and
the face.

90 | Section 4. Divide
User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Section 5 Protrude
Overview
5.1
Extrude Create a solid, face and line by extruding a geometry shape (face, line, point) in a straight direction. It is
possible to create a solid using a face, a face using a line, and a line using a point.

For special cases, the solid option can be set to create a solid using a closed wire or edge.

▶ Extrude

Methodology

Input the geometry shape (face, line, point) for the Extrude operation and enter the extend direction and
length. The extend direction can be set using the following 3 methods:

1. [Select Direction] : Determine the extend direction vector of the selected section. The user can select the
datum axis, datum plane, plane or edge.
2. [2 point vector] : Determine the extend direction vector by entering the coordinates of its Start and End
points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify the Start and End points.
3. [Normal of profile] : Extend the section in the normal direction to the plane when the direction can be
specified. If there are multiple sections, the shape is extended for each normal direction. If the extend
section is a curved face or a straight line, the normal direction cannot be defined and it cannot be extended.
Check the [Reverse Direction] option to reverse the extend direction.

[Length]
If the extend direction has a finite length (straight line edge or two-point vector), click the right "<" button to
automatically enter the extend length.

Section 5. Protrude | 91
 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Make Solid

Used on solids created by a closed line. Using an open edge or wire does not cause errors, but be aware
that it may create an incorrect shape..

[Fuse]
Use the Fuse operation between solids to expand the shape during extend process.
[Cut]
Use the Cut operation between solids to divide the shape during the extend process.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the extend line command on the Geometry set. The user can
specify the name of the Geometry set.

92 | Section 5. Protrude
User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
5.2
Revolve Create a solid, face and line by rotating the geometry shape (face, line, point). It is possible to create a solid
using a face, to create a face using a line, and to create a line using a point.

For special cases, the solid option can be set to create a solid using a closed wire or edge.

▶Revolve

Methodology

Select the geometry shape (face, line, point) and input the revolution axis and angle.
The revolution axis can be set using the following two methods:

1. [Rotation Axis] : Determine the revolution axis for rotation for the selected section. The user can select
the datum axis, datum plane, plane or edge. Check [Position] to specify the Start point of the revolution axis
directly. Entering the position moves the revolution axis to that value.
2. [2 points vector] : Determine the extend direction vector by entering the coordinates of its Start and End
points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify the Start and End points.

Make Solid

Used on solids created by a closed line. Using an open edge or wire does not cause errors, but be aware
that it may create an incorrect shape.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the rotation extend line command on the Geometry set. The
user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

When creating a solid or 2D mesh on a rotated body, the user can observe mesh deformation at the

Section 5. Protrude | 93
 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

vertex. This happens near the pole, which is created near the revolution axis of the rotated body.
This problem cannot be solved on the geometry shape and it is best to use move node or merge node
functions after creating the mesh for any modifications.

Overview
5.3
Loft Create a shell or solid that connects the selected sections in order of selection. The line type that connects
the objects can be set as a B-Spline or a straight line.
A solid can be created by selecting a closed wire or edge on the solid option.

▶ Loft

Methodology

Select shapes to perform loft. The selection method depends on the selection order. The order can be
largely divided into [Creation], [Selection] and [Vector].

[Creation] : Select section shapes in order of connection to create a shape. The selection shapes are
selected individually with the mouse.
[Selection] : Select section profiles in order of connection to create a shape. The section profiles are
selected individually with the mouse.
[Vector] : Select multiple sections that are connected depending on the organized vector direction of the
object shape. 2 point vectors can be used to define the coordinates of the direction vectors at Pt1 and Pt2.
The reference point and order of the profile is applied in the same way as organizing a section profile using
the coordinate system.

Make Solid, Straight

Check the [Make Solid] option to create a solid using a closed line.
Using this operation on an open edge or wire does not cause errors, but be aware that it may create an
incorrect shape.

94 | Section 5. Protrude
User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Sections with the [Straight] option checked on will connect each selected section using straight lines, not
curved.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the loft extend command on the Geometry set. The user can
specify the name of the Geometry set.

A solid cannot be created, even when the solid option is on and the wires and edges are closed, if the
planes cannot be created. In this case, it is recommended to create the planes individually and use the
Sew operation (Main menu > Geometry > Boolean > Surface > Sew).

Sometimes, a twisted geometry can form during the extend loft operation. This is because the wires or
edges selected as the section profile are not in the same direction.

Section 5. Protrude | 95
 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
5.4 Create a face, shell or solid by extruding the selected section along a guide curve.
Sweep Working with a wire as a section profile creates a shell. Working with an edge as a section profile creates a
face.
▶Sweep

Methodology

Select the Object to perform sweep and extend along the guide curve.

[Scale] Check to input the scale size and extend with the end shape scaled to that factor.
[Make Solid] Check to extend the face to create a solid.
[Ortho] Check to extend the selected section in the direction perpendicular to the guide curve.
[Contact] Check to move the section to the start point of the guide curve and then sweep extend.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the sweep extend command on the Geometry set. The user can
specify the name of the Geometry set.

The object is best created when the guide curve exists on the center position of the sweep profile.
A solid cannot be created, even when the solid option is used and the wires and edges are closed, if the
planes cannot be created. In this case, it is recommended to create the planes individually and then
perform the fuse process to create a solid.
Use the preview button to check the shape. If the shape is not appropriate, use the sweep mod or bend
mod functions to create an appropriate shape.
Sometimes complexities in geometry will prevent the desired result from being generated through the
sweep functions. In this case, use the Sweep pattern (Main menu > Geometry > Transform > Sweep-
Translate) to copy the object profile using the guide curve and use the Loft extend (Main menu >
Geometry > Protrude > Loft) to obtain the same result.

96 | Section 5. Protrude
User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Section 6 Transform
Overview
6.1
Translate Move the object by a certain distance. This command can be applied regardless of the type of shape. The
[Copy] options can be used to leave the original object and only move the copied object.

▶Translate

Methodology

Select the shape to move and specify the direction. The direction can be defined in 2 ways:

1. [Select Direction] : Determine the direction vector for move. The user can select the datum axis, datum
plane, face or edge.
2. [2 point vector] : Determine the direction vector to be the reference axis of the move by entering the
coordinates of its Start and End points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify the
Start and End points.

The target object can be moved/copied using [Move], [Copy (Uniform)] and [Copy (Non-Uniform)].
[Move] : Move target shape by desired distance.
[Copy (Uniform)] : The repeat option is activated and copies the target object repeatedly by the entered
number.
[Copy (Non-Uniform)] : List the copy distance by a space or comma (,) and when repeating, enter number
@ distance(Example : 2,3,4,4,4 or 2 3 3@4)

Distance

Section 6. Transform | 97
 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

If the direction has a finite length (straight line edge or two-point vector), click the right "<" button to
automatically enter the length.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the move command on the Geometry set. The user can specify
the name of the Geometry set.

Overview
6.2
Rotate Move or copy the object by rotation. This command can be applied regardless of the type of shape and the
[Copy] option can be used to leave the original object and only move the copied object.

▶Rotation move

Methodology

Select the shape to rotate and specify the revolution axis. The revolution axis can be defined in 2 ways:

1. Check [Location] to specify the Start point of the revolution axis directly. Entering the position moves the
revolution axis to that value.
2. [2 point vector] : Determine the direction vector for rotation extend by entering the coordinates of its Start
and End points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify the Start and End points.
The target object can be moved/copied using [Move], [Copy (Uniform)] and [Copy (Non-Uniform)].

[Move]
Enter the angle directly to rotate.
[Copy (Uniform)]
The repeat option is activated and rotation copies the target object repeatedly by the entered number.
[Copy (Non-Uniform)]

98 | Section 6. Transform
User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

List the rotation angle by a space or comma (,) and when repeating, enter number @ distance
(Example : 10,20,25,25,25 or 10 20 3@25).

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the rotate command on the Geometry set. The user can specify
the name of the Geometry set.

Overview
6.3
Mirror Move the target object. This command can be applied regardless of the type of shape and the [Copy]
option can be used to leave the original object and only move the copied object.

▶Mirror

Methodology

Select the shape to mirror and specify the mirror type.

The mirror type can be defined by [Point], [Axis] and [Plane].

[Point] type : Mirror the selected point with reference to a point. The mirrored point can be selected directly
by clicking on the work screen or checking the coordinate system option and entering the coordinates.
[Axis] type : Mirror the selected axis with reference to an axis. The mirror axis can be selected directly by
clicking on the work screen or checking the Two-point vector option and entering the Start and End point
coordinates of the direction vector.
[Plane] type : Mirror the selected plane with reference to a plane. The mirror plane can be selected directly
by clicking on the work screen or checking the Three-point plane option and entering the three coordinates
to define an infinite plane.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the mirror command on the Geometry set. The user can specify
the name of the Geometry set.

Section 6. Transform | 99
 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
6.4
Scale Scale the target object with reference to a point. This command can be applied regardless of the type of
shape and the [Copy] option can be used to leave the original object and only move the copied object.

▶Scale

Methodology

Select the shape to scale and specify the reference point coordinates to scale up or down.
There are 2 scale methods; [Uniform] and [Non-Uniform]
[Uniform] : All axis's are scaled by the same amount.
[Non-Uniform] : Each axis direction (GCS standard) can be scaled by a different factor.

Geometry set
Register the geometry shape created from the scale command on the Geometry set. The user can specify
the name of the Geometry set.

Overview
6.5
Sweep-Translate Copy the target object along a guide curve. This command can be applied regardless of the type of shape.

▶Sweep-Translate

100 | Section 6. Transform

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Methodology

Select the shape to move and specify the guide curve (edge or wire).
Check [Reverse Curve Direction] to move in the opposite direction of the guide curve.

There are 3 move methods: [Offsets], [Ratio (0~1)], [Division].

1. [Offsets] : Specify the offset interval and input the move distance. If the entered move distance is longer
than the guide curve, the shape does not move past the end of the guide curve.
Enter a space or comma to enter multiple distances to copy and move multiple shapes.

2. [Ratio (0~1)] : Specify the guide curve ratio and input the move distance. The ratio at the Start point of
the guide curve is 0 and the ratio at the End point of the guide curve is 1. Enter multiple ratios to copy and
move multiple shapes.

3. [Division] : Specify the number of guide curve divisions and input the move distance. Copy and move the
equally divided edge to the division position.

Check the [Keep angle] option to apply the curves of the guide curve during sweep pattern move and check
the [Contact] option to move the guide curve of the target object to the Start point.

Select a Sweep Basis point

The reference point used when applying a vertical, line contact option on a plane. The reference point must
be a particular point on the shape.

Make Lofted Shape

Section 6. Transform | 101

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

It is convenient to use this option instead of the loft extend option when creating a shape by interpolating a
section along a guide curve with discontinuous curvature. The solid can be made in line form. The resulting
shape is created and the original shape is not copied.

Geometry set

Register the geometry shape created from the sweep pattern command on the Geometry set. The user can
specify the name of the Geometry set.

Overview
6.6
Project Project the selected shape. The user can project [Curve to Surface], [Point to Edge] or [Point on Surface].

▶Project – Curve to
Surface
▶▶Project – Point to edge
▶▶▶Project – Point to
surface

Curve to Surface

Methodology

Select the target surface and tool line for projection.

The projection direction can be set using the following 4 methods:

1. [Select direction] : Determine the projection direction vector. The user can select the datum axis, datum
plane, plane or edge.
2. [2 point vector] : Determine the direction vector of the projection axis by entering the coordinates of its
Start and End points. The user can also directly click on the work screen to specify the Start and End points.
3. [Point on Curve (Ratio)] : Select a point on the line. Project the shortest distance direction from the
selected point to target surface.
4. [Direction of Shortest path Line] : Project in the shortest distance direction from the tool edge to the
target shape.

Point to Edge

102 | Section 6. Transform

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Methodology

Select the target edge and tool point for projection. The selected point is projected in the vertical direction.

Point to Surface

Methodology

Select the target surface (shell or face) and tool point for projection. The selected point is projected in the
vertical direction.

Nearest Only
Projection is performed infinitely in the selected direction and if the target shape is a curved plane or shell,
it can meet the target shape more than twice. Check this option to select only the projected shape closest
to the tool shape.

Geometry set
Register the created line or point on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

There is no function to create a straight line and project a point at the same time. Imprinting the point and
connecting it to a line can be a similar function.

6.7 Overview
Attach
Attach the target shape and tool shape. Here, the selected shape moves in the direction with shortest
distance between it and the shape to which it is being attached.
If there are more than two tool shapes, the attaching shape moves to the closest tool shape.

▶Attach

Section 6. Transform | 103

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Methodology

Select the target shape and the shape to attach. All target shapes can be selected if they are independent
shapes.

The attach direction can be selected from [X-Dir], [Y-Dir] or [Z-Dir].

104 | Section 6. Transform

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Section 7 Sub Shape

Overview
7.1
Super Shape Create a solid or compound shape using selected target shapes.

▶Super Shape

Shell  Solid

Methodology

Selecting closed shells or faces and running this option automatically fills the interior and creates a solid.

Compound

Methodology

A compound is a group of shapes that cannot be defined as a single shape (point, line, face, solid). Multiple
shapes can be selected to form a compound.
Compounds are created during the modeling process when a shape is completely divided into two or more
shapes. For example, when the 4 side faces of a cube are removed, the resulting compound is formed by
two completely separate top and bottom faces.
A compound can also be created from grouping un-connectable shapes. For example, performing a
crossover operation on two separated solids can result in a compound.
Hence, if a compound is created, acknowledge it as a set of un-connectable shapes.

Section 7. Sub Shape | 105

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
7.2
Remove Remove the desired outer face of a selected shell or solid.

▶Sub Shape - Remove

Methodology

Select the faces to delete and press the [OK] or [Apply] button to delete the selected faces. For solids,
deleting a face creates a shell. For faces, deleting a face leaves the outline wires.

Geometry set

Register the created shape on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

106 | Section 7. Sub Shape

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
7.3
Extract Extract a geometry shape (face, line, point) of the selected shape to create an independent shape.

▶Sub Shape – Extract

Methodology

Select the geometry shape (face, line, point) to extract. A face can be extracted from a face, a line from a
face and a point from a line. If the extracted shapes are within the error range, check the [Merge] option to
merge the shapes into a single shape. For example, an object that is extracted with two adjacent faces,
such that the error between the outlines is small, can create a single shell without any free edges.

Geometry set

Register the created shape on the Geometry set. The user can specify the name of the Geometry set.

Disassembling a face can be used when an edge of an existing face is needed during the modeling
process. In this case, the face is deleted but using the extract command leaves the face intact and
extracts the independent edge.

Section 7. Sub Shape | 107

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
7.4
Explode Disassemble a selected shape into its sub-shapes.

▶Sub Shape – Explode

Methodology

Select the shape and set the disassemble level to disassemble into its sub-shapes.
The disassemble level can be selected from [Sub Shapes], [Solid], [Shell], [Face], [Wire], [Edge] and [Point].

Disassemble is applied to target shapes that have a higher rank than the disassemble level. In other words,
if the shape is solid, it can be divided into shapes that have a lower rank than a solid such as [Shell], [Face],
[Wire], [Edge] or [Point].

[Sub Shapes] is the option that disassembles the shape by the geometry rank just below it.
Compound shapes are a set of simple shapes and applying [Sub Shapes] disassembles each shape in the
compound individually.

108 | Section 7. Sub Shape

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

The geometry ranking is as follows: [Solid] > [Shell] > [Face] > [Wire] > [Edge] > [Point].

For example, the sub-shapes of a shape consisting of faces and solids are as follows.
The properties of the selected shape can be verified from Tools > Show/hide > Properties.

Shape Face
Wire 1
Sub-
Edge 5
shape
Point 5

Shape Face
Wire 2
Sub-
Edge 2
shape
Point 2

Shape Face
Face 2
Sub- Wire 2
shape Edge 7
Point 6

Shape Face
Shell 1
Face 6
Sub-
Wire 6
shape
Edge 12
Point 8

Section 7. Sub Shape | 109

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Section 8 Remove
Overview
8.1
Face/Edge Find and delete faces/Edges that are smaller in value (area for face, length for edge) than the input value.

▶Model Simplification >

Auto

Methodology

Select the geometry shape to check and input the micro-line/micro-face threshold values. Press the find
button to automatically find faces or lines with areas or lengths less than the threshold value. The user can
check and delete the selected shapes.

When using an imported geometry shape data file, very small faces (especially, long faces with small
widths) can also be imported, which leads to a reduction of work efficiency and the creation of incorrect
shapes. The best way to solve this problem is to erase the problematic faces and restructure the shape
using adjacent faces. However, if the model is too large and the problematic faces cannot be checked
individually by the naked eye, it is efficient to use this option to adjust the allowance and automatically
delete small faces.

When using many edges to create a face, some faces may not form. This problem can be caused by very
short edges that overlap. In this case, the function can be used to find and delete such micro-edges when
creating a face.

110 | Section 8. Remove

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Condition : Find and remove selected entities automatically

 Hole (Radius) : Input radius of hole

 Fillet (Radius) : Input radius of fillet
 Small Edge : Input the length of edge
 Small face : Input the length for the longest edge of face
 Silver Face : Input the width of strip
 Spike : Input the width of spike

Results : All entities which meet criteria are listed in the dialog

 Selected entities will be highlighted in the model view

 Double click on the selected entity to fit zoom to window

▶Spike Width

Section 8. Remove | 111

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
8.2
Remove Manual Infinitesimal lines or faces are main sources of error when creating an element. Unintended infinitesimal
faces can be created during repeated divisions or shared surface creation during complex geometry
modeling.
Elements are created by linear interpolation of the input size with reference to the division point of the
geometry shape. Here, the infinitesimal lines or faces, which cannot create an element, need to be modified
by combining with adjacent shapes, deleting or regenerating. This function searches for infinitesimal lines
or faces with reference to the input size and deletes or merges them.
8.1 Face/Edge can only be performed on created faces and lines, and Manual delete searches and
modifies faces/lines that are sub-shapes of a solid.

▶Model Simplification >

Manual

Methodology

Select infinitesimal line or face shapes manually to delete them from the specified geometry, or
automatically figure out the total number and positions of the infinitesimal faces on the solid, with reference
to the will-be created element size by entering the infinitesimal area directly. Input the infinitesimal length
and press the Find button to highlight faces that are smaller than the input value, as shown in the figure
below.

It can also delete the sub-shapes of the solid and stretch the adjacent shapes to fit automatically. For
example, deleting a small hole on the solid creates a solid that automatically fills the deleted hole.
Selecting a particular face (sub-shape) of a solid cannot maintain the solid shape and so, it is not
automatically deleted. In this case, the specified solid needs to be decomposed into faces.

 Remove Vertex : Remove the shortest edge of ones which are connected to the selected vertex

112 | Section 8. Remove

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

 Remove Edge : Remove selected edge and corresponding vertex at the same time

 Remove Face : Remove selected face and merge

 Merge Faces : Merge faces with removing selected edge

Section 8. Remove | 113

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
8.3
Imprinted Object Delete edges or points that exist in an interior object inside the selected geometry shape.

▶Imprinted Object – Point

▶▶Imprinted Object- Edge

Point

Select points created by imprint and press the apply button to automatically erase them.

Edge

Select the surface that contains the interior edges and then select the target edges. Select one of the
following methods to automatically find and select interior edges..

[All] : Automatically select all selectable interior edges.

[Radius] : Input the radius and select all interior edges within that radius. It can be linked with the arc
shaped interior edges.
[Length] : Input the edge length and select all interior edges that are shorter than the specified value.
[Diagonal] : Input the diagonal length of the boundary box and select interior edges that have a shorter
diagonal length than the specified value.

114 | Section 8. Remove

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Section 9 Tools
Overview
9.1
Options Set the general environment of the program.
The sections are General, Geometry/Mesh/Connections, Loads/Boundary Condition, Analysis/Results.

Tools9.1
옵션

General

[General]
 Application : Specify the user name, company name, temporary file folder, file save interval, etc.
 License : Authorize the program license. The Stand Alone (USB Hard lock) method and the Web
Authorization method are supported.
 Unit system : Specify the force/length/time unit system used for analysis. Use the Unit converter
at the bottom right to convert the units before or after analysis.

[Graphic]
 Work View : Set the options for the screen.
- The mouse operation can be used to fit the utilized 3D CAD wheel operation.
- The Smoothing Surface Rendering method regulates the edge line tessellation of a cylinder
shaped curved surface. The available levels are from 1 to 5, with a higher quality and
smoother surface as the level gets higher.
- The Shape of the Dynamic View is the option for the displayed modeling shape on the work
window during view rotation.
 Selection : Specify the options for the model part.
 Guider : Specify the options for the screen guider.
 Geometry shape : Specify the color for each geometry shape type.
 Element : Specify the color for each element type.
 Advanced : Adjust the advanced options for the graphic setting. It determines whether to show
the shadow and controls its shade. The available levels are from 1 to 5, with darker information
shown as the level gets higher.

Section 9. Tools | 115

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Geometry/Mesh/Connect

[Geometry]
 Common : Adjust the options used on all geometry shapes.
 Import : Set the import option.

[Mesh Set]
 Common : Adjust the basic options used on the mesh feature.
 Size Control : Adjust the color of the symbol shown when the seed function is used.

Load/Boundary Condition

[Coordinate system] : Specify the color of the coordinate system symbol. Symbol 1, Symbol 2, and Symbol
3 represent the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis respectively.
[Mesh] : Specify the size of the node and element number.
[Static load] : Specify the size and color of the static load symbol.
[Dynamic load] : Specify the size and color of the dynamic load symbol.
[Boundary condition] : Specify the color of the boundary condition symbol.

Analysis/Results

[Analysis]
 Number of processors : Specify the number of CPUs used for analysis. For a dual core CPU,
input 2 processors and for a quad core CPU, input 4 processors to increase the analysis speed.

 Element Formulation : Specify the formula applied to the element.

In terms of speed, a faster solution can be obtained in order of Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard
(Stability) > Hybrid (Accuracy). In terms of accuracy, a more accurate solution can be obtained in
order of Hybrid (Accuracy) > Reduced (Efficiency) > Standard (Stability).

 Equation Solver (Structural) : Specify the method for solving a finite element simultaneous
equation. If the setting is automatic, the program automatically determines one of the following
methods: Multifrontal, Dense matrix or AMG(Algebraic Multi-Grid).

 2D Element Setting (Structure) : The [Unique Shell Normal Generation] function judges two
adjacent shell elements to have two different normal directions when the value between the
normal direction vectors are larger than the input value. Because the element size is relatively
larger than the curvature, if this value is increased for a rough curved mesh, a smooth contour
that considers the curvature of the geometry shape can be calculated.
The [Consider Drilling DOF(degree of freedom)] option calculates the stiffness of the in-plane
deformation by considering the rotation about the out-plane axis (drilling degree of freedom).

116 | Section 9. Tools

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

[Result]

 General : Input an analysis result that is extremely small and can be considered as 0. The default
value is set as 1e-12, and results lower than this value is considered as 0.
 Contour : Determine the various settings for contour representation of analysis results.
 Vector : Display results that are represented with a (V) using vectors. Here, specify how to
represent the vectors.
 Deform : Specify the basic settings for checking the deformed shape of analysis results.
 No result entity : Specify how to represent the no result entities when displaying analysis results.
 Diagram : Determine the basic settings for diagrams.
 Graph : Select whether to show the graph.
 Animation : Specify the location in which the animation image types and files are saved.
 Legend : Specify the background color and number of result bands displayed on the screen.

Customize Shortcut Key

The user can call up frequently used commands by defining a shortcut key.

Section 9. Tools | 117

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
9.2
Terrain Geometry The Terrain Geometry Maker (TGM) function can be used to model a terrain geometry using a CAD DXF
Maker file. When using FEA NX, first use the CAD DXF file to set the bounds of the analysis area and save it as a
file (*.tms format) that can be used in the FEA NX. Import this file to FEA NX to create the terrain geometry.

Methodology

Step 1. Tools > Terrain Geometry Maker > Terrain Geometry Maker
Use the CAD DXF file to set the bounds of the analysis area and save it as a file (*.tms format) that can be
used in FEA NX. Activating this function creates a new window called MIDAS/TGM.

▶ MIDAS/TGM

Side View

Ground Plane

Model View

Step 2 : File > Import DXF

Import the AutoCAD DXF file.

▶ Import AutoCAD DXF

file

[Visible layers]
The layers that are needed for the terrain geometry out of all the layers in the AutoCAD DXF files. The
unused layers are selected and moved to the invisible layer.
[Invisible layers]
The layers in the AutoCAD DXF file that are not used for the terrain geometry.
Step 3 : Set analysis boundary

118 | Section 9. Tools

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Move the mouse to the area to be modeled and click the Terrain geometry information icon ( ) on the
right toolbox to set the analysis boundary.

Step 4 : Set section zone

▶Terrain geometry
information

[Base Contours]
Select the minimum zone that contains the analysis boundary by dragging on the XY plane.

[Geometry Zone (Rectangle)]

Specify the rectangular analysis boundary that is within the base contour zone. Corner 1 and Corner 2 are
the diagonal corners that specify the rectangular boundary. Lx, Ly specify the X axis and Y axis lengths of
the specified boundary. Click the Display area to view the specified boundary on the plane.

[Number of Sampling Points]

Specify the number of sampling points in the selected region with respect to the X direction and Y direction.

▶ Example of Terrain
geometry information zone

Corner 2

LY

Corner 1 LX

Step 5 : Check geometry face

Check the geometry face on the View model window.

Section 9. Tools | 119

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

▶ Example of Terrain
geometry information zone

Step 6 : File > Export surface

Save the generated terrain face as a *.tms file that can be used in the FEA NX.

Step 7 : Main menu : Tools > Terrain Geometry Maker > Import TMS file
Import a generated *.tms file using the MIDAS/TGM function.

Overview
9.3
Frame to Solid Convert frame data created on midas Civil or midas Gen into solid data.

▶Frame to Solid

Methodology

Select a frame data (*.mcs) file created on midas Civil or midas Gen. Defining the Linear interpolation
(straight line) or Smoothstep (smooth interpolation), automatically calls up a solid element. This depends on
the multidimensional curved lines of the selected frame element’s end section,
Checking mesh can create a mesh on the solid during conversion.

120 | Section 9. Tools

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
9.4
Check Geometry Check the detailed information of a selected shape.

▶Check Shape
▶▶Repair Shape

▶Check Duplicates
▶▶Edges Domain

Check shape

Methodology

Select the geometry shape to be checked and select the option to view the information on the screen. The
geometric information is also shown on the output window.

[Free Edge (Red)]

The object outlines are indicated in red.

[Manifold Edge (Green)]

The edges between 2 meeting faces are indicated in green.

[Non-Manifold Edge (Blue)]

The edges between 3 meeting faces are indicated in blue.

Section 9. Tools | 121

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

[Small Edge (Orange)]

The edges shorter than the input length are indicated in orange.

[Small Face (Yellow)]

The faces smaller than the input area are indicated in yellow.

Repair shape

Methodology

Find and modify geometric errors automatically for atypical and inaccurate shape. The user can perform the
function when have failed to create mesh for selected geometry. Recommended to be performed
"Geometry Clean → Geometry Simplify → Topology Optimize" continuously.

 Geometry Clean : Modify invalid shape

▶Abnormal topology
▶▶Tangled shape

 Geometry Simplify ; Modify irregular shape

 B-Spline surface ; Plane, Cylinder, Sphere, Cone and Torus
 B-Spline curve ; Line, Circle and Ellipse
 Irregular shape : Normalized and primitive shape

▶Omission of Edge or
Vertex

 Topology Optimize ; Performance improvement in creating mesh

 Simplify geometry and delete duplicated edge / surface automatically
 Delete unnecessary edge or vertex automatically

122 | Section 9. Tools

User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Check Duplicates

Methodology

Check for repeated shapes in the same position.

[Visible Shape Only]

Repeated shapes are represented by visible shapes on the screen. The check is performed regardless of
the Show/hide status of the target.

[Check Duplicate Points]

Check for duplicated points. The function only checks for independent points. Overlapping points are
indicated in yellow. Check the [Include Sub-Points] to perform the check on sub-shape points
(ex: the corner points of a box).

[Check Duplicate Edges/Wires]

Check repeated edges or wires. The function only checks for independent edges and wires. Overlapping
edges/wires are indicated in green. Check the [Include Sub-Edges] to perform the check on sub-shape
edges (ex: the edges of a rectangle).

[Check Duplicate faces]

Check duplicated faces. The function only checks for independent faces. Overlapping faces are indicated in
orange. Check the [Include Sub-Faces] to perform the check on sub-shape edges (ex: a face of a box). Use
the [Extract Boundary Topology] to only check faces that are exactly overlapping. An overlapping face has
the same number of points on the outline, the same coordinates and the same edge direction.

[Remove Duplicated Shape]

Remove repeated independent shapes and only leave a single shape. However, the sub-shapes are not
deleted.

Check for shared faces after creating a 3D geometry object. Creating a mesh on an unshared solid
created a free face makes obtaining accurate analysis results difficult. Such shared faces can be checked
using Check Shape > Check Duplicates. To view the object information, change the view mode of the solid
to linear view.
When the shared face of adjacent shapes are not shown, use Boolean > Solid to create a shared face.

Edges-Domain

Methodology

Check the connection of lines. When importing geometry shapes from CAD, this option can be used to
check for areas that are not connected.

Section 9. Tools | 123

 User Manual Chapter 3. Geometry

Overview
9.5
Measure Measure the shortest distance or angle between shapes using various methods.

▶Measure

Methodology

Measure the distance or angle by selecting a shape’s point, line, face etc. on the screen.
The distance can be measured using [Distance between point and point], [Distance between point and
Edge], [Distance between point and face], [Distance between edge and edge], [Distance between edge and
face], [Distance between face and face]. The angle can be measured using [Angle between three points].

Checking the needed snaps with Define snap ( ) makes it easier to select points on the screen.

124 | Section 9. Tools

Advanced Nonlinear and
Detail Analysis System

Chapter 4
Mesh

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

Section 2. Control

Section 3. Generate

Section 4. Mesh Set

Section 5. Protrude

Section 6. Transform

Section 7. Node

Section 8. Element

Section 9. Tools
User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Section 1 Property/Coordinate/Function
Overview
1.1
Material Define the general stiffness and nonlinear material properties of the ground and structure. For ground,
additional permeability properties and drained/undrained conditions can be set.

Methodology

[Create] : Add a ground or structure material. The following 4 material types can be selected and the model
type can be set for each material type.

The model type available for each material type is shown below. The ground/structure material properties
and the material behavior properties are defined for each model type. Here, the elements used for ground
modeling such as plane strain or solid can be assigned to a structure material that does not consider Ko
effects or permeability properties.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 125

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Ground Structure Material behavior

Material type Model type
material material properties
Elastic O O Linear elastic
Tresca O O Elasto-plastic
von Mises (Nonlinear) O O Elasto-plastic
Mohr-Coulomb O O Elasto-plastic
Drucker Prager O O Elasto-plastic
Hoek Brown O O Elasto-plastic
Generalized Hoek Brown O O Elasto-plastic
Hyperbolic(Duncan-Chang) O X Nonlinear elastic
Strain Softening O X Elasto-plastic
Modified Cam Clay O X Elasto-plastic
Jardine O X Nonlinear elastic
D-min O X Nonlinear elastic
Isotropic Modified Mohr-Coulomb O O Elasto-plastic
Soft Soil O X Elasto-plastic
Soft Soil Creep O X Elasto-plastic
User defined model O O Elasto-plastic
Modified UBCSAND O X Elasto-plastic
Sekiguchi-Ohta(Inviscid) O X Elasto-plastic
Sekiguchi-Ohta(Viscid) O X Elasto-plastic
Modified Ramberg-Osgood O O Elasto-plastic
Modified Hardin-Drnevich O O Elasto-plastic
Hardening Soil(small strain
O X Elasto-plastic
stiffness)
Generalized SCLAY1S O X Elasto-plastic
CWFS O O Elasto-plastic
Transversely Isotropic O O Linear elastic
Jointed Rock Mass O O Elasto-plastic
Orthotropic
2D Orthotropic X O Linear elastic
Geogrid X O Elasto-plastic
2D Equivalent 2 Dimensional equivalent O O (Equivalent)Linear elastic
Interface X O Elasto-plastic
Interface Shell Interface X O Elasto-plastic
/Pile User supplied - Shell Interface X O Elasto-plastic
Pile X O Nonlinear elastic

[Isotropic] : Isotropic materials have the same properties in every direction and is used to define material
behavior properties of most linear-elastic / nonlinear elastic / elasto-plastic materials.

[Orthotropic] : Natural ground is generally layered and sloped, making it possible to have different strengths
in each orthogonal direction. This option can also be used to define Jointed Rocks, which have different
properties depending on the direction and behave differently according to the specific confinement
conditions.

[2D Equivalent] : 2D equivalent linear analysis specific model. Use the converging strength and damping
ratio from the equivalent linear method to consider the nonlinear and n1lastic behavior of materials.

[Interface / Pile] : Applied when simulating relative behavior (interface behavior) between ground and
structure.

126 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Modify/Copy/Delete]
Modify the parameters of an added material. Copy can be used when adding multiple materials while only
changing certain parameters.

[Import/Import from Excel / Export to Excel]

Import the material properties from a different model file with a saved material/property. This operation is
useful when analyzing the existing project under the same conditions. Selecting the import file generates
the material list containing all saved materials. The user can select the desired material.

The user can construct the frequently used material DB by importing or exporting the excel file containing
the material properties.

[Renumber]
Change the registration number of a material. Repeating Add/Delete automatically sets the registration
number to recently added number+1.

Refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis manual to understand the Finite element formulization and yield shape. The
input parameters and behavioral characteristics for each material model are as follows.

Elastic
1.2
General Material A linear elastic model where the stress is directly proportional to strain. The proportionality constants are
(Behavioral the Elasticity modulus ( E ) and Poisson’s ratio (  ).
Properties)

▶Linear elastic-stress
strain behavior

Since the yield value is not defined, the calculated stress and strain of the linear elastic model can be highly
unrealistic. Hence, it is recommended that the Mohr-Coulomb or other nonlinear material models be used
for general analysis. However, this model is appropriate in modeling concrete or structural steel structures,
which have a much higher strength than the ground.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 127

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Tresca

The Tresca criterion was originally developed to be used on yield conditions of metallic materials. In
geotechnics, it is often used to simulate the ground material behavior during undrained conditions. This
model has some flaws when applied to soil materials, such as no consideration of the effects of hydrostatic
pressure acting on the yield surface. Firstly, the assumption that shear stress is unrelated to hydrostatic
pressure (or confining pressure) is wrong for general soil behavior. Secondly, the yield stress is the same
for compression and tension in this criterion, but soils generally have a much larger compressive strength
than tensile strength, sometimes even negligible tensile strength.

However, performing the total stress analysis for saturated soils under undrained conditions (called   0
analysis) using the Tresca yield criterion still gives appropriate results. The Tresca yield criterion can be
used because according to the results, the shear strength of the saturated soil is unrelated to the stress
comp1nt of the hydrostatic pressure during undrained loading. In this case, because the maximum shear
stress limit represents the undrained shear strength, the decision must be made from the results of the
undrained triaxial compression test.

von Mises (Nonlinear)

The von Mises model is often used to define the behavior of ductile materials based on the principle that
yielding occurs when the shear stress reaches the threshold value. This model can be applied to truss,
embedded truss and pipe elements as well as geotechnical elements. It can also be applied when
simulating anchors, nails or steel pipe piles made from steel.

The von Mises model has the same limitation as the Tresca model when applied to soil materials; it does
not consider of the effects of hydrostatic pressure and the yield stress is the same for compression and
tension. Like the Tresca criterion, the undrained strength of saturated soil can be appropriately presented
using the von Mises yield criterion. This model is useful because it does not have the mathematical
difficulty or analysis complexity caused by the hexagonal corners of the curved surface on the Tresca
criterion.

As a material yield, hardening defines the change of yield surface with plastic straining, which is classified
in to the three types : Isotropic, Kinematic and Combined.
Appropriate for all types of materials, which exhibit Plastic Incompressibility.

Perfect Plastic
Specify Initial Uniaxial (tensile) Yield Stress

128 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Hardening Curve
Relation between plastic strain and stress(true stress) can be resulted from uniaxial compression / tensile
test or shear test.

Stress Strain curve (optional)

Relation between strain and stress(true stress)

Hardening Rule
Isotropic, Kinematic and Combined (Isotropic + Kinematic)

- Total increment of Plastic can be expressed by Isotropic and Kinematic Hardening as follows:

- Combined hardening factor (λc, 0~1) represents the extent of hardening. ‘1’ for Isotropic, ‘0’ for
Kinematic, and between ‘0~1’ for Combined hardening.

▶Yield Surface for each

hardening rule

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 129

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Mohr-Coulomb

The Mohr-Coulomb model is defined by an elasto-plastic behavior as shown in the figure below. This
behavioral assumption shows reliable results for general nonlinear analysis of the ground and is widely
used in simulating most terrain.

▶Material behavior of
Mohr-Coulomb model

The Mohr-Coulomb yield criterion has 2 flaws when using geo-materials. First, the intermediate principal
stress does not affect yield, which is a contradictory assumption to real soil test results. Second, the
Meridian and Failure envelope of the Mohr-Circle is linear; so the Strength parameter (angle of friction)
does not change with the Confining pressure (or Hydrostatic pressure). This criterion is accurate within a
limited range of confining pressure but as the range difference increases, the accuracy decreases.
However, this criterion is often used because it is easy to use and displays considerably accurate results
within the general confining pressure range.

The major nonlinear parameters used to define the Coulomb yield criterion are as follows.

▶Mohr-Coulomb

Cohesion (C) , Friction angle (Φ)

Soils have different cohesion and friction angle depending on their type and these values are applied to the
shear strength equation. Soils, unlike other construction materials, have very little resistance to tension and
in most cases shear failure occurs. When an external force or self weight is applied, shear stress occurs in
the ground. The strain increases with stress increase and as these progresses, it works along a plane
causing what is known as shear failure. The shear stress induces shear resistance and the shear
resistance limit is called shear strength. The shear resistance of soil is made up of 2 comp1nts: cohesion
and friction angle.
According to Coulomb, the shear strength of soil can be expressed in the following linear equation.
τ= c + σtanφ (c: Cohesion, σ: Normal stress, φ: Interior friction angle)
Cohesion is the shear strength when the interior friction angle is '0(zero)' according to the yield criterion. It
can be defined as an undrained shear strength of cohesive soils. Sandy soils with no cohesion can be

130 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

defined as c=0, but to avoid errors in analysis, it is recommended that a value of at least 0.2 (kN/m2) be
entered.
Defining the cohesion automatically sets the tensile strength by that amount. However, because tensile
resistance is generally ignored for geo-materials, the Tension-Cutoff is set to prevent unrealistic resistance
behavior to tension.

▶Mohr-Coulomb Failure
envelope
(Drained/Undrained)

Increment of Cohesion Reference Height

In general, the strength properties of the soil change with the depth and confining pressure; even within a
ground layer composed of the same material. For example, defining a soil layer several meters deep as a
‘strength parameter’ may be a limitation in the detailed simulation of a ground behavior. The ground layer
can be further subdivided and modeled, but this characteristic can be replaced by changing cohesion
according to height. If the cohesion increases according to the height being '0(zero)', the cohesion has a
constant value and if it is not '0(zero)', the cohesion is calculated with reference to a standard height
(reference height based on the Global Coordinates) using the following equation.

c  cref   yref  y  cinc y  y 

ref

c  cref y  y 
ref

cref : Input cohesion value

cinc : Incremental amount depending on cohesion depth
yref : Depth of cref measurement

▶ Conceptual diagram of
depth
cohesion increment

yref cohesion
cref

cinc

The y in the equation represent the integral point positions of an element where the finite element method
calculation occurs. If the integral point position is higher than yref , the cohesion can be less than 0 in some
places. To avoid this, use the cref value instead of further decreasing the cohesion value.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 131

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Dilatancy Angle

The dilatancy angle can be viewed as the volume increase rate according to shear strain. It is a type of
strength parameter for roughness and is generally defined as dilatancy angle = interior friction angle-30˚.
Hence, if the interior friction angle is less than 30˚, the dilatancy angle is close to '0(zero)'. In real tests, a
negative dilatancy angle can be defined for vey loose sandy soil but numerically, the dilatancy angle has a
value between 0 and the interior friction angle.
For undrained analysis, the dilatancy angle must be set as '0(zero)' when the interior friction angle is
'0(zero)'. The important thing is that the dilatancy angle is a parameter considered in analysis after changes
have been made to the constitutive equation. If the effects of the dilatancy angle are not considered, the
same value must be entered for the dilatancy angle and interior friction angle. In other words, not checking
the ‘Consider dilatancy angle’ option automatically performs the analysis with the dilatancy angle equal to
the interior friction angle.

Tensile Strength (Tension-CutOff)

Input the allowable tensile strength of the geo-material. In many cases, tension cracks can be observed on
the natural ground surface rather than shear failure. Input the allowable tensile strength to assign tensile
resistance to the geo-material. The tensile resistance of geo-materials are generally ignored and so the
default setting is '0(zero)'. Not checking the tensile strength option uses a tensile stress, automatically
calculated from cohesion and the interior friction angle, into the analysis.

Drucker Prager

The Drucker-Prager model was developed by Drucker and Prager (1952) to solve the numerical problems
that occur on the corners of the yield shape of the Mohr-Coulomb model. The internal algorithm is the same
as the Mohr-Coulomb model, and the material constant can be related to the existing cohesion ( c ) and
friction angle (  ) of the Mohr-Coulomb model.

▶ Drucker-Prager

Hoek Brown

Geo-materials can be largely divided into rocks and soils. Rocks are more rigid than soils and their strength
characteristics depend on the degree of weathering. The behavioral characteristics of rocks are divided by
the fact that the change in stiffness due to stress is negligible. In particular, the shear stress and tensile
stress of rocks have a larger effect on the overall behavioral characteristic than soils. Hoek and Brown
(1980) suggested the concept of an equivalent continuum to define the stress decrease phenomenon in
jointed rock mass failure. A yield function was proposed to distinguish between intact rock and broken rock
and when the rock failure was defined by this function, certain parameter values that define the function
could be decreased to simulate the stress decrease phenomenon. This method defines the unconfined
compressive strength that could not be considered in the existing Mohr-Coulomb method and allows

132 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

accurate and simple representation of rock behavior, making it a widely used analysis method even today.
The shear strength of rocks can be expressed using the Mohr-Coulomb yield criterion and Hoek-Brown
strength parameters within a certain stress range can be used to predict the cohesion and friction angle of
the Mohr-Coulomb model.

▶Hoek-Brown yield
criterion

The main nonlinear parameters of the Hoek-Brown criterion are as follows.

Initial m,s value

The initial m,s values are 1 of the empirical Hoek-Brown material constants for Intact rocks that classify
rocks according to their grade (type). General m values are shown in the table below.

▶Hoek-Brown material
constant mi

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 133

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

The s constant can be calculated from the GSI (Geological Strength Index) when the rock is intact and has
a value of '1'. The GSI according to rock grade is shown in the table below and the value can be generally
predicted by calculating the rock classification results (RMR, RQD).
The s calculated from the GSI is as follows.

GSI − 100
s = exp ( ) (GSI > 25)
9
s = 0 (GSI ≤ 25)

134 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶ GSI (Hoek(1999))

The m,s relationship from the GSI assumed by a=0.5 from the Hoek-Brown model is as follows.

▶Relationship between 1.0

Lower bound Upper bound
GSI and m,s
0.8
mb/mi, s, a

0.6
a

0.4
mb/mi

0.2
s

0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
GSI
Uniaxial Compressive Strength

Input the Uniaxial compressive strength test results for Intact Rock. The general numerical value for rock
grade is as follows.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 135

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Uniaxial compressive
strength

Generalized Hoek Brown

Representative model to simulate general rock behavior (stiffer and stronger than other types of soil).
Hoek-Brown model is isotropic linear elastic behavior and Generalized Hoek-Brown is to link the empirical
criterion to geological observations by means of one of the available rock mass classification schemes. All
geological index was subsequently extended for weak rock masses. This model is also applicable for
Strength Reduction Method (slope stability analysis).

▶Failure surface in
principle stress plane

The main nonlinear parameters of the Generalized Hoek-Brown criterion are as follows.

136 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Refer to following Geological Index (Hoek, 1999)

Uniaxial Compressive Strength

▶Uniaxial Compressive
Strength

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 137

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Intact Rock Parameter

▶Intact Rock Parameter

Geological Strength Index (GSI)

▶Geological Strength
Index (GSI)

138 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Guideline for estimating Disturbance Factor (D)

▶Guideline for estimating

Disturbance Factor (D)

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 139

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Engineering example for

material verification (Slope
Stability Analysis)

Hyperbolic (Duncan-Chang)

Ground stress-strain behavior becomes nonlinear as it approaches the yield criterion; nonlinear elastic
models simulate such ground behavior by modifying the foundation modulus. The function proposed by
Duncan and Chang (1970) is used to calculate the foundation modulus. The stress-strain curve of the
function is a hyperbola and the foundation modulus is a function of confining stress and shear stress. This
nonlinear elastic material model is very useful because it only needs material properties that can be easily
obtained from the triaxial compression test or literature. The Duncan and Change nonlinear stress-strain
curve represents a hyperbola between the axial strain space generated by shear stress ( (1   3 ) ) and it
can be defined according to stress state and stress path by 3 foundation moduli (Initial modulus ( Ei ) ,
Tangent modulus ( Et ) , Unloading-reloading modulus ( Eur ) ).

The main nonlinear parameters of the hyperbolic model are as follows.

140 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

The results of the triaxial compression test can be plotted on a vertical axis of E pa or Bm pa and a
horizontal axis of  3 pa . Set each axis to a log scale and the vertical axis value at  3 pa =1 is the Initial
Loading Modulus (K). The Initial Stiffness Exp1nt(n) can be found from the slope when the vertical axis
is E pa and the Bulk Modulus Exp1nt(m) can be found from the slope when the vertical axis is Bm pa .
Here, the Bulk modulus Bm is defined by the following equation and can be predicted using the relationship
with Poisson’s ratio. Here, the Poisson’s ratio is limited to values within 0 to 0.5.

Bm 
 1   2   3  3
 v
,
 : Amount of principal stress change,
 v
: Amount of volume strain change
E
Bm 
3 1  2 

▶Set material property

103

1
E/Pa or Bm/Pa

n or m
102
K modulus

101

100 101 102

3/Pa

The Duncan and Change nonlinear stress-strain curve can be defined according to stress state and stress
path by 3 foundation moduli (Initial modulus ( Ei ) , Tangent modulus ( Et ) , Unloading-reloading modulus
( Eur ) ).

▶Nonlinear stress-strain
behavior Et
1
B
A
1   3

Eur

1
Ei C
1
O strain

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 141

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Here, the Failure Ratio (Rf) can be found by the relationship between the Initial modulus ( Ei ) and Tangent
modulus ( Et ) . The ratio of failure is the ratio between the asymptote of the hyperbola and the maximum
shear strength and has a value between 0.75~1. A convergence problem can occur when the Tangent
modulus ( Et ) is too small and so the minimum Tangent modulus value is set as the atmospheric pressure
(Pa). Bulk modulus number (Kb) can be calculated from the Bulk modulus (Bm) and Bulk modulus index
(m).

m
 
Bm  Kb pa  3 
 pa 
Here,
Bm : Bulk modulus,
Kb : Bulk modulus number,
m : Bulk modulus index

Eur
Unloading-reloading modulus number Kur can be calculated from the unloading-reloading ratio .

n
 
Eur  Kur pa  3 
 pa 

If the confining stress is '0(zero)' or negative (tensile state) when calculating the initial moduli, the moduli
can be '0(zero)' or a negative value. Hence, a lower bound needs to be set for the confining stress and the
set Minimum confining pressure is 0.01Pa.

The suggested parameter values depending on the density of sandy soils are as follows. (Duncan, J. M.
and Chan, C. Y. (1970))

▶Table. Summary of Relative density d Rf K Kur n

stress-strain parameters
100% (dense) 36.5 0.91 2000 2120 0.54
for uniform fine silica sand
38% (loose) 30.4 0.90 295 1090 0.65
Cd  0
for dense and loose sand
d Cd
* , : Dry state friction angle and cohesion

Strain Softening

The softening model consists of a linear region until it reaches the maximum shear strength. The softening
region then enters a nonlinear region. Specify the Maximum residual strength, Residual strength and
Softening rate to define the constitutional relationship below.

142 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Strain softening
constitution relationship

shear strength, cu
peak, cu

E
residual

strain

The main nonlinear parameters of the Softening model are as follows.

The maximum cohesion using the undrained shear strength and define residual cohesion, defined by the
amount of stress reduction and softening rate to simulate the strength decrease with strain and bulk
increase. In comparison with the Tresca model, the Tresca model behaves in a simple or perfectly plastic
state for undrained conditions but this model decreases from the maximum strength and can simulate the
effects of the residual strength.

▶Softening behavior
shear strength

Cu
R

Cres

 res 

Modified Cam Clay

A model used to simulate clay materials. The general relationship between volume change and pressure in
clay ground can be expressed using the concept of normal consolidation line and over-consolidation line.
The over-consolidation line is also called the dwelling line and the stress increase (load) follows along over-
consolidation line to the normal consolidation line. Passing the intersection with additional stress increase
makes the stress state move down along the normal consolidation line. This has similar characteristics to
the stress-strain curve of an elasto-hardening plastic model. Hence, the initial linear elastic region of the
over-consolidation line can be corresponded to the hardening plastic region of the normal consolidation line.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 143

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Volume-Pressure vs
Stress-Strain relationship normal consolidation

volume change

stress
hardening plastic

overconsolidation linear elastic

pressure strain

To use the Modified Cam Clay model, the initial void ratio, initial stress and initial Pre-consolidation
pressure need to be defined. The Pre-consolidation pressure can be directly entered, or calculated from the
initial stress and Over Consolidation Ratio (OCR). When both the OCR and Pre-consolidation pressure are
entered, the Pre-consolidation pressure is preferentially used.

The main nonlinear parameters of the Modified Cam Clay model are as follows.

Symbol Definition
 Over-consolidation line slope
 Normal consolidation line slope
M Critical state line slope

The material properties of the ground are generally obtained from the 1-dimensional consolidation test and
the Compression index Cc and Swelling index Cs can be obtained from the void ratio ( e ) - log10  p  graph.
The Compression index and Swelling index are related to the Normal consolidation line slope  and Over-
consolidation line slope  by the following equations.

Cc Cs
 , 
2.303 2.303

The Critical state line slope M can be assumed from the effective shear resistance angle (shear resistance
angle from drained test).

6sin 
M
3  sin 
 : Interior friction angle from triaxial compression test

The OCR value can be used to calculate the stress distribution of the in-situ state from the current loaded
stress distribution. The stress for each depth is calculated from the entered OCR and because the ground

144 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

surface stress can be underestimated than the actual initial stress, the Pc (Pre-consolidation pressure) can
be directly defined. When both the OCR and Pre-consolidation pressure are entered, the Pre-consolidation
pressure is preferentially used in the analysis.
When the Pc is entered, the internal solver studies whether the Pc and in-situ stress state satisfy the yield
function. If it does not, the Pc is recalculated.

Allowable Tensile Stress

MCC material models fundamentally do not allow tensile stress in the failure criteria (stress-strain
relationship). However, various conditions can generate tensile stress, such as the heaving of neighboring
ground due to embankment load during consolidation or uplift due to excavation. To overcome the material
model limits and increase the applicability, analysis on tensile stress within the 'allowable tensile stress'
range can be conducted.
The size of the allowable tensile stress is not specified, and requires repeated analysis to input a larger
value than the tensile stress created from the overburden load (embankment) or failure behavior. Hence,
the allowable tensile stress value needs to be set, to prevent divergence and halting of analysis results due
to tensile failure during analysis.
Hence, the allowable tensile stress value needs to be set, to prevent divergence and halting of analysis
results due to tensile failure during analysis.
However, when directly entering the pc (pre-consolidation load), the allowable tensile stress cannot surpass
the pc value. When defining using the OCR, the pc value is automatically calculated internally by
considering the size of the input allowable tensile stress.

Jardine

The Jardine model is appropriate for geo-materials that display nonlinear behavior even with little strain.
Jardine (1984) proposed this nonlinear elastic model to simulate clay like materials that display nonlinear
behavior when the confining stress range is small and this model displays perfectly plastic behavior when
the material stress is larger than the input shear stress. The main nonlinear parameters of this model are as
follows.

The Jardine model is often applied to clay ground. Clays display nonlinear elastic behavior at small strains
and the Jardine model was developed to consider this. The nonlinear equation can be derived from the
Secant elasticity modulus and axial strain measured from the undrained triaxial compression test as shown
below. The undrained triaxial compression test applies a load in the axial direction of a cylindrical sample
and the stress along the side is maintained.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 145

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Eu
F test data

best fit
G

2G  F

A  min B  max C
a

Here, F , the maximum and average stiffness that satisfies the best fit line value, A , B , C the strain
G

 
at the maximum, medium and minimum Elasticity modulus and max , min the maximum and minimum
strain.

The shear strength of clay is needed because the Tresca model is used at the plastic region.

D-min

The D-min model is a secti1d linear model proposed by Japan Central Research Institute of Electric Power
Industry (CRIEPI), Hayashi, Hibino and applied to general rocks (hard rock, soft rock etc.). In this model,
the stiffness is different for each construction step, but the stiffness within 1 construction step is a constant
value. In other words, the materials in the model have a fixed material property value for each load step
and hence, do not require repeated analysis.

It is assumed that as the failure envelope approaches the Mohr circle, the interior bonding state of the rock
eases and the Elasticity modulus decreases while the Poisson’s ratio increases. Hence, the relative
distance between the Mohr circle and failure envelope in each section determines the Elasticity modulus
and Poisson’s ratio.

▶Failure envelope and  1  a  2 

Mohr circle of D-min
model   
  1

 R  t
R
d min D1
d min
R 
 2
t  1
2

t m 3

D2

The main nonlinear parameters are as follows.

146 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

If the user enters the material properties at the initial state and limit state, the value proceeds to the limit
state material property depending on the plasticity as shown below.

E  Rm ( Ei  Ecr )  Ecr
  Rn ( i  cr )  cr

Ei E
Here, is the initial Elasticity modulus, cr is the limit Elasticity modulus, m is the nonlinear property
 
factor, i is the initial Poisson’s ratio, cr is the limit Poisson’s ratio, n is the nonlinear material modulus.
The Mohr’s envelop parameter ( a ) and relax factor ( k ) increases with the increase in initial Elasticity
E
modulus ( i ).The relationship between the Mohr’s envelop parameter ( a ) and relax factor ( k ) with the
E
initial Elasticity modulus ( i ) is shown below. The data was based on the triaxial compression test and put
together by the Japan Road Traffic Information Center in 1986.

▶Table. Parameters based Initial Elasticity modulus

on initial Elasticity E 2 Relax Factor ( k ) Mohr’s envelop parameter ( a )
modulus (JARTIC, 1986) ( i , kgf / cm )
100  Ei  1,000 2.0 1.0
1,000  Ei  10,000 4.0 2.0
10,000  Ei  100,000 6.0 3.0
100,000  Ei 10.0 4.0

Modified Mohr-Coulomb

This model is an improvement on the Mohr-Coulomb model, generated by combining nonlinear elastic
models and elasto-plastic models to make a suitable model for the behavioral characteristics of silt or sand
based ground. The Modified Mohr-Coulomb model can simulate the Double stiffening behavior, which is
not affected by the shear failure or compressive yield.

The axial strain and decrease in material stiffness caused by the initial deviatory stress is similar to the
Hyperbolic (nonlinear elastic) model, but it is closer to the plastic theory than elastic theory and has
differences in dilatancy angle consideration and yield cap application.

The main nonlinear parameters are as follows.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 147

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Elasticity modulus (Three types of reference stiffness modulus)

This model is a more detailed material model than the Mohr-Coulomb model and the Elasticity modulus can
be set at different values for loading and unloading. In most cases, the Elasticity modulus for unloading is
set larger to prevent uplift (bulging phenomenon) on the cutting surface due to stress release during
excavation modeling. For a rough approximation, in case of hard soil (sand, OC clay), unloading stiffness is
set equal to 3 times of secant stiffness in standard drained triaxial test. In case of soft soil, based on the
relationship between compression and swelling index, unloading stiffness is approximately set equal to 10
times of secant stiffness.

▶Hyperbolic stress-strain
relation

Failure Ratio
The ultimate deviatoric stress is derived from the Mohr-Coulomb failure criterion. As soon as the deviatoric
stress reaches to the ultimate value, the failure criterion is satisfied and perfectly plastic yielding occurs.
The ratio between the ultimate and the quantity in deviatoric stress is given by the failure ratio which must
be smaller than1.

Reference Pressure
The reference stress used in the triaxial test of specific strengths on the nonlinear elastic curve. This can
represent in-situ horizontal stress at mid-level of soil layer depending on OCR(Over Consolidation Ratio)

148 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Power Law nonlinear elastic model coefficient

Hardening soil model is the stress dependency of soil stiffness. The reference stiffness modulus which is
used in this model has the relationship with the confining stress dependent stiffness. In this relation, the
amount of stress dependency is given by the power m. In case of soft clays, the power is recommended to
be taken equal to 1. The value of m around 0.5 for hard soil like sand and OC clays can be used to
simulate a logarithmic compression behavior. In general, m is in the range of 0.5 to 1.

Porosity
The void ratio is the volume ratio between voids and soil particles. Here, the porosity is the volume ratio
between voids and the total soil including water. Hence, unlike the void ratio, the porosity cannot have a
value larger than 1 and has a value of 0.6 in general. When soil experience shearing, dilating materials
reach to the state of critical density. In order to include this soil behavior by means of dilatancy cut-off, the
maximum porosity must be entered as advanced parameters. When the soil is subject to shear hardening,
solver recalculates dilatancy angle.

▶Strain curve including

dilatancy cut-off

KNC
KNC is the percentage of K (Coefficient of earth pressure) in a normally consolidated ground. In other
words, it is the effective horizontal stress ratio during maximum vertical stress. This can be expressed as 1-
sin (Interior friction angle) and because general clays have an interior friction angle of nearly zero, the
value is close to 1. However, it cannot be smaller than '0(zero)'.

Friction angle at shear / Ultimate dilatancy angle / Cohesion

Same as the friction angle, dilatancy angle, cohesion parameters of the Mohr coulomb material model.

Shear hardening can be defined by equivalent plastic strain related to the mobilized shear resistance
automatically. Shear yield surface can expand up to the Mohr-Coulomb failure surface.

Increment of Cohesion with depth can be defined with additional options as in Mohr-Coulomb model. The
reference height must be inputted based on the Global coordinates.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 149

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶ Conceptual diagram of
depth
cohesion increment

yref cohesion
cref

cinc

Cap (Compression hardening)

Compressive yield can happen when excessive compression forces occur on the ground. Normally, the
compressive forces that cause yield are very large and the Mohr-Coulomb model has no problems in
simulating real soils with it omitted. However, in order to simulate the compressive behavior more
accurately, the model considers circles or ellipses when considering compressive failure, hence the name
'Cap'.

OCR / Pc (Pre-overburden pressure)

Yield surface of hardening soil model in p-q plane has the length of preconsolidation stress and its
magnitude is determined by Cap shape factor and cap hardening parameter. The smaller value of cap
shape factor(α) lead to steep caps underneath the Mohr-coulomb failure line. For this, the preconsolidation
stress can be calculated from either the OCR(Over consolidation ratio) or the Pc(Pre-overburden pressure).
The user can input the pressure at which compressive failure occurs.

Cap shape factor / Cap Hardening Parameter

Use this variable to change the shape of the Cap, a yield function shape. Refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis
manual for a more detailed algorithm. These are considered automatically based on the relation between
KNC and Eoedref rather than directly inputting parameters.

 1


 Drucker-Parger
 0 6 ( 1  0)

 
6 fit for   15
 fit for   35

 3  2

150 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Following is the summary of parameters for the Modified Mohr-Coulomb model.

Parameter Description Reference value (kN, m)

Soil stiffness and failure

Ei x (2 – Rf) / 2
E50ref Secant stiffness in standard drained triaxial test
(Ei = Initial stiffness)

Eoedref Tangent stiffness for primary oedometer loading E50ref

Eurref Unload / reloading stiffness 3 x E50ref

0.5 ≤ m ≤ 1 (0.5 for hard soil,

m Power for stress-level dependency of stiffness
1 for soft soil)

C (Cinc) Effective cohesion (Increment of cohesion) Failure parameter as in MC model

φ Effective friction angle Failure parameter as in MC model

ψ Ultimate dilatancy angle 0≤ψ≤φ

Advanced parameters (Recommend to use Reference value)

Rf Failure Ratio (qf / qa) 0.9 (< 1)

Pref Reference pressure 100

KNC Ko for normal consolidation 1-sinφ (< 1)

Tensile
Cut off value for tensile hydrostatic pressure -
strength

Dilatancy cut-off

Porosity Initial void ratio -

Porosity(Max) Maximum void ratio Porosity < Porosity(Max)

Cap yield surface

Over Consolidation Ratio / Pre-overburden When entering both parameters,

OCR / Pc
pressure Pc has the priority of usage

Cap Shape Factor (scale factor of preconsolidation

α from KNC (Auto)
stress)

β Cap Hardening Parameter from Eoedref (Auto)

Soft Soil

The Soft Soil model is suitable for simulation of normally consolidated or near normally consolidated clay
soils. The Soft Soil model has the nonlinear elastic characteristic which has the logarithmically relationship
between volumetric strain and mean effective pressure. This is the same stress-dependent stiffness with
Modified Cam-Clay.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 151

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Following is the summary of parameters for the Soft Soil model.

Parameter Description Reference value (kN, m)

Soil stiffness and failure

λ Compression index Cc / 2.303

Cs / 2.303
κ Swelling index
(Cc / 5 for a rough estimation)

c Cohesion Failure parameter as in MC model

φ Friction angle Failure parameter as in MC model

ψ Dilatancy angle 0

Advanced parameters (Recommend to use Reference value)

KNC Ko for normal consolidation 1-sinφ (< 1)

Cap yield surface

Over Consolidation Ratio / When entering both parameters,

OCR / Pc
Pre-overburden pressure Pc has the priority of usage

Cap Shape Factor (scale factor of

α from KNC (Auto)
preconsolidation stress)

Soft Soil Creep

This is the model which is extended to a 3D-model based on the 1D-creep theory. In case that time-
dependent behavior is critical, this model is applicable to estimate the creep from FE analysis. The stress
dependent stiffness parameters can be estimated from compression and recompression index as in
Modified Cam Clay model. Unlike MCC model, the user can consider secondary consolidation.

152 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

log  time 

Primary Secondary

strain

Following is the summary of parameters for the Soft Soil Creep model.
Parameter Description Reference value (kN, m)

Soil stiffness and failure

λ Compression index Cc / 2.303

Cs / 2.303
κ Swelling index
(Cc / 5 for a rough estimation)

μ Creep index Cc / 20 for a rough estimation

c Cohesion Failure parameter as in MC model

φ Friction angle Failure parameter as in MC model

ψ Dilatancy angle 0

Tensile Cut off value for tensile hydrostatic

-
strength pressure

Advanced parameters (Recommend to use Reference value)

KNC Ko for normal consolidation 1-sinφ (< 1)

Cap yield surface

Over Consolidation Ratio / When entering both parameters,

OCR / Pc
Pre-overburden pressure Pc has the priority of usage

Cap Shape Factor (scale factor of

α from KNC (Auto)
preconsolidation stress)

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 153

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

User Supplied Material

The User Supplied Material utilizes the material model generated by the user using the Pre/Post of the
program. The total stress, interior variable, strain and strain increment amount is basically given at the
integral points to calculate the stress and tangent slope converged to the User Supplied Material. Nonlinear
elastic materials and nonlinear elasto-plastic materials are applied and the supported elements are planar
strain, axis symmetry and solid element. Refer to the separately attached 'User Supplied Subroutine
(Appendix)" for more information.

User Supplied Material library file

Select the User Specified Model DLL file path on Windows explorer.

Number of parameters
Input the number of parameters needed to define the materials. For example, input the material properties
such as Elasticity modulus or Poisson’s ratio needed for the User Supplied Material.

Number of internal state variables

Save the variables needed for the next repetitive calculation. In this case, real type variables are saved
such as plastic strain.

Number of integer indicator variables

If the interior state variables were saved as real type variables, the integer indicator variables are saved as
integer type variables such as plasticity state index.

Modified UBCSAND

This model is an effective stress model for predicting liquefaction behavior of sand under seismic loading.
FEA NX Liquefaction Model is extended to a full 3D implementation of the modified UBCSAND model using
implicit method. In elastic region, nonlinear elastic behavior can be simulated, elastic modulus changes
according to the effective pressure applied. In plastic region, the behavior is defined by three types of yield
functions: shear (shear hardening), compression (cap hardening), and pressure cut-off. In case of
shear hardening, soil densification effect can be taken into account by cyclic loading.

* Note - Implicit Method: Explicit methods calculate the state of a system at a later time from the state of
the system at the current time, while implicit methods find a solution by solving an equation involving both
the current state of the system and the later one.

154 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Elastic
Shear modulus is updated according to the effective pressure (p’) based on the following equation.
Allowable tensile stress (Pt) is calculated using cohesion and friction angle automatically. Poisson’s ratio is
constant and bulk modulus of elasticity will be determined by following relation.

ne
 p ' pt  2 1   e
G e  K Ge pref   , Ke  G
 p 3(1  2 )
 ref 

Plastic / Shear
Depending on the difference between mobilized friction angle (Фm) and constant volume friction angle (Фcv),
shear induces plastic expansion or dilation is predicted. The Plastic shear strain increment is related to the
change in shear stress ratio assuming a hyperbolic relationship and can be expressed as follows.

np 1 2
Gp  p'    sin   
 sin m   s  KGp  1    R f   s
 p 
m

sin m  sin m  sin cv , p'  ref    sin  p  

 s  1p   3p

▶Swelling/Shrinkage
according to the direction Gp / p'
Stress Ratio
Shear Stress

of plastic strain Constant volume

▶▶Plastic shear cv
hardening behavior Dilative
 sin m

Contractive
 S

Mean Stress Maximum Plastic Shear Strain

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 155

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Following is the summary of parameters for the Modified UBCSAND model.

Parameter Description Reference

In-situ horizontal stress at mid-level of soil

Pref Reference Pressure
layer

Elastic (Power Law)

K Ge Elastic shear modulus number Dimensionless

ne Elastic shear modulus exponent Dimensionless

Plastic / Shear

p Peak Friction Angle Failure parameter as in MC model

cv Constant Volume Friction Angle -

C Cohesion Failure parameter as in MC model

K Gp Plastic shear modulus number Dimensionless

np Plastic shear modulus exponent Dimensionless

0.7~0.98 (< 1), decreases with increasing

Rf Failure ratio (qf / qa)
relative density

Fpost Post Liquefaction Calibration Factor Residual shear modulus

Fdens Soil Densification Calibration Factor Cyclic Behavior

Advanced parameters

Plastic/Pressure Cutoff (Tensile

Pcut -
Strength)

K Bp Cap Bulk Modulus Number -

mp Plastic Cap Modulus Exponent -

OCR Over Consolidation Ratio Normal stress / Pre-overburden pressure

Model Calibration
Monotonic and cyclic drained Direct Simple Shear (DSS) test (Skeleton Response).
Single element test and calibration using Standard Penetration Test (SPT) - ((N1)60: Equivalent SPT blow
count for clean sand.

156 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Parameters and
Equations for Calibration

▶Undrained DSS
(Monotonic)

▶Undrained DSS (Cyclic)

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 157

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Estimation of
liquefaction results Pore Pressure Ratio (PPR)
The ratio of excessive pore pressure change and the initial effective pressure

pw pinit
'
 pcurrent
'
PPR   '  '
pinit pinit

Δpw Excessive Pore Pressure Change

p’init Initial Effective Pressure
p’current Current Effective Pressure

Normalized Max Stress Ratio

The ratio of mobilized friction angle and the peak friction angle
When the Max stress ratio is reached, the mobilized friction angle is close to the peak friction angle,
liquefaction is triggered (1 = Liquefaction)

 sin m  φ’m Mobilized Friction Angle

max 
 sin   φ’p Peak Friction Angle
 p 

[Nonlinear Time History Analysis under the earth quake]

Sekiguchi-Ohta(Inviscid)

This model is one of the Critical state theory model which is similar to Modified Cam Clay model. The yield
function has K0 dependent terms, therefore users have to always consider K0 condition (Earth pressure
coefficient at rest) for initial stress of ground (K0 Anisotropy is not applicable). As the representative
cohesive soil model, this can consider the elasto-plastic behavior, but time-independent one. If K0=1,
Original Cam Clay model is equal to Sekiguchi-Ohta model.

158 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Yield Function

Nonlinear Parameters

Following is the summary of parameters for the Sekiguchi-Ohta(Inviscid) model.

Parameter Description Reference value

Nonlinear

λ Slope of normal consolidation line Cc / 2.303

Cs / 2.303
κ Slope of over-consolidation line
(Cc / 5 for a rough estimation)

6 x sinФ’ / (3-sinФ’)
M Slope of critical state line
(Ф’: Effective internal friction angle)

K0nc K0 for normal consolidation 1-sinφ’ (< 1)

Cap yield surface

Over Consolidation Ratio / When entering both parameters,

OCR / Pc
Pre-overburden pressure Pc has the priority of usage

Tallow Allowable Tensile Stress * Note

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 159

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Allowable Tensile Stress

Fundamentally, this model does not allow tensile stress in the failure criteria (stress-strain relationship).
However, various conditions can generate tensile stress, such as the heaving of neighboring ground due to
embankment load during consolidation or uplift due to excavation. To overcome the material model limits
and increase the applicability, analysis on tensile stress within the 'allowable tensile stress' range can be
conducted.
The size of the allowable tensile stress is not specified, and requires repeated analysis to input a larger
value than the tensile stress created from the overburden load (embankment) or failure behavior. However,
when directly entering the pc (pre-consolidation load), the allowable tensile stress cannot surpass the pc
value. When defining using the OCR, the pc value is automatically calculated internally by considering the
size of the input allowable tensile stress.

Model Calibration
- Undrained Triaxial Compression and Extension test - Effect of Strain Rate.
- Undrained strength depends on the rate of shearing in different ways on the compressional and
extensional sides of shearing.

160 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Sekiguchi-Ohta(Viscid)

This model is one of the Critical state theory model which is similar to Modified Cam Clay model. The yield
function has K0 dependent terms, therefore users have to always consider K0 condition (Earth pressure
coefficient at rest) for initial stress of ground (K0 Anisotropy is not applicable). As the representative
cohesive soil model, this can consider the elasto-plastic behavior, and time-dependent one like soft soil
creep model.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 161

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Soft Soil Creep Sekiguchi-Ohta (viscid)

Always plastic state Plastic state after yielding

Nonlinear Parameters

Following is the summary of parameters for the Sekiguchi-Ohta(Viscid) model.

Parameter Description Reference value

Nonlinear

λ Slope of normal consolidation line Cc / 2.303

Cs / 2.303
κ Slope of over-consolidation line
(Cc / 5 for a rough estimation)

6 x sinФ’ / (3-sinФ’)
M Slope of critical state line
(Ф’: Effective internal friction angle)

K0nc K0 for normal consolidation 1-sinφ’ (< 1)

Cap yield surface

Over Consolidation Ratio / When entering both parameters,

OCR / Pc
Pre-overburden pressure Pc has the priority of usage

Tallow Allowable Tensile Stress * Note

Time Dependent
α Coefficient of secondary consolidation Cc / 20 for a rough estimation

0 Initial volumetric strain rate * Note

t0 Time when primary consolidation ends * Note

162 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Time Dependent log  time 

Primary Secondary

strain

Allowable Tensile Stress

Fundamentally, this model does not allow tensile stress in the failure criteria (stress-strain relationship).
However, various conditions can generate tensile stress, such as the heaving of neighboring ground due to
embankment load during consolidation or uplift due to excavation. To overcome the material model limits
and increase the applicability, analysis on tensile stress within the 'allowable tensile stress' range can be
conducted.
The size of the allowable tensile stress is not specified, and requires repeated analysis to input a larger
value than the tensile stress created from the overburden load (embankment) or failure behavior. However,
when directly entering the pc (pre-consolidation load), the allowable tensile stress cannot surpass the pc
value. When defining using the OCR, the pc value is automatically calculated internally by considering the
size of the input allowable tensile stress.

Sekiguchi Ohtamodel requires some material properties, which can be obtained by triaxial tests.
Following empirical relations can be used to estimate the additional soil parameters: Karibe Method

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 163

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Model Calibration
- Undrained Triaxial Compression and Extension test - Effect of Strain Rate.
- Undrained strength depends on the rate of shearing in different ways on the compressional and
extensional sides of shearing.

164 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Modified Ramberg-Osgood

This model is one of Hysteresis models for inelastic hinge, an extension was made to 2D and 3D solid
elements. This model can be applied to simulate crack or local (plastic) failure. (Refer to inelastic hinge).
This model is applicable to all types of nonlinear static and dynamic analysis. (Nonlinear static,
Construction Stage, Consolidation, Fully Coupled, SRM (Strength Reduction Method), Nonlinear Time
History, Nonlinear Time History + SRM analysis.

Nonlinear Parameters

Following is the summary of parameters for the Modified Ramberg-Osgood model.

Parameter Description Reference

Go Initial Shear Modulus -

r Reference Strain

hmax Maximum Damping

0.05 (for soil),
Check: Consider shear modulus for each direction separately (Gxy, Gyz, Gzx)
Shear Only
Uncheck: Consider equivalent shear modulus (Geq)

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 165

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Yield Function


Go      

2 hmax  2 
 ,   
2   hmax   r Go 

▶Modified Ramberg- 
Osgood model

Go  1 ,  1 
Skeleton Curve

Go

Hysteresis Curve

Verification Example

▶Load
▶▶System
▶▶▶Results

Modified Hardin-Drnevich

This model is one of Hysteresis models for inelastic hinge, an extension was made to 2D and 3D solid
elements. This model can be applied to simulate crack or local (plastic) failure. (Refer to inelastic hinge).
This model is applicable to all types of nonlinear static and dynamic analysis. (Nonlinear static,
Construction Stage, Consolidation, Fully Coupled, SRM (Strength Reduction Method), Nonlinear Time
History, Nonlinear Time History+SRM analysis. Hysteresis curves are formulated on the basis of the
Masing’s rule.

166 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Nonlinear Parameters

Following is the summary of parameters for the Modified Hardin-Drnevich model.

Parameter Description Reference

Go Initial Shear Modulus

r Reference Strain

Check: Consider shear modulus for each direction separately (Gxy, Gyz, Gzx)
Uncheck: Consider equivalent shear modulus (Geq)
Shear Only

-n1: The Initial Shear Modulus index (0 < n1 < 1)

-n2: The Reference Shear Strain index (0 < n2 < 1)

Yield Function

▶Modified Hardin- 
Drnevich model

Go  1 ,  1 
Skeleton Curve

Go

Hysteresis Curve

Verification Example

▶Load
▶▶System
▶▶▶Results

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 167

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Hardening Soil (small strain stiffness)

The Hardening Soil with small strain stiffness model is implemented by using the Modified Mohr-Coulomb
model and Small strain overlay model, and needed two additional parameters as below:

G0ref : Initial or very small-strain shear modulus

 0.7 : Shear strain at which the shear modulus is about 70% of the initial small-strain shear modulus

The strain range in which soils can be considered truly elastic is very small. With increasing strain range,
soil stiffness decrease nonlinearly as the following graph.

▶Characteristic stiffness-
strain behavior of soil with
the ranges for typical
geotechnical structures
and different tests

To reflect the above characteristics, the Hardening Soil with small strain stiffness model uses the modified
Hardin & Drnevich relationship as the following equation.

Gs 1
 , a  0.385
G0 
1 a
 0.7
Gs : Shear modulus
G0 : Initial shear modulus
 : Shear strain
 0.7 : Shear strain at which the shear modulus is about 70% of the small-strain shear modulus

168 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Nonlinear Parameters

Following is the summary of parameters for the Hardening Soil (small strain stiffness) model.
Parameter Description Reference value (kN, m)

Soil stiffness and failure

Ei x (2 – Rf) /2
E50ref Secant stiffness in standard drained triaxial test
(Ei = Initial stiffness)

Eoedref Tangent stiffness for primary oedometer loading E50ref

Eurref Unload / reloading stiffness 3 x E50ref

0.5 ≤ m ≤ 1 (0.5 for hard soil,

m Power for stress-level dependency of stiffness
1 for soft soil)

C Effective cohesion Failure parameter as in MC model

φ Effective friction angle Failure parameter as in MC model

ψ Ultimate dilatancy angle 0≤ψ≤φ

Advanced parameters (Recommend to use Reference value)

Rf Failure Ratio (qf / qa) 0.9 (< 1)

Pref Reference pressure 100

KNC Ko for normal consolidation 1-sinφ (< 1)

Tensile
Cut off value for tensile hydrostatic pressure -
strength

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 169

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Small strain stiffness

Threshold Shear strain at which shear modulus has 1

 0.7  2C 1  cos 2    '1 1  K0  sin 2 
Shear strain decayed to 70% of initial shear stiffness (G0ref) 9G0 

β Shear modulus at small strain G0ref  33

 2.97  e  2
1 e

Generalized SCLAY1S

The Generalized S-CLAY1S model is a development of the earlier S-CLAY1 model and is a rotational
hardening elasto-plastic model incorporating the influence of bonding and destructuration. The S-CLAY1
model assumes the triaxial stress state whereas the Generalized S-CLAY1S model considers to the
general stress state as well. The Generalized S-CLAY1S model has the complex yield surface and needs
additional constitutive parameters for anisotropy and destructuration.

Nonlinear Parameters

Following is the summary of parameters for the Generalized SCLAY1S model.

Parameter Description Reference value (kN, m)

Over Consolidation Ratio / Pre-overburden When entering both parameters,

OCR / Pc
pressure Pc has the priority of usage

POP Pre-Overburden Pressure -

λ Compression index Cc / 2.303

Cs / 2.303
κ Swelling index
(Cc / 5 for a rough estimation)

170 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

M Stress ratio at critical state Triaxial test

K0nc K0 for normal consolidation 1-sinφ (< 1)

α Initial inclination of the yield curve Anisotropy (estimated via φ’)

Anisotropy (typical values: 10/λ ~

μ Absolute effectiveness of rotational hardening
20/λ)

β Relative effectiveness of rotational hardening Anisotropy (estimated via φ’)

x Initial bonding effect Destructuration

Absolute effectiveness of destructurational

a Destructuration (typical values: 8~11)
hardening

Relative effectiveness of destructurational Destructuration (typical values:

b
hardening 0.2~0.3)

Yield Function

▶Generalized SCLAY1S
model

CWFS

When a tunnel or an underground structure is excavated in deep geological environments, the failure
process is affected and eventually dominated by stress-induced fractures growing preferentially parallel to
the excavation boundary. This fracturing is generally referred to as brittle failure by spalling and slabbing.
Continuum models with traditional failure criteria such as Hoek-Brown or Mohr-Coulomb model have not
been successful in prediction of the extent and depth of brittle failure. The cohesion weakening and
frictional strengthening (CWFS) model is known to predict brittle failure well. The general conditions
(General, Porous and Time Dependent) are same with Mohr-Coulomb model, but the hardening/softening
behavior with table using Mohr-Coulomb yield surface can be considered in the nonlinear parameters.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 171

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Nonlinear Parameters

172 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Mobilisation of the strength components

Transversely Isotropic

Natural ground is generally layered and sloped, making it possible to have different strengths in each
orthogonal direction. The figure below shows a soil layer with an angle  between the global x axis and
the element x' axis and displays perpendicular anisotropy (orthotropy) with the x' axis and z' axis of the
element.

Z
▶Orthotropic model
z
E1 1


E2  2

x
X

This orthotropy is simulated by assigning different stiffness to the tangent and normal direction to the
stratification (fault) orientation. Generally, the normal direction stiffness decreases in comparison to the
tangential stiffness and the anisotropic shear strength is defined by the Shear modulus (G). For fully
isotropic case, E1 ,  1 is equal to E2 ,  2 respectively and G is defined by E1 2 1   1  .

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 173

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Transversely isotropic materials are material models defined by an isotropic transverse section with a
vertical axis to the section. The physical properties are the same within the transverse section and the
vertical direction has different properties.

E1 12    13  G12   G13 

► Out of transverse plane material properties : , ,
E2   E3   23 G23
► In transverse plane material properties : , ,

E   G G
Here, 1 is the Elasticity modulus in the vertical axis to the section, 12 , 13 and 12 , 13 are the
Poisson’s ratio and Shear modulus of the surfaces generated by the vertical and section with the other
axes respectively.

 
The local coordinate system is defined by the dip angle 1 and dip direction 2 . Because the reference axis of
the inclined plane and horizontal plane ( N and X respectively) are not identical, use the auxiliary angle
3 2
that subtracts the declination (angle formed between the 2 axes) from when setting the actual
transformation matrix.

3  2  declination
Thermal

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature
unit. (required for transient heat transfer problems)

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load
vector for heat transfer analysis is the total exothermic load applied to the object.

174 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Jointed Rock Mass

Geo-materials have different material properties depending on the direction and behave differently
according to the direction specific conditions. This material property is called Anisotropic. Jointed Rock
models pose both transversely isotropic properties and anisotropic plastic properties, making it an
Anisotropic elasto-perfectly plastic model. The Jointed rock model is appropriate in modeling the behavior
rock formations with joined stratifications as shown below.

▶ Schematic diagram of
rock formation
Jointed Rock model

stratification

major joint direction

It is appropriate when a series of connections or set of connections (joint, Fault etc.) exists. These
connection sets must not be filled with fault clay and the spacing must be smaller than the size of the
structure. The direction of the connection can be defined in a maximum 3 directions.

The Elasticity modulus, Poisson’s ratio, cohesion of each joint, friction angle is the same as that of the
Mohr-coulomb model.
The method to define the dip direction, dip angle and deflection angle is the same as the Transversely
Isotropic model, but 3 joints can be entered in this model. Here, the anisotropic elastic behavior is defined
by the alpha1 and alpha2 defined on the first joint and the other 2 joints are only used when defining plastic
deformation.

Thermal

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 175

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature
unit. (required for transient heat transfer problems)

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load
vector for heat transfer analysis is the total exothermic load applied to the object.

2D Orthotropic

This model is applicable to 2D element type such as Shell, Plane Stress and 2D Geogrid. Users can define
different values of stiffness along each direction, so can define geometrically orthotropic with significant
different stiffness in horizontal and vertical direction.

Parameters

▶Stress-strain relation in
2D

Thermal

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature
unit. (required for transient heat transfer problems)

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load
vector for heat transfer analysis is the total exothermic load applied to the object.

176 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Engineering example for

geometrical orthotropic

Geogrid

The Geogrid model is an orthotropic material which has tension only behavior and can be only assigned to
1D/2D Geogrid property. 1-direction and 2-direction behave independently each other. It shows tension
only nonlinear elastic behavior without the ‘Tensile Strength’ option, and it shows plastic behavior under
load conditions that exceed the tensile strength if this option is selected. In case of 1D Geogrid element, E2,
G12 and Tensile Strength 2 are not considered.

Parameters

Thermal

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature
unit. (required for transient heat transfer problems)

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 177

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load
vector for heat transfer analysis is the total exothermic load applied to the object.
2D Equivalent

Is a material that simplifies complex nonlinear behavior of geo-material properties into equivalent linear
properties and allows ground-structure analysis under dynamic loading. Shear strain due to earthquakes or
other dynamic loading is constantly changing and the effective shear strain concept is used to set an
equivalent linear value. The required input parameters and application process are as follows.

Process Analysis process

1 Assume initial Shear modulus and damping ratio
2 Compute ground response and strain hysteresis from initial values
3 Use maximum strain from computed strain hysteresis to calculate effective strain
Use equivalent linear damping ratio corresponding to effective strain and Shear modulus to
4
re-compute the ground response and strain hysteresis
Repeat process 2~4 until the calculated Shear modulus and damping ratio error variation is
5
within the tolerance

▶Convergence of
nonlinear Shear modulus
and damping factor using
the equivalent linear
method

The stress-strain relationship graph for equivalent linear analysis and nonlinear analysis can be
expressed as follows.

178 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

In the equivalent linear method, the nonlinear characteristics of the geo-material can be expressed as a
function of the ratio of maximum shear modulus and shear modulus
G / G0 
and shear strain , and a

function of damping ratio h and shear strain . These material properties can be found from the dynamic
strain test as shown below.

Strain compatibility properties can be set using a function of Shear modulus and damping ratio to strain
when considering the nonlinear, inelastic behavior of the ground. If the function is not defined, the geo-
material is assumed to be linear and an entered (fixed) Shear modulus and damping ratio is used in the
analysis. Various DB exist for each type of ground. Refer to 'Function' section for more detailed
information.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 179

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

180 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Interface (Interface / Shell Interface)

Interface
The interface behavioral model was developed to simulate the boundary (interface) behavior between
same or different materials. The interface behavioral model is not only used in geo-technology but also
throughout architecture and civil engineering in general to define the behavior of various interfaces. The
interface behavioral model is based on Coulomb's law of friction (1785) and follows the assumption that
the frictional force of an interface is proportional to the coefficient of friction and the confining forces
perpendicular to the normal direction acting on the interface.

This model is mostly used to simulate rock joints or structure-ground interfaces such as friction pile-ground
interface, earth retaining wall-ground interface, lining-ground interface etc.

▶Coulomb Friction tt
function
c / tan 

tensile strength

c

tn

The main nonlinear parameters of the interface model are as follows. The user can also define the
coefficient of permeability or stiffness to simulate interface behavior.

[Normal stiffness modulus (Kn)]

Is the Elasticity modulus for bonding and un-bonding behavior in the normal direction to the interface
element. The general range is 10~100 times the smallest value of the Elasticity modulus on the oedometer
of adjacent elements.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 181

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Shear stiffness modulus (Kt)]

Is the Elasticity modulus for slip behavior in the normal direction to the interface element. The general
range is 10~100 times the smallest value of the shear strength of adjacent elements.

The nonlinearity of the interface needs to be computed by applying the Coulomb Friction criterion and using
the stiffness parameters along with experimentation (relative displacement-frictional force curve), but an
empirical formula can be used to predict the interface behavior between 2 materials. The empirical formula
uses a virtual thickness (tv) and strength reduction factor (R). When creating an interface element, the
following Wizard can be used for automatically calculate, according to the element properties of the
neighboring ground element, using the 2 parameters (tv, R).

The interface material can be defined using the following equation. Using the stiffness of adjacent
elements and nonlinear parameters, the virtual thickness (tv) and strength reduction factor (R) is
applied. R x ( Fn + Ft x tan(phi) - C) = 0 → R x ( Kn x un + Kt x ut x tan(phi) - C) = 0
The Wizard can be used to simplify this process.

Kn = Eoed,i / tv
Kt = Gi/tv
Ci = R x Csoil
-1
phii = tan (R x tan (phisoil))
Here, Eoed,i = 2 x Gi x (1-νi)/(1-2 x νi)
(νi =Interface Poisson’s ratio=0.45, the interface is used to simulate the non-compressive frictional
behavior and automatically calculates using 0.45 to prevent numerical errors.)
tv = Virtual thickness(Generally has a value between 0.01~0.1, the higher the stiffness difference
between ground and structure, the smaller the value)
Gi = R x Gsoil (Gsoil = E/(2(1+ νsoil)), R = Strength Reduction Factor

The general Strength reduction factor for structural members and neighboring ground properties are as
follows.
 Sand/Steel : R ≈ 0.6~0.7
 Clay/Steel : R ≈ 0.5
 Sand/Concrete : R ≈ 0.8~1.0
 Clay/Concrete : R ≈ 0.7~1.0
In case of multiple soil layer the same structural component, the smaller value of R is recommended.

Checking the Element size consideration calculates the interface material properties considering the
average length(line), average area(face) of the neighboring ground element when creating an interface.

182 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

In other words, the average length(l), average area(A) are multiplies to the virtual thickness in the
equation below to calculate the tangent, normal direction stiffness of the interface.

Kn = Eoed,i / (I or √A x tv ) , Kt = Gi / (I or √A x tv )

If the consideration is not checked, the unit length(area) is applied.

The thickness is defined separately for a line interface. The thickness is an important element when
using the interface on a ground material that displays hardening behavior. Generally, the neighboring
ground particle size is input, but if an accurate numerical value is not available, the default value from
the program is used. For a 3D model, like the 1 in the example above, the surface interface does not
need a thickness.

When defining the stiffness against seepage for an interface element, the “permeability coefficient” can
be defined to be the same as the permeability coefficient of the ground. If the option is not checked, the
layer is considered to be impermeable.

When the dilatancy angle and tensile strength is defined, a smaller or equal value needs to be defined for
the interface element and the cohesion; friction angle can be multiplied with the strength reduction factor.
For the interface dilatancy angle, the same angle can be applied as the ground when the ground is under
rigid body motion without strength reduction (R=1). When considering strength reduction, entering '0(zero)'
is the general definition for rigid body motion.

[Mode-II Model]
The Mode-II model expresses shear behavior and defines the tangential slip behavior or the interface. For
the 2 models below, the failure envelopes are shown for when the ‘Constant Shear Retention’ function is
considered suitable in terms of numerical analysis stability etc.

• Brittle model
The structure does not receive any loading if the vertical force is higher than the tensile strength.

tt

Kt

ut

• Constant Shear Retention

Apply the input value on the shear direction such that the structure can receive loading in that
direction.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 183

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

tt

Kt
Reduced shear stiffness

Kt

ut

K ′t : Reduced Shear Stiffness

[Multi-linear Hardening]

If a function is entered in the multi-linear hardening, the cohesion and friction angle used in the Coulomb
friction failure criterion changes with plastic displacement. Note that the cohesion and friction angle both
need to increase as the plastic displacement increases. This behavioral characteristic must be defined by
experimentation and is mainly used for research purposes than practical purposes.

Seepage
Conduction for Seepage flow:Sets allowable flow rate at the interface.

Thermal
Convection coefficient:Controls allowable heat exchange at the interface.

Shell Interface
The interface element was developed to simulate the interface behavior just like a general face element.
Here, the interface element is also capable of resisting the rotational force between plates.

• Tensile force is not transmitted to the load or moment.

• Linear behavior is observed for small rotations or shear force.
• Nonlinear elastic behavior for large rotations. (Janssen’s law)
• Plastic behavior for large shear force. (Coulomb friction)

Nonlinear behavior at the plate interface element follows the Coulomb friction law for movement and
Janssen’s law for rotation. The relative move displacement and interface force follows the Coulomb friction
model with some restrictions. The tensile strength is set as 0 for the Tension Cut-off function, the dilatancy
angle and interior friction angle are identical and the asymmetrical material property matrix is not defined.
The stiffening function does not need to be defined separately.

For the User supplied shell interface, it is the same as the User Supplied Material model.

184 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Pile (Pile & Pile Tip)

The pile element behavior is the interfacial behavior between the parent element and pile elements such as
a beam or a truss. The interfacial behavior for a pile can divided into 2 normal direction behavior and 1
tangent direction behavior. Like the interface element, the shear/vertical stiffness is defined for simulation of
interface behavior but here, it is assumed that the 2 normal direction (vertical) motions undergoes identical
rigid body motion as the parent element and the tangent direction (shear) behavior undergoes nonlinear
elastic motion.

The pile tip element behavior is the interfacial behavior between the parent element and the 1 tip of the pile
element. It is assumed that the normal direction behavior with respect to the element coordinate axis at the
pile tip undergoes identical rigid body motion as the parent element and the tangent direction behavior
undergoes nonlinear elastic motion. For the pile element, it is assigned either multiple curves as a nonlinear
material model or a value for fully plastic behavior.

Pile and pile tip elements express nonlinear behavior through default stiffness as well as bearing power or
ultimate strength. The nonlinear behavior can be defined by functions and a 3D table is supported for piles
to define different function for different depths.

When defining the shear stiffness of the pile using yield strength, assume that the slope and yield strength
undergoes fully elasto-plastic behavior depending on height as shown below. The user can also define the
strain-frictional force relationship curve for different heights when defining the stiffness as a function.

▶Relative displacement- Traction

at the upper
Frictional force reference height
relationship (+) ultimate shear at the reference
force height
shear stiffness modulus
at the lower
reference height

modified shear stiffness modulus

relative displacement

(-) ultimate shear

force

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 185

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Input a certain coefficient for the normal direction. The nonlinear analysis is analyzed linearly. For the shear
direction, use the input coefficient and analyze if linear. For nonlinear analysis, also consider the ultimate
shear strength and analyze as a fully plastic model. If the shear stiffness is differs for each depth, a function
must be used.

Ultimate Shear Force : Input the ultimate shear resistance force(kN) of the pile for a load in the axial
direction in stress units, by dividing it with the pile length(m) and pile element thickness(m). The frictional
force of the pile is output as the force per unit length(kN/m) and the Ultimate frictional force becomes the
input [Ultimate shear force(kN/m2) x Pile element thickness(m)].

Shear Stiffness Modulus (Kt) : The slope of the linear section of the friction stress(kN/m2)-relative
displacement(m) curve that has the units of kN/m3. When the analysis results of the tangent direction
frictional force(kN/m) and relative displacement(m) of a pile is drawn with respect to the applied load size,
the graph has a linear slope(kN/m2) until the ultimate frictional force and this becomes the input [Shear
stiffness modulus(kN/m3) x Pile element thickness(m)].

Function : To specify the nonlinear elastic behavior in the tangent direction, define the Friction
stress(kN/m2)-Relative displacement(m) curve for each depth, rather than entering the Ultimate shear force
and Shear stiffness modulus.

Normal Stiffness Modulus (Kn) : The slope of the linear section of the relationship graph between the
ground resistance to a horizontally applied force(kN), which is expressed as stress by dividing it with the
pile length(m) and pile element thickness(m), and the relative displacement. It is the same concept as the
Lateral subgrade reaction modulus, calculated from general p-y analysis. When the analysis results of the
tangent direction frictional force(kN/m) and relative displacement(m) of a pile is drawn with respect to the
applied load size, it is the linear slope(kN/m2), which can be expressed as the input [Shear stiffness
modulus(kN/m3) x Pile element thickness(m)].
When using the Lateral subgrade reaction modulus formula proposed by the design code, input the
calculated coefficient into the Normal Stiffness Modulus and the pile element thickness can be input as a
unit width(1m).

Thermal
Convection coefficient: Controls allowable heat exchange at the interface.

Because the pile size, length, neighboring ground material properties all affect the pile element
parameters, it is ideal to use the results of a loading test. However, if there are no test results, the
Ultimate Shaft Resistance, Lateral Subgrade Reaction Modulus and End Bearing Capacity of a pile can
be calculated using the formulas proposed by the design code and the neighboring ground parameters
(unit weight, cohesion, friction angle etc.).

1. Using loading test results

For example, if a load of 1000kN was found before failure from the pile loading test and the pile length
was 10m, the Ultimate shear force is [1000kN/10m/1m] = 100kN/m2. Here, the 1m is the unit length of
the input pile element thickness.
The Shear stiffness modulus is the slope of the linear section on the relationship graph with relative
displacement until the 1000kN load is applied. If we assume that the relative displacement at 1000kN is
0.01m, the Shear stiffness modulus becomes [100kN/m2 / 0.01m] = 10000kN/m3.

186 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

2. Using the Ultimate Shaft Resistance results

For each design code, various formulas are suggested to predict the Ultimate bearing capacity of a pile
according to ground and pile section properties. For example, if the calculated Ultimate shaft resistance
is 50kN/m2 and the Shaft surface area of the pile(equivalent circumference) is 3m, input 50kN/m2 for the
Ultimate shear force and 3m for the Pile element thickness respectively, or input 150kN/m2 for the
Ultimate shear force and the unit length of the Pile element thickness 1m. The Pile element length is
automatically taken into account.

Because the load-relative displacement has no relationship, if the allowable settlement is assumed to
occur at the Ultimate bearing capacity, the Shear stiffness modulus applied to the analysis can be
inferred with reference to the allowable settlement. If the allowable settlement is 0.025m for the example
above, the Shear stiffness modulus is [150kN/m2 / 0.025m] = 6000kN/m3. If the Pile element thickness
is 3m, entering [50kN/m2 / 0.025m] = 2000kN/m3 still gives the same results.
However, if a different numerical value from the unit length is input for the Pile element thickness, be
aware that the same Normal stiffness modulus is equally applied.

3. Applying the interface Wizard interaction formula

Pile elements are also used to estimate the ground-structure mutual behavior with interface elements.
Because the neighboring ground material has a larger affect than the pile stiffness or sectional
properties, the shear/normal stiffness of the pile element can be inferred using the interaction formula
that calculates the tangent/normal stiffness on the interface Wizard.

[Kn = Eoed,i / L x tv , Kt = Gi / L x tv]

Here, Eoed,i = 2 x Gi x (1-νi)/(1-2 x νi)

(νi =Interface Poisson’s ration=0.45, the interface is used to simulate the non-compressive frictional
behavior and automatically calculates using 0.45 to prevent numerical errors.)
tv = Virtual thickness (Generally has a value between 0.01~0.1, the higher the stiffness difference
between ground and structure, the smaller the value)
Gi = R x Gsoil (Gsoil = E/(2(1+ νsoil)), R = Strength Reduction Factor

The general Strength reduction factor for structural members and neighboring ground properties are as
follows.
 Sand/Steel = R : 0.6~0.7
 Clay/Steel = R : 0.5
 Sand/Concrete = R : 1.0~0.8
 Clay/Concrete = R : 1.0~0.7

When inferring the shear/normal stiffness of the pile using this method, the Ultimate shear force can be
found using the Shear stiffness modulus, as calculated in example 2, and the allowable displacement
that is to be applied in the analysis.

Examples 2 and 3 are only acceptable suggestions when the test results are not available. For accurate
behavior predictions, the load test must be conducted, or the design parameters need to be computed
through repeated analysis.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 187

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Default parameter (General)

1.3
Material The input parameters and units for defining the default stiffness and initial condition of each model are
Properties listed in the table below

Input parameter Definition Units

Elasticity modulus ( E) Elasticity modulus kN/m2
Elasticity modulus The Elasticity modulus increment amount depending on kN/m3
increment height (slope)
Reference height Reference height of Elasticity modulus increment m
Poisson’s ratio ( ) Poisson’s ratio -
Unit weight (γ) Unit weight of entire unsaturated soil(γt) kN/m3
Initial stress (Ko) Coefficient of earth pressure (initial stress parameter) -
Temperature coefficient Coefficient for calculating temperature loading 1/[T]
Damping ratio Material damping ratio (only applied to dynamic analysis) -

▶General parameter

Elastic modulus (E)

This parameter defines the default initial stiffness of the material. The user can specify the Elasticity
modulus, or use the Shear modulus (G) or Oedometer Elasticity modulus (Eoed) from the Oedometer test.
The initial stiffness is very important because geo-materials display nonlinear behavior from the early
stages of loading. The initial stiffness can be defined from the stress-strain curves of the triaxial
compression test. It is realistic to use the E 0 for materials that display linear (elastic) behavior until a large
strain but for general geo-materials, E50, the slope of the tangent at 50% of the stress, is appropriate as an
initial stiffness. When simulating unloading and reloading due to excavation during construction step
analysis, it is better to use E ur instead of E50 to realistically simulate the ground behavior.
Hence, it is important to set the stress path and stress range (size) when using the initial stiffness to
simulate the ground behavior. To simulate detailed behavior, various nonlinear material models can be
used.

188 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Triaxial compression test

result graph

The use of K(bulk modulus) and G(shear modulus) may be debatable use to the continuity issues
associated with the ground, but it can be expressed more simply and clearly than E or v and is convenient
to use. The following figure briefly explains the mechanical significance of K and G.

▶Various types of tangent modulus

Elasticity modulus 1

 secant modulus
According to the magnitude 
stress 


of the stress increment 1

strain 

z
According to the loading z
condition
Young’s modulus
uniaxial loading z
E
z
y

x  xz

z simple shear
 zx  xz shear modulus
 xz
G
 xz

isotropic
bulk modulus
compression
 zx
K
 xz

confined constrained modulus

compression z
M
z

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 189

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

The Elasticity modulus values gained from on-site tests can be 1 of the many elasticity moduli discussed above

and can be modified appropriately for real situations.

▶The Elasticity modulus Geo-material Elasticity modulus Poisson’s ratio

and Poisson’s ratio for (tonf/m2)
rock and other materials amphibolite 9.4~12.1 106 0.28~0.30
anhydrite 6.8 106 0.30
siabase 8.7~11.7 106 0.27~0.30
siorite 7.5~10.8 106 0.26~0.29
solomite 11.0~12.1 106 0.30
sunite 14.9~18.3 106 0.26~0.28
deldspathic gneiss 8.3~11.9 106 0.15~0.20
gabbro 8.9~11.7 106 0.27~0.31
granite 7.3~8.6 106 0.23~0.27
ice 7.1 106 0.36
limest1 8.7~10.8 106 0.27~0.30
marble 8.7~10.8 106 0.27~0.30
mica Schist 7.9~10.1 106 0.15~0.20
obsidian 6.5~8.0 106 0.12~0.18
oligoclasite 8.0~8.5 106 0.29
quartzite 8.2~9.7 106 0.12~0.15
rock salt 3.5 106 0.25
slate 7.9~11.2 106 0.15~0.20
aluminum 5.5~7.6 106 0.34~0.36
steel 20.0 106 0.28~0.29

The Elasticity modulus in the table above is for small, intact rock samples tested in the lab. Hence, when
considering the site conditions, a reduced elasticity modulus needs to be used considering the
discontinuous surfaces within large scale rocks. The figure below is a graph of actual data showing the
relationship between the RQD (Rock Quality Designation) and the Elasticity modulus reduction ratio. An
RQD is the percentage of the sum of the lengths of cracks that are over 10cm and exist on the 100cm situ
core against the total length. An RQD of 100% does not mean the core is an intact rock. However, a higher
RQD means a higher quality rock and the RQD decreases with more weathering.

190 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶RQD- Modulus reduction 1.2

ratio (EL/EM) relationship
Results from DWORSHAK DAM, Deere
et.al., 1967

Results after Coon and Merritt, 1970

1.0
ORANGE FISH TUNNEL ㅡ VERTICAL JACKING
TESTS, Oliver, 1977
ORANGE FISH TUNNEL ㅡ HORIZONTAL JACKING
TESTS
Modulus Reduction Ratio (EL/EM)

0.8 DRAKENSBERG TESTS

ELANDSBERG TESTS
OTHER DATA, 1978

0.6

0.4

0.2
?
?
?
0.0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Rock Quality Designation (%)

As shown on the figure, an RQD of 70% already needs to decrease the lab Elastic modulus by 20%.

Increment of Elastic modulus

In general, the strength properties of the soil change with depth and confining pressure, even within a
ground layer composed of the same material. To take this characteristic into account, increase or decrease
in the Elastic modulus can be simulated with reference to a reference height (standard height). If the elastic
increase according to height is '0(zero)', the Elastic modulus has a constant value and if it is not '0(zero)',
the Elastic modulus is calculated with reference to a standard height using the following equation.

E  Eref   yref  y  Einc y  y 

ref

E  Eref y  y 
ref

Here,
Eref
: Input elastic modulus value
Einc
: Incremental slope of elastic modulus
yref E
: Depth of ref measurement

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 191

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Schematic diagram of
depth
Elastic modulus increment

yref elastic
modulus
Eref

Einc

y
The in the equation represent the integral point positions of an element where the finite element method
yref
calculation occurs. If the integral point position is higher than , the elastic modulus value can be less
Eref E value.
than 0 in some places. To avoid this, use the value instead of further decreasing the

Poisson’s ratio(  )

Poisson’s ratio is a proportional constant from the stress-strain relationship and displays the material
volume change associated with loading. As  approaches 0.5, the material becomes an incompressible
solid and closer to 0 means the material is elastic, showing large volume changes even at small loads. The
initial stress ratio due to self weight K 0 = σh/ σv can be related to the ratio in the uniaxial compression state
by K0 =  /(1-  ). If K0 is not used to define the initial in-situ stress, the horizontal stress is calculated from
the vertical stress using the entered  . For geo-materials, the general Poisson range is within 0.3~0.4 and
entering a value larger than 0.49 can cause numerical errors. Hence, if K 0 is larger than 1, for example
over-consolidated ground, the Poisson’s ratio cannot be calculated and the value must be entered directly.

Shear modulus(G)

The Shear modulus is automatically calculated from the Elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio using the
following equation derived from Hooke's law. If the value is directly entered, the Elastic modulus changes.
E
G=
2(1 + ν)

Oedometer Elastic modulus (Eoed)

The Oedometer modulus can be calculated from the Elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio using the
following equation.

(1 − ν)E
Eoed =
(1 − 2ν)(1 + ν)

192 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Initial stress (K0)

K0 is the Coefficient of earth pressure, which is defined as the ratio of the initial vertical/horizontal stress (K0
= σh/ σv). The anisotropic property can be set with reference to the Global Coordinate System.

Firstly, select yes/no on whether the Global Coordinate System direction and anisotropic property match
and set the lateral pressure index in each axis or any direction depending on the selected options.

When the 2 properties do match, the lateral pressure index is set in each axis direction but a value of ‘1’ in
the direction of gravity cannot be defined depending on the work environment (2D/3D).

When the 2 properties do not match, the lateral pressure index direction is set by entering the angle with
respect to the reference axis. The reference axis exists to set the lateral pressure index direction. For a 2D
work environment, the ’X-Y’ plane is fixed and only the ‘X’ axis can be selected, with all initial shear stress
at ‘0(zero)’. For 3D, each axis apart from the gravitational direction can be selected. For example, if the
gravitational direction is the ‘Z’ axis and the reference axis is set as the ‘X’ axis, the angle can be entered
on the ‘X-Z’ plane will be the maximum lateral pressure angle and all initial shear stress in the XY and YZ
direction will be '0(zero)'.

The in-situ stress state, where the soil it not disturbed by excavation or fill, can be expressed using the
Coefficient of earth pressure and self weight. In other words, realistic results can be obtained from applying
K0 after modeling the in-situ ground for the 1st step of construction during analysis. This is true for flat
foundations but for inclined foundations, it is recommended that another construction process be added to
converge the stress found using K0 for equilibrium.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 193

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Thermal Parameter

Thermal Coefficient - describes how the size of an object changes with a change in temperature.
Specifically, it measures the fractional change in size per degree change in temperature at a constant
pressure.

*Molecular vapor diffusion coefficient - the gas diffusion coefficient of a porous medium, which indicates the
change in gas density over time.

*Thermal diffusion enhancement (factor) - controls the degree of gas flow according to the temperature
gradient (unit less).

Safety Result (Mohr-Coulomb)

- Cohesion, Friction Angle and Allowable tensile strength (optional) can be defined as the failure
criteria.
- Stress status of material for each construction stage can be represented by Factor of Safety
based on Mohr-Coulomb failure criteria.
- The ratio of generated stress to stress at failure for each element will be calculated automatically.
- Users can figure out stable, potential failure and plastic failure area directly.
- Check factor of safety for each element - (2D : Plain Strain Stresses > SAFETY FACTOR , 3D :
Solid Stresses > SAFETY FACTOR)
- In case that Safety Factor is less than 1(or 1.2), it can be identical with plastic failure region.

Seepage, Drained/Undrained Parameter

194 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

The input parameters for the permeability characteristics and drained/undrained conditions of the
foundation are as follows.

Input parameter Definition Units

3
Unit weight(saturated) Saturated state unit weight kN/m
Initial void ratio(eo) Initial void ratio -
Unsaturated characteristic function setting (negative pore
Unsaturated characteristic -
water pressure-water content-permeability ratio)
Drainage parameter Drained/Undrained condition -
Permeability coefficient GCS direction - Saturated permeability constant m/sec
Void ratio dependent
Permeability ratio dependent on void ratio -
permeability ratio (ck)
Specific storage(Ss) Volume ratio of water inflow/outflow 1/m

▶ Permeability parameter

Initial void ratio (e0)

The initial void ratio of the foundation used in consolidation analysis and stress-seepage coupled analysis.
It is the volume ratio between the voids and soil particles within the soil and the value is less than 1 for
most soils. The value can be larger than 1 for clays or organic soils, but the value depends greatly on the
sampling method or compaction. Generally, coarse grain sand has a value of 0.6~0.8 and high density
sand with an even size distribution has a value of 0.3. The void ratio can be even 2~3 for fine grained soils.

Unsaturated Property

Set to consider the unsaturated property of the foundation. It is a required property for unsteady infiltration
analysis and is used to consider the partial degree of saturation of the foundation for nonlinear
(construction step)/consolidation analysis etc. Because real foundations are unsaturated and have a certain
ratio of air, unsteady infiltration analysis needs to consider unsaturated characters of the soil for more
realistic results. If the unsaturated properties are not considered, it is assumed that the ground is saturated
and hence, the infiltration analysis with time cannot be examined.
Unsaturated property defines the change in permeability coefficient and water content (Degree of saturation)
in the unsaturated region depending on the size of the negative pore water pressure. There are 2 methods
to define the unsaturated property; directly defining (define individually) the permeability function and water
content function using the pressure head (negative pore water pressure) or defining the relationship

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 195

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

between pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio (define

relationship). Refer to "Function>Unsaturated characteristic function" for more information.

Drainage parameters

The pore water pressure in stress analysis can be divided into normal state pore water pressure and
abnormal state pore water pressure - the excess pore water pressure generated between soil particles due
to external loading under undrained conditions. An excess pore water pressure of nearly 0 is called the
drainage condition and is generally used for drainage analysis of sand, which has a large permeability.
However when simulating clay, which has a very small permeability and water cannot be drained out during
sudden loading, undrained analysis is appropriate. The initial state, where the excess pore water pressure
has not yet dissipated, is seen as the most unstable state and the pore water pressure is determined by the
volume change of the foundation due to compressibility and permeability coefficient.

Undrained Poisson’s ratio and Skempton(B) coefficient are parameters used to calculate the bulk modulus
of elasticity for water. The undrained Poisson’s ratio has a standard value of 0.495 with a compressibility of
nearly ‘0(zero)’ and the Skempton coefficient expresses the saturation, with 1 meaning full saturation.
The materials for the unsaturated analysis are as follows.
Please refer to Ch.4 of the Analysis manual for more detailed information.

Drained/Undrained Materials Useable Material models

Drained All geo-materials
Elastic, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Duncan-Chang,
Undrained (Effective stiffness
Hoek-Brown, Strain Softening, Modified Cam-clay, Jardine, D-min,
/Effective strength)
Modified Mohr-Coulomb, User-supplied, Transversely Isotropic
Undrained (Effective stiffness /
Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Modified Mohr-Coulomb
Undrained strength)
Undrained (Undrained stiffness /
Elastic, Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, Modified Mohr-Coulomb
Undrained strength)

Permeability coefficients (kx,ky,kz)

The permeability coefficient represents the permeability characteristics (velocity) of the foundation and is
used in infiltration analysis and consolidation analysis. The permeability coefficient for each direction can
be defined on the GCS. The input value is the saturated permeability coefficient and becomes the standard
for computing the permeability ratio (Kunsat / Ksat) due to negative pore water pressure when defining an
unsaturated property function.

196 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Void ratio dependency permeability (ck)

The permeability coefficient is a measurement of how much the groundwater within a foundation moves in
a unit time and is dependent on the water content and the void ratio change e . The larger water content,
the larger the flow channel and hence, the value is largest when the foundation is saturated. The water
content depends on the pore water pressure and hence, the permeability coefficient is also dependent on
the pore water pressure. The change in void ratio is considered in consolidation analysis as well as stress-
seepage coupled analysis and is calculated from the initial void ratio.

To express the change in pore water pressure, FEA NX uses the permeability ratio function kr  kr ( p)
depended on saturated pore water pressure coefficient k sat and pore water pressure change and the void
ratio dependent permeability ratio ck dependent on void ratio change e . The unsaturated permeability
coefficient depending on void ratio change e is given by the following equation.

e

k  10 ck kr ( p) k sat

Specific storativity (Ss)

The Specific storage is the water volume inflow or outflows from the unit volume of the aquifer due to water
level rise or fall in a confined aquifer. A coefficient can be directly entered or automatically calculated for
compressible fluids.
The change in volumetric water content for pore water pressure in infiltration and consolidation analysis can
be expressed by the porosity and degree of saturation.
 n S
S n
p p p

The first clause is the slope of the volumetric water content under saturated conditions that can be
expressed using the specific storage.
n Vv h Ss
S  
p h p 

When the material drainage property is set to undrained, the specific storage is automatically calculated
using the undrained Poisson's ratio (v u) and the Effective elastic modulus (E') and Poisson's ratio (v'),
entered in the general parameters.

E '( u  ')
K f  BK u 
(1  2 ')(1  ')(1  2 u )

ng w g w
Ss = =
Kw K f
(1- 2n ')(1+ n ')(1- 2n u )
Ss = g w
E '(n u - n ')

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 197

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Thermal

Conductivity: the ability to conduct thermal energy.

Specific Heat: the amount of heat required to raise single unit mass of a substance by single temperature
unit. (required for transient heat transfer problems)

Heat Generation Factor: the value of the heat load multiplied by the exothermic coefficient used as the load
vector for heat transfer analysis is the total exothermic load applied to the object.

Unfrozen water content: indicates floating water content in soil / rock. It is given as a temperature-
dependent function as a unique characteristics of the ground.

Time Dependent

This is to define Creep Formulation to simulate time-dependent behavior of concrete structures. Following
constitutive models are available for concrete structures, Elastic, Tresca, von Mises, Mohr-Coulomb,
Drucker Prager, and Hoek Brown.

Two types of creep formulation are available to define Time-dependent behavior of material, Age
Dependent and Age Independent. Refer to analysis reference Ch.4-Section5 in detail.

198 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶ Creep Formulation

Age Dependent
The stiffness of concrete changes with time, and the creep and shrinkage may cause unexpected
deformation. The creep strain of concrete depends on the time of stress occurrence even under the same
applied load. FEA NX supports aging-Kelvin model and aging Viscous model excluding the spring from
Kelvin model.
k1 k2 k3 k4 k5
▶ Aging - Kelvin creep
model
· 

1 2 3 4 5

Age Independent
FEA NX can take into account the primary and secondary creep. The user can use two types of empirical
law to define the creep behavior.
▶ Kelvin-Maxwell creep Primary Secondary
model Creep k1 Creep k2
k p ( ) e2 or  cprimary e1 or  total
c

cs ( )

· c p ( ) · ·  (t ) or s1

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 199

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
1.4
Property Add/define ground and structural properties. This function defines the property of each mesh set when a
ground or structure mesh is generated. For ground, it determines which material to use and for structures, it
adds section size, shape (stiffness) and horizontal spacing etc. The horizontal spacing is the 1D spacing
between structural members in the horizontal direction of a 2D model. Tapered section option, where the
size (thickness) of a beam or plate changes, is also available.

Methodology

[Create]
Creates 1 of the following 4 property types and adds a material type and section characteristic for each
property.

200 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

The supported model type for each property type is as follows. The section shape/size, stiffness depending
on spacing and selectable materials is defined.

Property Ground Structural

Model type Nonlinear property
type property property
Geogrid(1D) X O Tension Only
Plot only(1D) X X -
From Material
Tension Only/Hook
Truss X O
Compression Only/Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
1D From Material
Tension Only/Hook
Embedded truss X O
Compression Only/Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
Beam X O -
Embedded Beam X O -
Pile X O -
Geogrid(2D) X O Tension Only
Plot only(2D) X X -
Gauging shell X O -
2D Axisymmetric O X -
Shell X O -
Plane stress X O Tension Only
Plane strain O X -
3D Solid O X -
Rigid link X O -
Pile tip X O -
User Supplied Behavior for
X O -
Shell Interface
Linear Elastic
Tension Only
Compression Only
Point spring X O
Hook
Gap
Nonlinear Elastic
Matrix spring X O -
Others Free Field
Free Field O X
Absorbent Boundary
Interface X O -
Shell interface X O -
From Adjacent Element
Infinite O X
User Defined
Linear Elastic
Rigid Body
Elastic link X O Tension Only
Compression Only
Nonlinear Elastic
Seepage Cut Off O X -

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 201

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Refer to Ch.3 of the Analysis manual for detailed information on each input parameter and behavioral
characteristic.

[Modify/Copy/Delete]
Modify the parameters of an added material. Copy can be used when adding multiple materials while only
changing certain parameters.

[Import]
Import the material properties from a different model file with a saved material/property. This operation is
useful when analyzing the existing project under the same conditions. Selecting the import file generates
the material list containing all saved materials. The user can select the desired material.

Overview
1.5
Section Property The section material properties need to be defined for a 1 dimensional truss, embedded truss or beam
element. Here, the truss and embedded truss only need the cross-sectional area but the beam needs other
material properties such as total cross section, torsional rigidity, first area moment of inertia and second
area moment of inertia to consider torsion, bend and shear.

The thickness of the element needs to be defined to specify the 2D plane stress element, 2D geogrid
element, plate element, plane strain element, axial symmetry element, linear interface element etc. Here,
the plane strain element, axial symmetry element and linear interface element have an interior unit weight
of 1 and the user can define the used units according to the thickness.
The plane stress element, 2D geogrid element and plate element use the thickness value entered by the
user. Here, the plate element has a rotor float and because nonlinear analysis is possible, a separate
integration is performed in the thickness direction.

202 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

1D element

1D element is an element that is made up of 2(primary) or 3(secondary) nodes and has the geometric
property of length. Because 3D shapes are expressed as 1D elements, the section (size, shape) needs to
be defined and this is modeled as a 2D element for calculations.
FEA NX provides various shapes, as shown in the figure below. The position can also be set when defining
the sectional properties.

▶Actual model
▶▶Finite element model

▶Automatic section
modeling

QUAD-4 6400 elements QUAD-4 3400 elements QUAD-4 1700 elements

<Solid square> <H section> <Channel>

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 203

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶ Section shape and size

specification

<Solid Rectangle> < Solid Round> <Pipe>

<Box> <T-section> <H-section>

<Channel> <Angle> <Cross>

<I-section>
<Channel 1> <Hat>

204 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

2D element

2D elements are Triangles or Quadrilaterals with the geometric property of area. Because 3D shapes are
expressed as 2D elements, the thickness needs to be defined. The thickness can be set the same or
tapered.

▶Actual model
▶▶Finite element model

3D element

3D elements are Tetrahedron or Hexahedrons, Bricks with the geometric property of volume.

▶Actual model
▶▶Finite element model

Cross sectional area (A)

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 205

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

The cross sectional area is used to calculate the axial stiffness when a tensile or axial force acts on the
member or the stress on a member. The calculations for the H section are as follows.
There are 2 methods to calculate the cross sectional area in the FEA NX. The first method uses the
provided database to input the dimensions of a section and automatically calculate the area. For the
second method, the user calculates the area directly and inputs the value. The first method is convenient,
but because it does not consider the decrease in area due to bolts in the connection or rivet holes, the area
entered using the second method may provide more accurate results.

▶Example of cross 300

15
sectional area calculation

A1

Area =∫dA=Aone+ A2 + A3
A2
=(300×one5)+ (573×one0)

600
+ (320×one2) = one4,070
10
A3

320 12

Torsional stiffness(Ixx)

The torsional stiffness resists the torsional moment and is expressed as follows.

T
I xx 
G

Here,
I xx : Torsional stiffness
T : Torsional moment or torque
 : Torsional angle (angle of twist)
G : Shear modulus

The torsional stiffness is the stiffness that resists the torsional moment and is different from the polar
moment of inertia that decides the shear stress due to torsion. (However, the 2 are the same when
considering a circular cross-section or a thick cylindrical section)
The torsional stiffness can be calculated from Saint-Venant's principle as shown below.

      
T  G    y y   z  z  dA
 z   y  

206 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

 is the warping function ( y, z) that can be calculated using the Finite element method as shown below.

         

  y y
  dA   
z z   y
z
z
y  dA


Because T  I xxG , the torsional stiffness comp1nt is expressed as the following equation.

      
I xx     y y   z  z  dA
 z   y  

Effective shear area (Asy, Asz)

The effective shear area is needed to calculate the shear stiffness that resists the shear force acting on the
y axis or z axis of the element coordinate system. If the effective shear area is not entered, the shear strain
in that direction is ignored.

Asy  Sky A
Asz  Skz A

Here,
Sky : Effective shear factor that resists shear force in the y axis of the element coordinate system
Skz : Effective shear factor that resists shear force in the z axis of the element coordinate system
Asy : Effective shear area that resists shear force in the y axis of the element coordinate system
Asz : Effective shear area that resists shear force in the z axis of the element coordinate system

When the interior section material properties are calculated or entered from the database, the shear
stiffness comp1nt is automatically considered and the effective shear factor is calculated using the warping
function  ( y, z) from the shear force caused by bending moment and the warping function ( y, z) from the
Saint-Venant principle.

1 A  I y I yy  I z I yz
  
 Czz I yy  C yy I yz  
Sky Vy  I yy I zz  I yz
2
2 1    I yy I zz  I yz2 
 
1 A  I z I zz  I y I yz
  
 Czz I zz  C yy I yz  
Skz Vz  I yy I zz  I yz
2
2 1    I yy I zz  I yz2 
 

Here,
I y    ydA, I z    zdA

C yy   xz  y  yo  dA, C zz   xy  z  zo  dA
2 2

     
  z y  y 2 dA

  y
 z  z 2 dA

yo  , zo 
     
2   y  ydA 2   z  zdA
 z   y 

Area moment of inertia(Iyy, Izz)

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 207

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

The area moment of inertia is used to calculate the flexural stiffness that resists the bending moment and is
calculated from the centroid axis of the section using the following equation.

• Area moment of inertia about the y axis of the element coordinate system

I yy  z
2
dA

• Area moment of inertia about the z axis of the element coordinate system

I zz  y
2
dA

8
z

3
②
neutral centroid

17
10
y
z'
2
z

①
4

y'
y
reference point 10

▶Table. First area moment Section

b h Ai zi Q yi yi Q zi
of inertia and calculation element
of centroid ① 10 4 40 2 80 5 200
② 2 10 20 9 180 5 100
③ 8 3 24 15.5 372 5 120
total - - 84 - 632 - 420

Ai : Area
zi : Distance from the reference point to the centroid of the section element in the z′-axis direction
yi : Distance from the reference point to the centroid of the section element in the y′-axis direction
Q yi : First moment of area relative to the reference point in the y′-axis direction
Qzi : First moment of area relative to the reference point in the z′-axis direction

208 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

• Calculate position of neutral axis ( Z , Y )

Z
 zdA  Qy

632
 7.5238
Area Area 84

Y 
 ydA 
Qz

420
 5.0000
Area Area 84

• Calculate second area moment of inertia ( I yy , I zz )

▶Table. Second area Section

Ai Z  zi I y1 I y2 I yy Y  yi I z1 Iz2 I zz
moment of inertia example element
① 40 5.5328 1224.5 53.3 1277.8 0 0 333.3 333.3
② 20 1.4672 43.1 166.7 209.8 0 0 6.7 6.7
③ 24 7.9762 1526.9 18.0 1544.9 0 0 128.0 128.0
total 2794.5 238.0 3032.5 0 468.0 468.0

bh3
I y1  Ai   Z  zi  , I y 2 
2
, I yy  I y1  I y 2
12
hb3
I z1  Ai  Y  yi 
2
, Iz2  , I zz  I z1  I z 2
12

Area product moment of inertia (Iyz)

The area product moment of inertia is used to calculate the stress comp1nt of an asymmetrical section and
the definition is as follows.
I yz   y  zdA
H, pipe, box, channel, tee type sections have at least 1 axis of symmetry out of the y,z axis on the element
coordinate system and hence Iyz=0. For angle type sections, it does not have any angle of symmetry (Iyz≠
0) and so, the stress comp1nt needs to be calculated.
The calculations for the area product moment of inertia of an angle type section are shown in the figure
below.

z
▶ Area product moment of
B
inertia calculations for an 1

angle section
tf

centroid
section
y Ai ezi ezi
element
H

① Bt f B / 2 Y ( H  t f / 2)  Z
Z

② ( H  t f )  tw tw / 2  Y ( H  t f / 2)  Z

tw

I yz   Ai  eyi  ezj
  B  t f    B / 2  Y    H  t f / 2   Z 

  
  H  t f   tw   tw / 2  Y    H  t f / 2   Z 

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 209

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶ Flexural stress
Neutral Surface
distribution diagram for
asymmetrical section

The neutral axis is the axis that passes the points where the flexural stress due to the bending moment is
‘0(zero)’ within the member. The neutral axis is perpendicular to the m -axis and the n -axis.

Because the flexural stress due to bending moment is ‘0’ on the neutral axis, the neutral axis direction can
be found by the following equation.

M y  I zz  M z  I yz   z   M z  I yy  M y  I yz  y  0
y M y  I zz  M z  I yz
tan   
z M z  I yy  M y  I yz

The general equation used to calculate the flexural stress due to bending moment is as follows.

M y  M z  I yz / I zz  M z  M y  I yz / I yy 
fb  z y
I yy   I / Izz 
2
yz I zz   I yz2 / I yy 

If this is a H type section, I yz  0 and,

My Mz
fb  z  y  f by  f bz
I yy I zz
Here,
I yy : Second area moment of inertia about the y axis of the element coordinate system,
I zz : Second area moment of inertia about the z axis of the element coordinate system,
I yz : Area product moment of inertia,
y : Elemental y axis distance from neutral axis to where the flexural stress is calculated,
z : Elemental z axis distance from neutral axis to where the flexural stress is calculated,
My : Bending moment about the y axis of the element coordinate system,
Mz : Bending moment about the z axis of the element coordinate system

The shear stress due to shear force acting in the y axis and z axis direction of the element coordinate
system can be calculated using the following equation.

210 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Vy  I yy  Qz  I yz  Qy   Vy 
y    I yy  Qz  I yz  Qy       
bz   I yy  I zz  I 
2
yz
 I I  I2
 yy zz yz   bz 
Vz  I zz  Qy  I yz  Qz   Vz 
z  I Q  I Q       
by   I yy  I zz  I yz
2
 zz y yz z  I yy  I zz  I yz2   by 
Here,
Vy : Shear force acting in the y axis direction of the element coordinate system,
Vz : Shear force acting in the z axis direction of the element coordinate system,
Qy : First area moment of inertia about the y axis of the element coordinate system,
Qz : First area moment of inertia about the z axis of the element coordinate system,
by : Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction
to the elemental y axis,
bz : Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction
to the elemental z axis

First moment of area (Qy, Qz)

The first moment of area is used to calculate the shear stress at an arbitrary point on the section and the
shear stress can be calculated using the following equation.

Qy   zdA
Qz   ydA

For a section that is symmetrical about the y, z or both axis, the shear strength on an arbitrary point can be
calculated using the following equation.

Vy  Qz
y 
I zz  bz
Vz  Q y
z 
I yy  by
Here,
Vy : Shear force acting in the y axis direction of the element coordinate system,
Vz : Shear force acting in the z axis direction of the element coordinate system,
I yy : Second area moment of inertia about the y axis of the element coordinate system,
I zz : Second area moment of inertia about the z axis of the element coordinate system,
by : Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction
to the elemental y axis,
bz : Section thickness at the point where shear stress is calculated in the normal direction
to the elemental z axis
Element thickness

On the FEA NX, the thickness needs to be defined to specify the 2D plane stress element, 2D geogrid
element, plate element, plane strain element, axial symmetry element, linear interface element etc. Here,
the plane strain element, axial symmetry element and linear interface element have an interior unit weight
of 1.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 211

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

The plane stress element, 2D geogrid element and plate element use the thickness value entered by the
user. The plate element has a rotor float and because nonlinear analysis is possible, a separate integration
is performed in the thickness direction.

Spacing

This functionality is in the 1D element property which is activated only in 2D project setting. Since this
option is used to consider the 1D element force per each element when the user introduce the 1D element
more or less than one along the axis of horizontal direction (thickness direction) in 2D model.

If the user uncheck the spacing option, on the FEA NX, the spacing will be regarded as Plane Strain
Thickness in the analysis setting, meaning that the unit thickness based on the selected unit system.

On the FEA NX, spacing is used to calculate the stiffness of the element and output the member force per
each element.

E A/ n
K*  K / n 
L
where, n = spacing, L = length , A = area, K* = stiffness considering spacing.

A *
f   A*  E  nd   E  d  A , f  nf
n
where, f* = member force

212 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

For instance,

if E  1000N / m2 , L  10m , A  1m2 , and applied external load P  1000 N ,

F  K *D 
EA
D

1000 N / m2  1m2 / 0.5 
D  200 N / m  D , D  F / K  5m
L 10m
5m
  D/L  0.5
10m
  E  500N / m2
f   A  500 N / m 2  (1m 2 / 0.5)  1000 N

the member force calculated is as follows,

f *  nf  0.5 1000 N  500 N

Overview
1.6
Complex Cross- Calculate the section property in the non-formalized cross-section. (Cross Sectional Area (A), Torsional
Section Property Constant (Ix), Torsional Stress Coefficient, Area Moment of Inertia (Iy, Iz), Effective Shear Area (Ay, Az),
Shear Stress Coefficient (Gy, Gz))
The section property is calculated automatically from the material property by selecting 2D elements
assigned ground material, and this can be used for 1D structural property.
A value close to the exact solution can be obtained under the more dense mesh.

Methodology

[Auto-calculation of complex cross-section property]

Create 2D mesh for the complex cross-section.
Click ‘Add’ in the Complex Cross-Section Property window. If 2D mesh is selected, the cross-section
property is calculated automatically.
Save the cross-section property.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 213

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Create/Modify 1D Property > Section Template]

The complex cross-section property can be assigned when creating 1D structural element.
The registered complex cross-section property is available if the ‘Complex Cross-Section’ is selected in the
‘Section Template’.

Overview
1.7
Coordinate Add a result output coordinate system for 2D/3D element. The default rectangular/cylindrical coordinate
System system is defined and another coordinate system can be added by arbitrarily defining 1 of the three planes
on the coordinate system. The added coordinate system can be used as the material coordinates when the
properties of the 2D / 3D elements are defined. For 2D structural members, it is especially hard to unify the
element coordinate system in 1 direction depending on the element shape. It is useful to set the output
coordinate system to check the member forces of the entire structure according the same direction and
sign convention.

214 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Methodology

There are 2 types of coordinate systems; rectangular and cylindrical. The coordinate system can be set by
defining 1 of the three planes of the coordinate system 12, 23, 31 (XY,YZ,ZX) by entering three points. In
other words, the plane that passes the three points becomes 1 of the 12, 23, 31 planes and the other 2
planes are automatically determined by the direction of the reference plane.

Select the plane, origin point, a point on 1 axis of the selected plane and a point on the selected plane in
this order to specify the position and direction of the reference plant.

Overview
1.8
Function When setting the analysis conditions (boundary, loading etc.) after the mesh has been generated, the
values that change with position and time can be registered as a function. The provided function types are
as follows and the characteristics and applicable range for each function is given.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 215

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Methodology

Applicable range
Function type Boundary
Material/Property Loading
condition
Force, Displacement, Pressure,
General (Spatial) - Water level Prestress, Initial equilibrium force,
Dynamic nodal, Dynamic surface
General (Non-spatial) Pile, Pile tip - -
Force, Displacement, Pressure,
Generalized space - Water level Prestress, Initial equilibrium force,
Dynamic nodal, Dynamic surface
Surface Function - Water level -
Non-Hydrostatic Water
- Water level -
Pressure
Creep / Shrinkage Strain Time-dependent
- -
Function (User-defined)
Time-dependent
Creep/Shrinkage Function
(Design code - -
Group
based)
Time-dependent
Elastic Modulus Function (Design code - -
based)
Plastic Hardening Shear Hardening
- -
Function (User-defined)
Hardening Curve von Mises - -
Stress-Strain Curve von Mises - -
Cohesion Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve
Frictional Angle Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve
Dilatancy Angle Hardening
CWFS - -
Curve
Tensile Strength
CWFS - -
Hardening Curve
Node head,
Seepage boundary - Node flux, -
Surface flux
Nonlinear elastic Truss,
- -
(Truss element) Embedded truss
Nonlinear elastic Point spring,
- -
(Point spring/ Elastic link) Elastic link
Isotropic,
Unsaturated property - -
Orthotropic
Strain compatible 2D Equivalent - -
Response spectrum - - Response spectrum
Ground acceleration, Time varying
Time forcing - -
static, Dynamic nodal, Dynamic surface

216 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

General function (Spatial)

Changes in position (coordinates) of a value with respect to the rectangular or cylindrical coordinate system
can be set as function and used when specifying the load. The water level conditions can be directly
specified on the screen, but registering the water level according to the coordinate change as a function
allows this to be used as the water line during the construction step.

Input the independent variables (X,Y,Z or R,TH,Z) according to the reference coordinates and the values of
the set variables in the table to generate a function . Already made functions can be copy + pasted from
Excel.

▶Reference coordinate
system standard

Equation
The Equation can be set without defining the values of the independent variables.
For example, when defining the function Y=2*X on the Cartesian coordinate system, specify the X
coordinate range (start, end) and the X coordinate increment first. Input 2*X and press the calculate button
to automatically generate a function as shown above.
When defining the function Sin(T) between a certain angle with reference to the T coordinate on the
cylindrical coordinate system , specify the angle range (start, end) and increment angle and then input sin(T)
to generate a sin function within the specified angle range.

Scale Value
Value multiplied to the defined function value. The initial value is set as 1. For example, to increase all
defined functions by 2 times, input 2 for the scale value.

Extrapolation
Assign a function value to values outside the independent variable range. The user can select whether to
set the function value outside the range to be 0, the same as the closest function value or determined
through linear extrapolation.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 217

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Extrapolation

General function (Non-spatial)

Used to specify the shear stiffness and spring stiffness of pile or pile tip elements as a function. The relative
displacement vs Force/Area is used as a shear stiffness function and the relative displacement vs
Force/Length is used as a spring stiffness function at the pile tips. Different pile shear stiffness functions
can be set for each depth when defining the pile material properties.

Generalized space function

The purpose and functions are the same as the general function (spatial). However, the generalized space
function is able to generate a function that considers all 3 axis directions while the general function (spatial)
is a 1 dimensional function that can only set 1 independent variable axis. The input method and detailed
functions are the same as the general function (spatial).

218 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Input the independent variables (X,Y,Z or R,TH,Z) according to the reference coordinates and the values of
the set variables in the table to generate a function . Already made functions can be copy + pasted from
Excel.

Surface function

Used to specify the water level surface in 3D space. The 3D water level surface can be generated by
entering the variable values with reference to the global or cylindrical coordinates as shown in the table
below, but it can also be generated using the Boundary Condition > Water Level operation and selecting a
surface in space to automatically extract the coordinate information. Here, the X axis spacing determines
the precision of the water surface and for suddenly changing sections, the spacing needs to be carefully set
following the element node positions.

Non-hydrostatic Water Pressure

Define the water pressure at the top and bottom depending on the position of the model. Applicable in
integer conditions and user-defined conditions when specifying the mesh set level.

- User-defined condition: the user can directly define the water pressure at the top and bottom of the
assigned mesh by using the specific water pressure function.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 219

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

- Hydrostatic condition: this function is used to define the water pressure at the top of the allocated mesh
as hydrostatic

Name – input name for the function.

Ref. CSys – reference coordinate system for the function definition.

Water Pressure Type – select the type of function for selection in Analysis Case > Analysis Control >
Define Water Level for Mesh Set. (User Defined or Hydrostatic condition)

Scale factor to multiply all input data.

Creep / Shrinkage Strain Function

Define the time dependent creep property and shrinkage strain of concrete material. These functions are
available if User Defined is selected in the Code field.

There are three types of Creep function data types.

 Specific Creep ; Strain per unit stress excluding immediate deformation
 Creep Function ; Strain per unit stress including immediate deformation
 Creep Coefficient : Ratio of creep strain to elastic strain

220 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

A frequently used Creep Function may be saved in and recalled from a file. The data file, fn.TDM retains
the following form:
* Unit, in, kip
* Data Assign the units (optional items)
Enter the data in the form of 'day' and 'value' (mandatory
20, 0.9934
items)
40,1.2182 -
60, 1.3705 -
80,1.4883 -
100, 1.5854 -
120, 1.6683 -
140, 1.7408 -
160, 1.8054 -
180, 1.8636 -
200, 1.9166 -
220, 1.9653 -
240, 2.0103 -
260, 2.0252 -

Creep / Shrinkage Function Group

The user can define Creep/Shrinkage Function based on the embedded Design Codes as follows.

▶Show Creep / Shrinkage

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 221

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[CEB-FIP(1990)]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of
the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[CEB-FIP(1978)]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of
the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

222 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[ACI]

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

Material factored ultimate value

- The user may enter the ultimate values considering concrete properties by ACI code or User type.

[PCA]

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 223

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Combined (ACI & PCA)]

Material factored ultimate creep strain / Shrinkage

- The user may enter the ultimate values considering concrete properties by User type.

[AASHTO]

Expose to drying before 5 Days of curing

- If this option is checked on, the influence of Creep & Shrinkage is increased by 20% (ref. AASHTO 5.4.2.3)

224 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[European]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of
the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[AS 3600-2009]

Hypothetical Thickness
- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of
the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 225

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[AS/RTA 5100.5-2011]

Hypothetical Thickness
- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of
the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[Russia]

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

Fast – accumulating creep

- If this option is checked on, the influence of Creep & Shrinkage will be increased by % based on
Russian code

226 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Korean Standard]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of
the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[Japan]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Equivalent area divided by perimeter of the member
considering Environmental Coefficient.

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 227

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Japan (JSCE)]

Cement content / Water content

- Required to input each content per unit volume to generate Creep/Shrinkage Function
automatically

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[CHINA]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of
the member considering Environmental coefficient

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

228 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[China (JTG D62-2004)]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of
the member.

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

[KCI-USD 12]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of
the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 229

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[KSCE 2010]

Notational size of member

- Conceptual (Equivalent) size of structure. Two times of equivalent area divided by perimeter of
the member

Age of concrete at the beginning of shrinkage

- The number of days elapsed after pouring of concrete, when the shrinkage is assumed to start

Elastic Modulus Function

Define Time-dependent Elastic modulus function based on selected design code. It is required to input End
Time of function with the number of steps.

230 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[CEB-FIP(1990)]

Specify the Concrete Compressive Strength at 28 Days and Cement Type

RS – Rapid hardening high strength cements
N,R – Normal or rapid hardening cements
SL – Slowly hardening cements

[CEB-FIP(1978)]

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 231

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[ACI]

Modulus of elasticity, which will be reflected in the analysis, is calculated using the compressive strength of
concrete and weight density

[Ohzagi]

The equation proposed by Ohzagi is used to define the change of compressive strength of concrete.
Specify the Concrete Compressive Strength at 28 Days and Cement Type
RS – Rapid hardening high strength cements
N,R – Normal or rapid hardening cements

232 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

SL – Slowly hardening cements

Fly ash – Fly ash cementing material

[European]

Specify the Concrete Compressive Strength at 28 Days and Cement Type

RS – Rapid hardening high strength cements
N,R – Normal or rapid hardening cements
SL – Slowly hardening cements

[AS 3600-2009] / [AS/RTA 5100.5-2011]

Mean modulus of elasticity of concrete at the appropriate age is calculated as follows.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 233

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Since there is no equation for Compressive Strength at the appropriate age in Australian Standard, it is
calculated based on the following equation specified in CEB-FIP 1978.

[Russian]

[Korean Standard]

Specify the Concrete Compressive Strength at 91 Days and Strength Factor (a,b)

234 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Cement Type a b

Rapid strength 2.9 0.97

Normal 4.5 0.95

Moderate heat 6.2 0.93

[Japan (Hydration)]

Specify the Concrete Compressive Strength at 28 Days and Strength Factor (a,b,d)

Cement Type a b d

Rapid strength 4.5 0.95 1.11

Normal 6.2 0.93 1.15

Moderate heat 2.9 0.97 1.07

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 235

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Japan (Elastic)]

[KCI-USD12]

Specify the Concrete Compressive Strength at 91 Days and Strength Factor (a,b)
N,R – Normal or rapid hardening cements
RS – Rapid hardening high strength cements
SL – Slowly hardening cements

Plastic Hardening Function

Shear Hardening in Modified Mohr-Coulomb model can be defined by Equivalent plastic strain related to
the mobilized shear resistance. Using "Auto-Calculated" option, solver recalculates friction angle based on
the deviatoric plastic strain.

236 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and stress are directly inputted. It is used when defining hardening curve within von Mises
model. Plastic strain begin once the material starts yielding so it can be calculated using following equation.


e p     el   
E
Where, E : Young’s modulus

Stress-Strain Curve

Stress and stain are directly inputted. It is used when defining Stress-Strain Curve within von Mises model.
When Load-Displacement Curve is already known, true strain can be calculated using following equation.

 L0  d   L Pe
  log    log   ,  
 L0   L0  A0
Where, L0, L : Length before/after deformation
A0 : Area before deformation

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 237

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Cohesion Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and cohesion are directly inputted. It is used when describing Cohesion Hardening Curve
within CWFS(Cohesion Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Frictional Angle Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and frictional angle are directly inputted. It is used when describing Frictional Hardening
Curve within CWFS(Cohesion Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

238 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Dilatancy Angle Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and dilatancy angle are directly inputted. It is used when describing Dilatancy Hardening
Curve within CWFS(Cohesion Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Tensile Strength Hardening Curve

Plastic strain and tensile strength are directly inputted. It is used when describing Tensile Strength
Hardening Curve within CWFS(Cohesion Weakening and Frictional Strengthening).

Seepage Boundary function

Used to simulate the head and flow rate difference with time such as node head, node flux rate, surface flux.
Setting the values (head/flux) according to the time flow that fits the specified time unit generates a function
that can be applied to unsteady infiltration analysis.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 239

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

For unsteady infiltration analysis, the time steps for result verification are set separately and the time
function for the steps is used in the analysis. When the time step is beyond the range of the function, the
function value is automatically calculated using linear interpolation. In other words, to apply a 0 function
value to time steps outside the range, the same function value (0) needs to be entered for arbitrary time
steps when creating the function as shown in the figure above.

Nonlinear elastic function (Truss element)

The behavioral characteristics of truss elements or embedded truss elements can be defined as nonlinear
elastic. The stress change according to strain of the truss element can be directly generated as a function
and used. The function can be applied to the tensile (compression) test results of a structural member
(truss affiliated) or to the deformation behavior properties of a general steel member.

Nonlinear elastic function (Point spring/ Elastic link)

The behavioral characteristics of spring or elastic link elements can be defined as nonlinear elastic. The
spring/link stiffness according to the element strain can be defined to generate a function.

240 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

For steady infiltration analysis that assumes a saturated ground, the unsaturated properties are not taken
into account even if they are entered. For the time dependent unsteady analysis, the unsaturated properties
of the ground must be considered. Also, because real foundations are unsaturated and have a certain ratio
of air, unsteady infiltration analysis needs to consider unsaturated characters of the soil for more realistic
results.

Unsaturated property defines the change in permeability coefficient and water content (Degree of saturation)
in the unsaturated region depending on the size of the negative pore water pressure. There are 2 methods
to define the unsaturated property; directly defining (define individually) the permeability function and water
content function using the pressure head (negative pore water pressure) or defining the relationship
between pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-permeability ratio (define
relationship).

Individually

Define the permeability function data and water content function data. Based on the experimental data of
unsaturated soil, the coefficients for each function type can be defined using Curve Fitting or the data can
be directly input through customize. If the experimental data is entered directly, the negative pore water
pressure size is entered by its absolute value and the permeability ratio is found by dividing the unsaturated
value with the saturated state value.

▶ Individual consideration

The provided permeability functions and coefficients are listed below.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 241

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Gardner coefficient]

𝐑 𝐤 : Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

a, n : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data
[Frontal function]

K ratio (Rk) : Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at
h=0)
Ho : Head at which the permeability coefficient no longer decreases

[Van Genuchten function (Permeability ratio)]

𝐑 𝐤 : Permeability ratio (permeability coefficient according to h increase / permeability coefficient at h=0)

a, n, m : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

[Van Genuchten (Water content)]

θw : Volume water content

θr : Residual volume water content
θs : Saturated volume water content
a, n, m : Experimental constants predicted from Curve Fitting of unsaturated experimental data

Relation

The unsaturated material property data can be set on the ground type according to the JICE (Japan
Institute of Construction Eng.) criteria. The pressure head-volumetric water content (degree of saturation)-
permeability ratio relationship function for each type of ground is shown below.

Pressure head(P)-Volumetric water content(T) Pressure head(P)-Degree of saturation(Sr)

-Permeability ratio (K) -Permeability ratio(K)
(T)- (P) (T)- (K) (Sr)- (P) (Sr)- (K)
Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], Gravelly soil [G], [G-F], Gravelly soil [G], [G-F],
[GF] (JICE) [GF] (JICE) [GF] (JICE) [GF] (JICE)
Sandy soil [S], [S-F], Sandy soil [S], [S-F], Sandy soil [S], Sandy soil [S], [S-F],
[SF] (JICE) [SF] (JICE) [S-F], [SF] (JICE) [SF] (JICE)
Sandy soil [SF] (JICE) Cohesive soil [M], [C] (JICE) Sandy soil [SF] (JICE) Cohesive soil [M], [C] (JICE)
Cohesive soil [M], [C] (JICE) User specified Cohesive soil [M], [C] User specified

242 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

(JICE)
User specified User specified

▶Dual consideration

For unsteady analysis, the negative pressure head (pore water pressure) is calculated for each time step
(construction step) and applied, renewing the relative permeability coefficient. The volumetric water content
(degree of saturation), according to the calculated pressure head, is found and the relative permeability,
according to the found volumetric water content (degree of saturation), is renewed for each step.

Strain compatible function

For the 2D equivalent linear analysis, the shear modulus and damping ratio are set as functions of strain to
consider the nonlinearity and inelastic behavior of the ground. If the function is not defined, the ground
material is assumed to be linear and the entered (fixed) shear modulus and damping ratio is applied.
Generally, the ground displays decreasing shear modulus and increasing damping ratio as the shear strain
increases. For complex nonlinear behavior of the ground, the material properties are simplified to linear
equivalent properties. Repeated calculations from the assumed initial values can compute the converging
shear modulus and damping ratio.

▶Dynamic Strain
compatible function

Material properties can be defined from various existing database. The following empirical equation can be
used to generate a function following the stratum properties.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 243

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Database
A strain function stored from existing research can be imported from the database. An example DB is
shown below.

Clay - Pl=5-10 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Lower Bound (Sun et al.0)

Clay - Pl=10-20 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Average (Sun et al.0)
Clay - Pl=20-40 (Sun et al.0) Clay - Upper Bound (Sun et al.0)
Clay - Pl=40-80 (Sun et al.0) Clay (Idriss 1990)
Clay - Pl=80+ (Sun et al.0) Gravel (Seed et al.0)
Clay (Seed and Sun 1989) Linear
Modulus Gravel (Seed et al.0) Rock
Damping
Reduction Linear Rock (Idriss)
Curve
Curve Rock Sand (Idriss 1990)
Rock (Idriss) Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Lower Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Lower Bound Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound Vucetic - Dobry
Sand (Seed and Idriss 1970)
-
Vucetic - Dobry

244 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Response spectrum function

Define the spectrum function used in response spectrum analysis. Because the response spectrum
analysis uses a linearly interpolated spectrum function value for the natural periodicity of the structure,
compact spectrum values are needed for areas where the curvature of the spectrum curve changes rapidly.
The period range of the spectrum function must contain all natural periods of the structure.
The spectrum data types are normalized acceleration (acceleration spectrum, gravitational acceleration),
acceleration, velocity and displacement spectrum and changing the time function data format only changes
the application format, not the data format. The scale factor is a gradient modulus for the entered data and
the entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value. In the 'Damping Ratio' space, input the
damping ratio applied on the response spectrum but if the damping ratio of the target structure is different,
the input spectrum data is processed to fit the structural damping ratio.

Design spectrum function

Use the built-in design spectrum. The default built-in design spectrum types are as follows.

► Korea(Bridge) : Korea, Traffic Specification

► Japan(Bridge02) : Japan, Load instruction and Dynamic Analysis of Building
► China(JTJ004-89) : China, Specifications of Earthquake Resistant Design for Highway Engineering
► KBC 2009 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2009
► KBC 2005 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2005
► IBC2000(ASCE7-98) : USA, International Building Code 2000
► UBC(1997) : USA, Measure of Uniform Building Code 97 (Standards)
► EURO(2004H-ELASTIC) : Europe, Sesismic Design Measure of Structures

Time forcing function

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 245

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

The time forcing function is applied to the loading conditions (ground acceleration, time varying static,
dynamic nodal, dynamic surface) applied to linear/nonlinear time history analysis. A function for the time
history loading value is formed and changing the time function data format only changes the application
format, not the data format.[edit] The scale factor is a gradient modulus for the entered data and the entire
data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value.

246 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Add Time Function

The defined function is also applicable for Dynamic node (surface) loading and time varying static loading.
Specifying 'Force' or 'Moment' uses the time history load as a 'dynamic node (surface) load' input and
specifying 'Normalized Acceleration' or 'Acceleration' uses it to input the 'ground acceleration'. Specifying
'Normal' uses the time history load as the change in static load with time for 'time varying static load' or
'dynamic surface load'.

Import/Earthquake

Save and import frequently used time history loading or select earthquake acceleration data from the
program DB. There are a total of 32 types of earthquake acceleration.

Add Time Sinusoidal

A sine function can be used to define the time history loading. A, C are constants, f is the frequency of the
input load, D is the damping factor and P is the phase angle. If the time history load is entered as a
harmonic function, input the necessary sine function variables and click [Redraw Graph] to view the loading
on the right hand side.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 247

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
1.9
Hinge When crack or yield occurs due to irregular cyclic load such as seismic load, very complex behavior
appears since displacement history to the current affects to the restoring force and displacement
relationship. It is called that hysteresis model which regulates this relationship and is considered to inelastic
hinge at inelastic element.
Inelastic hinges are available in nonlinear, construction stage, consolidation, fully coupled, nonlinear time
history analysis, SRM/SAM (Slope stability analysis) and nonlinear time history analysis with SRM and
element results can be displayed.

248 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Methodology

 Type

[Beam - Lumped] : It concentrates the inelastic behavior represented by rotational and translational springs
at each end and the center. And the remaining parts are assumed to behave elastically. Inelastic hysteresis
behaviors are defined by skeleton curves, which are empirical hysteresis models. The axial component is
represented by a spring at the center and two translational components are represented by springs at each
end defined by force-displacement relationships. The two flexural components, My and Mz, are
represented by springs defined by the relationship between moment and angle of rotation at either I or J or
at both ends.

[Beam – Distributed] : Unlike lumped hinges, it assumes inelastic behavior throughout the member. The
plastic hinge locations in the length direction of a member assigned by the user are defined as the
integration points. The flexibility matrix of a section, which represents the distribution of internal forces, is
calculated through the integration points. The number of integration points can be 1 and between 3 and 20.
If the number of integration points is 2, the moment at the free end of a cantilever beam does not come to
exactly zero due to the inherited characteristic of the integration method. Therefore, two integration points
are not permitted. Inelastic hysteresis behavior can be defined by 2 models, empirical Skeleton and Fiber.
The hinge behaviors can be expressed by force - deformation relationships in each axis direction, and the
hinge hysteresis behavior of the flexural components can be expressed by the relationships of moment and
angle of rotation. Inelastic behaviors can be defined for 3 axis components and 2 flexural (My & Mz)
components.

[Truss] : The axial component is represented by a spring at the center defined by the force-displacement
relationship. The inelastic hysteresis behavior of a spring is defined by a skeleton model.

[Spring / Elastic Link] : Unlike Lumped and Distributed hinges, which are influenced by the inelastic
properties of materials and members, the inelastic plastic hinge properties for the corresponding linear
properties of each component of Property Type defined in General Link Properties are defined. The elastic
stiffness of each component is defined by effective stiffness and acts as the initial stiffness in inelastic
analysis. The inelastic hysteresis behavior of a spring is defined by a skeleton model. The inelastic
properties of a spring can be defined for all 3 translational and 3 rotational directions.

 Interaction

The type of considering interaction between axial force and moment is selected.

[None] : Interaction between axial force and moments is not considered.

[P-M in Strength Calculation] : N-M interaction in time history analysis is reflected by calculating the flexural
yield strength of a hinge considering the effect of axial force. In this method, the interaction between biaxial
bending moments is ignored. The axial force is assumed to act with each directional bending moment
independently when the hinge status is evaluated at each time step. Recalculation of bending moment yield
strength reflecting axial force is carried out in a loading condition, which satisfies the following three
conditions:

1) It must be the first among the sequential time history load cases, which will be consecutively
analyzed.
2) Inelastic static analysis must be carried out.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 249

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

The elements are inelastic beam elements assigned with hinge properties to which P-M interaction is
applied. The initial axial and bending moment at this time are determined by the combination of linear
elastic analysis results of all the static loads contained in Time Varying Static Load. The factors used in the
combination are defined by the Scale Factors specified in Time Varying Static Load.

[P-M-M in Status Determination] : This method uses a multi-axis hinge hysteresis model in inelastic time
history analysis. Interaction between axial force and biaxial moments is realized by applying the plasticity
theory. The interaction is considered at each time step through evaluating the status of inelastic hinges
using the 3-dimensional yield surface. FEA NX supports the kinematic hardening type.

▶Yield Surface
Parameter

▶Yield Surface Function

250 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

 Interaction

If "P-M in Strength Calculation" or "P-M-M in Status Determination" is selected in Interaction Type, enter
the related data for P-M interaction curve and 3-D yield surface.

[Component]
Select the components of sectional strength for which properties will be entered. The Spring Type permits
properties in all directional components, whereas Lumped and Distributed types permit all but the Mx
component.

[Hinge Location]
Select the locations of lumped inelastic hinges. Axial component is fixed to the center of a member. I-end, j-
end or both ends can be selected for the bending moment components.

[Num. of Sections]
Enter the number of integration points for inelastic hinges of the distributed type. Up to 20 sections are
permitted, and moment - curvature relationships are calculated at all the sections corresponding to the
points.

[Hysteresis Model]
Select a hysteresis model for an inelastic hinge.

Hinge Components (Single)

 Hysteresis Model Type

[Origin-oriented] : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. Response
points at unloading move toward the origin and again move along the skeleton curve after reaching the
opposite skeleton curve.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 251

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Peck-oriented] : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. Response
points at unloading move toward the point of maximum displacement on the opposite side. If the first
yielding has not occurred on the opposite side, the response points move toward the first yielding point on
the skeleton curve.

[Kinematic] : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. The unloading
stiffness is identical to the elastic stiffness. It shows the tendency of strength increase with the increase in
loading. This is used to model the Bauschinger effect of metallic materials. Accordingly, it is cautioned that
energy dissipation may be overestimated for concrete. Due to the characteristic of the model, only the
positive (+) and negative (-) symmetry is permitted for the strength reduction ratios after yielding.

252 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Clough] : Response points at the initial loading move along a bilinear skeleton curve. Unloading stiffness is
obtained from the elastic stiffness reduced by the equation below. As the deformation progresses after
yielding, unloading stiffness reduces gradually.


 D 
K r  K o  1   K o
 Dmax 

 D 
K r  K o  1   K o
 Dmin 
Ko : Initial elastic stiffness

D 1 : Yield displacement in the region of the first unloading
Dmax : Maximum displacement in the region of tension
Dmin : Maximum displacement in the region of compression
 : Constant for determining unloading stiffness

If the sign of loading changes in the process of unloading, response points move toward the point of
maximum displacement in the zone of progressing direction. If yielding has not occurred in this zone, the
response points move toward the yield point on the skeleton curve. If unloading becomes loading without
changing the loading sign, the response points move along the unloading path. If the loading continually
increases, loading continues on the skeleton curve again.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 253

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Degrading] : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. The load-
displacement coordinates at unloading move to the path of reaching the maximum deformation point on the
opposite side due to the change of unloading stiffness once in the middle. If yielding has not occurred on
the opposite side, the first yielding point is assumed to be the maximum deformation point.

[Takeda] : Response points at the initial loading move along a tetralinear skeleton curve. If the current
displacement or deformation, D, does not exceed D3, the hysteresis rules are identical to the Original
Taketa hysteresis. If the current displacement or deformation, D, exceeds D3, response points move along
the slope K4. For unloading, response points move by the same rules as the Original Taketa hysteresis.
The Takeda tetralinear hysteresis model can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type
of Lumped Type and Distributed Type.

254 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Modified Takeda] : Response points at the initial loading move along a trilinear skeleton curve. If the
current displacement or deformation, D, exceeds D2 for the first time or the maximum deformation point up
until now, response points move along the trilinear skeleton curve. If unloading takes place from this
straight line toward the opposite direction, the points move along the slope K un2 until the point of the
restoring force becoming 0. If the restoring force goes beyond the 0 point, the points move toward the
maximum deformation point on the opposite side. Even in the case where unloading takes place from the
straight line directed toward the maximum deformation point from the point of the 0 restoring force, the
points move along the slope K un2 until the points reach the 0 restoring force. After the point of 0 restoring
force is passed, the points move toward the maximum deformation point on the opposite side. The Modified
Takeda type hysteresis model can be applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped
Type and Distributed Type.

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 255

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Normal Bilinear] : Response points at the initial loading move along a bilinear skeleton curve. The
unloading stiffness is identical to the elastic stiffness. The Normal Bilinear type hysteresis model can be
applied to beam element and General Link of Spring Type of Lumped Type and Distributed Type.

[Modified Ramberg-Osgood]

[Modified Hardin-Drnevich]

256 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

 Symmetric / Asymmetric

Select the type of Skeleton Curve.

 Yield Function

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 257

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Stiffness Reduction Ratio] : Enter the stiffness reduction ratios of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength -
Stiffness Reduction Ratio is selected for Input Type.

[Yield Displacement] : Enter the yield displacement of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Yield
Displacement is selected for Input Type.

[Force (Yield Strength)] : Yield strength is specified. It is user defined based on material and section
properties. The user specifies positive (+) values regardless of tension (t) or compression (c). The program
treats compression as negative (-) internally.

 Unloading Stiffness Parameter

[Exponent in Unloading Stiffness Calculation]

This is an option used to determine the unloading stiffness of the outer loop used in the Clough and Takeda
type models among hysteresis models of skeleton curves. This is used to reflect the effect of reduction in
stiffness, which occurs as the deformation progresses after yielding. The unloading stiffness is determined
by the elastic stiffness reduced by the yield displacement and maximum displacement in the zone where
unloading begins and the exponent entered here.

[Inner Loop Unloading Stiffness Reduction Factor]

This is used to determine the unloading stiffness of the inner loop. The inner loop is formed when unloading
occurs before reaching the target point on the skeleton curve while reloading after the loading sign changes
in the process of unloading. The unloading stiffness of the inner loop is calculated by multiplying the
unloading stiffness of the outer loop by the reduction ratio for the unloading stiffness of the inner loop.

Hinge Components (Multi)

258 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[P-M Interaction Curves]

Enter the P-M interaction curve data required to calculate 3-dimensional yield surfaces. All strength values
must be entered with positive sign. Sign convention for plotting P-M curve is positive for compression and
negative for tension.

Strengths for the 1st P-M Interaction Curves

PC(t): First yield strength subject to pure tension force
PC(c): First yield strength subject to pure compression force
PCBy: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the first yield interaction curve for the y-axis
moment of the section
PCBz: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the first yield interaction curve for the z-axis
moment of the section
MCy,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the first yield interaction curve for the y-axis
moment of the section
MCz,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the first yield interaction curve for the z-axis
moment of the section

Strengths for the 2nd P-M Interaction Curves

PY(t): Second yield strength subject to pure tension force
PY(c): Second yield strength subject to pure compression force
PYBy: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the second stage yield interaction curve for the
y-axis moment of the section
PYBz: Axial force at the time of balanced failure in the second yield interaction curve for the z-
axis moment of the section
MYy,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the second yield interaction curve for the y-axis
moment of the section
MYz,max: Maximum bending yield strength in the second yield interaction curve for the z-axis
moment of the section

[Approximation of Yield Surface Shape]

On the basis of P-M interaction curve, the parameters for 3-dimensional yield surface are either user
defined or auto-calculated. If some items are auto-calculated and the remainder is to be user defined, Auto-
calculation should be performed first, and then necessary items can be modified after converting to User
Input. In case of Alpha, only user defined entry is possible. The value of each parameter is used in the
equation of yield surface displayed in the dialog box.

Beta y, Beta z, Gamma: Being the exponential powers of P-My or P-Mz interactions, different
values can be entered for the first and second yields. For Beta y and Beta z on the other hand,
two separate values representing the ranges of larger and smaller axial forces relative to the axial
force at the time of balanced failure can be entered.
st nd
Alpha: Exponent for My-Mz interaction for the 1 and 2 yielding

[Stiffness Reduction Ratio]

Enter the stiffness reduction ratios of a sloped skeleton curve when Strength - Stiffness Reduction Ratio is
selected for Input Type.

α1: Ratio of stiffness immediately after the first yielding divided by the initial stiffness
α2: Ratio of stiffness immediately after the second yielding divided by the initial stiffness

[Initial Stiffness]

Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function | 259

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

The initial stiffness used in inelastic analysis is either selected or entered by the user.

Elastic Stiffness: elastic stiffness of a member is used as the initial stiffness for inelastic analysis.
User Defined: the user directly enters the initial stiffness if the Input Type is Strength - Stiffness
Reduction Ratio.

260 | Section 1. Property/Coordinate/Function

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Section 2 Control
Point
2.1
Size Control

Overview

Specify the size of elements surrounding the selected point. It is only applied to points imprinted on the
surface or points that exist as interior objects. Points that exist on sub-shapes, such as the corners of a
surface, are automatically ignored during the mesh creation process.

Methodology

Specify the point and input the mesh size with respect to the current length unit to generate a mesh around
the selected point.

'Seeding' is defined as the 'position where the node will be generated’.

If a seed is assigned to the shape and the shape is then modified, all seeding information is erased.
Hence, seeding assignment is best d1 just before the mesh creation, after the geometrical shape has
been finished. Seed information is the value that is applied first during mesh creation and the value is
continuously applied until it is erased or removed.
The generated seed information can be registered on the Control mesh column of the Model tree by the
specified name. The seed information can be erased/modified using the Context Menu.

Section 2. Control | 261

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Edge seed

Overview

Select edges (lines) and use the following 5 methods to preset the position (mesh size) of the new mesh
node. The node spacing can be directly entered or a selected line can be divided into constant or linearly
changing segments.

Methodology

[Interval Length] : Input the node spacing in the current length unit.
[Number of Divisions] : Divides the selected line into multiple divisions, specified by the input number.
[Linear Grading (Length)] : Input the spacing between the start and end points of a line to automatically set
the node positions through linear interpolation.
[Linear Grading (Ratio)] : Input the spacing ratio (end/start) between the start and end points of a line.

▶Interval Length
▶▶Number of Divisions
▶▶▶Linear Grading
(Length)
▶▶▶▶Linear Grading
(Ratio)

262 | Section 2. Control

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Hyperbolic Tangent] : Input the start length and number of divisions to specify the nodes positions
considering the total length of the line and number of divisions.

▶Hyperbolic Tangent

The number of divisions and certain intervals to the Linear Gradient (Length/Ratio) method. Entering the
number of divisions makes it a priority. The certain interval defines the section of the selected line where
linear change will take place. Input 0 for the start point and 1 for the end point. For an input of 0.3, the line
will be divided by the specified constant value until 0.3 of the length from the start point. From that point,
linear change takes place. Entering a negative value applies the certain interval value from the end point.
For an input of -0.3, the line will be divided by the specified constant value until 0.3 of the length from the
end point. The rest of the line will undergo linear change. Check the symmetric seed option to generate
seeds that are symmetric about the center of the line.

Custom seed

Specify the node positions on the selected edge by entering the coordinates in the table directly. Entering a
ratio between 0~1 automatically calculates the node position (length) of the selected line.

▶Custom seed

Section 2. Control | 263

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
2.2
Default Size The mesh size and number of divisions used in the mesh creation process can be preset. The default mesh
Control size is not forced upon and is the value entered in the Generate mesh dialog box. Hence, the user can
input a different value to generate a different size mesh during the mesh creation process.

Methodology

Check the ‘Use Default Size’ to apply the default setting to all Generate mesh dialog boxes. The current
length unit can be set directly or can be defined by the number of divisions of the selected shape.

Overview
2.3
Property Control Pre-assign the properties (Edge, Face, Solid) of the geometry shape.

Methodology

▶Edge (Property Control)

▶▶Face (Property Control)
▶▶▶Solid (Property
Control)

The element properties can be assigned simultaneously as the mesh creation. However, this function can
be used to pre-assign the properties of the geometry shape and to automatically generate elements using
the assigned properties. Pre-assigning a property give it priority over other property assignments during
mesh creation.

264 | Section 2. Control

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
2.4
Match Seed Specify the seed by transferring the seed information of a seeded edge to another edge. It is generally
used to make the node positions of 2 separated edges similar to generate a homogeneous mesh or to ease
the share node operation at a point with a very small gap.

Methodology

▶Match Seed
(Projection/Proportional)

Select the target edge and the already seeded source edge to transfer the seed information from the
source edge to the target edge.

[Projection] The source edge seeds are projected on to the target edge in the minimum distance direction.
[Proportional] Set the ratio such that the target edge has the same node division ratio as the source edge.

Section 2. Control | 265

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
2.5
Layer Control This tool creates several layers of mesh around holes (circular closed shapes) to obtain more accurate
stress concentration result

Methodology

Select the target surface where circular shape is present and edges from circular shape (closed edges
domain).

Number of Layers
Specify the number of layers to be offset (minimum value 1).

Total Layer Height

Specifies the height of the total number of boundary layers.

Layer Growth Rate

Proportionally adjusts the height value as the layer advances when the number of boundary layers is 2 or
more.

Example:
When 1 is input, it is represented by the same height.
If it is larger than 1, it becomes larger.
If it is smaller than 1 a layer is created with increasingly smaller heights.

266 | Section 2. Control

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Section 3 Generate
Overview
3.1
1D Generate a 1D structural mesh by selecting an edge. It is mostly used to generate independent structural
elements that do not require node connections with neighboring ground elements.

Methodology

▶Generate 1D mesh

Embedded trusses or Pile elements are interface elements that do not require node connections with
neighboring ground elements. These elements can set independent mesh sizes or number of divisions to
generate meshes independently.
The assigned properties can be set or new properties can be added during Mesh creation.

Section 3. Generate | 267

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Orientation (Element Z-Axis)]

This function is used to unify the direction property of a 1D element to 1 direction or to set the major and
minor axes directions. Adjust the Z axis direction by checking the element coordinate axis and assigning
with reference to the Beta angle.

 Reference node: Select the reference node for the sectional direction of the 1D element. The
element Z coordinate direction is set with reference to the selected node.
 Reference Vector (GCS): Set the Z coordinate direction of the selected element using the GCS
direction or the input vector direction.
 Beta Angle: Angles 0, 90 and 180 can be chosen, and the selected Beta angle rotates the
element by that angle with reference to the X axis.

▶Beta angle:0
▶▶Beta angle:90
▶▶▶Beta angle:180

Advanced Option ( )

Small gaps within the tolerance can be automatically joined for mesh creation. When creating a mesh for 2
or more edges, individual independent mesh sets can be generated.

268 | Section 3. Generate

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Auto-Face
3.2
2D Overview

Generate a 2D mesh by selecting a surface. It is mostly used to generate a mesh in the ground or specified
area of a 2D model.

Methodology

Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions for the surface forming edge to set the mesh
size. Assigned properties can be specified during mesh creation, and the name of the mesh set can be pre-
determined.

▶Auto-generate surface
mesh

Advanced Option ( )

Additional options are provided depending on the mesh generation method. The mesh shape, mesh density
and generation algorithm can be set. The initial settings take into account the efficiency and accuracy
depending on the geometric shape for the best mesh generation. The detailed settings are as follows.

[Merge Nodes]

Section 3. Generate | 269

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Merge 2 or more nodes within the tolerance during mesh generation. Nodes separated by tiny gaps are the
main sources of error during analysis, and small gaps within the tolerance can be automatically joined for
mesh creation.

[Refinement Factor]
Select the mesh size (mesh density) that will be created in the interior of the selected shape. A more
compact mesh is created as the value approaches [Fine]. Fine meshes provide more detailed result
analysis, but it is important to consider analysis time and efficiency when selecting the mesh density.

[2D Mesher]
Select the mesh generation algorithm for mesh generation. The user can select between three options;
Loop Mesher, Grid Mesher and Delaunay Mesher. The generated shape and process change with the
selected algorithm.

 Loop: Mesh generation method and shape based on Looping algorithm

 Grid: Complex mesh generation based on Modified grid algorithm
 Delaunay: Indirect mesh generation based on Delaunay triangulation algorithm

▶Loop
▶▶Grid
▶▶▶Delaunay

[Element type]
Generate a mesh with the selected shape. The user can select between a triangle, quadrilateral or a
combination of the 2. Quadrilateral meshes provide a more stable analysis, but for complex geometric
shapes where quadrilateral meshes are difficult to generate, it is better to generate a triangular mesh.

[Higher-Order Element]
Generate another node between mesh nodes to create a higher order mesh. Higher order adds a
computation point and therefore, a more detailed analysis is possible, but the analysis time becomes longer.
It is recommended that meshes be created with reference to the mesh shape and mesh density, and the
higher order meshes be created only when necessary, depending on the analysis method. For example,
generate a higher order mesh for the strength reduction method on a slope face where analysis of detailed
deformation sections is necessary.

Check the [Skip Meshed Face(s)] to prevent overlapping generation of meshes on a surface with an
existing mesh. The homogeneity option can be set to make the mesh sizes as uniform as possible. Also,
when generating meshes on multiple surfaces at the same time, the mesh sets can be individualized by
each surface or grouped into 1 mesh set.

270 | Section 3. Generate

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Auto-Area

Overview

Select lines that form a closed area to generate a mesh in that domain. It does not create a surface for a
complex 2D shape and is used to generate a mesh in all areas.

Methodology

Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions for the area forming edge to set the mesh
size.
If the closed domain is within another closed domain, use the [Mesh Inner Domain] option to divide the
domain and auto-generate. If an interior line (edge) or point is selected, the option identifies the position of
the line or point and creates a node. In particular, the [Include Interior Edges] option can extract sub-
shapes from an edge and is a vital option when generating a structural element.

▶Auto-generate area
element

Section 3. Generate | 271

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Map-Face

Overview

Select a surface and auto-generate a quadrilateral mesh. The Mapped mesh maps the selected shape with
square domains and generates a mesh on the mapped domains.

Methodology

Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions on the surface forming edge.
The target shape must have at least 4 outlines for the mesh to be generated and if the shape has too many
outlines, the automatic mapping may not work. In this case, select 4 corners to manually map the edges.
The 4 selected points become the corners of the square domain and lines between each point are mapped
by 1 side of the square domain.

For mapped domains, mesh cannot be created if the opposing outlines (the group of outlines opposite each
other after mapping) have different number of generated mesh elements. Hence, it is convenient to work
after entering the seed information on the edge beforehand.

▶Create mapped mesh

surface

Generating a mesh by selecting multiple surfaces in random order may not generate a mesh because the
number of divisions on the left and right are not the same. To avoid this, specify the mesh generation
order as X axis, Y axis or Z axis and align the surfaces in order before generating a mesh.

272 | Section 3. Generate

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Map-Area

Overview

Select lines that form a closed domain to generate a quadrilateral mesh.

Methodology

Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions on the surface forming edges. Select
[Automatic Mapped-Boundaries] or [Manual Mapped Boundaries] edge composition to select edges that
form a closed domain.

▶Automatic Mapped-
Boundaries
▶▶Manual Mapped
Boundaries

[Automatic Mapped-Boundaries]
Generate a 2D mapped mesh by automatically selecting edges that form the desired domain. The mesh
may not be created due to the model shape and algorithm properties.

[Manual Mapped Boundaries]

When the 2D mapped mesh cannot be automatically generated, the edges are divided into 4 explicit groups
and then selected. All edges within an edge group must be connected and the edge groups need to be
specified in order, either in the clockwise or counter clockwise direction. Finally, the selected edges must
form 1 closed domain.

Section 3. Generate | 273

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Auto-Solid
3.3
3D Overview

Automatically generate a mesh on a 3D solid shape. The mesh shape can be selected between a
tetrahedral and a hexahedron centered hybrid (tetrahedral + hexahedron combination shape).

Methodology

Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions on the solid forming edges to set the mesh
size. Also, the mesh density can determine the mesh size by the “More” or “Less” option in [Automatic].

▶Auto-generate solid
mesh

[Mesh generator]
The default tetrahedron element and hexahedral centered hybrid element are both supported. Like the 2D
mesh, quadrilateral-based meshes provide more stable analysis than triangle-based meshes. Hybrid
elements are formed by combining a pyramid and tetrahedron on the hexahedron base.

▶Hybrid mesh shape

[Match Adjacent Faces]

274 | Section 3. Generate

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

The most important part in mesh generation is the node connection between adjacent elements. If the
nodes are not connected, errors can occur during analysis and if the “Fit adjacent mesh” option is checked
off, the nodes may not be connected even though an interface forms between the 2 solids. Unless the node
is removed separately, always keep this option checked when generating a mesh.

Advanced Option ( )

The mesh shape and mesh density options can be set additionally depending on the mesh generation
method. The detailed settings are as follows.

[Interior Edge/Point]
Generate a solid mesh considering the position and size of the interior edges inside a solid. If the whole
edge is within the solid, just selecting the edge creates a solid mesh that considers the interior edge.
However, if the edge is touching or penetrating the exterior boundary surface, the intersecting point needs
to be imprinted on the surface of the solid and the mesh division point needs to be set to generate a solid
mesh. Selecting an interior point creates a mesh node at the point when the mesh is created.
The additionally selected interior edges can be assigned a 1D structural property during mesh generation.

▶Include interior
edge/point

[Merge Nodes]
Merge 2 or more nodes within the tolerance during mesh generation. Nodes separated by tiny gaps are
main sources of error during analysis and small gaps within the tolerance can be automatically joined for
mesh creation.

[Refinement Factor]
Set the interior mesh density in addition to the mesh size to create a better quality mesh.
[Higher-Order Element]

Section 3. Generate | 275

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Generate another node between mesh nodes for a more detailed analysis, but the analysis time becomes
longer per additional node.

Other options are available, such as [Geometry Proximity], which divides meshes that have a size
difference during the mesh generation process, and {Pattern mesh}, which makes the mesh sizes as
uniform as possible.

Map-Solid

Overview
Automatically generate a hexahedral mesh on 3D solid.

Methodology
Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions on the corner edges to set the mesh size.
Mapped meshes use only hexahedral shapes to generate the mesh and so, the seed information on the 2
opposing surfaces needs to be identical. Hence for complex shapes, the solid needed to be divided
appropriately or the seed information must be input in advance.

▶Auto-generate
hexahedral mesh

[Select Base Face]

Use the Sweep Based Mapped Mesh algorithm to generate a mesh when the 3D mapped mesh is not
generated by the Full Mapping algorithm. However, the mapped mesh may not be generated if the shape is
complex and the reference surface cannot be automatically found. In this case, directly select the reference
surface for Sweep.

[Match Adjacent Mesh]

Generating a mesh by selecting multiple solids in random order may not generate a mesh because the
number of divisions on the left and right are not the same. To avoid this, specify the mesh generation order
as X axis, Y axis or Z axis and align the surfaces in order before generating a mesh.

2D -> 3D

276 | Section 3. Generate

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
Generate a tetrahedral or hybrid (hexahedral centered) mesh using 2D mesh information for a 2D mesh
enclosed domain with no solids.

Methodology
The 2D mesh must completely surround the domain where the 3D mesh will be created without any free
edges. The original 3D mesh can be deleted or kept.

▶2D3D Mesh
generation

Advanced options ( )
The following advanced options can be set when generating a 3D mesh from a 2D mesh. The nodes within
the tolerance can be automatically merged to prevent analysis error and the interior mesh density of the
solid mesh can be specified. Selecting the [Avoid Tetra with All Boundary Nodes] option prevents the 4
nodes of the tetrahedral element from all being on the boundary surface. This option puts at least 2
elements in the thickness direction of a thin solid and granting it a boundary condition can prevent the 4
nodes of the tetrahedral element from all being restricted.

Section 3. Generate | 277

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
3.4
Remesh Regenerate a 2D mesh using already created 2D mesh information to define the surface. This option can
be used to edit the mesh size and shape.

Methodology

When selecting the target for mesh generation, surfaces that do not have an existing 2D mesh are not
selected. The mesh type can be selected from triangular, quadrilateral and triangular+quadrilateral
combined elements.

▶Regenerate 2D mesh

[Maximum Element Size]

Specify the maximum Element size of the new mesh. However, if the target surface is seeded, the seed is
also applied to the mesh regeneration process. Hence, to specify a new mesh size, the existing seeds need
to be deleted before regeneration.

[Patch Angle]
Input the maximum angle between the selected existing element and the new generated element. The
angle needs to be smaller than 45 degrees.

[Keep Boundary Nodes]

Decide whether to keep the boundary nodes. The boundary node positions may not be changed, even if
the element shape or size is changed, to connect with other nodes of adjacent meshes.

278 | Section 3. Generate

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Section 4 Mesh Set

Methodology
4.1
Rename Change the name of the mesh set by adding numeric suffixes in the specified order. Because the data used
for construction step is classified by the name of the mesh set, it is recommended to classify the mesh sets
by domain or property in advance. It is especially useful to use the Wizard to automatically set the
construction step.

Methodology

Select all the mesh sets that need name changes and set the classified order and name. For example,
selecting 3 mesh sets and entering “Excavation” for the name and “3” for the Start number changes the
name of the mesh sets in the classified order to “Excavation-003”, “Excavation-004”, “Excavation-005”.

[Coordinate]
Specify the mesh set order with respect to the Global Rectangular or Cylindrical coordinate system. Specify
st nd rd st
the order according to priority by specifying each coordinate axis direction in 1 , 2 , or 3 priorities. The 1
nd
axis is given the most preference, and the 2 axis becomes the order reference when the coordinates of
st st
the 1 axis are equal. Hence, if the target is assigned an order in the 1 axis, the order does not change
even if the coordinates in the 2nd axis is different. If the coordinates are the same in both the 1st and 2nd
axes, the 3rd axis determines the order.

[Base Point of Mesh Set (Bounding Box)]

Specify the coordinates of the calculation position used for order comparison. For example, selecting the
center compares the position of the mesh set using the coordinates of the center point of the mesh set
boundary box.

[Order]
Increase or decrease the suffix number in order of specification.

Section 4. Mesh Set | 279

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
4.2
Copy Copy the generated mesh set. The copied mesh can be used in various ways. For example, the mesh can
be generated without further geometrical modeling when comparing different materials or properties on
each copied element to the original element; or when the same element is uniformly placed for each
construction step.

Methodology

Select the target mesh set and input the new position to copy all the nodes and elements of the original
mesh set to the new position 1 by 1.

280 | Section 4. Mesh Set

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
4.3
Create Create multiple empty mesh sets according to the specified name rule. This function is useful for defining
an element in 1 set into multiple sets.

Methodology

Input the name of the newly generated mesh set. When creating multiple mesh sets, input the starting
number and number of mesh sets.

Data used in analysis is classified by mesh sets. Hence, the mesh set needs to be subdivided depending
on the analysis case. Generating an empty mesh set, clicking it with the right mouse button and bringing
up the Context Menu allows the [Include/Exclude of Elements and Nodes] for each mesh set, as shown
below.

<Include/Exclude Elements/Nodes>

Section 4. Mesh Set | 281

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Section 5 Protrude
Node -> 1D
5.1
Extrude Overview

Generate a 1D element by extruding a node in the set direction. This function can be used to create a
structural element without drawing a line.

Methodology

Select the element node to extrude and specify the extrude direction and length. The element can be
created by extruding in 1 direction or 2 directions.

▶Extrude node

282 | Section 5. Protrude

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Orientation (Element Z axis)]

This function is used to unify the direction property of a 1D element to 1 direction or to set the major and
minor axis directions. Adjust the Z axis direction by checking the element coordinate axis and assign with
reference to the Beta angle.

 Reference Node : Select the reference node for the sectional direction of the 1D element. The
element Z coordinate direction is set with reference to the selected node.
 Reference Vector (GCS) : Set the Z coordinate direction of the selected element using the GCS
direction or the input vector direction.
 Beta Angle : Angles 0,90,180 can be chosen and the selected Beta angle rotates the element by
that angle with reference to the X axis.

▶Beta angle:0
▶▶Beta angle:90
▶▶▶Beta angle:180

Extrude Direction

Select the element extrude direction with reference to the GCS or input the start and end points of the
direction vector using the 2-point vector function. It is useful when extruding in an arbitrary direction.

Extrude Information

Set the total length and division of 1D element which will be created. The division spacing can be set as
either uniform or nonuniform. Entering a negative value for length (Offset,Times) extrudes in the opposite
direction to the axis or vector direction.

[Nonuniform]
Specify the offset length and number simultaneously. The length can be listed using a comma (,) or as
number@length for continuously repeating extrude operations.
For example, entering 10@3 creates 10 elements with a length of 3 each and entering 2,3,4 creates 3
elements, each with a length of 2,3 and 4.
[Uniform]
Set the offset length or number, or input the total length and division spacing.
Advanced Option ( )

Section 5. Protrude | 283

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

When checking the User defined mesh set, the generated elements are classified and registered in
different mesh sets depending on the number of inputs in the [Offsets per Set] option. Entering a number
registers the mesh sets in the specified uniform offset spacing and entering 2 or more numbers register the
mesh sets in the specified uniform offset spacing and the rest are registered separately on the mesh set.
When entering 2 or more numbers, the sum of input numbers should not be more than the total number of
offsets.

1D -> 2D

Overview

Generate a 2D element by extruding a 1D element, element edge (element outline) or line (edge).
Here, the used edge needs to be seeded (have seed information) or needs to be connected to the mesh.

Methodology

Select the 1D element, element side or edge to be extruded and set the extrude direction, length and
number of divisions. The element can be created by extruding in 1 direction or 2 directions. The original
element used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element is moved to the end of
the extruded element.

284 | Section 5. Protrude

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶1D element
-> 2D element extrude
▶▶Element edge
->2D element extrude
▶▶▶Geometry edge
->2D element extrude

Extrude Direction

Select the element extrude direction with reference to the GCS or input the start and end points of the
direction vector using the 2-point vector function. It is useful when extruding in an arbitrary direction.

Extrude Information

Set the total length and division of 2D element will be created. The division spacing can be set as either
uniform or non-uniform. Entering a negative value for length (offset, spacing) extrudes in the opposite
direction to the axis or vector direction.

[Non-uniform]
Specify the offset length and number simultaneously. The length can be listed using a comma (,) or as
number@length for continuously repeating extrude operations.
For example, entering 10@3 creates 10 elements with a length of 3 each and entering 2,3,4 creates 3
elements, each with a length of 2,3 and 4.

[Uniform]
Set the offset length or number, or input the total length and division spacing.

The shape of the 2D element can be selected from a triangle or a quadrilateral in advanced options ( ).

Section 5. Protrude | 285

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

2D -> 3D

Overview

Generate a 3D element by extruding a 2D element of a boundary surface of a 3D element.

Methodology

Select the 2D element or 3D element face to be extruded and set the extrude direction, length and number
of divisions. The element can be created by extruding in 1 direction or 2 directions. The original element
used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element is moved to the end of the
extruded element.

▶2D element
->3D element extrude
▶▶Element face
->3D element extrude

Extrude Direction

Select the element extrude direction with reference to the GCS or input the start and end points of the
direction vector using the 2 points vector function. It is useful when extruding in an arbitrary direction.

Extrude Information

Set the total length and division of 3D element which will be created. The division spacing can be set as
either uniform or nonuniform. Entering a negative value for length (offset, spacing) extrudes in the opposite
direction to the axis or vector direction.

286 | Section 5. Protrude

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Nonuniform]
Specify the offset length and number simultaneously. The length can be listed using a comma (,) or as
number@length for continuously repeating extrude operations.
For example, entering 10@3 creates 10 elements with a length of 3 each and entering 2,3,4 creates 3
elements, each with a length of 2,3 and 4.

[Uniform]
Set the offset length or number, or input the total length and division spacing.

Node -> 1D
5.2
Revolve Overview

Generate a 1D element by rotating a node about the specified revolution axis by the input angle. It can be
used to create various arch or circle shaped 1D elements without using geometry shape.

Overview

Generate a 1D element by rotating a node about the specified rotation axis by the input angle. It can be
used to create various arch or circle shaped, 1D elements without using geometry shape.

▶Node revolve extrude

Rotation Axis

Section 5. Protrude | 287

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Select the rotation axis with reference to the GCS or input the start and end points of the direction vector
using the 2 points vector function. '2 points vector' is useful when setting the reference axis in an arbitrary
direction. When using the GCS, use the [Locate] option to set the revolution axis position using its
coordinates. The revolution axis is moved to the coordinate position and the node is rotated about the
moved axis.

Revolution Information

Set the rotation angle and division of 1D element which will be created. The division spacing can be set as
either uniform or non-uniform. Entering a positive angle rotate extrudes in the counterclockwise direction
and entering a negative angle rotate extrudes in the clockwise direction.

[Non-uniform]
Specify the rotation angle. The angle can be listed using a comma (,) or as number@angle for continuously
repeating angles.
For example, entering 10@20 continuously creates 10 elements that are rotated 20 degrees from the
previous element and entering 10,20,30 creates 3 elements, each rotated by 10 degrees, 20 degrees and
30 degrees.

[Uniform]
Set the rotation angle and number, or input the total rotation angle and division spacing.

1D-> 2D

Overview

Generate a 2D element by revolve extruding a 1D element, element side (element outline) or line (edge).
Here, the used edge needs to be seeded (have seed information) or needs to be connected to the mesh.

Methodology

Select the 1D element, element side or edge to be revolve extruded and set the rotation axis, rotation angle
and number of divisions. The element can be created by extruding in 1 direction or 2 directions. The

288 | Section 5. Protrude

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

original element used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element is moved to
the end of the extruded element.

▶1D element
->2D revolve extrude
▶▶Element edge
->2D revolve extrude
▶▶▶Geometry edge
->2D revolve extrude

Rotation Axis

Select the rotation axis with reference to the GCS or input the start and end points of the direction vector
using the 2 points vector function. It is useful when setting the reference axis in an arbitrary direction. When
using the GCS, use the [Locate] option to set the revolution axis position using its coordinates. The
revolution axis is moved to the coordinate position and the node is rotate extruded about the moved axis.

Revolution Information

Set the rotation angle and division of 1D element will be created. The division spacing can be set as either
uniform or non-uniform. Entering a positive angle rotate extrudes in the counterclockwise direction and
entering a negative angle rotate extrudes in the clockwise direction.

[Non-uniform]
Specify the rotation angle. The angle can be listed using a comma (,) or as number@angle for continuously
repeating angles.
For example, entering 10@20 continuously creates 10 elements that are rotated 20 degrees from the
previous element and entering 10,20,30 creates 3 elements, each rotated by 10 degrees, 20 degrees and
30 degrees.

[Uniform]
Set the rotation angle and number, or input the total rotation angle and division spacing.
The shape of the 2D element can be selected from a triangle or a quadrilateral in advanced options ( ).

2D-> 3D

Overview

Generate a 3D element by rotate extruding a 2D element or a boundary surface of a 3D element.

Section 5. Protrude | 289

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Methodology

Select the 2D element or 3D element boundary surface to be revolve extruded and set the rotation axis,
rotation angle and number of divisions. The element can be created by extruding in 1 direction or 2
directions. The original element used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element
is moved to the end of the extruded element.

▶2D element
->3D revolve extrude
▶▶Element Face
->3D revolve extrude

Rotation Axis

Select the rotation axis with reference to the GCS or input the start and end points of the direction vector
using the 2 points vector function. It is useful when setting the reference axis in an arbitrary direction.
When using the GCS, use the [Locate] option to set the revolution axis position using its coordinates. The
revolution axis is moved to the coordinate position and the node is rotate extruded about the moved axis.

290 | Section 5. Protrude

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Revolution Information

Set the rotation angle and division of 1D element will be created. The division spacing can be set as either
uniform or non-uniform. Entering a positive angle rotate extrudes in the counterclockwise direction and
entering a negative angle rotate extrudes in the clockwise direction.

[Non-uniform]
Specify the rotation angle. The angle can be listed using a comma (,) or as number@angle for continuously
repeating angles.
For example, entering 10@20 continuously creates 10 elements that are rotated 20 degrees from the
previous element and entering 10,20,30 creates 3 elements, each rotated by 10 degrees, 20 degrees and
30 degrees.

[Uniform]
Set the rotation angle and number, or input the total rotation angle and division spacing.

Section 5. Protrude | 291

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Node-> 2D
5.3
Fill Overview

Generate a 2D surface element between 2 nodes. It is useful when creating elements in a certain area
using edit/add mesh.

Methodology

Set the top and bottom nodes of the 2D element to set the total domain and define the mesh size by
entering the mesh size directly or the number of divisions between nodes. The number of top nodes and
bottom nodes must be the same and the selected nodes are assigned a number in order. The same
numbered nodes correspond and generate a 2D element. To reverse the corresponding order, use the
[Reverse Ends] option.

▶Node->2D element

The shape of the 2D element can be selected from a triangle or a quadrilateral in advanced options ( ).

292 | Section 5. Protrude

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

1D-> 2D

Overview

Generate a 2D surface element that connects 1D elements or 2 edges. It is useful when creating a 2D
connecting element between structural elements or surface elements.

Methodology

Select the top and bottom nodes or edges of the 2D element and define the mesh size by entering the
mesh size directly or the number of divisions between edges or nodes. The number of top nodes and
bottom elements must be the same when using a 1D element and if a line (edge) is used, the input seed
information for the top and bottom lines (edges) need to be the same. The bottom element, or start point of
a line and top element, or start point of a line correspond in order and generate a 2D element. If the start
point of the bottom element and end point of the top element correspond such that the element is twisted,
use the [Reverse Ends] option to reverse the corresponding order.

▶1D element->2D element

▶▶Geometry edge
-> 2D element

The shape of the 2D element can be selected from a triangle or a quadrilateral in advanced options ( ).

Section 5. Protrude | 293

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

2D-> 3D

Overview

Generate a 3D element that connects 2D elements. It is useful when adding elements to a certain area to
edit the model.

Methodology

Select the top and bottom 2D elements and define the 3D element size by entering the mesh size directly
or the number of divisions between the selected 2D elements. The number of top and bottom elements of
each selected 2D element need to the same and the element position or shape needs to be similar to allow
3D element fill. If the corresponding pairs cannot be found automatically, the corresponding reference
nodes need to be specified manually. Each reference node needs to exist on the outline of the element.

▶2D->3D element

The shape of the 2D element can be selected from a triangle or a quadrilateral in advanced options ( ).

294 | Section 5. Protrude

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Node -> 1D
5.4
Sweep Overview

Generate a 1D element by sweeping a node about a selected guide curve. It is useful to create complex
elements continuously.

Methodology

Select the element node to extrude and select the sweep guide curve or node positions that can substitute
the guide curve. Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions for the selected curve.

▶Node sweep extrude

Sweep Guide

[Curve]
Only 1 guide curve can be selected. Hence, the curves for a complex shape need to be created into a
single wire in advance.

[Sequential Nodes]
When selecting multiple nodes, be aware that the extrude direction is specified by the selection order.
When selecting the nodes directly, the spacing between the nodes becomes the element size so the size
does not need to be set.

Section 5. Protrude | 295

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

1D-> 2D

Overview

Generate a 2D element by extruding a 1D element, element side (element outline) or line (edge) along a
guide curve. Here, the used edge needs to be seeded (have seed information) or needs to be connected to
the mesh.

Methodology

Select the 1D element, element side or seeded line (edge) to be extruded and directly select the sweep
guide curve or node positions that can substitute the guide curve. The element size can be directly entered
or defined by the number of divisions on the selected extrude curve. The original element used in extrude
can be deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element is moved to the end of the extruded element.

▶1D element->2D Sweep

extrude
▶▶Element edge
->2D Sweep extrude
▶▶▶Geometry edge
->2D Sweep extrude

296 | Section 5. Protrude

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Sweep Guide

[Curve]
Only 1 guide curve can be selected. Hence, the curves for a complex shape need to be created into a
single wire in advance.

[Sequential Nodes]
When selecting multiple nodes, be aware that the extrude direction is specified by the selection order.
When selecting the nodes directly, the spacing between the nodes becomes the element size so the size
does not need to be set.

[End Scale Ratio]

Adjust the scale ratio at the end of the element generation to set the ratio for the extruded mesh size.
For example, entering 2 generates an element that is 2 times larger at the extrude finish point.

2D-> 3D

Overview

Generate a 3D element by extruding a 2D element or 3D element boundary surface along a guide curve.

Methodology

Select the 2D element or 3D element boundary surface and select the sweep guide curve or node positions
that can substitute the guide curve. Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions for the
selected curve. The original element (2D element) used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move,
the used element is moved to the end of the extruded element.

Section 5. Protrude | 297

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶2D element
->3D Sweep extrude
▶▶Element Face
->3D Sweep extrude

Orthogonal

Extrude along the selected guide line or in the orthogonal direction to the selected node direction to
generate an element. It is especially useful when rotate extrude along a curve.

Sweep Guide

[Curve]
Only 1 guide curve can be selected. Hence, the curves for a complex shape need to be created into a
single wire in advance.

[Sequential Nodes]
When selecting multiple nodes, be aware that the extrude direction is specified by the selection order.
When selecting the nodes directly, the spacing between the nodes becomes the element size so the size
does not need to be set.

[End Scale Ratio]

Adjust the scale ratio at the end of the element generation to set the ratio for the extruded mesh size.
For example, entering 2 generates an element that is 2 times larger at the extrude finish point.

298 | Section 5. Protrude

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Node -> 1D
5.5
Project Overview

Generate a 1D element by project extrude a node. It is useful when generating an element in the same
direction as the target surface (projection target).

Methodology

Select the element nodes to project extrude and specify the projection target (target surface) and projection
direction. Define the mesh size directly or input the number of divisions for the projection distance.

▶Project extrude node

Project Target

Select an existing surface of a geometry shape or an element boundary surface as the projection target
(target surface) or select 3 arbitrary points that pass the target surface using the [Tree points Plane]
function.

Projection Direction

Set the projection direction using the axis direction on the GCS or the direction of an arbitrary vector that
connects the start and end points. Use the [Shortest Path Line] to automatically set the shortest distance
direction between the node and projection target (target surface) in the normal direction.
1D-> 2D

Overview

Section 5. Protrude | 299

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Generate a 2D element by project extruding a 1D element, element side (element boundary line) or edge
onto the target surface. Here, the used edge needs to be seeded, or connected to a mesh.

Methodology

Select the 1D element, element side or seeded line (edge) to be extruded and set the projection target
(target surface) and direction. The element size can be directly entered or defined by the number of
divisions on the distance to the projection. The original element used in extrude can be
deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element is moved to the end of the extruded element.

▶1D element
->2D Project extrude
▶▶Element edge
->2D Project extrude
▶▶▶Geometry edge
->2D Project extrude

300 | Section 5. Protrude

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Project Target

Select an existing surface of a geometry shape or an element boundary surface as the projection target
(target surface). Or, select 3 arbitrary points that pass the target surface using the [Tree Points Plane]
function.

Projection Direction

Set the projection direction using the axis direction on the GCS or the direction of an arbitrary vector that
connects the start and end points. Use the [Shortest Path Line] to automatically set the shortest distance
direction between the node and projection target (target surface) in the normal direction.

2D-> 3D

Overview
Generate a 3D element by project extruding a 2D element or 3D element surface (element boundary
surface).

Methodology
Select the 2D element or element face to project extrude and set the projection target (target surface) and
direction. The element size can be directly entered or defined by the number of divisions on the distance to
the projection. The original element (2D element) used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move,
the used element is moved to the end of the extruded element.

▶2D element
->3D Project extrude
▶▶Element face
->3D Project extrude

Project Target
Select an existing surface of a geometry shape or an element boundary surface as the project target (target
surface). Or, select 3 arbitrary points that pass the target surface using the [Three points Plane] function.

Section 5. Protrude | 301

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Projection Direction
Set the projection direction using the axis direction on the GCS or the direction of an arbitrary vector that
connects the start and end points. Use the [Shortest Path Line] to automatically set the shortest distance
direction between the node and projection target (target surface) in the normal direction.

1D-> 2D
5.6
Offset Overview

Generate a 2D element by offset extruding a 1D element, element side or line (edge). Here, the used edge
needs to be seeded (have seed information) or needs to be connected to the mesh.

Methodology

Select the 1D element, element side or seeded line (edge) to be extruded and directly select the offset
direction, extrude length and number of element divisions. The element can be created by extruding in 1
direction or 2 directions. The original element (1D) used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move,
the used element is moved to the end of the extruded element.

▶1D element
->2D Offset extrude
▶▶Element edge
->2D Offset extrude

▶Geometry edge
->2D Offset extrude

302 | Section 5. Protrude

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Offset Direction

Set the extrude direction in the selected object [Positive] direction (normal direction), [Negative] direction
(opposite normal direction), or in both directions.

Extrude Information

Set the total width and division of 2D element will be created. The division spacing can be uniform or non-
uniform. Entering a negative value for length (offset, spacing) extrudes in the opposite direction to the axis
or vector direction.

[Non-uniform]
Specify the offset length and number simultaneously. The length can be listed using a comma (,) or as
number@length for continuously repeating extrude operations.
For example, entering 10@3 creates 10 elements with a length of 3 each and entering 2,3,4 creates 3
elements, each with a length of 2,3 and 4.

[Uniform]
Set the offset length or number, or input the total length and division spacing.

The shape of the 2D element can be selected from a triangle or a quadrilateral in advanced options ( ).

Section 5. Protrude | 303

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

2D-> 3D

Overview

Generate a 3D element by offset extruding a 2D element or a 3D element boundary surface.

Methodology

Select the 2D element or 3D element boundary surface and set the offset direction, extrude length and
number of divisions. The element can be created by extruding in 1 direction or 2 directions. The original
element (2D) used in extrude can be deleted/moved/copied. For move, the used element is moved to the
end of the extruded element.

▶2D element
->3D Offset extrude
▶▶Element face
->3D Offset extrude

Offset Direction
Set the extrude direction in the selected object [Positive] direction (normal direction), [Negative] direction
(opposite normal direction), or in [Both] directions.

Extrude Information
Set the total width and division of 2D element will be created. The division spacing can be uniform or non-
uniform. Entering a negative value for length (offset, spacing) extrudes in the opposite direction to the axis
or vector direction.

[Non-uniform]
Specify the offset length and number simultaneously. The length can be listed using a comma (,) or as
number@length for continuously repeating extrude operations.
For example, entering 10@3 creates 10 elements with a length of 3 each and entering 2,3,4 creates 3
elements, each with a length of 2,3 and 4.
[Uniform]
Set the offset length or number, or input the total length and division spacing.

304 | Section 5. Protrude

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Section 6 Transform
Overview
6.1
Translate Move/copy a node, element or mesh set. It is useful for moving the element position or copying the same
element to a specified distance.

Methodology

Select the node, element or mesh set to move (or copy) and define the direction.

▶Translate (Move/Copy)

Direction

Select the move/copy direction with respect to the GCS or the direction of a vector that connects 2 arbitrary
points. For the 2 points vector function, select (deselect) a particular coordinate axis and select only the
directional comp1nt of a vector defined by a start and end point.

Method

Move the position of the selected element or copy and move the element to a specified or arbitrary distance.

Section 6. Transform | 305

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Move]
Directly input the move distance or using the 2 points vector function, automatically calculate the actual
move distance with reference to the start and end points. Select the button to check the automatically
calculated distance.

[Copy (Uniform)]
Specify the copy distance and number of copies. Entering a negative value copies the object in the
opposite direction to the set direction.

[Copy (Non-Uniform)]
The length can be listed using a comma (,) or as number@length for continuously repeated moves (copies).
For example, entering 10@3 creates 10 elements with a move length of 3 each and entering 2,3,4 creates
3 elements, each with a move/copy length of 2,3 and 4.

Overview
6.2
Rotate Rotate a node, element or mesh set about the rotation axis to move/copy. It is useful for continuously
generating a mesh that forms a certain angle.

Methodology
Select the node, element or mesh set to rotate move (or copy) and define the revolution axis.

▶Rotate(Move/Copy)

Rotation Axis

Select the move/copy revolution axis with respect to the GCS or for the 2 points vector function, input the
start and end point coordinates of the direction vector. It is useful when setting the reference axis in an
arbitrary direction.

306 | Section 6. Transform

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

When using the GCS, use the [Locate] option to set the rotation axis position using its coordinates. The
rotation axis is moved to the specified coordinate position and the node is rotated and moved/copied about
this axis.
For the 2 points vector function, select (deselect) a particular coordinate axis and select only the directional
comp1nt of a vector defined by a start and end point.

Methodology

Specify the rotation angle and rotation copy angle. A uniform angle or arbitrarily set non-uniform angle can
be used to rotate and move/copy.

[Move]
Directly input the rotation angle.

[Copy (Uniform)]
Set the rotation angle and number of repetitions. Input a negative to rotate in the opposite direction to the
set direction.

[Copy (Non-uniform)]
The angle can be listed using a comma (,) or as number@angle for continuously repeating angles.
For example, entering 10@30 continuously creates 10 elements that are rotated 30 degrees from the
previous element and entering 20,30,40 creates 3 elements, each rotated and moved/copied by 20 degrees,
30 degrees and 40 degrees.

Section 6. Transform | 307

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
6.3 Mirror a node, element or mesh set and move/copy. If a section shape is symmetrical, model only half and
Mirror use the mirror (copy) function to easily model the whole section.

Methodology

Select the node, element or mesh set to mirror move/copy and select the mirror type. The mirror types are
point, axis and plane. Use the copy target option to use mirror move and copy simultaneously.

▶Mirror point
▶▶Mirror axis
▶▶▶Mirror plane

Mirror Type
[Point] : Directly select the mirror point or input the coordinates.
[Axis] : Select the mirror axis on the GCS or define an arbitrary vector axis that connects the start and end
points.
[Plane] : Select the mirror plane or define an arbitrary plane that passes 3 points.

Generating an element using the mirror move operation reverses its coordinates with respect to the
original element.
For example, the normal direction is reversed for 2D elements that are mirrored about an axis or point.
This creates an error during analysis and the element coordinate system needs to be united from Mesh >
Element > Parameter.

308 | Section 6. Transform

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
6.4
Scale Scale up/down a node, element or mesh set with reference to a scale center.

Methodology

Select the node, element or mesh set to scale up/down and specify the scale center. Apply a constant ratio
with respect to the scale center or selectively apply a scale factor on the axial direction of the GCS.
Check the copy target option to use scale up/down and copy simultaneously

▶Scale

Scale type

[Uniform] : Scale up/down the selected target in all axial directions of the GCS uniformly.
[NonUniform] : The scale factor can be applied differently for each axial direction on the GCS.

Section 6. Transform | 309

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
6.5 Move a node, element or mesh set along a sweep guide and copy.
Sweep

Methodology
Select the node, element or mesh set and directly select the sweep guide or node positions that can
substitute the guide curve. Specify the center point. Apply a certain ratio with respect to the center point or
apply a selective scale factor on the axial directions of the GCS.

▶Sweep pattern

Sweep Guide
[Curve]
Only 1 guide curve can be selected. Hence, the curves for a complex shape need to be created into a
single wire in advance.
[Sequential Nodes]
When selecting multiple nodes, be aware that the extrude direction is specified by the selection order.
When selecting the nodes directly, the spacing between the nodes becomes the element size so the size
does not need to be set.
[Orthogonal]
The copied shape is always perpendicular to the sweep guide and the reference point can be set by
selecting a node.
[End Scale Ratio]
Adjust the scale factor at the end of the element generation to set the ratio for the mesh size.
For example, entering 2 generates an element that is 2 times larger at the sweep finish point.

Size Method
[Size] : Directly specify the mesh size. For Sweep move/copy, size signifies the sweep interval.
[Ratio] : Define the sweep interval and number with a ratio between 0~1. For example, entering 0.3,0.5,1
moves/copies the mesh at 0.3,0.5,1 ratio positions on the total length of the sweep guide.
[Divisions] : Define the sweep interval by the number of divisions on the total length of the sweep guide.

310 | Section 6. Transform

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Section 7 Node
Overview
7.1
Create Add a node in the desired position on the 3D work space. There are a total of 5 node creation methods.

The position and number can be freely adjusted depending on the creation method. The additional node
number can be set as the minimum non-overlapping and available number or the maximum number+1.

Methodology

[Coordinates]
Directly input the node coordinates or select the position on the screen using snap point.

▶Create node :
Coordinates

Section 7. Node | 311

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Between 2 nodes]

▶Create node : Between 2

nodes

Create an additional node between the 2 selected nodes. Select the number of nodes to create and when
creating more than 1 node, adjust the spacing by entering the ratio between the starting space and ending
space of nodes,

[Center of nodes]
▶Create node : Center of
nodes

Create an additional node at the center of the shape created by selecting 2 or more nodes.

[On curve]
▶ Create node : On curve

Add a node on the selected curve. The node position can be specified by directly entering its distance from
the start or end point, or by entering a ratio between 0~1. The [Reverse Direction] option can be used to
reverse the direction of the start point and end point.

[Conic center]
▶ Create node : Conic
center

Automatically create a node at the center point of selected arc (circle). The node can also be created by
using the snap position for arc centers.

312 | Section 7. Node

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
7.2
Delete Delete a node.

Methodology

▶Delete node

The free nodes that are not connected to an element can be deleted and selected. However, deleting a
node that forms an element will delete the element as well.

Section 7. Node | 313

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
7.3
Merge Merge 2 or more nodes into 1, or merge two nodes by selecting be moved and be kept node continuously.
It is mostly used to connect nodes between elements that are slightly apart during the modeling
modification process. It is useful when checking for model errors due to free edges by checking the free
nodes that are not connected to an element.

Methodology

[Selected Nodes]
▶Merge : Selected Nodes

Select the nodes to merge and define the merge criterion. The tolerance is the allowable limit of the merger;
nodes with spacing smaller than the tolerance are merged. Selecting ‘find’ automatically searches for
nodes below the tolerance. The merged node positions are specified by the node number (Smallest
ID/Largest ID) or the Center of Nodes (Merge Nodes at the Center Location). The [Blink Mark] function
indicates the Free Nodes on the screen, which can be used to distinguish modeling errors such as Free
Edges.

[2-Nodes]
▶Merge : 2-Nodes

Merge 2 nodes by selecting the moving node and maintained node. If a Free Edge is created on a small
area, the Merge 2-Nodes function can be used to edit easily.

314 | Section 7. Node

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
7.4
Project Project the node onto the target surface or edge.

Methodology

▶Node projection

Select the nodes to project; the target shape can be selected between a surface and edge. The projection
direction can be selected using the axis direction on the GCS or the direction of an arbitrary vector that
connects the start and end points. Use the [Shortest Path Line] to automatically set the shortest distance
direction between the node and projection target (target surface) in the normal direction. Selecting all nodes
of the element moves the whole mesh. Selecting only some nodes, the unselected nodes remain in their
position and the element shape and size automatically changes with the projection distance.

Section 7. Node | 315

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
7.5
Align Align/move the selected nodes with reference to the target node. It is useful when editing the shape with
respect to the target node and alignment direction.

Methodology

Select the nodes to align and the alignment reference node to move the target nodes in the alignment
direction. The alignment direction can be selected from 1 of the X, Y, Z axis directions of the GCS.
Selecting all nodes of the element moves the whole mesh. Selecting only some nodes, the unselected
nodes remain in their position and the element shape and size automatically changes with the projection
distance.

▶Node alignment

316 | Section 7. Node

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
7.6
Modify Select individual nodes to edit the node number and node coordinate system.

Methodology

Select the node to edit or input the node number to automatically print the coordinates of that point. The
node number can be kept or a new node can be assigned, provided that the new number does not conflict
with an existing node number. Simultaneously, the coordinate system of the selected node can be changed.
The node coordinate system change can be d1 simultaneously for multiple nodes in the coordinate system
function.

▶Edit node

Section 7. Node | 317

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
7.7
Coordinate Change the node coordinate system.
System

Methodology

▶Change node coordinate

system

Select the node to change the coordinate system. The changed coordinate system can be selected from
the Rectangular coordinate system, Cylindrical coordinate system and the arbitrary setting using the 3-point
plane.

The Rectangular coordinate system and Cylindrical coordinate system can be distinguished as follows.

318 | Section 7. Node

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Section 8 Element
1D
8.1
Create Overview

Create a 1D element connecting 2 nodes. This is useful when creating structural elements (pile, embedded
truss, truss element) which do not require connections to the neighboring ground individually.

Methodology

Input the element ID that becomes the end points of the 1D element. Already created nodes can be
selected in order on the screen. The element ID is automatically set to maximum previous number+1. Note
that the number being directly entered cannot overlap with an existing node ID. Structural properties that
will be assigned can be set or added to the created element and the mesh set can be created separately.

[Orientation (Element Z axis)]

This function is used to unify the direction property of a 1D element to 1 direction or to set the major and
minor axis directions. Adjust the Z axis direction by checking the element coordinate axis and assign with
reference to the Beta angle.

 Reference Node: Select the reference node for the sectional direction of the 1D element. The
element Z coordinate direction is set with reference to the selected node.
 Reference Vector (GCS): Set the Z coordinate direction of the selected element using the GCS
direction or the input vector direction.

Section 8. Element | 319

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

 Beta Angle: Angles 0,90,180 can be chosen and the selected Beta angle rotates the element by
that angle with reference to the X axis.

▶Beta angle:0
▶▶Beta angle:90
▶▶▶Beta angle:180

2D

Overview
Create a 2D element connecting 2 nodes. This is useful when creating an arbitrary surface strain element
in an area where mesh auto-generation has failed.

Methodology
Create a triangular or rectangular element depending on the number of selected nodes. Directly input the
node numbers that will become the corners of the 2D element, or select already created nodes in order on
the screen. The element ID is automatically set to maximum previous number+1 and when entering the
number directly, the number cannot overlap with an existing node number. Properties that will be assigned
can be set or added and the mesh set can be created separately. Using the automatic generation function
generates a mesh set immediately after node selection.

3D

Overview
Create a 3D element filling the space between selected nodes. It is useful when creating individual 3D
elements of a complex geometry.

320 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Methodology

Create a tetrahedral, pyramidal, pentahedral, hexahedral shape depending on the number of selected
nodes. Directly input the node numbers that will become the corners of the 3D element, or select already
created nodes in order on the screen. The element number is automatically set to maximum previous
number+1 and when entering the number directly, the number cannot overlap with an existing node
number. Properties which will be assigned can be set or added and the mesh set can be created
separately.

Other

Overview
Create a spring, node link or Pile affiliated elements as shown below. The assigned properties can be
defined depending on the created element type.

Methodology

[Point spring]
Create a spring with a constant stiffness on the selected node. The constraints on deformation and rotation
with reference to the GCS are defined by the spring constant and damping coefficient. It is mostly used as
a flexible support condition for ground or a constraint condition for dynamic analysis.

[Matrix Spring]
Has the same function as the Point spring. However, the spring constant for deformation and rotation can
be directly input into a matrix when defining the characteristics.

Section 8. Element | 321

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Rigid links]

Create a link element that connects 2 selected nodes. Select the first node (reference) and select multiple
nodes that become the connection target. It is used to simulate the rigid behavior between 2 nodes under
deformation and rotation and the constraint direction can be defined the with reference to the GCS.

[Elastic link]

Connect 2 nodes with a spring that has a constant stiffness. Select the first node (reference) and select
another node to create the link. Like the point string, the property is defined by the constant stiffness to
deformation and rotation.

[Interpolation]

This function simulates the behavior of the standard (reference) node by weighing the average behavior of
the selected nodes. It restricts the movement between connected nodes, similar to the rigid link. However,
the interpolation element allows the relative behavior of a node due to movement at multiple different nodes.
Hence, the average behavior at the multiple other nodes determines the movement of the reference node
(dependent node).
Select the nodes to restrict and the degree of freedom, and then select the nodes to take the average
values from. The weight of each node can be applied.

322 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Rigid link
▶▶Interpolation

Rigid link Interpolation

[Surface spring]
Create a point spring or elastic link by entering the spring stiffness per unit area at the support point of an
element.
This is used to consider the flexible support condition of the ground during foundation analysis or
underground structure analysis. Entering the spring stiffness per unit area automatically converts it to the
spring or link acting on the node by considering the selected element area.

The surface spring inputs are as follows.

• Frame: Create a point spring or elastic link on a 1D element node. Input the width to calculate
the support stiffness per unit length of a beam element.
• Planar: Create a spring or link by selecting a 2D element.
• Solid-Face: Specify an arbitrary surface on 3D Solid and create a spring or link at all nodes
connected to that surface.
• Element Edge: Select an outline of a 2D element and create a spring or link at the nodes
connected to that outline.

The input elastic link per unit area is a way to define the spring constant. Other options are available, su ch
as [Tension only] or [Compression only].

[Ground surface spring]

This automatically creates the elastic/viscous boundary elements needed for dynamic analysis. Selecting a
mesh automatically creates boundary conditions at the left/right/floor of the selected mesh and the spring
constant is automatically calculated from the material/characteristics assigned to the element.

Section 8. Element | 323

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

For dynamic analysis, the bottom of the model (floor surface) is often assigned a fixed condition
(displacement constraint) to simulate bedrock conditions. Check the [Fixed Bottom Condition] to set this
condition more easily.

* How to create an elastic boundary element

 The elastic spring is used as a ground boundary condition for Eigen value analysis and Response
spectrum analysis.
 Creating an elastic spring can be hard for beginners and the elastic spring element can be created
from the following steps.

1. Use the elastic modulus of the ground to compute Kv0. (The Equation is shown below.)

a
Modulus of deformation E0 from the following test methods (kfg/cm2) Regular During
time earthquake
1/2 of E0 from the cyclic curve of the plate load test, d1 using a rigid
1 2
circular plate of 30cm diameter
E0 measured in the borehole 4 8
E0 from the unconfined or tri-axial compression test on a specimen 4 8
E0 estimated by the N value from the Standard Penetration test when
1 2
E0=28N
Here, E0: Elastic modulus of the ground, a Coefficient depending on test condition
2. Re-calculate the Subgrade Reaction Modulus Kv(= Kh) using the computed Kv0.
Bv
K v = k v0 ( )3/4
30
Here,
The area Av becomes the area where the subgrade reaction spring will be installed.

If the model exists like the following figure,

2
Area of Ground A is Av=1m(Left length of model)*1m(Unit width of 2D analysis)=1m , Bv becomes
1m=100cm.
Using the same method, the unit width of Ground B is Bv=√(20000)cm=141.42136 cm.

324 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Ultimately, the Subgrade Reaction Modulus K can be computed and a point spring is created on the
node, considering the area of the element.

2 3
E (tonf/m ) Ky0 A (cm) B K (tonf/m ) α
Ground A 1000 3.3333 1.00E + 04 100 1351.18664 1
3
Ground B 2000 6.6667 2.00E + 04 141421356 2083.84592 1
2 5

The spring coefficient of the floor (Z direction) is created with the same value as the X direction.
(Element length x Width (1m) = Cross sectional area, so only consider the effective length of the
element.)
2 overlapping boundary elements are created where the ground and ground meet.

* How to create a viscous boundary element

• The viscous boundary element required as a model boundary condition for time history analysis.
• The viscous boundary element can be created from the following steps.

1. Compute Cp, Cs
Cp, Cs can be calculated using the equation below.

Here, , ,
λ : Bulk modulus, G : Shear modulus, E : Elastic modulus, ν : Poisson’s ratio, A : Cross-section area

2. The cross-section area is automatically considered until the surface spring is created, so only the Cp,

Section 8. Element | 325

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Cs needs to be computed.

Elastic Bulk Shear Unit Poisson’

P wave S wave
modulus modulus modulus weight s ratio
E λ G W Cp Cp
2 2 3 ν 3 3
(tonf/m ) 2
(tonf/m ) (tonf/m ) (tonf/m ) (tonf·sec/m ) (tonf·sec/m )
GroundA 1000 864.1975309 370.3703704 1.8 0.35 17.1605 8.2437
GroundB 2000 1459.531181 751.8796992 2 0.33 24.5792 12.381

3
Multiplying the Cp, Cs (tonf·sec/m units) to the cross-section area eventually leads to the spring
stiffness of the viscous boundary element in tonf·sec/m units.

The shaded cell parameters are the physical properties of the ground the user inputs during modeling
and the Bulk modulus and Shear modulus are calculated using the Elastic modulus and Poisson’s
ratio. Hence, there is no need to input additional values when creating a viscous boundary element.

When creating the viscous boundary element automatically, the spring is automatically created by
considering the element area (effective length*unit width) as shown below. Input the Cp value for the
normal direction coefficient at the point of spring creation and input the Cs value for the parallel
direction.

For example, the Cx of the spring coefficient created on the left/right of the model is the Cp of each
ground and Cz becomes the Cs value. The bottom spring coefficient Cz becomes the Cp value.

[Gauging shell]
Create a shell element to check the force and moment on the surface of a solid element structure. To
create a gauging shell, select the base solid element and then select the element surface on the solid to
extrude the gauging shell from. The stiffness of the gauging shell is calculated by applying the stiffness
increment coefficient to the stiffness of the solid element. The thickness of the selected solid is
automatically considered and the thickness of each element is calculated.

326 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Select element surface

▶Gauging shell thickness

(Length of red dotted line)

[Mass]
Input the lumped mass on an arbitrary point. It is used to convert the loading into mass and apply it to the
analysis.

Check total mass to automatically divide and input the lumped mass data entered in the mass property onto
a selected node. The sum of the divided lumped mass data on a node, created using the total mass option,
is equal to the entered lumped mass data. Entering the loading using the converted mass value and
selecting the total mass option allows easy application of mass data for Eigen value analysis, Response
spectrum, analysis, Time history analysis etc. The lumped mass data is input with respect to the GCS and
the moment of inertia (I) is defined according to the set unit system.

Overview
8.2
Delete Delete an element. It is possible to select the element to delete on the model tree or work screen and press
the Delete key, but this function provides the following options.

Section 8. Element | 327

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Delete Affected Node

The selected element is deleted and the nodes that no longer have a connection with the element are also
deleted.

Delete Empty Mesh Set

The empty mesh set that no longer has an element is deleted along with the selected element.

Duplicated Element only

Overlapping elements are different elements that have the same node and can be the source of analysis
error. Changing the properties of an identical element can use the element property change boundary
condition and so, it is better to delete the overlapping element created during modeling. This function
searches for overlapping elements out of the selected elements and deletes all but 1 overlapping elements.

Overview
8.3
Modify Edit the properties of the selected element. Select the element to edit on the work screen or use the ID
select function to input the element ID. The element property modification can also be d1 through Element
> Parameters.

The input information needed for editing, depending on the selected element type, is automatically printed
as shown below.

▶1D element
▶▶2D element
▶▶▶3D element

328 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Edit Geometry through changing node information or change property. This function is useful when
modifying details of the specific element.

Overview
8.4
Modify Topology Modify the shape after element generation. There are 3 methods to choose from, depending on the
element type and modification purpose.

Methodology

[Flip 2 Triangles]
Modify the shape of 2 2D triangle elements that share a side by selecting them consecutively. The nodes
are kept. When modifying an element shape, the relationship with the geometry shape can be ignored, or
the shape can be automatically renewed by setting the auto-apply option and selecting 2 elements.

[Merge Element]
Merge 2 connected triangles, or quadrilaterals, into 1 element by selecting them consecutively.
However, a B-Spline can form if the node connection between the adjacent elements is ignored.

[Fix Connectivity of Reversed Solid]

An incorrect element can be formed during mesh ‘import’ or when the normal direction is defined in the
opposite direction accidentally. In this case, this function modifies the node connections of a solid element.
Use the [Front-Back Color] in View mode (mesh) to view the element shape on the screen and to check for
elements in the opposite normal direction, indicated by the different color.

1D
8.5
Parameters Overview

Change the properties, difference, coordinate system of a 1D element or add the offset distance or the end
boundary conditions (fixed, hinge roller etc.) of a beam element. The addable and changeable items are
listed below.

Section 8. Element | 329

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Methodology

[Change Property]
Change the property assigned to a 1D element during its creation. Select the 1D element to modify and
specify the property to change.

[Change Element Order]

Add or delete the nodes between a 1D element to change it into a higher order or lower order element.
Changing the position of the middle node to the start or end point for high order element can create an
arbitrary middle node on the geometry shape. A 1D high order element can be divided into 2 low order
elements with reference to the middle node.

[Change Coordinate System]

The analysis results of a structural element are printed with reference to the element coordinate axis.
Hence, it is important to check the coordinate system of the structural element to make sure it is in 1
direction. Switch the element x axis direction or specify the element y axis direction to unify the major and
minor axis directions of the structural elements. The direction can be unified with adjacent 2D elements.

Orientation (Element Z-axis)

This function is used to unify the direction property of a 1D element to 1 direction or to set the major and
minor axis directions. Adjust the Z axis direction by checking the element coordinate axis and assign with
reference to the Beta angle.

330 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

 Reference Node: Select the reference node for the sectional direction of the 1D element. The
element Z coordinate direction is set with reference to the selected node.
 Reference Vector (GCS): Set the Z coordinate direction of the selected element using the GCS
direction or the input vector direction.
 Beta Angle: Angles 0, 90,180 can be chosen and the selected Beta angle rotates the element by
that angle with reference to the X axis.

▶Beta angle:0
▶▶ Beta angle:90
▶▶▶ Beta angle:180

[Add Offset (Beam/Embedded Beam)]

Define the offset distance by considering the sectional properties (shape) of the structural element. When
defining the properties, the offset can be set within the boundary of the section shape, or outside the
boundary using the extra features of offset. The offset is the eccentric distance between the position of the
geometry shape (line), needed to create a structural element, and the reference axis, where the loading is
applied and the results are calculated. It is mostly used to express the connection between structural
members or the combined section of 2 meeting members.

Specify the reference coordinates for the offset distance calculation and input uniform or non-uniform to set
the offset distance for each axial direction.

Section 8. Element | 331

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Add End Release (Beam/Embedded Beam)]

Specify the end point boundary conditions for a 1D element. It is mostly applied when specifying the
connection conditions between structural members such as hinge, roller etc.

[Taper Section Group (Beam/Embedded Beam)]

Members designated to a tapered section are grouped and calculate the section size automatically to
define a constant tapered section regardless of the divided state of the elements. Firstly, select all elements
that configure section changing area, and select the node at the beginning and the end of section changing
area into the node of section i and j respectively. The tapered section is calculated by section property
assigned to section i and j. The complex section changing area can be modeled quickly without creating
the property of tapered section as the number of elements within section changing area.

2D

Overview

Change the properties, difference, coordinate system of a 2D element or add the offset distance or the end
boundary conditions (fixed, hinge roller etc.) of a surface element. The addable and changeable items are
listed below. The material coordinate system is defined as the result printing coordinate system for the 2D
element and a separate print coordinate system (material coordinate system) can be added to certain
selected elements.

332 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Methodology

[Change Property]
Change the property assigned to a 2D element during its creation. Select the 2D element to modify and
specify the property to change.

[Change Element Order]

Add or delete nodes between a 2D element to change it into a higher order or lower order element.
Changing the position of the middle node to the start or end point for high order element can create an
arbitrary middle node on the geometry shape.

[Change Coordinate System]

For a 2D structural element, the print coordinate system (material coordinate system) can be defined
separately. Here, if the print coordinate system (material coordinate system) is set as the element
coordinate system, it is important to check the coordinate system of the structural element to make sure it is
in 1 direction. Switch the element z axis direction or unify the normal directions of the selected elements to
the normal direction of the reference element. When using centered coordinates, use the direction vector
from the reference point to each element to modify the normal direction of each element.

[Add Thickness]

The thickness of a 2D element is defined in the section properties, but an additional thickness can be
specified for selected elements. Select the 2D element and change the thickness by specifying the
thickness for each element node.

Section 8. Element | 333

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Add Offset]

Define the offset distance by considering the sectional properties (shape) of the structural element. The
offset is the eccentric distance between the positions of the geometry shape (surface), needed to create a
structural element, and the reference axis, where the loading is applied and the results are calculated. The
distance can be specified by a function on the GCS and the direction moves to the normal direction (+,-) of
the 2D element. When applying the function, the input offset distance becomes the scale factor that is
multiplied to the function for calculation.

[Add Material Orientation]

Apart from the material coordinate system specified on the 2D element property, a separate material
coordinate system (print coordinate system) can be additionally set for selected elements. The coordinate
system can be defined as follows.

 Coordinate System: Specify the material x direction in the X,Y,Z direction of the GCS. Both the
Global rectangular coordinate system and Global cylindrical coordinate system can be used.
 Angle: Specify the material x direction by setting the normal direction of the element as the
revolution axis and rotating the coordinate system by the specified angle.
 Reference Vector: Input or use the selected space vector direction to specify the material X
direction.
 Coordinate system and Angle: Specify the material X direction as the rotated direction of the
reference coordinate axis on the selected coordinate plane.

[Add End Release (Shell)]

Specify the selected node boundary conditions for a 2D element. The axial direction and rotation conditions
can be released for each element.

3D

Overview

Change the properties and difference of a 3D element.

334 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Methodology

[Change Property]
Change the property assigned to a 3D element during its creation. Select the 3D element to modify and
specify the property to change.

[Change Element Order]

Add or delete nodes between a 3D element to change it into a higher order or lower order element.
Changing the position of the middle node to the start or end point for high order element can create an
arbitrary middle node on the geometry shape.

Other

Overview

Use to change the assigned other properties of an element. It is applied to spring, link, interface affiliated
elements and select the element to define a fitting property.

Section 8. Element | 335

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
8.6
Connection Cut the connection between shared nodes or create a spring or rigid link element between nodes. The free
edge/faces created by the node separation can be used to create an interface element.

Methodology

[Split]
Select the element that contains the node which will be separated. Then, select the nodes to divide or
create a link element on. The connection type can be chosen between only node separation, create elastic
link after node separation or create rigid link. When creating an elastic link, specify the coordinate system of
the link element.

[Closest]
Select 2 groups of nodes and create an elastic link between the 2 closest nodes between the groups.

[Coincident]
Create a rigid link between selected nodes that are within the tolerance range. The tolerance is the
allowable limit of the node connection, and the operation is only applied when the distance between the
nodes is smaller than the tolerance. It is used to automatically connect 2 barely separated nodes.

Overview
8.7
Extract Extract a sub-element from an existing mesh on a geometry shape or a mesh set. The extracted mesh is
connected to the existing meshes by nodes and is often used to create structural elements that are
connected to the neighboring ground by nodes. During extract, the element properties can be defined or
added and for 1D elements, the element coordinate system can be specified.

The extracted mesh can be divided by target shape, possessed shape or mesh to create a mesh set. This
option automatically divides the mesh sets when extracting elements from multiple solids simultaneously.

336 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Methodology

[Geometry]
Extract 1D/2D elements that have kept their node position from the edge/surface used for mesh creation.
The [Skip Duplicated Faces] option can be applied when extracting a 2D element from a surface. This
option extracts the mesh from only the non-overlapping surfaces of the selection. If the selected target
surface lies on multiple solids in a complex manner, select all the solids and use [Skip Duplicated Faces] to
extrude only the outermost surface of the solid.

[Mesh]
Extrude a 1D/2D element from the free edge/surface of an existing mesh. Only the selected nodes on the
free edge/surface are extruded automatically and selecting the reference mesh extrudes only the nodes on
the specified mesh.

1D
8.8
Divide Overview

Divide the 1D element by the set number. It is used to divide a 1D high order element into 2 low order
elements.

2D

Overview

Divide a 2D element into multiple elements using a pattern or entering the number of divisions. If the
geometry shape is complex, the shape (quality) of the equal size mesh created by the auto-mesh function
may not be good. In this case, use the divide function to increate the Aspect ratio. Set the divide pattern or
the number of divisions in the axial direction. Use the [Divide Neighbor Element] option to maintain the
node connections with adjacent elements during element division.

Section 8. Element | 337

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Methodology

[Divide by Pattern]
Specify the 2D element and pattern. Then, select the reference node.

Pattern -2: Use 1 of the 11 patterns to divide the element outline into 2 segments. The red point that
appears in the pattern indicates the position of the reference node. The white points indicate the points that
ignore the reference node.

Pattern -3: Use 1 of the 8 patterns to divide the element outline into three segments. The red point that
appears in the pattern indicates the position of the reference node.

[Divide by Number]
Evenly divide the 2D element by the input number of divisions. However, it can only be applied to
rectangular elements that are defined in 2 axial directions. Set the number of divisions in the axis 1, 2
direction and define the axial direction as follows. Input the number of divisions in the axial direction of an
element edge that has makes up the smallest angle between the specified axis directions.

Axis Direction

[Local Coordinate]
Use axis 1 as the x axis direction of the element coordinate system.

[Coordinate Axis]
Use the coordinate system to specify axis 1. The axis can be select from the Global rectangular system or
the Global cylindrical system.

[Location along Vector]

338 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Use the input vector as axis 1. Input the start point and another arbitrary point on axis 1 to create a vector.

3D element

Overview

Divide a 3D element into multiple elements using a pattern or entering the number of divisions. Only
hexahedral elements can be divided.

Methodology

[Divide by Pattern]
Use 1 of the 4 preset patterns to divide the element. The red point that appears in the pattern indicates the
position of the reference node. Specify the 3D element and pattern and select the reference node.

[Divide by Number]
Evenly divide the 3D element by the input number of divisions. Set the number of divisions in the axis 1,2,3
direction and define the axial direction as follows. Input the number of divisions in the axial direction of an
element edge that has makes up the smallest angle between the specified axis direction.

Axial Direction
[Local Coordinate]
Use axis 1 as the x axis direction of the element coordinate system.

[Coordinate Axis]
Use the coordinate system to specify axis 1 and axis 2. The axis can be select from the Global rectangular
system or the Global cylindrical system.

[Location along Vector]

Use 2 input vectors as axis 1 and axis 2. Input the start point and any other arbitrary points on axis 1 and
axis 2 to create 2 vectors.

Section 8. Element | 339

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
8.9
Measure Measure the material and geometric information of a selected element. It is useful to check the Length (1D),
Area (2D) and Volume (3D) of an element. Select the element to be measured and use calculate to check
the total sum of all selected elements. For Volume (2D), use the property (thickness) information of a 2D
element and the element area to calculate the hypothetical volume.

Overview
8.10
Interface
Create a homogeneous or heterogeneous material interface where slip or isolation can happen. It is used
to simulate the interface behavior between ground and structural members with a large relative stiffness
difference. The interface generation method is classified by the work environment (2D/3D) and the target.
The properties must be defined in order to create an interface element. The properties can be directly
entered, or can be automatically calculated from the properties of adjacent elements using Wizard.

340 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Interface element generation immediately separates the connected nodes of that position and creates an
element with specific stiffness in the normal and tangent directions. Hence, because the nodes are left
separated for certain steps where the interface element is not used (ex. Initial in-situ ground), the nodes
need to be connected by a rigid link to prevent analysis error. Reversely, when the interface element is
used, the rigid links need to be removed during analysis. Use the [Create Rigid Link Element] option to
automatically create a Link element connecting 2 nodes.

The interface material can be defined using the following equation. Using the stiffness of adjacent
elements and nonlinear parameters, the virtual thickness (tv) and strength reduction factor (R) is applied.
Interface material stiffness and parameters are applied differently according to the relative stiffness
difference between neighboring ground or structural members. The Wizard can be used to simplify this
process.

Ex) Kn = Eoed,i / tv
Kt = Gi/tv
Ci = R x Csoil
-1
phii = tan (R x tan (phisoil))
Here, Eoed,i = 2 x Gi x (1-νi)/(1-2 x νi)
(νi =Interface Poisson’s ration=0.45, the interface is used to simulate the non-compressive frictional
behavior and automatically calculates using 0.45 to prevent numerical errors.)
tv = Virtual thickness(Generally has a value between 0.01~0.1, the higher the stiffness difference
between ground and structure, the smaller the value)
Gi = R x Gsoil (Gsoil = E/(2(1+ νsoil)), R = Strength Reduction Factor

Methodology

The interface can be created using the following methods, depending on the work environment and
comp1nts or shape.

Section 8. Element | 341

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Line Interface
▶▶Shell Interface
▶▶▶Plane Interface

 From Element Boundary

Create an interface element at the boundary position between the selected element and adjacent
element, as shown in the figure below. Selecting all elements cannot create an interface element
because there are not adjacent elements. If the created interface element is within a mesh, the
interface element has a wedge shape, as shown.

▶From element boundary

 Manual Node ID Input

Directly input the node ID to create an interface element. The nodes are divided into 2 groups: Side
1 and Side 2 that determine the shape of the interface element. The number of input nodes on
Side1 and Side2 must be the same and the shape for each size is as follows.

 Convert Element

Convert a general 1D, 2D, 3D element into an interface element. Because general elements do not
have a consistent node order, the base reference node needs to be selected additionally.

▶Convert element

 From Free-Edge

342 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Create an interface element from opposing free surface/edge. The free edges (free surface for 3D)
with no node connections need to be selected on each side and if the free edge (free surface) does
not exist, use the Connection > Divide function to divide beforehand.

 From Truss/Beam (Use plate element)

Create an interface element using the truss/beam element. For 3D, use a plate element. Creating
an interface element for structural elements such as truss/beam/plate generates an interface
element on both sides of the element. Hence if the interface creation method is truss/beam, set the
“add mesh set separately” option for the interface element to separately create the interface
element in each direction.

▶Use structural element

Also, if the ground element connected to the interface element is removed during construction, the
interface element is also removed to prevent analysis errors.

 From Truss/Beam (T/X-cross type)

The interface elements are created at the location where truss/beam elements cross T or X-shape.
Shell elements can be selected in 3D model. The ‘Register Interface Mesh Set Separately’ option
isn’t available since interface elements are T or X-shape.

From Truss/Beam (T/X-

cross type)

Section 8. Element | 343

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

From
Truss/Beam

 From Mesh-Set (T/X-cross type)

Create an interface element at the T- or X-cross of the selected mesh set. This method can be used
when the interface elements intersect, such as in masonry structures.

From Mesh-Set (T/X-cross

type)

 From Node

Create an interface element between adjacent elements, using the relationship between the
selected nodes. For 3D, select a segment point if the interface element is not created properly.

Pile
8.11
Pile/Pile tip Piles are an interface affiliated element in embedded beam element form that does not require node
connections with the neighboring ground. It is used to check the relative displacement and friction behavior
between the beam element and the ground. Create a beam element and neighboring ground element and
then select the beam element to create a pile element.

Pile tip

The pile tip element is added when defining the relative behavior between the ground element and 1 end
node of a pile. Create a pile element. Then, select the tip. The stiffness of the pile tip is defined by the end
bearing capacity and spring constant.

344 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
8.12
Free Field For the seismic analysis, users need to model infinite ground to eliminate the boundary effect caused by
Element (Infinite reflection wave. Since it is not possible to model infinite ground, users can apply Free Field Element at the
Element for boundary.
Dynamic Analysis) Free Field Element enables to apply traction resulted from Free Field Analysis to the ground bou ndary and
then, eliminate reflection wave using absorbent boundary condition.

Methodology

Select free edges in 2D and free faces in 3D to define Free Field Elements.

Section 8. Element | 345

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

 Free Field
Enable to simulate infinite ground boundary.

 Absorbent Boundary
Enable to eliminate reflection wave at the ground boundary.

 Width Factor (Penalty Parameter)

In order to minimize the size effect of the model, users have to input more than 104, This value will
be multiplied by model width (In case of 2D, this is plain strain thickness (unit width).

 DOF (Degree Of Freedom for damping)

Users can select specified DOF for damping effect.

▶Schematic Overview of Free Free

field field
Free Field Element
▶▶Free field effect (O),
Absorb reflection (O)
Main domain

Seismic
wave

▶Free field effect (X),

Absorb reflection (X)
▶▶Free field effect (X),
Absorb reflection (O)

 Verification Example
Free field element can result in identical behavior with infinite ground model.

346 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶None
▶▶Free field
▶▶▶Ground
acceleration

▶Infinite ground

▶Displacement results for

each case
Time vs displacement
4.00

2.00
None
0.00
Displacement

0.35
0.65
0.95
1.25

1.85
2.15
2.45
2.75

3.65
3.95
4.25
4.55
0.05

1.55

3.05
3.35

4.85
-2.00 Infinite
ground
-4.00
Free field
-6.00
Viscous
-8.00 boundary

-10.00
time

Methodology
8.13
Hinge  Inelastic Hinge
Inelastic hinge can be applied to the structural elements to simulate crack or local (plastic) failure.
Applicable in Nonlinear Static and Time History Analysis as follows : Nonlinear, Construction Stage,
Consolidation, Fully Coupled, SRM (Slope Stability).
Following properties are available to define inelastic hinge : Beam, Truss, Elastic Link and Point
Spring

▶Hinge Properties

Section 8. Element | 347

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

▶Schematic overview of
Inelastic Hinge

Overview
8.14
Infinite Element Without modeling all region, a model can be reduced considering the area of interests by assigning infinite
element on the boundary which does not have significant effects on the result. All analysis types are
applicable except dynamic analysis. (Free field element is used in dynamic analysis.)
It isn't possible to use all kind of load & boundary condition (Self Weight, Constraint, Nodal Head, Review,
etc.) in the node or element of infinite element.

Methodology

It is divided into ‘Line, and ‘Plane’ tab according to the type. For the adjacent element with infinite element,
analysis is only for Quad / Wedge / Hexa typed Low/High order element with 'Plane Strain / Axisymmetric /
Solid' property.

348 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

 Target Object Type

Infinite element can be created by selecting 2D element, ‘Free Edge’ in the case of 'Line' type.
Infinite element can be created by selecting 3D element, ‘Free Face’ in the case of 'Plane' type.

 Property
Select Line/Plane type infinite element

 Infinite Type
Select infinite element type. It is divided into ‘Line’ type and ‘Plane’ type for 2D model and 3D model
respectively.

 Constitutive Behavior
Select Constitutive Behavior of infinite element. It is divided into ‘From Adjacent Element’ type
which adopt material property of adjacent element and ‘User Defined’ type which can assign other
material property for only infinite element. ‘Material’ is directly inputted for only 'User Defined' type.

Overview
8.15
Seepage Cut Off The Seepage Cut Off (SCO) element can be used to simulate the behavior of structural waterproof
Element members. Main role of the element is to control seepage DOF on the line or face.

Section 8. Element | 349

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Methodology

In 2D analysis, select a line element (From Element Boundary/Truss/Beam element) to define the
impermeability.

In 3D analysis, the impermeability can be defined by selecting the face element (From Element
Boundary/Shell element).

▶From element boundary  From Element Boundary

Create an SCO element at the boundary position between the selected element and adjacent
element, as shown in the figure below. Selecting all elements cannot create an SCO element
because there are not adjacent elements.

▶Use structural element  From Truss/Beam (for 3D case - Shell element)

Create an SCO element using the truss/beam element. For 3D, use a plate element. Creating a
seepage cut off element for structural elements such as truss/beam/shell generates “impermeable
interface” element on both sides of the element.

350 | Section 8. Element

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

 Property
Checking the Seepage Flow DOF option allows for control the flow rate/impermeability
characteristics. (※ When checked: consider the effect of seepage, when not checked: consider the
impermeability effect)

The effective thickness used in Seepage Flow DOF is the effective thickness for the imaginary size
used for the calculation of the seepage flow and it defines the width of the structural member.

▶Schematic overview of  Results comparison

Seepage Cut Off element
results - 2D analysis case (via Truss/Beam element type).
-

- 3D analysis case (via Shell element type).

Section 8. Element | 351

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Section 9 Tools
Overview
9.1
Renumber When mesh and node numbers are recomposed, results can be checked in an organized manner.

Methodology

Select the target nodes and elements and input the starting number. The organization can be set for the
whole model, or only for the selected nodes (elements). Use the [Compact IDs Only] option to organize the
node number continuously starting from 1, and the coordinate system priority for the organization reference
can be selected from User defined. Assign the minimum number with reference to the first axis. The
numbers are then organized by the second axis within the range that does not affect the first axis. The
numbers are organized again by the third axis within the range that does not affect the first and second
axes.

For example, if the first is X, second is Y, third is Z, then the organization is first d1 by considering the X
coordinates specified by the first priority. The number increases from the small X coordinate to the large X
coordinate, and if the X coordinates are the same, then the next priority Y coordinates are considered. For
elements, XYZ coordinates of the center of gravity is used for organization.

The number order can be selected from Ascending/Descending order.

Mesh Topology
9.2
Check Overview

Analyze the mesh information and sort the mesh depending on classification for easy distinction. Apply the
check mesh menu to view all existing meshes regardless of the view/hide status to display all calculated
free lines, free surfaces, and etc. on the screen.

352 | Section 9. Tools

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

When checking a free surface, the mesh is displayed as a wireframe and it may be difficult to check for free
surfaces existing within the interior of the model. In this case, the mesh check is performed with all target
meshes hidden.

Methodology

[Non-Manifold Edges (Blue)]

Check Non-Manifold edges in blue. A Non-Manifold edge is formed at the meeting edge of three or more
element surfaces.

[Feature Edge (Yellow)]

Check the feature edge in yellow. A feature edge is the line that has a sudden change in the model shape,
and has an angle larger than the feature division angle between 2 element surfaces.
 Feature Angle
Input the feature angle to calculate the feature edge.

[Free Faces (Orange)]

Check the free surface in orange. The free surface is the section where the nodes between 3D elements
are not connected.
 Show Bounding Faces
This is an option to show/hide the boundary faces among free faces. It is useful to check free
faces located inside in case of 3D complex model.

Section 9. Tools | 353

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Clamped Element (Purple)]

Check the clmped element in purple. Search for elements with all nodes on the free surface in each 3D
element. If the boundary condition is all applied on the free surface of the mesh, the confined element does
not affect the analysis.

[Overlapped Element (Green)]

Check overlapped elements that have the same node information at the same position. The elements are
highlighted in green, and the Element > Delete function can be used to delete the overlapping element.

Mesh Quality

Overview

The relative size between connected elements and the shape and quality of a mesh have a larger effect on
the analysis results than its absolute size. Hence, after creating a mesh, it is important to check and modify
the quality of the mesh, especially for 3D elements. Input the reference value to color the elements that do
not meet this standard.

[Aspect Ratio]
Length ratio between the width and length, or the ratio of the longest side to the shortest side of a 2D
element. For example, a square has the same width and length and therefore has an aspect ratio of 1. As a
shape digresses from the square shape, the aspect ratio becomes smaller. A value closer to 1 is ideal. This
ratio has significant effect on the analysis result and if the value is very small, it may be hard to obtain
normal analysis results.

[Skew Angle]
How much the shape digresses from the rectangular shape (90 degrees), measured in angles. A
quadrilateral forms a 90 degree angle, the inclination angle is 0 degrees and this value increases as the
shape strays from the quadrilateral. For a solid element, the inclination angle is checked for each face and
the smallest value is chosen as the inclination angle. A value closer to 0 is better.

354 | Section 9. Tools

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Warpage]
Evaluates how much the shape is out of the plane. For a quadrilateral 2D element with all nodes on the
same plane, the value is 0. The value increases as the shape strays from the plane. For a solid element,
the warpage is checked for each rectangular face and the smallest value is chosen as the warpage value.
A value closer to 0 is better. This item has significant effect on the analysis result and if the value is very
large, it may be hard to obtain normal analysis results.

[Taper]
Geometrically calculates how much the quadrilateral digresses. It is not applied to triangular elements. A
quadrilateral has a value of 1, and the value decreases as it digresses (becomes closer to a triangular
shape) from its rectangular shape. For a solid element, the taper value is checked for each face and the
smallest value is chosen as the taper value. A value closer to 1 is better.

Section 9. Tools | 355

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

[Jacobian Ratio]
The Jacobian determinant is calculated at each Gauss integral point on the mesh the Jacobian ratio is the
ratio between the largest and smallest Jacobian determinant value. For 2D elements, the Jacobian
determinant is calculated on the element projected onto a plane. For solid elements, the Jacobian
determinant is calculated directly. If the quadrilateral element is not convex, the negative value is outputted
and the analysis is not performed properly. A higher value is better.

[Twist(Solid)]
Value that represents the twist between 2 opposing faces in a solid.

[Element length]
Check the edge length of an element. Here, the minimum and maximum values can be set.

Mesh set

After the quality check has finished, press ‘Send’ to define a different mesh set. The user can specify the
name of the mesh set.

356 | Section 9. Tools

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Overview
9.3
Table The node and mesh information for all mesh sets in a model can be printed onto a table. Activate all
created mesh sets and select mesh set to extract the overlapping nodes and element information from.

Node table

Selecting an element prints the coordinate information of all nodes in the selected element. The model
information can be modified on the table through Add, Edit, Delete.

Element table

Selecting an element prints the element information divided into element type tabs. The node connections
and node number can be checked and the element can be edited on the table through Add, Edit, Delete.

Section 9. Tools | 357

 User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

Click the right mouse button on the node/element table to bring up the Context Menu. The functions
available in the menu are as follows.

Copy/Paste/Find
Copy the selected area on the table and paste it into a different table on excel or search particular number

Sorting Dialog

Organize the table information according to a certain principle. Each column title is listed in the Table
column and the chosen align principle is moved to the Align key column. The checked Asc in the Align key
column organizes in ascending order and the top column on the Align key column is given priority. The
priority can be changed by using the Up, Down button.

Style Dialog

Change the expression style of each data on the table. The name of each column is listed and Integer,
real, string is automatically listed for each string type. The width, alignment (Left, Right, Center) format,
digits or each column can be set. The data format can be chosen from the 4 options below.

358 | Section 9. Tools

User Manual Chapter 4. Mesh

 Default : The data is expressed in 11 digits.

 Fixed : The decimal place is specified by the input value.
 Scientific : The input value is used as the number of significant figures, which are expressed in
exp1ntial form. It is useful for expressing very small numerical data such as the permeability
coefficient.
 General : Rounding off at the digit, automatically determined by the program.

Resize Column Width

Minimize the width of each column. It is useful when there are many columns.

Show Graph
Select 2 or more columns to draw a graph. The graph type can be chosen from the 25 built-in options.

The graph can be drawn by setting the graph type and X axis, Y axis labels and click the right mouse
button on the graph table to bring up the Context Menu. The functions available in the menu are as
follows.

Edit the graph title and the label of each axis. Select an arbitrary point on the graph with the left mouse
button and drag to magnify. In this case, use Zoom out to return to the original state. The graph can be
saved as an image file (*.bmp, *.jpg. etc.)

Export to Excel / Active Dialog

Auto-save the printed table as an excel file and re-set the mesh set to print the node/element information
from using the Active dialog box.

Section 9. Tools | 359

Advanced Nonlinear and
Detail Analysis System

Chapter 5
Analysis
Method

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1. Contact

Section 2. Construction Stage

Section 3. Boundary Condition

Section 4. Load

Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Section 1 Contact
Contact analysis fundamentally assumes that two objects in a space can be in contact, but cannot
penetrate each other (non-penetration condition), and are nonlinear in behavior or condition from a physical
point of view. The type of contacts are general contact (considers the impact and impact friction between
two objects in analysis), rough contact(does not consider sliding), welded contact (two objects are welded
from the start of analysis) and sliding contact (only considers the sliding in the tangent direction). In the
example below, general contact and rough contact are assigned depending on the position of two objects
at the start of analysis and can be seen as linear. FEA NX supports the welded and general contact feature.

▶Concept of General
contact and Rough
contact

Rough contact
General contact

▶Concept of Welded
contact

Welded contact

Section 1. Contact | 361

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Overview
1.1
Define Contact Use welded contact elements where element faces meet, but the nodes are not shared, to induce the same
behavior. It can be used as the initial contact conditions between adjacent objects in structural analysis,
consolidation analysis or seepage analysis. It is often used when node sharing on very complex geometry
needs to be ignored to create an element. This function prevents analysis error and checks the analysis
results that are similar to node sharing.

General contact considers the impact and impact friction between two objects in analysis, otherwise two
objects are bonded like rigid link each other by welded contact. General contact can be used in nonlinear
(static, dynamic) and fully coupled analysis. With Geometric Nonlinearity option, solver will take into
account all possible contact area automatically regardless of defined Contact tolerance between two
objects. It is also possible to consider Frictional behavior by Friction coefficient between two objects and
the penetration at initial stage can be ignored by adjusting slave nodes automatically.

▶Define auto contact

▶Create manual contact
pair

Methodology

The contact can be defined through the Automatic Contact and the Create Manual Contact Pair functions.

Auto contact

This function automatically searches for areas where the selected meshes meet without node sharing and
creates a contact surface.
[Searching Distance] : Input the distance between the main contact surface and the sub contact surface.
The function searches for contact surfaces within this range.

Manual contact pair

The user can directly specify the main contact surface and the sub contact surface to create a contact
surface. Face, 2D element, 3D element, 2D element free face, and 3D element free face geometries can be
selected.
When creating the contact surface manually, the node-to-surface contact or surface-to surface-contact can
be selected to create the surface. Node-to-surface contact takes less time, but the solution accuracy is
relatively low because the nodes of the main object tend to penetrate through the sub object. On the other
hand, surface-to surface-contact takes longer but the non-penetrating conditions are satisfied relatively
accurately, allowing for more accurate simulations of structural behavior.

362 | Section 1. Contact

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

[Contact Parameters] : Input the coefficient value to calculate the initial contact search distance. The initial
contact search distance can be found by multiplying the coefficient value by the longest length on the
element face. If the main and sub contact faces are within this distance, contact is considered to have
occurred.

Contact Parameters

Define the normal and tangential stiffness of contact element. Based on the material properties of adjacent
elements, the stiffness will be updated automatically according to the generated strain. Highly recommend
to use Default setting for Scaling Factor.

Following is the summary of parameters for the Contact Elements.

Parameter Reference value (kN, m)

Contact stiffness (Recommend to use default setting)

Normal stiffness scaling 1 (The smaller value, the larger penetration)

Tangential stiffness scaling 0.1 ( Normal stiffness / 10)

Advanced options (parameters)
Contact Tolerance Auto (Uncheck) : Find contact area within the tolerance

Friction Coefficient (Optional) 0.3 ~ 0.6 (Depending on material types)

Impermeable (Uncheck) : Possible to allow seepage flow

Conduction for Seepage Flow
through the contact elements

Property used to describe ability to conduct heat between

Thermal Conductance
two bodies in contact.

Section 1. Contact | 363

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Section 2 Construction Stage

Most numerical analysis for ground over the entire construction process is done through construction stage
analysis. Ground analysis is normally material non-linear analysis and the material non-linear properties
can be obtained from the initial conditions within the ground. Here, the initial conditions are the in-situ
conditions of the site before construction.

After the initial stresses have been obtained from the initial conditions, the excavation loading and Shear
strength from applying material properties can also be obtained. Hence, construction stage analysis
includes the sequential construction process, starting from the initial ground conditions. Because on-site
construction stages are very complex and subject to change, the analysis simplifies the process and
focuses on the important construction stages.

For example, the construction stages for a tunnel are as follows.

1 Stage: Initial ground stress

2 Stage: 1st face excavation
3 Stage: 1st reinforcement + 2nd face excavation
4 Stage: 2nd reinforcement + 3rd face excavation
5 Stage: 3rd reinforcement + 4th face excavation
…… (Repeat) ……

FEA NX does not create an independent analysis model for each construction stage. Rather, it uses a
cumulative model concept where only the structural or loading changes are input for each construction
stage and the analysis results are accumulated from the previous stage analysis results. Therefore in
construction stage analysis, the structural changes and loading history from the previous stage affects the
next stage analysis results. For example, when applying a load in an arbitrary construction stage, the
loading will continue to exist in future construction stages until it is removed.

Instead of generating all the needed elements for an arbitrary construction step, only the elements needed
for that construction stage are generated.

The definition of the construction stage is done by dragging & dropping the mesh set, boundary set, load
set and contact set into the activated data column or deactivated data column. FEA NX provides the [Stage
Definition Wizard], [Define Construction Stage] and [Simulate Construction Stage] functions to ease the
construction stage setup process.

364 | Section 2. Construction stage

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Overview
2.1
Stage Definition A wizard to efficiently define the construction stages. A regular number (postfix) needs to be assigned to
Wizard each set to define the construction stage using wizard. This number can be assigned using the [Rename]
function for mesh sets. Sets that are only used once in the entire construction stage process does not need
to be assigned a number.

It can be used in construction stage-using analysis (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/Consolidation analysis).

▶Stage definition wizard

Methodology

Display the usable Mesh sets, Boundary sets and Load sets. Select the desired data and drag it to the Set
assignment rule, or drag the Mesh set, Boundary set and Load set to the activation state.

Be aware that the display format of each set is completely different from the workstree. Here, all mesh sets
are displayed as individual mesh sets, ignoring the relationship between mesh sets and sub-mesh sets in
the workstree. Also, the upper most display name is the mesh set name without the postfix. Expanding one
step displays the mesh set name with the postfix.

Refer to the following example.

▶Element, Boundary,
Load display format

Section 2. Construction Stage | 365

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Set Assignment Rule

Specify the construction stage set used to define the construction stage and specify the assignment rule.

[Set Type]
The type of set on which the construction stage will be defined. The user can select between Mesh set,
Boundary set or Load set.

[Set Name Prefix]

Specify the name without the serial number of the set on which the construction stage will be defined.
For example, if a Mesh set is specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’, select the Set name
prefix as ‘‘Final Core #’.

[A/R]
Select whether to Add or Remove a selected set. A is displayed in green and R is displayed in yellow.

[Start Postfix]
Specify the set number of the selected set that is used first in the construction stage.
For example, if a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’ is selected and the Final
Core #001’ is removed at the second construction stage with the other Cores removed in sequence after
each step, the first used set number is 001 and so the postfix can be set as ‘1’.

[F]
Check this option on when the selected set is not used until the final number. The user can input the end
suffix when checked. If it is not checked, the set is used sequentially until the final number.

[End Postfix]
Specify the set number of the selected set that is used last in the construction stage.
For example, if a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’ is selected and the Final
Core #001’ is removed at the second construction stage with sequential removal until the ‘Final Core #006’,
check F and input the postfix 6.

[Postfix Increment]
Input the postfix number increment used as the construction stage progresses.
For a Mesh set specified from 'Final Core #001' to 'Final Core #012', if the mesh is removed in order of
'Final Core #001', 'Final Core #003' and 'Final Core #005' for each construction stage, the postfix increment
is 2 and hence, input a postfix spacing of 2.

[Start Stage]
Input the stage number first used in the construction stage.
For example, if a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’ is selected and the Final
Core #001’ is removed at the second construction stage with the other Cores removed in sequence after
each step, the second stage is first used and so the start stage is set as 2.

[Stage Increment]
Select the stage increment for a selected set that is used every few stages.

366 | Section 2. Construction stage

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

For a Mesh set specified from ‘Final Core #001’ to ‘Final Core #012’, if the 'Final Core #001' is removed at
the second construction stage and the Final Core #002' is removed at the fourth construction stage, the set
is used every 2 stages and so the stage spacing is 2.

[Apply Assignment Rule]

Press this button to display the specified data according to the assignment rule on the Mesh, Boundary,
Load set activated state. Press OK to create the construction stage.
The activated Mesh, Boundary, and Load set can be checked for each stage using the Preview
construction stage( ) option. This function has the same function as Construction stage simulation ( ).

Mesh, Boundary, Load Activation Status

Display the currently specified construction stage on a table.

The construction stage progresses as it moves to the right. The I.S. and S1 on the top of the columns are
abbreviations for initial stage and Stage1, respectively. The added data is displayed in green and the
removed data is displayed in orange. Data defined by postfixes are expressed in each construction stage
as numbers. Data that does not use a prefix (eg. Ground) are expressed as a line. If the mesh, boundary
condition and load data are dragged onto the menu [Mesh, Boundary, Load Activation Status], the delete
setting cannot be conducted and only additional settings can be conducted.

▶Mesh, Boundary, Load

display format

Click the [Apply Assignment Rule] button to display the construction stage on the Mesh, Boundary, Load
activation status. To delete the displayed construction stage, select that data cell and press the Delete key
on the keyboard.

This method deletes the created construction stage data, but not the construction stage. Hence, a
construction stage with no content is created. Select the whole target column and press the Ctrl and Delete
key together to delete the construction stage for the whole column.

The stage where all the mesh sets are activated initially (in-situ state) is when all the mesh sets in the I.S.
(initial stage) are activated. This stage can be specified by entering 0 for start stage (the 0 stage is the
initial stage) and 0 for stage spacing (the stage increment number is 0 and thus all elements are activated
in one stage).

The advanced options (LDF etc.) used in the construction stage can be set in the Define Construction
Stage menu. Hence for complex models, it is convenient to use the Construction Stage Wizard to create
the framework of the overall construction stages. It is also convenient to use the [Define Construction Stage]
menu to specify the individual options used in each construction stage.

Example

Let us examine a simple example of Construction stage definition.

The construction stage is defined for a tunnel modeled on a homogeneous ground. The entire tunnel shape
is excavated at once and the rock bolts and shotcrete are created in the following stages. The excavation is

Section 2. Construction Stage | 367

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

done in 5 stages. The excavation is assumed to start from the smaller postfix number and progresses to
the larger postfix.

The mesh set is created as follows.

Run the Stage definition wizard.

'Soil' and 'Tunnel#' need to be included in the in-situ state. Select using the Ctrl key and drag & drop into
the I.S. column of the Mesh, Boundary, Load activation status.

Start the tunnel excavation.

In this example, the exaction is done stage by stage, starting from the first stage as follows: 1st face tunnel
excavation -> 1st face rock bolt/shotcrete installment -> 2nd tunnel excavation -> 2nd face rock
bolt/shotcrete installment -> ….
Select R to select and delete the 'Tunnel#' of the element type, the Start postfix as 1 and do not check F to
process until the last number. The Start stage is 1 and the input is 2 for the Stage spacing to allow for the
installation of rock bolts and shotcrete between excavation stages. Afterwards, click the [Apply Assignment
Rules] button to specify the construction stage of the Mesh, Boundary, Load activation status.

The shotcrete and rock bolts are also specified on the construction stage.
Input 2 for the Start stage and set as A to create both elements in the second construction stage. Also,
input Start postfix 1, do not check F and input Postfix spacing to use all the numbers from 1 to the final
number. Finally, input 2 for the Start stage and Stage spacing to create the first elements at the second
construction stage with two stage spacing between element creation.

368 | Section 2. Construction stage

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Press the [Assign Assignment Rules] button to automatically create the Mesh, Boundary, Load activation
status and click the [OK] button to create the construction stage.

Overview
2.2
Construction Define the Construction stage set for analysis.
Stage Set
▶Construction stage set

Used for analyses that incorporate construction stages (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/Consolidation
analysis).

Methodology

Define the Construction Stage Set and then define the Construction Stage.
A single file can be composed of multiple Construction stage sets.
The construction stage types are [Stress], [Seepage], [Stress-Seepage-Slope], [Consolidation], [Fully
Coupled stress], [Heat Transfer], [Seepage-Thermal Stress], [Thermal Stress].

▶Analysis methods
supported for construction
stage formation

Section 2. Construction Stage | 369

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Click the Define Construction Stage button to form the construction stage. Advanced options that are not
available on the [Stage Definition Wizard] can be set.

▶Define construction
stage

Stage name

Define the construction stage name. Use [New] to create a new construction stage and use [Insert] to add a
new construction stage in between existing stages.
For example, clicking the Insert button at Stage 2 moves the current stage to Stage 3, and the new stage
becomes Stage2. Click the button to move to the previous or next stage.

Stage type

Specify the construction stage type. Be aware that the designated [Analysis Control], [Output Control]
options are different and the boundary conditions/loading conditions for each stage type are different.
Refer to the Analysis > Analysis case > General > Analysis/Output Control for more information on control
options.

Move to Previous/Next

The construction stage order may need modification when many construction stages are created. Use the
Move to Previous or Next button to change the order of created construction stages.

Time Step

Define time steps used in the analysis.

[Duration]
Insert the duration to be analyzed. ‘User Defined Step’ generates steps by dividing with Step Number. ‘Auto
Time Step’ automatically divides defined period with time step.

[Auto Time Step]

It will automatically choose appropriate time steps for a consolidation or fully coupled stress seepage
analysis.

370 | Section 2. Construction stage

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

When the calculation runs smoothly, resulting in very few iterations per step, then the program will choose
a larger time step. When the calculation uses many iterations due to an increasing amount of plasticity,
then the program will take smaller time steps.
This function reduces the pore water pressure result errors when loading is applied in short period of time.

[Initial Time Step]

Initial Time Step can be either manually defined by user or calculated automatically within solver. The
automatic calculation formula is as follows:

 w h2  1   s s 
tinitial    A , A  n  
 k  Kbulk   K water p 
Where,  w : Unit weight of water
h : Length of element
 : Shape factor (1/3)
k : Permeability
K bulk : Bulk modulus
n : Porosity
s : Degree of saturation
K water : Bulk modulus of water
p : Pore water pressure

[Max. Pore Pressure Changes per Step]

Input Max. Pore Pressure Changes per step. When pore pressure changes exceeds the maximum value,
step size is automatically reduced and analyzed.

[Ratio of Max Time Step to Initial]

Input the maximum value of time step ratio compared to ‘Initial Critical Time Step’.

[Max. Temperature Changes per Step]

Input Max. Temperature Changes per step. When temperature changes exceeds the maximum
value, step size is automatically reduced and analyzed.

[Save Step]
Select the output method of results. 'Last Increment': Only output results from last step, 'Every Increment':
Output results from all steps.

Section 2. Construction Stage | 371

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Set Data

Display the usable Mesh sets, Boundary sets, and Load sets in a workstree. Be aware that the sub-sets are
also displayed independently, so take caution when selecting the mesh sets.

For example, the set data for the created Core mesh set with registered mesh sub-sets (Core 001, Core
002, Core 003) are shown in the right figure. In this case, activating Core does not activate the mesh sub-
sets Core 001, Core 002, Core 003. Hence, mesh sets that are not registered directly on the set data are
useless.

Activated Data

Register the activated sets for each construction stage. The activated sets remain active for future
construction stages without needing re-activation until it is deactivated. The sets that need to be activated
for the construction stage can be selected using the left mouse button and dragged & dropped into the
activated data. Another method is to select the sets using the right mouse button on the Set data and select
activate on the Context menu.

Deactivated data

Register the deactivated set for each construction stage. The deactivated sets remain active for future
construction stages until they are re-activated. The sets that need to be deactivated for the construction
stage can be selected using the left mouse button and dragged & dropped into [Deactivated data]. Another
method is to select the sets using the right mouse button on [Set data] and select deactivate on the Context
menu.

Define Water Level For Global

Input the groundwater level that changes according to the construction stage with respect to the GCS. Click
to set the ground water level function. If the water level and function are both specified, the input water
level is multiplied onto the function and applied on the analysis.

Define Water Level for Mesh Set

Define the groundwater level that changes according to the construction stage for each mesh set.
If the groundwater layer is surrounded by rocks or an impermeable clay layer (confined aquifer), the
presence/absence of the groundwater level for each ground layer can be set for analysis.
If the total groundwater level is input and a mesh set has a defined groundwater level, the mesh set
groundwater level has priority and the total groundwater level is applied to mesh sets that do not have a
defined level.
If the water level and function are both specified, the input water level is multiplied onto the function and
applied on the analysis.

372 | Section 2. Construction stage

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

LDF

Set the Load Distribution Factor. The sum of all distribution factors need to be 1, and the keyboard Enter
key needs to be pressed after the input to apply the value properly.
For the example case shown below, a LDF of 0.4 is applied to the current stage and a LDF of 0.3 is applied
to the next stage and the subsequent stage. Here, the LDF does not need to be checked for the latter two
stages and the LDFs need to be set such that they do not overlap in the construction stages.

The application method of the Load Distribution Factor is as follows:

The LDF keeps track of the Internal Forces of a deleted element and loads it in stages according to the
factor assigned for each construction stage, rather than loading it at once.

When applying the LDF on the top and bottom simultaneously, the factors need to be set such that they do
not overlap in the construction stages. If the LDFs overlap as shown below, when calculating the internal
forces of this stage, the 0.5 on the bottom element released in STG #5 releases the stress using the
internal force of the bottom element, created by the 0.7 on the top element defined in STG #4. Hence, the
1.0 on the top element of STG #4 is not released and so, the internal force for the 0.3 on top is not taken
into account for analysis.

Part STG #3 STG #4 STG #5 STG #6

Top 0.3 0.4 0.3 -
Bottom - - 0.5 0.5

STG #3 STG #4 STG #5 STG #6

Hence, be careful not to overlap the LDFs in the construction stage, as shown below.

Section 2. Construction Stage | 373

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Part STG #3 STG #4 STG #5 STG #6 STG #7

Top 0.3 0.4 0.3 - -
Bottom - - - 0.5 0.5

Clear Displacement

Set the displacement of an analysis result in the current stage as 0. It is used to set the initial conditions of
the in-situ state. The stress is not reset to 0.

Slope Stability (SRM/SAM)

Decide whether to conduct the slope stability analysis (SRM) in the current construction stage. If this option
is checked, it is automatically registered as an analysis case and analysis is conducted. In other words, the
ground stress from the non-linear analysis results in the previous stage is coupled and slope stability
analysis is conducted. (However for SAM analysis, it is only applicable for 2D analysis and the boundary
conditions of the virtual slip surface needs to be set.)

Overview
2.3
Simulate Check the defined construction stage as a video.
Construction
Stage It can be used in analyses that incorporate construction stages (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/
Consolidation analysis).

▶Simulate Construction
Stage

Methodology

Specify the defined construction stage set and click the button to play the construction stage video. The
video is created by capturing the whole work screen. Unwanted frames can be inserted if a different dialog
box is open above the model.
Check the [Mesh],[Load] and [Boundary] to check the activated/deactivated data of the construction stage.

374 | Section 2. Construction stage

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Overview
2.4
Auto Set Automatically generate construction stages using the mesh, boundary condition, load that are viewed on
the current model screen.
It can be used in construction stage-using analysis (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/Consolidation analysis).
The data used for each stage can be checked on the model, allowing intuitive composition of stages.

Methodology

The construction stage auto set function can be activated by using the following steps:

1. Adding the construction stage set after finishing modeling registers the added construction stage set on
the workstree, as shown below.

2. Check the [Define Auto Stage] option by right mouse clicking on the registered construction stage set.
This option activates the Construction stage > Auto set on the ribbon menu that allows for the specification
of construction stages on the selected construction stage set.

▶Define auto stage

3. Click the [Auto Set] icon to automatically register the displayed meshes, boundary conditions, load
conditions on the activated data column and the un-displayed (not checked) meshes, boundary conditions,
load conditions on the deactivated data column. In other words, set the show/hide model information for
each composing stage and select [Auto Set] to automatically set the construction stage with reference to
the currently shown information. The created stages can be checked on the workstree.

Because the concept of construction stages is cumulative, the program compares the activated/deactivated
model information in the previous stage and only adds/deletes the changed information. Hence, it is
recommended that the creation be done in stages, after the displayed model information is returned to its
initial in-situ state.

Section 2. Construction Stage | 375

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

The auto set function generates construction stages using the work environment displayed on the screen.
Hence, to specify the individual options (LDF setting, clear displacement etc.) for each stage, use the
Construction stage set specification menu to check the options for each stage.

Overview
2.5
Volume Data The volume data of 1D/2D/3D elements defined to the construction stage is exported to excel file. This
Export shows the length/area/volume of activated/deactivated set for stages. This doesn’t apply for the other
element types (point spring, matrix spring, free field, interface, shell interface, pile tip, elastic link, rigid link,
user supplied behavior for shell interface, mass).

Methodology

▶Volume Data Export

376 | Section 2. Construction stage

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Section 2. Construction Stage | 377

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Section 3 Boundary Condition

The boundary conditions on FEA NX can be divided into the following three categories:

 Degree of freedom (DOF) constraint for displacement for Stress analysis

 Seepage boundary for Seepage analysis
 Boundary element for Equivalent linear analysis

The DOF constraint for the displacement function is used to constrain the displacement of an arbitrary node
or the DOF component when merging elements (Beam element with Plane stress element, Plate element
with Solid element etc.) with different DOF's for each node.

The DOF constraint for an arbitrary node is input as 6, with reference to the GCS.
If the node coordinate system exists, the node coordinate system becomes the reference.

For example, the method of assigning the DOF constraint conditions of a planar frame model below is as
follows. The movement of this 2D model is only allowed in the GCS X-Z plane and hence, the displacement
DOF in the GCS Y direction and the rotational DOF in the X and Z direction needs to be constrained for all
nodes.

▶Planar frame model that N2 N4 N6

considers the DOF
constraint condition

angle of
z x inclination
N1
y
N3 N5

Z
NCS
: fixed support condition
Y X : pinned support condition
GCS
: roller support condition

Also, for the N1 node with the fixed support condition, the displacement DOF in the GCS X,Z direction and
the rotational DOF in the Y direction is additionally constrained using the [Constraint] function. For the pin
supported N3 node with the roller support condition, the displacement DOF in the Z direction is constrained.

For the roller supported N5 node, the node coordinate system is rotated by the angle of inclination with
reference to the GCS X axis, and then the displacement DOF in the Z direction is constrained with
reference to the node coordinate system.

This DOF constraint for node displacement is often used for support conditions where the displacement can
be ignored, and assigning the constraint condition on an arbitrary node creates reaction forces on that node.
The reaction forces are output with reference to the GCS and if a node coordinate system is assigned,
the forces can be output with reference to the node coordinate system.

The method of assigning the DOF constraint conditions of a planar ground model below is as follows.

378 | Section 3. Boundary Condition

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Because the ground model restricts the normally semi-infinite analysis area to the tunnel surroundings, the
analysis boundary is defined at a position where there is nearly no change in stress or displacement due to
the tunnel construction. The nodes at the left and right boundary are constrained for the X DOF and the
nodes at the bottom boundary are constrained for the Z DOF. An additional X DOF constraint can be
assigned to the bottom boundary if the horizontal displacement at the bottom is not symmetric.
If the top boundary is in contact with the atmosphere like the ground surface, no degrees of freedom are
constrained. However, if the top ground is omitted from the analysis and the effects of gravity are ignored
when defining the interior initial stress of the model evenly for analysis efficiency, such as for deep road
tunnels, the Z direction DOF for the top boundary is also constrained.

▶Planar ground model that Ground surface

considers the DOF

constraint condition

Tunnel

The analysis boundary surface constraint conditions of a 3D ground model also follows the 2D model
method, where the DOF is constrained in the direction perpendicular to the boundary surface.

The figure below shows examples of 3D degrees of freedom constraint conditions. For a truss connection,
only the axial direction of the truss element has a DOF for displacement and so, the X direction
displacement and all rotation direction displacement components at the connection node are constrained. A
beam element with replaced top, bottom flanges has 6 degrees of freedom for each node and so, nodes
that are connected to the beam element do not need separate constraint conditions. For the nodes where
the plane stress elements meet, the plane stress element only has a DOF for in-plane behavior and so, the
degrees of freedom for the out-plane Y direction displacement and all rotational degrees of freedom need
to be constrained.

connecting node
▶When truss elements are (DX, RX, RY and RZ are constrained)
supports (all degrees of
freedom are constrained)

joined together
top flange (beam element)
▶▶When the top, bottom
Z
flanges of a H shape
web (plane stress
cantilever beam is element) X
modeled as a beam
element and the web is Z Y
modeled as a plane stress
Y
element supports (all degrees of
bottom flange (beam element)
freedom are constrained)
X in-plane vertical load ●: nodes without constrains
○ : DY, RX, RY and RZ are constrained
DX: displacement in the GCS X direction
DY: displacement in the GCS Y direction
DZ: displacement in the GCS Z direction
RX: rotation about the GCS X-axis
RY: rotation about the GCS Y-axis
RZ: rotation about the GCS Z-axis

Section 3. Boundary Condition | 379

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Overview
3.1
Define Set Define the boundary condition set.

▶Define set

Methodology

Input the name and specification and click [Add] to define the boundary condition set. The boundary
condition set can be input beforehand, and the name of each boundary condition can be entered when it is
generated.

The registered boundary condition set is automatically registered under Workstree > Analysis > Boundary
Condition and the checkbox is used to show or hide the set.

▶Workstree – Boundary

380 | Section 3. Boundary Condition

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Overview
3.2
Constraint Set the constraint conditions of a model.

▶Basic constraint
▶▶Advanced constraint
▶▶▶Auto constraint

Methodology

The methods for setting a constraint condition of a model are [Basic], [Advanced] and [Auto].

[Basic]
Select the target and assign a [Fixed], [Pinned] or [No Rotation] that fits the behavior of the analysis model.

[Advanced]
The 6 degrees of freedom of a node can be fully or partially constrained.
Tx, Ty, Tz are the displacement constraints in the x, y, z direction and Rx, Ry, Rz are the rotational
constraints in the x, y, z direction.
The constraint conditions can be input for a desired boundary condition (Point, Edge, Face, Node, Free
face node).

The constraint conditions are assigned to the element node and reflected in the analysis. Setting the
constraint conditions on a point, edge, face etc. is a convenient method of selecting element nodes
included in the selected geometry shape

[Auto]
Select the target mesh set to automatically create constraint conditions. The ground conditions for general
stress analysis are set automatically. The x direction displacement is constrained for the left/right side, the y
direction displacement is constrained for the front/back side and the x,y direction displacement is
constrained for the bottom of a model.

Boundary set
Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the
boundary set.

Section 3. Boundary Condition | 381

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

* Symmetric and inverse symmetric constraints

Boundary conditions can be largely divided into two conditions;
1. Constraint conditions of the analysis target are specified.
2. Symmetry of the structure is used to analyze the symmetric area only, not the entire model.

Applying symmetry is a very effective way to increase the convenience of modeling and decrease the
analysis time. If the geometry of the structure and loading is symmetrical, a 1/2 model or 1/4 model can be
used to decrease the number of elements and create an economic model that reduces analysis time.
However, constraints exist when checking the deformed shape or stress distribution for the entire model
because the analysis results from the symmetric model cannot be shown on the entire model. Here, use
the View symmetric model function on the Additional view control toolset to expand the analysis results of
the 1/2 or 1/4 model onto the entire model.

 How to apply symmetric boundary conditions

If one or more of the geometry shapes, materials, loads or boundary conditions is symmetrical about a
plane or axis, the symmetric boundary condition can be used. The View symmetric model function can
output, expand a 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 symmetric model onto the entire model. To assign a symmetric boundary
condition, a boundary condition needs to be set such that the structure does not invade the symmetry
plane.

The figure below is an example of symmetric constraint conditions applied to a solid model. To apply the
symmetric constraint conditions in the YZ plane, the Translation degree of freedom Tx is constrained.
For the XY plane, the Tz needs to be constrained and for the ZX plane, the Ty needs to be constrained.

Because Solid elements do not have a rotational degree of freedom, only the displacement boundary
condition of the symmetric model is constrained. However, the rotational degree of freedom needs to be
constrained for a Shell model such that the symmetry plane is not invaded. In other words, Tx,Ry,Rz
need to be constrained for the XY plane, Tz,Rx,Ry for the XY plane and Ty,Rx,Rz for the ZX plane.

When applying a symmetric boundary condition, the loading size needs to be converted to fit the
symmetric condition. Also, the symmetric condition cannot be applied to the model shape and buckling
shape because of the asymmetric vibration mode or the possibility of asymmetric buckling.

382 | Section 3. Boundary Condition

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Overview
3.3
Constraint Constrain the degree of freedom such that a particular node is dependent on the behavior of another node.
Equation
▶Constraint equation

Methodology

Constrain the behavior of one node to the behavior of another node. Define the main node that affects the
deformation of another node and degree of freedom [Constrained Node/DOF]. TX, TY, TZ are the degrees
of freedom for displacement and RX, RY, RZ are the degrees of freedom for rotation. [Independent
Node/DOF] inputs the coefficient applied on the displacement of the independent node, to define the
degree of freedom and interrelationship between the dependent node.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the
boundary set.

The behavioral characteristics are similar to Mesh > Element > Create > Other > Rigid link. For example,
when the main node moves by a certain distance, the dependent node can be constrained such that it
moves by twice that length. When creating a complex interrelationship between two or more nodes, the
constraint equation can be used.

Section 3. Boundary Condition | 383

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Overview
3.4
Change Property Apply a new attribute data or substitute an existing attribute data for an element that changes with the
construction stage.
It can be used in construction stage-using analysis (Static/Slope analysis, Seepage/Consolidation analysis).

▶Change property–
General
▶▶Change property
– Construction stage

General

Methodology

Select the target element and specify the element property subject to change.

Construction Stage

Methodology

If the construction stage is specified, change the element property collectively.

For example, apply a stage by stage change in the material property of shotcrete, from ductile to hardening,
of a 3D model. If the mesh set is already specified by shotcrete 001 ~ shotcrete 010, the boundary
conditions for element property change need to be specified separately for each element when using
Change property > General. However, for Change property > Construction stage, selecting shotcrete 001 ~
shotcrete 010 can create 10 boundary condition sets with just one click.

The name of the boundary condition set can be specified by [Replace substring of selected Mesh], [Fixed
Prefix] and [Add Prefix] to collectively change the name of the created mesh sets. If nothing is input, the
boundary condition set is created with the same name as the mesh set.

[Replace substring of selected Mesh] : Create a boundary condition set by using a different postfix on the
selected mesh set name.
[Fixed Prefix] : Create a boundary condition set by adding a different prefix, instead of using the selected
mesh set name.
[Add Prefix] : Create a boundary condition set by adding a prefix to the selected mesh set name.

Boundary set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the
boundary set.

384 | Section 3. Boundary Condition

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

[Change Property] can be used when the element properties change with the construction stage. If the
ground has a property A in Stage 1 and that property changes to B in Stage 2, which then changes to
property C in Stage 3, the following two boundary conditions are created.

Boundary condition 1 : A -> B

Boundary condition 2 : A -> C

Using Define construction stage, activate Boundary condition 1 in Stage 2 and for Stage 3, activate
Boundary condition 2 and deactivate Boundary condition 1.
As a result, an element property that changes by A->B->C can be defined.

Section 3. Boundary Condition | 385

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Overview
3.5
Slip Circular Define an circular virtual slip surface.
Surface
The virtual slip surface is a boundary condition used in slope stability analysis. The virtual slip surface can
only be set when the analysis setting is for 2D models.

▶Slip circular surface

Methodology

Define the slip surface of the virtual fracture arc using the grid point of the arc center and radius where the
tangent line to the arc is located.

Specify the rectangular grid area where the arc center can be located using 3 points (reference point x,y).
The center count x, y is the number of divisions in the grid area.
For example, entering a center count of 5,4 creates 5 x 4 = 20 arc center points.

The radius where the tangent line of the arc is located can be set using [Method using Tangent Line of
Circle] or [Method using Length and Range of Radius].

[Method using Tangent Line of Circle]

Directly specify the rectangular area where the tangent line is located on the work screen using [Draw
Range]. The number of radius divisions divides the rectangular area by that number and the tangent
direction of the arc radius domain can be changed using [Change Tangent Direction].

[Method using Length and Range of Radius]

Directly input the length of initial circular radius, increment for circle radius and number of increments for
circle radius.

Boundary Set
Register the set constraint conditions of the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the
boundary set.

386 | Section 3. Boundary Condition

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Overview
3.6
Slip Polygonal Define a non circular virtual slip surface.
Surface
The virtual slip surface is a boundary condition used in slope stability analysis. The virtual slip surface can
only be set when the analysis setting is for 2D models.

▶Slip polygonal surface

Methodology

The non circular virtual slip surface can be defined by:

 Directly input the coordinate values of the non-circular slip surface onto a table
 Mouse click the non circular slip surface domain on the work-plane

When defining the virtual slip surface on the work-plane, use the right mouse click to stop the input.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the
boundary set.

Section 3. Boundary Condition | 387

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Overview
3.7
Water level Create a changing groundwater level by selecting a geometry shape on the work screen.

▶Water level – edge

▶▶Water level – face

Edge

Methodology

Create a changing groundwater level by selecting edges.

Specify the axis direction of the changing variable. For example, if the groundwater level changes in the x
direction of the model, select the variable axis as x. Then input the spacing value. For example, if the
spacing is 1m, the groundwater level lines are created in 1m intervals.

The created water level is registered under Workstree > Analysis > Function > General function and can be
edited as a table using right mouse click > Edit.

388 | Section 3. Boundary Condition

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Face

Methodology

Select a face and input the spacing value to create a changing groundwater level.
The created water level is registered under Workstree > Analysis > Function > General function and can be
edited as a table using right mouse click > Edit.

Section 3. Boundary Condition | 389

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Overview
3.8
Nodal Head Input the head of the model. Both the constant head value for steady state analysis and the changing head
value for Transient analysis can be entered by applying the Seepage boundary condition function.

The Nodal head is used as a boundary condition for Seepage/Consolidation analysis (Fully-Coupled).

▶Nodal head

Methodology

Directly input the head value of a specific point. The target can be selected from [Node], [Edge], [Face],
[Free Face Node].
For [Node], the node is directly selected to define the head condition. Selecting [Edge] or [Face] defines the
head condition at all nodes in the selected line/face.

For [Free Face Node], select a free face node and all points that make contact with the node-containing
element at an angle smaller than the specified angle. Press to open the Free face/line entity selection
window to select the target.

There are two input methods:

1. [Total] : Input the head value calculated from the origin, regardless of the model position.
2. [Pressure] : Set the groundwater level condition by entering '0' for nodes that are on the groundwater
surface.

Transient analysis, in which the water level changes with time, can be defined as a function.
When using a function, the input value and function value are multiplied and reflected in the analysis.

390 | Section 3. Boundary Condition

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

The defined function is registered under Function > Seepage Boundary Function, and can be edited as a
table using right mouse click > Edit.

If Total Head < Potential Head, then Q = 0

A head-flow rate conversion boundary condition for water level variation analysis.
As the water level changes with time, such as for rapid drawdown, suction can occur and the seepage flow
can be reversed. If the water level falls suddenly for embankments or dams, the descending water level
speed is generally faster than the seepage speed within the body. To simulate these real conditions, the
head boundary conditions need to change automatically according to the water level. In other words, when
the node boundary at the bottom of the water level is exposed to the top, the total nodal head is not the
total head of the descended water level; it is the total head value before the descent, which is maintained
for a certain period, after which it falls gradually with time.

This option can be applied where the water level changes periodically and can be applied simultaneously
with a time variant function. However, if this option is checked when the input (total head) height of the
water level is above the selected node position, the boundary condition is automatically eliminated and so,
the option must be unchecked for this case.

If you put the total head as 140m, the

height of the water level is below the
selected territory. therefore,
→ Uncheck [if Total Head < Potential
Head, then Q=0]

The nodal head is applied then the water level position is known in advance. It is used to simulate
confined flow that does not form a phreatic surface. It is also used to simulate unconfined flow that creates
a seepage face.

Section 3. Boundary Condition | 391

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

The head boundary conditions can be selectively input between the Total Head and Pressure Head,
depending on the analysis condition. As shown in the figure below, it is convenient to input the Total Head
directly when the node position for boundary condition specification is easy to find from Z=0 on the GCS.
However, if the exact height is hard to find or if the height changes, it is convenient to input the Pressure
head as 0.

<Application of Nodal Head(ex.)>

Boundary condition set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary condition set. The user can specify the
name of the boundary condition set.

392 | Section 3. Boundary Condition

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Overview
3.9
Nodal Flux Input the flux at an arbitrary node.
The nodal flux is a boundary condition used in Seepage/Consolidation analysis (Fully-Coupled).

▶ Nodal flux

Methodology

Input the inflow/outflow per unit time on a particular position in terms of volumetric units. The target can be
selected from [Node], [Edge], [Face], [Free Face Node].

For [Node], the node is directly selected to define the nodal flux. Selecting [Edge] or [Face] defines the flow
rate conditions at all nodes in the selected edge/face.

For [Free Face Node], select a free face node and all points that make contact with the node-containing
element at an angle smaller than the specified angle selected. Press the button to select the reference
node, target element and feature angle.

Transient analysis (where the water level changes with time) can be defined as a function.
When using a function, the input value and function value are multiplied and reflected in the analysis.
The defined function is registered under Function > Seepage Boundary Function, and can be edited as a
table using right mouse click > Edit.

Section 3. Boundary Condition | 393

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the
boundary set.

The nodal flux boundary condition is used to simulate the inflow and outflow that happens at a node. The
(+) represents water flow into the node and (-) represents water flow out of the node. The time variant -
flux boundary condition can be input by coupling with a seepage function.

<Application of Nodal Flux>

394 | Section 3. Boundary Condition

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Overview
3.10
Surface Flux Input the surface flux boundary condition in terms of flow rate per unit area.
The surface flux is a boundary condition used in Seepage/Consolidation analysis (Fully-Coupled).

▶ Surface Flux

Methodology

Input the surface inflow/outflow rate of a specific point in terms of flow rate per unit area. It can be defined
as either an [Edge Flux] or [Face Flux]. Generally, the [Edge Flux] is input for 2D models and [Face Flux] is
input for 3D models.

The Face flux can be defined by entering the value on the edge or surface geometry, or directly entering it
on the selected element edge.

Define the inflow input from rainfall etc. as a (+) value and define the outflow input from excavation or
pumping etc. as a (-) value.

Transient analysis (where the water level changes with time) can be defined as a [Function].
When using a function, the input value and function value are multiplied and reflected in the analysis.
The defined function is registered under Function > Seepage Boundary Function, and can be edited as a
table using the right mouse click > Edit.

If q > Ksat, then Total Head = Potential Head

Section 3. Boundary Condition | 395

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

The flux-head boundary conversion condition for rainfall analysis.

For example, the Surface flux can be used to define the ground surface boundary conditions when the
rainfall intensity on the ground surface is inputted.

This function applies a forced inflow rate, as large as the rainfall intensity, onto the ground surface. If the
absorption capability of the soil stratum surface is larger than the rainfall intensity, the soil stratum absorbs
all the rain water. However if the absorption capability is smaller, rain is absorbed into the ground surface
by only the absorption capability amount, and the rest of the rain flows across the ground surface.

If the rainfall intensity is larger than the absorption capability, the ground surface is in a saturated state
during rainfall, as if the groundwater level existed above the surface. Hence, the area of rainfall needs to be
changed to a water level line.

Use the [If q > Ksat, then Total Head = Pressure Head] option to automatically change the ground surface
boundary from the existing rainfall intensity inflow condition to a water level condition for analysis. This
option is only available when the rainfall intensity acting on the surface is larger than the absorption
capability of the ground surface.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the
boundary set.

396 | Section 3. Boundary Condition

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Overview
3.11
Review Conduct iterative calculations using the Review function when the exact seepage line is hard to find.
Review is used as a boundary condition for Seepage/Consolidation analysis(Fully-Coupled).

▶Review boundary

Methodology

Select the points upon which to place the Review boundary.

For example, assuming that seepage occurs at the downstream face of a homogeneous dam, the seepage
line intersecting the downstream face cannot be found. In this case, set the review boundary and conduct
iterative calculations.

▶Specify Review
boundary node (ex.)
Review node

The target can be selected from [Node], [Edge], [Face], [Free Face Node].

For [Node], the node is directly selected to define the node on which iterative calculation will be conducted.
Selecting [Edge] or [Face] conducts the review for all nodes in the geometry shape.

For [Free Face Node], select a free face node and all points that make contact with the node-containing
element at an angle smaller than the specified angle selected. Press the button to select the reference
node, target element and feature angle.

The pore pressure P measured at the re-examined node is considered as the following condition, and these
two roles can be used to automatically search for the seepage surface.
1) When P > 0, Consider as P=0
2) Delete when P < 0
Boundary Set

Section 3. Boundary Condition | 397

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the
boundary set.

Overview
3.12
Draining Used to simulate the domain where the excess pore pressure is 0 (drain).
Condition The Drainage condition is used as a boundary condition for Consolidation analysis.

▶ Draining condition

Methodology

Select the point to assign Drainage conditions.

The target can be selected from [Node], [Edge], [Face], [Free Face Node].
For [Node], the node is directly selected to define the node on which the Drainage conditions will be
assigned. Selecting [Edge] or [Face] applies Drainage conditions for all nodes in the geometry shape.
For [Free Face Node], select a free face node and all points that make contact with the node-containing
element at an angle smaller than the specified angle are selected. Press the button to select the
reference node, target element and feature angle.

The excess pore pressure in an area with assigned drainage conditions is maintained as 0 and this implies
that water can escape due to loading applied to the ground. The Drainage condition is mainly used when
the permeability coefficient is large, or if the loading change is small.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the
boundary set.

398 | Section 3. Boundary Condition

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Overview
3.13
Non- Used to model non-consolidation layers.
Consolidation Non-consolidation elements are used as boundary conditions for Consolidation analysis.

▶ Non-consolidation

Methodology

Select the point to assign the Non-consolidation boundary conditions.

The target can be selected from [Element], [2D Element], [3D Element], [Face], [Part].
Selecting [Face] or [Part] applies the unconsolidated boundary conditions for all elements in the geometry
shape.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the
boundary set.

In Consolidation analysis, the elements have an additional pore pressure degree of freedom, as well as
displacement degree of freedom, at the nodes. FEA NX assumes all elements have a degree of freedom
for pore pressure, unless the two boundary conditions (Non-consolidating condition, Drainage condition)
are specified for consolidation analysis. Hence, for embankment materials that do not express
consolidated behavior directly, the non-consolidating element conditions need to be defined to apply it as
a general structural element. Also, the drainage conditions need to be defined for drainage boundaries in
consolidating elements. If the boundary conditions are properly defined and consolidation analysis is
conducted, the excess pore pressure is 0 (zero) where the non-consolidation conditions and drainage
conditions are applied.

<Boundary conditions of a consolidating element>

Section 3. Boundary Condition | 399

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Overview
3.14
Create Boundary The 'Nodal Seepage' is created to the boundary condition from the results which analysis has been
from Results completed, and this is available in another analysis case as the boundary condition type.

▶Create Boundary from

Results

Overview
3.15
Boundary Table  Import the information of boundary conditions from excel file or export them to excel. The sample of
Import / Export table for boundary conditions (BoundaryTable Sample.xlsx) can be found in the installation folder. (ex.
C:\Program Files\MIDAS\FEA NX\Sample)

Methodology

There are limitations in this function as follows.

- Constraint : The 'Advanced' type is only supported. The DOFs of 'Tx-Rz' are displayed ‘1’ (check on) or ‘0’
(check off).
- Nodal Head : The 'Total' and 'Pressure' type are separated.
- Nodal Flux : This is exported the same way as the ‘Nodal Head‘ type.
- Review : This is exported only the node information.

Overview
3.16
Transmitting Approximately express the semi-infinite ground layer by setting a virtual slip surface perpendicular to the
horizontally layered ground. This is done to consider the surface wave propagation into the far-field ground.

The transmit boundary condition is only used for Dynamic analysis > 2D Equivalent linear analysis.

400 | Section 3. Boundary Condition

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

The boundary conditions in ground modeling can be largely divided into:

1. [Element Boundary Condition]
2. [Viscous Boundary Condition]
3. [Transmitting Boundary Condition].

1. The [Element Boundary Condition] can be divided into: 1) the free end, where the force of the
earthquake response load is input, and 2) the fixed end, where the displacement is input at the free field
boundary position. The [Element Boundary Condition] can consider the effects of earthquake waves in the
free field, but it does not consider the effects of waves reflecting off the foundation slabs of an existing
structure. This effect gets larger as the boundary position moves closer to the foundation slab.

2. The [Viscous Boundary Condition] was developed as a solution to the flaws of the [Element Boundary
Condition] using a boundary condition that absorbs material waves having a certain angle to the boundary,
developed by Lysmer & Kuhlemeyer, Ang & Newmark, etc. However, because the [Viscous Boundary
Condition] cannot fully process the effects of complex surface waves, the boundary needs to be set at a
certain distance from the foundation slab, as with the element boundary.

3. The [Transmitting Boundary Condition] supplements the flaws of the [Viscous Boundary Condition] and
considers the effects of nearly all types of material and surface waves. The horizontal soil layer can be
expressed as a spring and damper using a function of frequency. The [Transmitting Boundary Condition]
generally assumes that the horizontal properties of each ground layer are equal and so, satisfactory results
can be obtained even when the boundary condition exists at the structure itself. However, to accurately
consider the property changes due to horizontal deformation, it is effective to maintain a certain distance
between the boundary and foundation slab.
▶Transmitting – General
▶▶Transmitting – Auto

General

Methodology

Select the element edge and line to set the transmit boundary on that element edge. The ground
information assigned to the element can be used to create the transmit boundary.

When the line between 2 different elements is selected, the transmit boundary is not created.

Section 3. Boundary Condition | 401

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

▶Transmitting – General

Auto

Methodology

Selecting a mesh set automatically creates boundary conditions and elements at the left/right/floor of the
mesh, according to the user specified options. The spring constant value is calculated depending on the
ground material characteristics defined for the mesh set.

The right/left transmit boundaries of the analysis model can be set, and the viscous boundary can be
created at the floor surface and free face.

It is difficult to accurately simulate the ground, which exists almost infinitely, using a 2D model used in
Ground-Structure Analysis. Hence, the model boundary needs to be set at an engineering-appropriate
position and processed to simulate in-situ conditions.

Boundary Set

Register the set constraint conditions on the desired boundary set. The user can specify the name of the
boundary set.

* Auto create viscous boundary

The Viscous boundary condition can be created as follows.

1. Compute Cp and Cs
The Cp and Cs are calculated using the equations below:

Here, ,
λ : Volume modulus, G : Shear modulus, E : Elastic modulus, ν = Poisson’s ratio,
A : Cross-section area

2. The cross-section area is automatically considered until the surface spring is created, so only Cp and
Cs need to be computed.

402 | Section 3. Boundary Condition

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Elastic Volume Shear Unit Poisson’s

P wave S wave
modulus modulus modulus weight ratio
Class Cp Cs
E λ G W
γ
(tonf/m2) (tonf/m2) (tonf/m2) (tonf/m3) (tonf·sec/m3) (tonf·sec/m3)
Ground A 2000 1459.53 751.88 2 0.33 24.579 12.381

 Multiplying the Cp, Cs (tonf•sec/m^3 units) by the cross-section area eventually leads to the spring
stiffness of the viscous boundary element in tonf•sec/m units.
 The shaded cell parameters are the physical properties of the ground that the user inputs during
modeling. The volume modulus and Shear modulus are calculated using the Elastic modulus and
Poisson’s ratio. Hence, there is no need to input additional values when creating a viscous
boundary element.
 When creating the bottom viscous boundary element, the spring is automatically created by
considering the element area (effective length*unit width) as shown below.
 Input the Cp value for the normal direction coefficient at the point of spring creation and input the
Cs value for the parallel direction. Hence, the bottom spring coefficient Cz becomes the Cp value
and the Cs value is applied to the Cx.

<Auto-create viscous boundary>

Section 3. Boundary Condition | 403

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Section 4 Load
Load (Static)

Loading that can applied as an external force for linear/non-linear static analysis
(Static/Slope/Consolidation analysis) can be specified as Self weight, Force/Moment, Displacement,
Pressure, Water pressure, Line/Element beam load, Temperature, Prestress, Initial equilibrium force or
Combined load.

▶Table. Static load Type of Static load Definition

Self weight Input the self-weight of an element as a load
Force Input the Force (as X, Y, Z axis direction component) on a desired model node
Input the moment (as X, Y, Z axis direction component) on a desired model
Moment
node
Input the displacement on a desired model node
Displacement
The displacement acts in the node coordinate system direction
Pressure Input the pressure on a surface or line
Automatically input the water pressure load according to the position on the
Water pressure
input water level line
When multiple beam elements are connected continuously, specify both ends
Line beam load
of the beam element and input a distributed force
Element beam load Input a distributed or force on a beam element
Input the node temperature on an arbitrary node for thermal stress analysis.
Temperature Input the initial temperature value used on a model node into the analysis
condition
Prestress Input the pre-loading on a Structure/Ground element
Initial equilibrium force Input the initial in-situ stress
Combined load Set the load combination using load sets and the factor for each set

Load (Dynamic)

Loads that are applied as external forces for linear/non-linear dynamic analysis can be specified as
Response Spectrum, Ground Acceleration, Time Varying Static Load, Dynamic Nodal, Dynamic Surface,
Mass, Dynamic Result Function or Table form. It generally implies that the time variant load function form
and the static load can be converted to a mass form to be used in dynamic analysis.

▶Table. Dynamic load Type of dynamic load Definition

Input the spectrum data and load conditions needed for Response
Response spectrum
Spectrum Analysis
Ground acceleration Input the ground acceleration in time load function form (DB can be used)
Time varying static Multiply a time function by a static load to define a dynamic load
Input the time load function (load component x time function) on an
Dynamic nodal
arbitrary node
Input the time load function(load component x time function) on a surface in
Dynamic surface
pressure form
Load to Mass Convert a static load to mass for application
Train Dynamic Load
Input or modify the train moving load using a table
Table

404 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

▶Table. Thermal load Type of thermal load Definition

Heat Flux Input the heat flux load. It can be applied to nodal points / edges / faces.
Heat Source Defines the heat generated in a solid body.
Prescribed Temperature Sets the temperature to have fixed value during analysis.
Input the convection condition. It can be applied to nodal points / edges /
Convection
faces.

Overview
Self Weight
Enter the self-weight of elements included in the model as applied loads, or modify or delete previously
entered self-weight.
The computed self-weight can be applied in each GCS X, Y and Z direction as a body force for static
analysis. When considering the effects of self-weight in dynamic analysis computations, the option can be
considered through the Project Setting function.
Self Weight

Methodology

Input the factor for the self-weight application direction in Project settings depending on the work
environment (2D/3D). The volume, density and gravitational acceleration of the input element is used to
automatically compute the self-weight included in the analysis model. The self-weight direction is defined
by a unit vector. The default value for the gravitational direction is set as -1.

[Spatial Distribution]
The ‘Generalized Space Function’ can be applied in the ‘Self Weight’. The input of ‘Generalized Space
Function’ is applied by scaling according to the location.

Overview
4.2
Force / Moment Apply the Force or Moment load on an element node. Force is one of the most fundamental loads and it
can be specified by 3 force components and a moment for each node. The direction can be defined with
reference to an arbitrary coordinate system.

Section 4. Load | 405

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Methodology

Select the node where the load will be applied and set the size and direction. The load direction can be set
using Default Load or Reference Object Load methods. For Default Load, the x, y, z, components are input
with reference to the coordinate system in the bottom right corner. For Reference Object Load, select the
target and reference shape to set the load direction. If the reference shape is a line, the component
direction is set in the line creation direction. If the reference shape is a surface, the normal direction to the
surface becomes the z component direction and the left, right directions become the x, y component
directions.

If the selected target shape is geometric, the Force can be selected as either a total force or individual
loads in Load Type as shown below. For total force, the input load size is considered as the total force
acting on the selected line/surface and is distributed evenly to all nodes. For individual loads, the input load
size is applied to all nodes of the selected line/surface.

▶Total force / Individual

load processing

The total force is distributed according to the length or area ratio when two or more targets are selected
and the individual load is applied to each selected target.

[Object]

The applied load is defined on the node, but the selection target can also be set as a geometry shape
(edge, surface etc.) or using auto-select free face nodes. For an edge or surface, the selected shape must

406 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

have been used for element creation and the force is applied to all nodes in the specified direction/size. For
free face nodes, select a free face node and all points that make contact with the node-containing element
at an angle smaller than the specified angle (feature angle) will automatically be selected.

▶Free face node

[Reference Object]

The load direction can be set using different methods. The reference coordinate system is the global
rectangular(cylindrical) coordinate axis. Geometry shapes (edge and surface) can be selected as a
reference direction. Selecting edge or surface displays the coordinate system of the selected shape and the
load is set with reference to that system. The vector is used to specify the load direction using X,Y,Z vector
components. The tangent direction can only be selected for surface objects and automatically sets the
direction in the tangent direction of the selected surface.

[Components]
Input the load size according to the set direction. A positive (+) value applies the load in the set direction
and a negative (-) value applies the load in the direction opposite of the set. The load size changes with
respect to the coordinate value increase in the GCS can be defined using a reference function. Here, the
input value is multiplied by the function value for application.

Overview
4.3 Input the displacement at an element node. The displacement is used to assign a displacement to a
Displacement particular node. It is classified as a load because it causes structural deformation, but it has similar
characteristics as the boundary condition. For example, constraint forces occur on the node where the
displacement is input. The input displacement acts in the node coordinate system direction, which is
defined by the GCS by default. The displacement is useful when applying the measured displacement in
analysis or when understanding the plastic (limit) state of the element.

Section 4. Load | 407

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Methodology
Select the node where the displacement will be applied and set the size and direction. The target selection
method and size/direction settings are as follows:

[Object]

The applied displacement is defined on the node, but the selection target can also be set as a geometry
shape (edge, surface etc.) or using auto-select free face nodes. For an edge or surface, the selected shape
must have been used for element creation and the displacement is applied to all nodes in the specified
direction/size. For free face nodes, select a free face node and all points that make contact with the node-
containing element at an angle smaller than the specified angle (feature angle) are automatically selected.

▶Free face node

[Components]
Input the displacement size according to the set direction. A positive (+) value applies the displacement in
the set direction and a negative (-) value applies the displacement in the opposite direction to the set
direction. The size change with respect to the coordinate value increase in the GCS can be defined using a
reference function. Here, the input value is multiplied by the function value for application.

Overview
4.4
Pressure Input the pressure loads on the face or edge of a plate element, plane stress element or solid element.
Uniform load and linearly/non-linearly distributed loads can all be defined. The pressure load acts on the
target geometric surface in a linearly/non-linearly distributed form per unit area and hence, the units are
[Force/Area]. Because it is the force per unit area, it is applied to all selected target surfaces equally. The
pressure is differ with the Force because the Force is using unit [N] and the force is loaded as nodal loads
at sub-nodes generated at the selected geometric surface.

408 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Because the Pressure load considers the area of the target surface (element surface) and is automatically
converted as a nodal load for analysis, the two load conditions do not have a difference in analysis results.
The more convenient load, depending on the applied direction, can be selected and used from the
concentrated/distributed load option given in Analysis Condition.

Methodology

The pressure is input in distributed force form for an element face or edge. It can be used on 2D or 3D
elements and the input direction can be specified as an arbitrary coordinate axis direction, arbitrary vector
direction or normal direction. The direction setting is the same as for [Force]. Uniform load size or
linearly/non-linearly distributed load size can all be specified as shown below, and the load change can be
defined using a function of coordinate direction/distance. When applying a function, the input value is
multiplied by the function value for application as a total load.

▶Pressure acting on each

element (target)

Overview
4.5
Water Pressure A function that automatically calculates and applies the water pressure on an element boundary line or
surface.

Section 4. Load | 409

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Methodology

Select the element boundary edge or surface where the water pressure will be applied. The [Auto] option
can be used when the water level is pre-set, and it is used to automatically calculate the hydrostatic
pressure based on the height difference between the water level and element boundary edge/surface. Use
the [Manual] option to directly specify the water pressure size applied on the selected element edge/surface.

Overview
4.6
Beam Load Concentrated and distributed force(moment) can be applied with reference to the GCS or the beam
element coordinate system. Linear beam load can be used when multiple beam elements are connected
continuously. Both ends of the beam element can be specified and a continuous beam load can be applied
as either a distributed load or force load. The load can also be applied to a continuous beam placed in a
curve on the same plane as the loading direction. For a beam element load, the beam load is applied as a
distributed or force on the singular beam element.

410 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Methodology

[Object]
For beam elements, select the beam element directly or select the line used to create the element to apply
a load. For continuous beam loads, the On Load Application Line Method or Select Element Method can be
used.

The [On the Loading Line] command applies the load to elements placed on the line between the two
points used to specify the continuous beam load. In this case, selecting two nodes sequentially inputs the
load for elements existing on the line between the two points. For the [Selected Element] command, the
load is applied to the selected element. It can be used to apply the continuous beam load on elements that
are not placed on the line. Select the start and end points of the beam element on which the load will be
applied.

[Direction]
The direction can be set with reference to the global coordinate system (X,Y,Z) or element coordinate
system (x,y,z). The projected area can be additionally set, which specifies whether to apply the load on the
total beam element within the load application section, or to apply the load by the projected length,
perpendicular to the load application direction. This option is only valid for [Distributed] loads in directions
with respect to the global coordinate system (GCS).

[Value (Fraction/Length)]
 Fraction: Input the continuous beam load position using a relative length ratio of the load
application section.
 Length: Input the actual length as the reference for the continuous beam load position.
x1 and x2 are the start and end points of the beam load respectively and w1,w2 are the load size at points
x1,x2. Entering a negative load size applies the load in the opposite direction to the set direction, and a
linearly distributed (increment, decrement) load can be set using the size difference.

▶Apply linear beam load

Overview [Nodal/Element Temperature]

4.7
Temperature Load Input the final temperature on a node or element for thermal stress analysis. The temperature load induces
deformation by temperature difference and all nodes are assigned an initial temperature in Analysis Setting.
Entering a node temperature calculates the load caused by the temperature difference with the initial
element temperature, and thermal stress does not occur if there is no displacement constraint. The element
temperature load is similar to the nodal temperature load. However, specifying an element sets a uniform
temperature for that selected element so that it has the same effect as entering the nodal temperature load
for all nodes connected to that element.

Section 4. Load | 411

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Methodology

Select a node or element to input the temperature. If the target shape is a geometry shape, the shape must
have been used to create the element. All nodes in the selected shape are defined by the input initial
temperature. The load is calculated by the temperature difference with that initial temperature. The
temperature difference can be simulated by directly entering the temperature or applying a function with
reference to the global coordinate system (GCS). When applying a function, the input value is multiplied to
the function value for application.

Overview [Temperature Gradient]

The temperature difference between the top and bottom of a beam element or plate element can be
defined. Temperature gradient analysis can only be conducted for beam or plate elements, which can
consider flexural rigidity. For beam elements, the temperature difference and distance of the outermost
portion is input with reference to the y axis and z axis of the element coordinate system to consider
temperature gradient loading. For plate elements, the temperature difference between the top and bottom
faces and the plate thickness is input to consider temperature gradient loading.

412 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Methodology

Select the beam (plate) element. The element can be selected directly, or the Beam/Shell that was used to
create that element can be selected. Selecting a shape inputs the load for all element nodes in the shape.
For a beam element, the temperature difference and distance in the z,y direction of the element coordinate
system can be input. Checking the [Used Section] option uses the structural section information assigned
to the element. For a plate element, the temperature difference in the thickness direction is input, and the
plate element thickness is used. The distance can also be input directly.

Overview
4.8
Prestress Used to input the prestress load. For truss/beam elements, the initial load for axial direction force and
moment can be applied. For plane strain elements, axis symmetric elements and solid elements, the initial
stress can be defined.

For truss/beam elements, the [Pretension Type] option can be applied. Checking this option maintains the
input pretension regardless of the stress state changes that occur in the construction stage. If this option is
unchecked, the prestress changes with the input stress state. If a prestress of 50 is input as shown in the
figure below, checking [Pretension Type] retains the prestress as the axial force, regardless of the stress
change due to excavation. If the pretension is not checked, the axial force is affected by the stress change
of 10 due excavation and so, the output axial force is 40. Pretension can only be applied if the prestress is
input for a truss element type.

Section 4. Load | 413

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Methodology

[Element Type]

The applicable element types are as follows and the input load component is different for each type. The
target shape can be selected by directly selecting the element or geometry shape (edge, face, solid). For
shapes, the selected shape must have been used for element creation and the input load is applied to all
element nodes within the shape.

[Components]
Define the load or stress for each axial direction and use a function to simulate the linear
increment/decrement of the load size with reference to the global coordinate system(GCS). The load
components for different element types are as follows:

 Nxx : Initial axial force acting on 1D element

 Mx, My, Mz : Bending force (moment load) with reference to each element coordinate system
 Sxx, Syy, Szz : Axial stress in each axial direction
 Sxy, Syz, Szx : Shear stress in each plane direction

The load application direction for the initial stress of Plane/Axis Symmetric/Solid elements can be set with
reference to the GCS or element coordinate system.

Overview
4.9
Initial Equilibrium Use the prestress function to apply the resultant force or stress as initial conditions, depending on the
Force element type. If the initial stress state is given as such, a force corresponding to the initial stress occurs.
This initial equilibrium force uses the force created by the initial stress from the prestress function as an
external force. If additional external forces do not exist, the initial equilibrium force is in equilibrium with the
initial stress, hence the initial state is maintained. Also, use the [Self-Weight Consideration] option to
assume the initial stress to be caused by gravity. If this assumption is applied, the load distribution factor
considering the self weight of the element is applied when the element is removed from the construction
stage.

414 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Methodology
[Element Type]

The applicable element types are as follows and the input load component is different for each type. The
target shape can be selected by directly selecting the element or geometry shape (edge, face, solid),
depending on the selected element type. For shapes, the selected shape must have been used for element
creation and the input load is applied to all element nodes within the shape.

[Components]
Define the load or stress for each axial direction and use a function to simulate the linear
increment/decrement of the load size with reference to the global coordinate system (GCS). The load
components for different element types are as follows:
 Nxx : Initial axial force acting on 1D element
 Mx, My, Mz : Bending force (moment load) with reference to each element coordinate system
 Sxx, Syy, Szz : Axial stress in each axial direction
 Sxy, Syz, Szx : Shear stress in each plane direction
The load application direction for the initial stress of Plane/Axis symmetric/Solid elements can be set with
reference to the GCS or element coordinate system.

Overview
4.10
Load Set The load conditions can be classified as sets. It is useful to create the load set in advance for easy
classification of data such as mesh sets, boundary sets, etc, during analysis. When entering the actual
loads, the loads can be inputted individually by entering their names. If the load set is already classified, a
particular factor can be assigned to each load set to create a combined load.

Section 4. Load | 415

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Overview
4.11
Combined Load Create a combined load set by combining existing load sets. A factor can be assigned to each load set and
Set the combined load is created with respect to these load factors. It is generally used when creating a load
combination according to the design code.

Overview
4.12
Create Load from The 'Nodal Force', 'Nodal Moment', 'Nodal Translational Displacement' and 'Nodal Rotational Displacement'
Results are created to the loads from the results which analysis has been completed, and these are available in
another analysis case as the load type.

416 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

▶ Create Load from

Results

Overview
4.13
Contraction Consider shrinkage or simulate a volume loss around a lining of TBM tunnel. It can be applied by selecting
beam/shell elements in 2D/3D model.

▶Contraction – Shell
▶▶Contraction – Beam

Methodology

The ‘Contraction’ is for the shrinkage in the circumferential direction of tunnel and the ‘Contraction Inc.’ is
for the shrinkage in the excavation direction of 3D tunnel. The ‘Rep. Depth’ is for the reference depth to
calculate the shrinkage in the excavation direction of 3D tunnel. To specify this contraction, a contraction
value is define as a strain value in percentage.

* Modeling Precautions
1. Contraction can only be applied to circular tunnels (bores tunnels) with an active continuous
homogeneous lining. (If the selected elements are closure, contraction can be applied even though non-
circular tunnels, but it is unable to get the correct results.)
2. In case of shell elements in 3D model, the coordinate system needs to be aligned that the excavation

Section 4. Load | 417

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

direction is the Element CSys-X to calculate the excavation length automatically.

Overview
4.14
Load Table Import  Define or modify load sets through excel file like the usage of Load Table.
/ Export  Users can import the amounts of load sets from excel file and export defined load sets (node/element
number, magnitude, and direction) to excel. The sample of table for load sets (LoadTable Sample.xlsx)
can be found in the installation folder. (ex. C:\Program Files\MIDAS\FEA NX\Sample)
 Force, Moment, Pressure, Prescribed Displacement and Element Beam Load are available to use this
function.
 Can be useful when users have to manage (input and modify) large numbers of load sets at once.
 In case that users select Geometries (Edge, Face) to define load sets, these load sets cannot be
detected when exporting load sets to excel, meaning that users must select element nodes or faces to
define pressure load.

Methodology

There are limitations in this function as follows.

- Force / Moment : GCS (Global Coordinate System) is only applicable to import and export.
- Pressure : Axisymmetric type is not available. In terms of direction, "Normal" and "Direction" are available.
- Only one excel file can communicate with FEA NX at the same time.

418 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Overview
4.15
Response Input the response spectrum function (spectrum data) and response spectrum load direction for response
Spectrum spectrum analysis. Response spectrum analysis expresses the natural period, natural angular frequency or
natural frequency at the maximum physical quantity response as a function when a dynamic load is applied
to the structure. The analysis can be expressed as a displacement response spectrum, pseudo rapidity
response spectrum or pseudo acceleration response spectrum. The load and boundary conditions required
for response analysis are similar to that of static analysis, but the load is defined as a function of time and
the internal force and damping force are included for response analysis. The important results obtained
from the transient response analysis are the node displacement, velocity, acceleration, and the force and
stress on the element. Detailed explanations on mode combination methods and damping setting methods
for maximum physical quantity (displacement, stress, member forces etc.) judgment of each mode can be
found in the Analysis Control Settings.

Methodology

[Direction]
Set the application direction of the response spectrum load with respect to the global coordinate system
(GSC) and input the [Period Modification Factor] that increases all applicable natural periods when applying
the natural frequency from the eigenvalue analysis.

[Spectrum Function]
Set the spectrum data for analysis. Select the button to define the spectrum function.

Section 4. Load | 419

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Directly input the period and spectrum value in the left input column on the dialog box. The spectrum
function is expressed as a graph by plotting the spectrum value against the period. The spectrum function
value for the natural period is linearly interpolated and used in response spectrum analysis. Hence, for
regions where the curvature of the spectrum curve changes rapidly, dividing the region into multiple
segments for compact spectrum values is recommended. The period range of the spectrum function must
contain all natural periods of the structure.

The spectrum data types are normalized acceleration (acceleration spectrum, gravitational acceleration),
acceleration, velocity and displacement spectrum. Changing the time function data format only changes the
application format, not the data format. The scale factor is a gradient modulus for the entered data. The
entire data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value.

In the [Damping Ratio] space, input the damping ratio applied on the response spectrum. But if the
damping ratio of the target structure is different, the input spectrum data is processed to fit the structural
damping ratio.

* Apply Design spectrum

Use the built-in design spectrum. The default built-in design spectrum types are as follows.

420 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

► Korea(Bridge) : Korea, Traffic Specification

► Japan(Bridge02) : Japan, Load instruction and Dynamic Analysis of Building
► China(JTJ004-89) : China, Specifications of Earthquake Resistant Design for Highway Engineering
► KBC 2009 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2009
► KBC 2005 : Korea, Korea Building Code-Structural 2005
► IBC2000(ASCE7-98) : USA, International Building Code 2000
► UBC(1997) : USA, Measure of Uniform Building Code 97
► EURO(2004H-ELASTIC) : Europe, Sesimic Design Measure for Structures

Overview
4.16
Ground Load the time load function for time history analysis using the ground acceleration. It is mostly used to
Acceleration check the seismic design of structures or liquefaction due to earthquakes. Time history analysis uses the
dynamic structural properties and the applied load to calculate the structural behavior (displacement,
member forces etc.) at an arbitrary time under dynamic loading. The Mode Superposition Method and
Direct Integration Method are available for time history analysis, and detailed information on the damping
setting for each analysis method can be found in [Analysis Control].

Methodology

[Direction]
Define the input (transmission) direction of ground acceleration. It is set with reference to the global
coordinate system (GCS) and multiple directions (X,Y,Z) can be combined to set a single ground
acceleration load set. The increment coefficient for the ground acceleration can be defined using a scale
factor and the arrival time can be controlled to set the ground acceleration delay time.

[Function]
Select the button to define the ground acceleration function.

Section 4. Load | 421

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Add time function

Construct the time varying load by directly entering the time and the corresponding time varying load value
in the left input column on the dialog box. The time function data types are classified by Acceleration,
Force(load), Moments, Normalized Acceleration (Time history acceleration / Gravitational acceleration) or
Normal(generalized). Changing the data format only changes the application format, not the data format.
The scale factor is a gradient modulus for the entered data. The entire data can be scaled to fit the
specified maximum value.

* Time function load application

The defined function is also applicable for [Dynamic nodal (surface)] and [Time varying static]. Specifying
'force' or 'moments' uses the time varying load as a [Dynamic Nodal(surface)] input and specifying
'Normalized acceleration' or 'Acceleration' uses it to input the [Ground Acceleration]. Specifying ‘Normal’
uses the time varying load as the change in static load with time for [Time Varying Static] or [Dynamic
surface].

* Import/Earthquake waves
Save and import frequently used time varying load or select earthquake acceleration data from the
program DB. There are a total of 32 types of earthquake accelerations.

422 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Add Time sinusoidal

A sine function can be used to define the time varying load. A and C are constants, f is the frequency of the
input load, D is the damping factor and P is the phase angle. If the time varying load is entered as a
harmonic function, input the necessary sine function variables and click [Redraw Graph] to view the loading
on the right hand side.

Overview
4.17
Time Varying Use the pre-entered static load to create a time load function for time history analysis. The dynamic load is
Static defined by multiplying the static load by the time load function. The time forcing function used here is
dimensionless and only the ‘Normal’ type time history data can be used. This function is a replacement
function that includes the [Dynamic nodal (surface)] created by the static load-time forcing function
combination.

Section 4. Load | 423

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Methodology

Select the static load to be applied on the load set. The load application position, direction and size are
already determined when entering the static load, and the to-be applied time forcing function is selected.
The gradient modulus of the load can be defined by a scale factor and the arrival time can be set to
simulate the delay time.

Select the button to add (select) a time forcing function. It can only be applied when the time forcing
function data type is ‘Normal’ (dimensionless function)

Construct the time varying load by directly entering the time and the corresponding load change ratio in the
left input column on the dialog box. The scale factor is a gradient modulus for the entered data. The entire
data can be scaled to fit the specified maximum value.

424 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Overview
4.18
Dynamic Nodal Used to create a time load function for time history analysis directly. The static load and force (pressure
(Surface) load) is defined by applying a time forcing function. The applicable time function data type for dynamic
nodal loads are ‘Force’, ‘Moments’ and, for dynamic surface loads, ‘Normal’. In addition, the reference
function can be applied to define a linear/non-linear distributed dynamic load that changes with position.
Generally it is used to define vibration, driving, blast and railway movement loads. The arrival time can be
set to simulate the delay time.

Methodology (Dynamic Nodal)

Select the node where the load will be applied and specify the direction. The load size is applied by
multiplying the time function (load size by time) and each load component (scale factor).

[Object]

The applied load is defined on the node , but the selection target can also be set as a geometry shape
(edge, surface etc.) or using auto-select free face nodes. For a line or surface, the selected shape must
have been used for element creation and the force is applied to all nodes in the specified direction/size. For
free face nodes, select a free face node and all points that make contact with the node-containing element
at an angle smaller than the specified angle (feature angle) will be automatically selected.

▶Free face node

[Reference Object]

Section 4. Load | 425

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

The load direction can be set using different methods. The default input reference is the Global
rectangular(cylindrical) coordinate axis. Geometry shapes (Edge and Surface) can be selected as a
reference direction. Selecting 'Line' or 'Surface' displays the coordinate system of the selected shape and
the load is set with reference to that system. 'Vector' is used to specify the load direction using X,Y,Z vector
components.

[Components]
Input the load scale factor according to the set direction. Generally, the load size is pre-defined as a time
variant value in the time function, and if the maximum ratio value is defined as 1, the actual load size is
input in the time function. A positive (+) value applies the load in the set direction and a negative (-) value
applies the load in the opposite direction to the set direction. The load size change, depending on the
coordinate value increase in the global coordinate system (GCS), can be defined using a reference function.
Here, the input value is multiplied by the function value for application.

[Time Dependency (Time function)]

Define the load size change with respect to time.
Select the button to add (select) a time forcing function. It can only be applied when the time forcing
function data type is 'Acceleration', 'Velocity', 'Displacement', ‘Force’ and ‘Moments’.

Methodology (Dynamic Surface)

Dynamic surfaces are input as the distributed load change with respect to time on the element face or edge.
It can be used on 2D or 3D elements and the input direction can be specified as an arbitrary coordinate
axis direction, arbitrary vector direction or normal direction.

[Components]
Input the load scale factor according to the set direction. The uniform or linear/non-linear distributed load
can be defined. A positive (+) value applies the load in the set direction, while a negative (-) value applies
the load in the direction opposite of the set direction. The load size change, depending on the coordinate
value increase in the global coordinate system (GCS), can be defined using a reference function. Here, the
input load component is multiplied by the function value for application.

[Time Dependency (Time function)]

Define the load size change with respect to time.
Select the button to add (select) a time forcing function. It can only be applied when the time forcing
function data type is ‘Normal’. ‘Normal’ functions are dimensionless and have no units. Hence, if the
pressure load size is directly entered, only the scale factor is input for the load component. If the maximum
ratio value is defined as 1, the actual load size is input.

Overview
4.19
Load to Mass Convert the already defined static load into a mass for application in dynamic analysis, such as Response
Spectrum or Time History Analysis.

426 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Methodology

[Mass direction(Global CSys.)]

Specify the directional component for consideration of the converted mass. When conducting analysis that
considers earthquake effects (Response spectrum analysis, Time history analysis using earthquake data),
the lateral behavior is mainly considered and the selected X,Y generally ignores the perpendicular direction
mass component. However, for driving or floor slab vibration analysis, the gravitational direction dictates
the dominant vibration mode and the Z direction is selected. Thus, the mass consideration direction is set
to fit the purpose of the analysis type.

[Static Load Type for Converting]

Select the static load set to convert and select the force, beam load and pressure load information in the
selected static load set for conversion. The scale factor during load-mass conversion can be considered
and the gravitational acceleration value applied in the conversion is specified.

Overview
4.20
Train Dynamic Create a train dynamic load and apply it to the analysis model.
Load Table The train dynamic load can be created in the same was as Dynamic Analysis > Tools > Create Dynamic
Load Data Generator > Train Dynamic Load.
The created load judges the train velocity and spacing between nodes and automatically applies it to the
analysis model as a dynamic nodal.

▶Train dynamic load table

Section 4. Load | 427

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Methodology

[Object] : Select the edge or node the train dynamic load passes through, and select the start and end
nodes.
[Name]: Define the train type name.
[Train Type] : Select the type of train. 6 basic DB (Mugunghwa Train, 2 diesel cars, Korea), [Saemaeul
Train, 8 cars, Korea), [KTX, 20 cars, Korea), [EL-18 Standard, 6 cars, Korea), [EL-18 Standard, 8 cars,
Korea), [EL-18 Standard, 10 cars, Korea) are provided and the user can directly input the length/force
depending on the number of wheels.
[Number of Wheels] : Stands for the number of wheels on the train. It is the same as the added number on
the table.
[Train Velocity] : Input the velocity of the train.
[Time] : Input the time the train dynamic load is applied.
[Direction] : Input the direction in which the train dynamic load is applied. It is generally applied in the
gravitational direction and thus the user can specify it in the same direction as the gravitational direction of
the 3D model.
[Dynamic Load Set] : Input the name that will be registered on the load set.

Overview
4.21
Heat Flux Heat flux is used to model heat input through the surface of an object.
It is the function to input the heat flux load. It can be applied to nodal points / edges / faces.

Methodology

It is used as a load vector in heat transfer analysis. The heat flux is entered as the unit time energy per time
x unit area (Watt/Area). A time function can also be applied.

[Name] : Enter the name of the heat flux to be defined.

[Type] : Select the type of target objects to which heat flux will be applied. Only the edges of 2D elements
can be selected.

428 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

[Heat Flux] : Enter the heat flux value to the selected target objects.
[Uniformly Distributed Load] : Load the heat flux uniformly. If this is not selected, the heat flux will be loaded
in a linear varying form.
[Area Factor] : Enter Area factor when Nodal method is used.
[Base Function] : Set a spatial function or a non-spatial function as a base function to be applied to the heat
flux.
[Q1] : Enter the heat flux value when Uniformly Distributed Load is selected.
[Q2 - Q4] : For a linearly varying distribution, enter the heat flux values sequentially.
[Time Function] : Select the function to be applied to time.
[Global Time] : The time applied to the time function is based on the total analysis time.
[Local Time] : The time applied to the time function is based on the subcase time.
[Thermal Load] : Register the specified heat flux to a desired load set. The user may assign any name to
the load

Overview
4.22
Heat Source An exothermic load is a modeling of the heat generated in a solid body, and is defined as the energy per
unit time of a unit volume. The larger the volume of the structure, the greater the total calorific value, and it
plays a similar role to the self weight in structural analysis. A time function can also be applied.

Methodology

An exothermic load is a modeling of the heat generated in a solid body, and is defined as the energy per
unit time of a unit volume. The larger the volume of the structure, the greater the total calorific value, and it
plays a similar role to the self weight in structural analysis. A time function can also be applied.

[Name Enter] the name of the condition of heat generation (source).

[Type Select] the type of target objects to which the transient heat generation conditions will be
applied. Element, 1D Element, 2D Element, 3D Element, Edge, Face and Part can be selected.
[Heat Generation] Enter the magnitude of heat generation per unit volume.
[Base Function] Set a spatial function or a non-spatial function as a base function to be applied
to the magnitude of heat generation.
[Time Function] : Select the function to be applied to time.
[Global Time] : The time applied to the time function is based on the total analysis time.
[Local Time] : The time applied to the time function is based on the subcase time.
[Thermal Load] : Register the specified heat generation conditions to a desired thermal load set.

Section 4. Load | 429

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Overview
4.23
Prescribed The prescribed temperature (fixed) serves as the boundary condition of the heat transfer analysis, makes
Temperature it always maintained during analysis. It has a similar role to the constraint in structural analysis. A time
function can also be added.

Methodology

Name] :Enter the name of the prescribed temperature condition.

[Type] : The applied temperature is defined on the node, but the selection target can also be set as a
geometry shape (edge, surface etc.) or using auto-select free face nodes.
[Temperature] : Enter the temperature value for the selected target objects.
[Base Function] Set a spatial function or a non-spatial function as a base function to be applied
to the magnitude of temperature.
[Time Function] : Select the function to be applied to time.
[Global Time] : The time applied to the time function is based on the total analysis time.
[Local Time] : The time applied to the time function is based on the subcase time.
[Thermal Load] : Register the specified fixed temperature conditions to a desired thermal load set.

Overview
4.24
Convection The prescribed temperature (fixed) serves as the boundary condition of the heat transfer analysis, makes
it always maintained during analysis. It has a similar role to the constraint in structural analysis. A time
function can also be added.

430 | Section 4. Load

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Methodology

The phenomenon of heat transfer in a liquid or gas as the hot and cold parts move together is called
convection. Convection conditions can be entered in the desired part of the model (nodes, lines, faces).
Convection generated by buoyancy due to density change caused by temperature difference in fluid is
called free convection.

Convection heat transfer rate is generally proportional to temperature difference. Enter the atmospheric
temperature at which the structure is placed at ambient temperature, and the convection coefficient is the
atmospheric convection coefficient. A time function can also be applied.

[Name] : Enter the name of the convection condition.

[Type] : Select the type of target objects to which convective heat transfer conditions will be applied. Face,
2D Element, 3D Element Face and 3D Element Free Face can be selected.
[Ambient Temperature] : Enter the ambient temperature value for the selected target objects.
[By Value] : Enter the ambient temperature directly.
[Ambient Temp. Function] : In the ambient temperature function, you can define the outside temperature
using Sine function, where:

T: Maximum outside temperature,

to: Delay time, and
To: Minimum outside temperature.

[Convection Coefficient]: Enter the convection coefficient.

[Base Function] Set a spatial function or a non-spatial function as a base function to be applied
to the magnitude of convection or temperature..
[Time Function] : Select the function to be applied to time.
[Global Time] : The time applied to the time function is based on the total analysis time.
[Local Time] : The time applied to the time function is based on the subcase time.
[Thermal Load] : Register the specified convection conditions to a desired thermal load set.

Section 4. Load | 431

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Section 5 Wizard and Tools

The 'Wizard and Tools' option is a tool that streamlines the modeling and design for analysis.
The Wizard consists of the [Tunnel Modeling] function, which creates tunnel shapes and construction
stages, and the [Anchor Modeling] function, which creates anchor shapes easily.
The Tools consists of [Seismic Data Generator] for Response Spectrum Analysis, [Dynamic Load Data
Generator] to compute the blast and train vibration load, and [Free Field Analysis].

Overview
5.1
Tunnel Modeling The Wizard creates a simple 3D tunnel model easily. It can be used to model a 3D tunnel model that
considers the undisturbed stratum and ground surface.
The Wizard is made up of 4 tabs: 1)General, 2)Shotcrete & Rock Bolts, 3)Excavation and 4)Mesh. The data
in all 4 tabs need to be properly input to create the tunnel model. Because everything up to the material
selection can be conducted at once, the Tunnel Wizard menu can be used immediately without any
separate processes after running FEA NX. The data can be set as the default wizard data, or a separate
Tunnel Wizard save file can be created. This allows for fast modeling when analyzing similar tunnels; only
certain variables need to be modified for the existing tunnel model.

The Tunnel Model Wizard cannot be used if the modeling is not done. If a model exists, the Tunnel Model
Wizard cannot be executed.

▶Tunnel Modeling Wizard

432 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

General

Methodology

Input the number of tunnels and tunnel shapes, and set the excavation method.
First, decide whether to model the full tunnel face or the half(right) of the full tunnel face. Be aware that the
specified construction stages and result data etc. cannot be used if the model, created using the Tunnel
Modeling Wizard, is modified later.

[Shape]
Determine the tunnel shape. Circular, 3 Center circle, 5 Center circle shapes are supported. The
dimensions specify the tunnel changes, depending on the specified tunnel shape. Set the input guide to
display the relationship between the tunnel shape and input values on the Tunnel Wizard dialog box. The
guide can be used as a reference when entering the variables. The input values for the tunnel shape are
the same as for Geometry > Point&Curve > Tunnel (Wire).

▶Circular
▶▶3 Center circle
▶▶▶5 Center circle

[Property]
Input the ground material around the tunnel. If the tunnel model is created using the Tunnel Wizard, a basic
rectangular ground shape can be created around the tunnel and the upper stratum and index shape can be
added to the model optionally. A basic model is the rectangular ground shape on the periphery of the tunnel.
The basic shape can be composed of a homogeneous material. The material and properties are the same
as the specified Material property in Property/Coordinate and System/Function.

[Excavation Method]
Determine the excavation method for the tunnel section. FEA NX supports the section shapes for [Full Face
Cut], [Bench cut 1], [Bench cut 2], [Ring cut 1], [Ring cut 2] and [3D cut]

▶Full face cut

▶▶Bench cut 1
▶▶▶Bench cut 2

▶Ring cut 1
▶▶Ring cut 2
▶▶▶CD cut

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 433

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Shotcrete & Rock Bolts

Methodology

▶Shotcrete & Rock bolts

The Shotcrete & Rock Bolts tab determines the generation of shotcrete and rock bolts, type and material,
arrangement, shape, etc.
The generation of shotcrete, soft shotcrete and rock bolts can be set using the checkbox. Shotcrete and
soft shotcrete are specified as plate elements and rock bolts are specified as embedded truss elements.
The material and properties are the same as the specified Material Property in Property/Coordinate
System/Function. The properties of shotcrete & rock bolts must be specified as a structural property.

[Add Shotcrete to the Intermediate Wall]

If the 3D cut tunnel excavation method is activated, the installation of shotcrete on the intermediate wall can
be decided.

[Rock Bolts]
Input the number, division length and spacing between rock bolts (Tangential pitch).
 Staggered Disposition
This option determines whether to place the rock bolts in an intersecting array for each
construction stage. Setting +1 creates the set number of rock bolts in the first construction stage,
an extra rock bolt is added in the second stage, and the number returns back to the set number in
the third stage. Setting -1 creates the set number of rock bolts in the first construction stage, a
rock bolt is removed in the second stage, and the number returns back to the set number in the
third stage.
The [Add Rock Bolt to the Intermediate Wall] option is activated when the tunnel excavation method is set
as 3D cut, and determines whether to install a rock bolt on the center wall.

▶Rock bolt
▶▶Add rock bolt to center
wall

[Input Guide] or [Drawing] can be used to check the drawn section shape in real time.

434 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Excavation

Methodology

▶Excavation

Determine the tunnel excavation for each construction stage.

Select the excavation type, whether to excavate in one direction or in both directions. For both directions,
the program creates the construction stages until the tunnel is perforated. After this point, the user needs to
create the construction stages directly.

When modeling 2 tunnels, specify the tunnel to be excavated first.

st
[1 Excavation Tunnel]
Input the stage spacing for shotcrete and rock bolts after excavation. For example, if 1 is inputted, the
shotcrete or rock bolts are created in the subsequent stage after excavation. When creating soft shotcrete,
the soft shotcrete is created in the specified stage and then stiffens in the next stage.

nd
[2 Excavation Tunnel]
Input the excavation stage for the second tunnel in the case of two tunnel construction. For example, if 2 is
inputted, one tunnel is excavated and the next tunnel is excavated 2 stages later. The shotcrete and rock
bolt creation point is determined by the specified value in Define Stages after the 1st Excavation.

[Advancing Length]
Specify the excavation length for each construction stage. Entering advancing length automatically
calculates and displays the total tunnel length. The excavation length for each construction stage is input
using commas or spaces. Repeating lengths can be input using number@length. For example, if the
excavation is done for lengths of 2,2,2,2,3,4, input ‘2,2,2,2,3,4’ or 4@2,3,4.

Divisions are the number of created elements in the excavation direction for each excavation stage. If
loading is needed, click the button to input the load distribution factor for each stage.

[Rock Bolt Location]

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 435

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Input the rock bolt creation location for each construction stage. Rock bolts can be automatically created at
the center of the excavation length of each stage and the user can directly input the pitch and angle to
adjust the creation location.
[Pitches] expresses the rock bolt creation location using the start portion of the tunnel and the rock bolt
creation location of the previous stage.
[Angle] is the angle between the tunnel length direction and the rock bolt.

Mesh

Methodology

▶Mesh

Input the mesh shape, strata and ground surface shape.

For the tunnel location, the model depth, the distance from tunnel floor to the lower boundary of the model,
the distance from the tunnel to the left/right boundaries of the model, and the distance between tunnels for
2 tunnel construction can be input.
Each boundary distance is input as a multiple of the tunnel floor width.

[Ground Modeling]
Model the upper stratum. The upper stratum can be modeled using the [Actual] or [Load] methods.
The [Actual] method creates real meshes to conduct modeling. The [Load] method does not model the
ground surface shape directly, but processes it as a pressure load.
The reference height is the [Base Elevation] on which the input values from the created stratum or terrain
will be added.

[Strata]
The stratum exists above the upper part of the tunnel, and multiple strata can be created using the [New]
button. The material and properties are the same as the specified material property in Property/Coordinate
System/Function.
 x
Input the stratum shape following the model width direction. Input the width coordinates in the x
direction. The origin is located at the bottom left corner of the tunnel as viewed from the front.
 Value

436 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Input the height value at each x coordinate position. Input the x coordinate and value to draw the
input shape on the right.
 z
Input the stratum shape following the tunnel direction. Input the tunnel length direction coordinates
in the z direction. The origin is located at the bottom left corner of the tunnel as viewed from the
front.
 Offset
Input the height value at each z coordinate position. The height value is the change in height
respective to the previous value.

[Terrain]
Model the terrain. The terrain is generated using virtual grids identical to the grid face. The height is input at
the grid intersections. The terrain height on a text file can be imported or the height can be input directly.
The material and properties are the same as the specified material property in Property/Coordinate
System/Function.

[Mesh Size]

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 437

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Input the size of the mesh created in the tunnel. For the tunnel (Interval), the user can input the mesh size
directly. The mesh boundary is input as a multiple of the created mesh size. Using the automatic setting
sets the boundary element size automatically.

Open
Open a saved Tunnel Wizard file (*.wzd).

Save as
Save the entered values in current Tunnel Wizard as a Tunnel Wizard file (*.wzd).

Save Default Data

Set the current input values as the default values of the Tunnel Wizard.

Open Default Data

Delete all current input values and reset to the default values of the Tunnel Wizard.

Overview
5.2
Anchor Modeling The Anchor Modeling Wizard creates a simple anchor model.

▶Anchor modeling Wizard

Methodology

Directly input the start position(Anchor head node position) or click from the work screen.
The anchor installation direction can be specified using [Angle,Length], [Relative dx, dy] or [Absolute x, y].

[Angle,Length] : Input the length and angle from the point entered in the previous stage. The angle is the
rotation angle in the counterclockwise direction relative to the x axis of the work-plane.
[Relative (dx, dy)] : Input the relative distance from the point entered in the previous stage as 2D
coordinates on the work-plane.
[Absolute (x,y)] : Input the absolute 2D coordinate value in the work-plane.

438 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

The anchor length can be classified as an ungrouted length or a grouted length. The ungrouted length
always creates 1 element using the seed method and setting the ‘number of divisions’ as 1. The grouted
length creates elements with a unit length using the seed method and setting the ‘length spacing’ as 1.

Prestress is the initial prestressing force of the anchor. A (+) value represents tension and A (-) value
represents compression.
Checking the [Pretension Type] option does not create axial force loss in the a load activated construction
stage. The created prestress can be registered by specifying the load set name.

Mesh set

Register the created anchor on the mesh set. The user can specify the name of the mesh set.

Overview
5.3
Soil Test In engineering practice, soil parameters are obtained from one or more laboratory tests. In order to perform
the best calculation, these soil parameters have to be translated into input parameters for the constitutive
model used, taking into account the possibilities and limitations of the constitutive model. Most parameters
for the constitutive models can be determined directly from standard laboratory tests such as triaxial test
and oedometer test. However, due to the complexity of the models, it is recommended to not simply accept
the parameters determined from those tests, but to actually model the tests and see if the parameters
found actually give a proper representation of the real laboratory test results within the limits of the
constitutive models. For this purpose, the Soil Test wizard is available with which in a simple manner
laboratory tests can be simulated without the need for making a finite element model.

Methodology

▶Soil Test Wizard

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 439

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

[Soil Test Set Name]

Define the set name of soil test to simulate.

[Method]
Select the test that will be simulated. The test options available are Tri-axial, Oedometer, CRS, DSS and
General.
 Tri-axial Test
In a triaxial test, stress is applied to a sample of the material being tested in a way which results in
stresses along one axis being different from the stresses in perpendicular directions. This is
typically achieved by placing the sample between two parallel platens which apply stress in one
direction, and applying fluid pressure to the specimen to apply stress in the perpendicular directions.
With the triaxial test, it is possible to test soil properties while controlling the stresses applied in the
vertical and horizontal directions relative to the specimen.
 Oedometer Test
Oedometer test is designed to simulate the one-dimensional deformation and drainage conditions
that soils experience in the field. To simulate these conditions, rigid confining rings are used to
prevent lateral displacement of the soil sample. Porous stones are placed on the top and bottom of
the sample to allow drainage in the vertical direction.
With the oedometer test, it is possible to define a one-dimensional compression test for soil models.
 CRS (Constant Rate of Strain) Test
In a Constant Rate of Strain test (CRS test), it is possible to gradually apply a load to a soil model
by increasing the displacement of a pressure cylinder at a constant rate.
In a CRS test, it is possible to gradually apply a load to a soil model by increasing the displacement
of a pressure cylinder at a constant rate.
 DSS (Direct Simple Shear) Test
The DSS test can be used to determine the shear strength of a soil model.
 General Test
The general soil test can be used as a customisable soil test mode. The user can define arbitrary
stress and strain conditions.

[Material]
Define the soil material properties.

[Initial Stress]
Define the initial stress. In case of ‘General’ type, it is possible to define the stresses of each direction.

[Boundary Condition]
The boundary condition is decided by the test method. In case of ‘General’ type, it is possible to restrain the
stress / strain conditions of each direction. This is an initial condition which cannot be changed to the
construction stages (applies to all stages).

[Stage Name]
Define the different stages of the test.

[Advanced Setting]
Define the details for analysis.

[Analysis]
Start the calculation for the selected soil tests.

[Show Graph]

440 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

The results of the test are displayed in the predefined diagrams in the graph window.

Stage

Methodology

▶Stage

Each stage is defined by a number of steps (Inc.), a duration (in units of time) and a applied stress or strain
increments. The given stress or strain increment will be reached at the end of the given duration in the
given number of steps. A negative stress or strain increment means additional compression, whereas a
positive stress or strain increment means unloading or tension.

Analysis

Methodology

▶Analysis

Define the convergence criteria of analysis.

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 441

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Output

Methodology

▶Output

Define the graph setting. You can select the configuration of diagrams to display.

Overview
5.4
Seismic Data Construct the earthquake acceleration, earthquake response spectrum and design response spectrum
Generator using the earthquake wave database built into FEA NX.

▶Seismic data generator

Methodology

[File]
Save the data created on the SGS in various forms, output or import existing data.

[Generate]
Construct the earthquake acceleration, earthquake response spectrum and design response spectrum
using the earthquake database built into the SGS.

[Earthquake Record]

442 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Display the earthquake wave data on the graph.

Select the earthquake wave, input the amplitude and time scale and click the [OK] button.
The created data is the normalized acceleration. The data time spacing is 0.02 seconds for North American
earthquake waves and 0.01 seconds for Japanese earthquake waves. Other earthquake wave data on a '*.
dbs (SGS dbase)' file can be used by clicking the [Import] button.

▶Example

Earthquake Response Spectra

Display the earthquake response spectrum as a graph, using the earthquake wave data in the database or
from the user defined earthquake wave data.

1. Select the earthquake wave and input the amplitude and time scale. Import other earthquake wave data
on a '*. dbs (SGS database)' file by clicking the [Import] button.
2. Input the damping ratio. To output multiple damping ratio graphs simultaneously, click the [Add] button.
3. Input the period range and spacing of graph output on the output period.
4. Select the spectrum type.
5. Check the [X-axis log scale] to set the x axis of the spectrum in log scale.

Design Response Spectra

Create a Design Response Spectra and display as a graph.

Input the data necessary for spectra creation on the dialog box, input the spectrum period range and click
the [OK] button to display the graph.

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 443

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

▶Example

Option

Set various options for the graph. The graph x axis and y axis can be displayed in log scale. The scale
marks can be displayed. The thickness of the graph line can be modified and the graph title can also be
modified.

View

Change the show/hide status of the tool bar or status bar. Also, the Zoom function for the graph and the
Time Domain and Frequency Domain of the graph can be modified.

Zoom Out All

Return from the zoomed state to the original state.

To magnify a section of the graph, drag and select the desired section using the left mouse button. The
right mouse button can be used to return the view state to the original state.

[Time<->Frequency]
Convert the graph x axis from the time domain to the frequency domain and vice versa.

Overview
5.5
Dynamic Load Create a blast load function from the suggested blast load formula, and create a railway load function from
Data Generator the railway load database.

▶Dynamic load data

generator

Methodology

444 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

File
Save the data created using the DGS in various forms, or import existing data.

[Unit System]
Specify the force and length units of the dynamic load data. The unit system must be specified before
creating the dynamic load data.

Blasting Dynamic Load

Select a suggested blasting load equation type, suggested by various institutions.

The institution, suggested equation and corresponding units are as follows:

Suggested by Suggested equation Used units

PD : kbar
National Highway Institute(US), 4.18 × 10−7 × S × V 2
Pd = V : ft/sec
1991 1 + 0.8 × S S : g/cm3

PD : kbar
International Society of
Pd = 2.5 × S × V 2 × 10−6 V : m/sec
Explosive Engineers, 2000
S : g/cm3

PD : kbar
2
Johannson & Persson,. 1973 Pd = 2.1 × (0.36 + S) × V V : km/sec
S : g/cm3

PD : g/cm2
Pd = 0.000424 × V 2 × S × (1 − 0.543 × S + 0.193
Jones & Hino, 1974 V : cm/sec
× S2
S : g/cm3

PD : kbar
D × C 0.25
Liu & Tidman, 1995 Pd = 1.62 × (S × V 2 ) × ( ) V : km/sec
S×V S : g/cm3

PD : kbar
−7 2
Atlas powder company, 1987 Pd = 2.325 × 10 ×S×V V : ft/sec
S : g/cm3
dc 2
When calculating the blast pressure, use the PB = ( ) × PD equation to consider the effects of decoupling.
dh
Depending on whether you are considering the effects of the blast periphery length, use P′ = PB × W ×
dh
2π × or P ′ = PB × W to calculate the value.
L
The final computed blast function can be calculated using the equation suggested by Starfield and Pugliese
(1968) that considers the Window Function:

−B × t
P(t) = 4 × P′ × {exp ( ) − exp(−√2 × B × t}
√2

Parameter

[Blasting Velocity(V)] : Input the blasting velocity. The fixed unit can change depending on the suggested
equation.

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 445

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

[Explosive Density(S)] : Input the density of explosives. The units are fixed as [g/cm3].
[Charge Diameter(dc)] : Input the explosive diameter. The units are fixed as [mm].
[Borehole Diameter(dh)] : Input the diameter of the borehole. The units are fixed as [mm].
[Maximum Charge Amount (W)] : Input the maximum charge per delay. The units are fixed as [kg].
[Load Factor(B)] : Input the load coefficient.
[Sound Velocity in Rock(C)] : Input the ground sound velocity. It is only considered in the ‘Liu & Tidman,
1995’ equation and the units are fixed as [km/sec].
[Rock Density(D)] : Input the ground density. It is only considered in the ‘Liu & Tidman, 1995’ equation and
the units are fixed as [g/cm3].

Time

[End time] : Input the final time for blast load creation. The units are fixed as [sec].
[Time Increment] : Input the time increment for blast load creation. The units are fixed as [sec].

Graph option

[X-axis log scale] : Output the X axis in log scale.

[Y-axis log scale] : Output the Y axis in log scale.

Equivalent Transform Blasting Load

Consider the equivalent blasting load. (When considering, refer to the content above)

Blasting Hole Perimeter(L)

Input the blast periphery length. The units are fixed as [mm].

▶Example

Train Dynamic Load

[Name]: Define name.

[Train Type] : User can directly input the distance/force depending on the number of wheels.
[Number of Wheels] : Stands for the number of wheels on the train. It is the same as the added number on
the table.
[Train Velocity] : Input the velocity of the train. The units are fixed as [km/hr].
[Element Size] : Input the size of the element which the train passes through. The units are fixed as [m].
The input element size and train velocity can be used to compute the arrival time when constructing the
influence line function. For railway moving load, the load is applied gradually to the node as the train arrives
and decreases as the load is removed, hence creating a triangle shaped load function form.

446 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

[Table] : Input the dynamic load of the train. Typical domestic train loads are provided in the database and
the load can also be input by the user defined load (Number of wheels/Length/Force).
 Number : Input the wheel number. The number starts from 1 and the wheel spacing and force
are input sequentially.
 Length : Input the wheelbase. For the first starting wheel, the length is input as 0.
 Force : Input the axial load acting on the wheels. The axial load can be divided into 2 and used
as a working load.
[Scaling] : Input the gradient modulus of the railway dynamic load.
 Scale factor : Input the gradient modulus.
 Maximum value : Modify the railway dynamic load data such that the maximum load value
becomes the specified desired value.
[Start time] : Input the start time of the railway load. The default value is 0 sec.
[Import] : Import a railway dynamic load in MS-EXCEL format. It is only activated when the train type is set
to User Defined.

▶Train dynamic load

example

▶Example

Overview
5.6
Free Field 1D Ground Response Analysis, also called Site Response Analysis, is a program used to analyze the in-
Analysis situ response of the ground for earthquake inputs before excavation or construction.

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 447

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

▶1D Ground response

analysis

Methodology

First set the project and then input the strata information and material properties, dynamic material property
function and ground acceleration function onto the model. Later, create an analysis case and conduct the
analysis for result analysis.

File
▶Project setting Set the basic information of the project. Because the analysis results are affected by the values set in
Project Setting, the settings need to be accurately set before analysis. It is best if the Project settings are
▶Convert unit system
pre-set when starting a new project, but it is fine if the settings are changed during modeling.

Set the unit system applied in the project. Click the [Unit Convert] button to set a different unit system. The
time unit settings are not changed.

Edit
Return to the immediate previous state using undo, or use redo to return to the state before the command
execution.

Model : Strata modeling

Overview

448 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Create a ground model for the free field analysis. Input the ground material property data for each stratum
to create a strata property.

▶Strata modeling

Methodology

Click the Input ground material property data button to input the strata material properties.
(The number of stratum is limited to a maximum of 50.)

[Number] : Automatically assigned identification number that starts from 1.

[Depth] : Input the depth of a stratum. The depth value needs to be larger than 0 and is applied
cumulatively. Entering the depth automatically calculates the stratum thickness.
[Unit weight] : Input the unit weight of the stratum.
[Vs(m/sec)] : Input the shear wave velocity of the ground.
2
[G0(kN/m )] : Input the maximum shear modulus.
[H0] : Input the initial damping ratio of the ground.
[Output Motion type]
 Outcropping
Applied to strata that outputs the analysis results in outcrop form.
 Within
Applied to strata that outputs the analysis results as a ground response.

[Dynamic Curve Function]

Click to select or create the shear modulus and damping ratio function to consider the non-linear, non-
elastic behavior of the ground. (For shear strain, refer to the dynamic material property function.)

Model : Dynamic Curve Function

Overview
Define the shear modulus and damping ratio function depending on the shear strain to consider the non-
linear, non-elastic behavior of the ground.

▶Dynamic curve function

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 449

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Add/Delete/Modify
Define a new dynamic material property function, or check, modify or delete the existing input data.

Function Name
[ID] : Define the function ID number.
[Name] : Input the function name.
[Description] : Display a simple description that explains the shear strain function.

Initialization
Conduct the reset function on the entered data.

Database
Import the database suggested by previous researchers.

▶Add/Modify dynamic
curve function

Add/Modify Dynamic Curve Function

The database supported on the FFA (Free Field Analysis) is shown on the following table.

Classification Database
Shear modulus damping ratio curve Clay - PI=10-20 (Sun et al.)
Clay - PI=20-40 (Sun et al.)
Clay - PI=40-80 (Sun et al.)
Clay - PI=5-10 (Sun et al.)
Clay - PI=80+ (Sun et al.)
Clay (Seed and Sun 1989)

450 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Gravel (Seed et al.)

Linear
Rock
Rock (Idriss)
Sand (Seed & Idriss ) - Lower Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound
Sand (Seed and Idriss 1970)
Vucetic - Dobry
Damping ratio curve Clay - Lower Bound (Sun et al.)
Clay - Average (Sun et al.)
Clay - Upper Bound (Sun et al.)
Clay (Idriss 1990)
Gravel (Seed et al.)
Linear
Rock
Rock (Idriss)
Sand (Idriss 1990)
Sand (Seed & Idriss ) - Lower Bound
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Average
Sand (Seed & Idriss) - Upper Bound
Vucetic - Dobry

Import
Import the saved data file.

Export
Save the entered data as a file.

Using Dynamic Curve Equation

Define the material property values from the various existing databases. The dialog boxes below represent
the Japan Public Works Research Institute (JPWRI) equation, Port facility technical standard, Yasda’s
method, Database according to the liquefaction manual, Japan Building Standard Law no.1457 and
Yamade’s equation.

▶PWRI equation
▶▶Method of the technical
standards of port facilities

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 451

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

▶Asuda’s method
▶▶Liquidal manual

▶The building standard

law of Japan, no.1457
▶▶Yamade’s equation

Model : Ground acceleration function

Overview
Input the time varying load for earthquake analysis on the input ground.

▶Ground acceleration
function

Add/Modify/Delete Acceleration
Input a new acceleration data, or check, modify or delete the existing input data.

452 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

Function Name
Selected the input time history analysis condition. If the condition is not input beforehand, press the button
to call up this function.

Time function data type

[Normalized acceleration]: This spectrum is found by dividing the acceleration spectrum with the
gravitational acceleration, and it cannot be set as another type.
[Acceleration]:The acceleration spectrum with time.

Scaling
Input the gradient modulus of the ground acceleration function.
[Scale factor] : Input the gradient modulus.
[Maximum value] : Modify the spectrum data such that the maximum acceleration becomes the specified
desired value.

Gravity
Input the gravitational acceleration.

Graph Options
Specify whether to express the direction of each axis of a graph in log scale.
[x-axis log scale]
Specify whether to express the x-axis direction of a graph in log scale.
[y-axis log scale]
Specify whether to express the y-axis direction of a graph in log scale.
[F.F.T]
Specify whether to convert the graph based on Fourier Transformation.

Description
Display a simple description that explains the ground acceleration function. If an [Earthquake] is created,
the maximum acceleration, time etc. used to create the wave is displayed.

Export
Export the ground acceleration function as a text(*.txt) file.

Earthquake Response Spectrum

Overview
Calculate and display the graph of the earthquake response spectrum using the earthquake wave data in
the database or from the user defined earthquake wave data. Input the damping ratio. To output multiple
damping ratio graphs simultaneously, click the [Add] button. Input the period range and spacing of graph
output for the result stage.
Select the spectrum type. Check the X-axis log scale and Y-axis log scale item to change the X-axis, Y-axis
of the spectrum to a log scale.

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 453

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

▶Table. 'fn.sgs' file format

The FFA provides the following 3 types of time varying load input methods for the convenience of the user:
1) Method of saving the frequently used time varying load as a file and importing
2) Method of calling up the time varying load from the database
3) Direct user input method

The earthquake load input is only supported for the value obtained by dividing the time history acceleration
by the gravitational acceleration.

1. Method of saving the frequently used time varying load as a file and importing
[Import]
Used to import a time varying load from an existing data. The data format is '*.sgs' or '*.thd' and
the file is created in the following format:

*SGSw States that this file is in the data format of the FEA
NX automatic earthquake data extraction module
"Seismic Data Generator".
*TITLE, Elcentro 1940, N-S -
Component
*X-AXIS, Second -
*Y-AXIS, Normalized Acceleration -
*UNIT&TYPE, GRAV, ACCEL -
*FLAGS, 0, 0 -
*DATA -
1.00000E-010, 3.50102E-001 -
5.00000E-002, 3.82861E-001 -
1.00000E-001, 5.08226E-001 -
1.50000E-001, 5.17459E-001 -
: -

▶Table. 'fn.thd' file format Selective item ** Annotation– Can be entered anywhere
–: User input - *UNIT, M , N - Length : Avilable for MM, CM, M, INCH, FEET, GRAV
*Load : KG, TON, KN, LBF, KIP
- *TYPE, ACCEL – Available for ACCEL, FORCE, MOMENT
Essential item *Data
- X1 , Y1 (X : Time, Y : Time Function)
- X2 , Y2
- X3 , Y3
- :

454 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

2. Method of calling up the time varying load from the FEA NX database
[Earthquake wave]
Create a time varying load by importing various earthquake data from the database. There are a
total of 32 types of earthquake acceleration in the DB.

▶Generate earthquake
acceleration record

3. Direct user input method

Construct the time varying load by directly entering the time and the corresponding time varying
load value in the left input column on the dialog box.

Analysis

Overview
Create an analysis case. Add a new analysis case, or modify, copy, delete an existing analysis case. The
input window for analysis case creation is as follows:

▶Create analysis case

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 455

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

General
[Name] : Input the analysis model name.
[Description] : Input the description for the analysis model.

General Setting
[Ground Material Set] : Select the modeled stratum to be used for analysis.
[Depth No. of Bed Rock] : Select the stratum number corresponding to the bedrock.

Control Motion Input

[Outcropping(2E)] : Set the ground acceleration as an outcrop state.
[Within(E+F)] : Set the ground acceleration as the ground response.
[Depth No.] : Select the control point for the earthquake wave input stratum.
[Ground Acceleration Function] : Select the input earthquake acceleration time varying load.

Water Level
[No. of Water Level] : Stratum ID inputted in Ground Material can be selected, and it calculates assuming
that the water level exists from the selected stratum.

Analysis
[Cut-off Frequency] : Set the maximum frequency range for frequency analysis.
[Frequency Step (for Transfer function)] : Set the calculation frequency spacing for transfer function
analysis.
[Maximum Number of Iteration] : Input the maximum iterative calculations to find the equivalent linear
material property value.
[Tolerance] : Input the tolerance for the shear modulus and damping ratio used to find the equivalent linear
material property value through iterative calculations.
[Effective strain coefficient] : Input the coefficient needed to calculate the effective shear strain from the
maximum shear strain.

Response spectrum
[Damping] : Input the damping ratio to calculate the response spectrum.

Result

The analysis results are output in a graph or table for each depth.
- Converging results and table (Absolute) (Maximum acceleration, Maximum velocity, Maximum
displacement)
- Converging results and table (Relation) (Maximum acceleration, Maximum velocity, Maximum
displacement)
- Strain/Stress result table (Uniform strain, Maximum strain, Maximum shear strain)
- Soil profile result table (Converging damping ratio, Converging shear modulus, Shear modulus
ratio)
- Soil profile table (Shear wave velocity, Shear modulus, Damping ratio)

Result : Time History Result

Select the function type of the output graph. The function types are ground movement, response spectrum,
stress/strain, and transfer function.

456 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

[Time History Result Function]

Select the function data, strata, result type of the output graph. Each result type can be selected depending
on the ground movement result function type.

Ground Motion Result Function Type Result type

Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, Relative displacement,
Ground Motion
Relative Velocity, Relative acceleration
Relative displacement, Relative pseudo-velocity, Relative
Response Spectrum
velocity, Absolute pseudo-acceleration, Absolute acceleration
Stress/Strain Stress, Strain
Transfer Function Transfer function

The selected result function is registered on the y axis.

The graph name, x axis name and y axis name can be defined for the time history graph in Define Graph,
and the values can also be expressed in exponential form.
The x axis, y axis can be represented in log scale or the F.F.T can be set in Graph Options.
The generated graph is displayed in the dialog window and can be exported in many forms such as image
file, image word file or excel file.

Overview
5.7
Artificial Generate artificial earthquake data from the embedded design spectral data. Envelope Function enables to
Earthquake generate transient earthquake data. There are three types of envelope functions : Trapezoidal, Compound
Generator and Exponential. FEA NX supports Trapezoidal Type.

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 457

 User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

User Manual

Methodology

▶Design Spectral Data

Read Target
Design Spectral Data

Compute PSD
(Power Spectral Density) Function

Compute Acceleration
Modify PSD
2
z ( t )  I ( t )  An sin( n t   n )
 RS A ( )  n
G ( ) i  1  G ( ) i  
 RS A ( ) 
(i )

Compute
Response Spectrum

NO
Iteration i ≥ Max. Iteration

YES

Output Results

where, ωn= Frequency, An = Amplitude, Фn = Phase Angle, and I(t) = Envelope Function

458 | Section 5. Wizard and Tools

User Manual Chapter 5. Analysis Method

▶Envelope Function
I(t) Level Time

Total Time
Rise Time

[Generate Options]
- Max Iterations : Maximum number of iterations to fit computed spectral data to target one.
- Max. Acceleration : Maximum acceleration of artificial earthquake data
- Damping Ratio : Damping ratio to calculate spectral data

[Generate Acceleration]: Convert from response spectrum to acceleration data

- Spectrum Graph : Check results based on spectral data
- Acceleration Graph : Check results based on acceleration data

Section 5. Wizard and Tools | 459

Advanced Nonlinear and
Detail Analysis System

Chapter 6
Analysis

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1. Analysis Case

Section 2. Analysis

Section 3. History
User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Section 1 Analysis Case

Ground analysis can be explained by comparing it to general structural analysis. Structural analysis gives
importance to the uncertainty of load, acting on the structure. Hence, it conducts the member design for the
largest member force obtained by combining various results systematically. In contrast, ground analysis
focuses more on the uncertainty of construction step and material itself, rather than the load and so, it is
important to understand physical state inside the ground. As a result, for ground analysis, solid elements
need to be used in modeling to reflect the ground shape and construction situation; and non-linear
anisotropic materials and in-situ stress states need to be considered to reflect the actual on-site conditions
as much as possible.
The program for ground analysis can be used to simulate in-situ conditions and determine whether design
or construction condition is appropriate. For ground analysis, various types of analysis are covered, from
General static analysis to Seepage analysis, Stress-seepage coupled analysis, Consolidation analysis,
Construction stage analysis, Slope stability analysis etc.

This section provides a brief overview of the analysis methods and descriptions for the analysis options.
Refer to the Ch. 5 of the Analysis manual for more detailed information on analysis algorithms.

Provided ground analysis features are as follows:

Static Analysis
 Linear static analysis
 Non-linear static analysis (Non-linear elastic or Elasto-plastic analysis)
Construction Stage Analysis
 Stress Analysis  Stress Nonlinear Time History Analysis
 Seepage Analysis  Heat Transfer Analysis
 Stress-Seepage-Slope Analysis  Seepage-Thermal Stress Analysis
 Consolidation Analysis  Thermal Stress Analysis
 Fully Coupled Stress Seepage Analysis

Seepage Analysis
 Steady State Seepage Analysis
 Transient Seepage Analysis
Coupled Seepage-Stress Analysis
 Seepage-Stress Sequential Analysis
 Consolidation Analysis
 Fully-coupled Seepage-Stress Analysis
Dynamic Analysis
 Eigenvalue Analysis  Nonlinear Time History Analysis
 Response Spectrum Analysis  2D Equivalent Linear Analysis
 Linear Time History(Modal) Analysis
 Linear Time History(Direct) Analysis
Slope Stability Analysis
 Slope Stability (Strength Reduction Method, SRM)
 Slope Stability (Stress Analysis Method, SAM)
 Dynamic-Slope Coupled Analysis

Section 1. Analysis Case | 461

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Overview
1.1
General Create an ‘Analysis Case’ to perform analysis. This step sets the analysis method and the analysis
conditions (Mesh set, Boundary condition, Load condition etc.) for each method. In addition, the detailed
analysis option and result output option can be adjusted according to each analysis method. For
Construction stage analysis in particular, the analysis can be set using the following five different analysis
methods and the data used for analysis is specified. The detailed analysis option and result output option
can be adjusted and multiple construction stage sets can be set for recursive analysis on a single model
with changing analysis conditions.

▶Construction state-
supported Analysis
methods

Methodology

Input the Title (and Description) to differentiate each Analysis case and select the Solution (analysis) type.
The Analysis Case Model should be defined according to the selected Solution (analysis) type. Only the
activated analysis conditions (Mesh, Boundary condition, Load etc.) moved to the Active Sets are reflected
in the analysis, not All Sets included in the analysis model. Therefore, it is possible to create several
Analysis cases by adjusting the analysis condition on the same model and comparing the results.
Especially for Linear static analysis, the [Solve Each Load Set Independently] option can be used to apply
all the activated Load Sets individually for recursive analysis and comparison of results.

Particular detailed analysis settings (Time step, Analysis control, Output control) can be added, according
to each Solution type (analysis method). Each analysis method has different settings and the settings need
to be checked before creating an Analysis Case.

If all sets are reflected in the analysis, use the button to move all conditions to the Active Set. If only
several particular conditions are reflected, use drag & drop to move the selected sets to the Active Set. For
Construction stage analysis, because the data used for stage-by-stage analysis is already set, select only
the sets used to perform the analysis.

462 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Linear Static Analysis

1.2
Solution Type Linear static analysis assumes ground and rock materials to be linear-elastic materials and uses static
analysis to determine the behavioral characteristics when loading is applied. Ground materials only display
linear-elastic properties in the early stages of loading, where only a small strain is generated. However,
because Linear-elastic analysis does not consider failure and idealizes the stress-strain relationship linearly,
it is widely used for simple analysis, such as identifying the stress distribution or concentration in the in-situ
ground.
In a broad sense, linear behavior can be viewed as a special form of nonlinear behavior but because linear
analysis is convenient and intuitive, linear static analysis is categorized as a separate analysis type. Linear
analysis, including Linear dynamic analysis, utilizes the elastic behavior of a defined material for analysis.
Also, the non-linear behavior (tension only, compression only and non-linear elastic behavior) of elastic link
elements or truss elements are ignored and the elements are used in the analysis as elastic bodies.
Consequently, it is useful to use Linear static analysis to observe the approximate behavior of the ground,
to organize the initial stage conditions of the construction stage or to conduct tunnel lining analysis.

Particularly, Linear static analysis does not require recursive calculations and hence, it has a short
calculation time. FEA NX considers pore pressure in Linear-static analysis and drained and undrained
conditions can be assigned to elastic materials for analysis.

Non-linear static analysis

All physical phenomena includes non-linearity. Ground or structural behaviors are not an exception. Non-
linear static analysis is used to simulate the behavior of ground considering such non-linearity, when the
change with time is small and can be ignored. FEA NX considers the following non-linearity

 Non-linearity of material : This occurs when the stress-strain relationship is non-linear. Most
ground materials have this non-linearity.
 Geometric non-linearity: If the displacement-strain relationship is non-linear, the linear
assumption is no longer applicable when the displacement is large, or the rotational deformation
is large.
 Non-linearity of load and boundary: Non-linearity that includes the non-linear behavior at an
interface, or non-linearity caused by the direction change of a load due to strain, caused by
forces such as the follower force.

FEA NX can consider all non-linearity mentioned above in analysis. Non-linear analysis can take a long
time for complex non-linear systems because repeated calculations are conducted. Hence for the
practicality, considering appropriate non-linearity can result in analysis results that simulate non-linear
behavior, while maintaining the accuracy with little computational cost.

Construction Stage Analysis

Construction stage analysis can be used to simulate the construction process of the ground using
numerical analysis. Construction stage analysis consists of multiple stages and loading/ boundary
conditions, as well as elements, can be added or removed at each stage. This loading/ boundary or
element change is applied at the start of each stage. FEA NX can use following types of analysis features
to conduct Construction stage analysis.

Stress-Slope Analysis
Analysis of stress and slope stability during the construction process

Section 1. Analysis Case | 463

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Seepage Analysis
Stage by stage Steady state seepage analysis, Stage by stage Transient seepage analysis,

Stress-Seepage-Slope coupled analysis

Sequential Seepage-stress analysis and Slope stability analysis during the construction process

Consolidation analysis
Consolidation analysis for environment change and construction process of embankment

Fully-coupled Stress-Seepage analysis

Stress analysis fully coupled with Transient seepage phenomenon

Stress - Nonlinear Time History analysis

Users can perform nonlinear dynamic analysis considering stress status of ground resulted from not only
self weight but also construction stage (the history of stress).
Nonlinear time history stage must be set at the final stage.

Heat Transfer
Stage by stage of steady state thermal analysis, stage by stage of transient thermal analysis can be
conducted.

Seepage-Thermal Stress
Thermo-hydro-mechanical analysis can be conducted.

Thermal Stress
Thermo-mechanical simulation can be conducted.

When conducting Construction stage analysis, the following should be considered.

 Addition/Removal of element
 Loading/Unloading of weight
 Change in boundary condition
 Change in rock material property
 Definition of load distribution factor
 Step by step underground water level
 Drained-Undrained analysis
 Initialization of displacement
 Stress Analysis for initial construction stage (Consider Ko condition)
 Restart

For example, the construction stages for a tunnel are as follows.

1 Stage: Initial ground stress
2 Stage: 1st face excavation
3 Stage: 1st reinforcement + 2nd face excavation
4 Stage: 2nd reinforcement + 3rd face excavation
5 Stage: 3rd reinforcement + 4th face excavation
…… (Repeat) ……
The first stage is the used to calculate the in-situ stress of soil strata. Because stress analysis of the ground
assumes the in-situ state to be the initial state, the in-situ stress state needs to be calculated.
FEA NX uses self-weight analysis to calculate the initial in-situ stress.

464 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Activate / Deactivate element

An element activated during Construction stage analysis has a default in-situ stress value of ‘0 (zero)’. But
if a prestress is defined on the element, the element has the defined prestress value as its in-situ stress. If
the self-weight is defined, the activated element has a body force due to its self-load. If the activated
element uses the Modified Cam-Clay material model, it has an initial linear-elastic property that is
determined by the loading/ boundary conditions of the corresponding stage.
New nodes will be activated as the element appears, and the initial displacement of the node is also ‘0
(zero)’.

If an element is deactivated at a construction stage, and an additional load distribution factor is not defined,
the internal forces of the deactivated element are no longer considered. The total stress state is re-
distributed according to this condition.

Loading / Unloading of weight

The addition and removal of load at each construction stage is possible and the load from the previous
stage is maintained, except for following cases.
 When an element subjected to the load is deactivated at a stage, its self-weight and external load
applied to it are also removed.
 When a node subjected to the load is deactivated, the external load applied to it is also removed.

Added load is cumulated to the already applied load from the previous construction stage.
Boundary conditions can also be modified in the same way and the same exceptions hold true.

Load distribution factor

The Load distribution factor is used during Construction stage analysis to simplify the modeling. The Load
distribution factor is a numerical analysis method that uses the load distribution factor to apply the effects of
element removal sequentially in the following stages. The Load distribution factor can be used to simplify a
3D problem in 2D, or to downscale the construction stage of a 3D model during analysis.

For example, if stress relaxations of 40%, 30% and 40% are assumed to occur in three consecutive stages,
starting from the excavation stage, define the excavation stage and activate the load distribution factor
option for that step. Input 0.4, 0.3 and 0.3 for the load distribution factor in option window for ‘After Current
Stage 0, 1, 2 stage’ respectively.

Material property conversion

During Construction step analysis, the ground material properties can change to model time dependent
ground disturbance, soil improvement or hardening. There are also cases where the structural material
Section 1. Analysis Case | 465
 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

properties need to be change in the middle of the stage, such as hardening of lining concrete or changes in
lining thickness. For this purpose, the material properties of a specific element can be changed without any
number limits. The changed material property is continued onto the element results(displacement, stress,
strain etc.) of the previous stage for analysis.

Caution: The Material property conversion feature needs to be used carefully. Changing the infill material
after excavation in Construction stage analysis can be simulated using just the property conversions,
without activating or deactivating any elements. Here, the stress conditions from the previous stage is
applied to the following stage and so, physically inappropriate behavior can be observed due to the material
property conversion. Hence, the material property conversion needs to be conducted at a stage where the
element is deactivated and re-activated to obtain the intended results. If a new element is activated, the
internal element has an in-situ stress, strain and interior state variable of ‘0(zero)’.

Undrained Analysis

Undrained analysis can be conducted for selected elements and selected construction stages. Two
conditions should be satisfied beforehand to apply undrained analysis. Firstly, the drainage parameter
should be set as undrained type on material model. Secondly, the undrained condition should be checked
on the Analysis control of construction stage. If only one of the conditions is met, the material conducts
drainage analysis in the corresponding stage.

For singular analysis cases such as static linear/nonlinear analysis, or slope stability examination, check
the Analysis Control > Undrained Condition > Allow Undrained Material Behavior.

Consolidation analysis

Consolidation analysis is an analytical method that calculates the behavior of pore water pressure when it
resists external loading, when excess pore water pressure occurs and as the excess pore water pressure
reduces with time for an undrained condition.

Pore water pressure in the ground with a small osmotic coefficient instantaneously displays the same
behavior as the undrained condition. Hence, it bears most of the compressive load by the created excess
pore water pressure, according to the change in load state. However, as time goes by, excess pore water
pressure is re-distributed and if there is a drainage boundary, the excess pore water pressure decreases
gradually. Because of this, the load previously resisted by the excess pore water pressure is gradually
resisted by the soil frame, causing gradual deformation of the soil frame and increasing effective stress
within the frame.

The increase in effective stress leads to the deformation of soil structure and this deformation is
accumulated in the gravitational direction, eventually displaying settlement behavior in the gravitational
direction with time elapse.

This gradual increase in deformation creates settlement at the base of structural foundation and differential
settlement at the base foundation greatly affects the stability and safety of the structure.

Characteristics of Consolidation element

In Consolidation analysis, the elements have an additional pore water pressure degree of freedom, as well
as displacement degree of freedom, at the nodes. It is assumed that all elements have a degree of freedom
for pore water pressure, unless the two boundary conditions (Non-consolidating condition, Drainage
condition) are specified, for Consolidation analysis. Hence, for bank materials that do not express
consolidated behavior directly, the non-consolidating element conditions need to be defined to apply it as a

466 | Section 1.Analysis Case

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

general structural element. Also, the drainage conditions needs to be defined for drainage boundaries in
consolidating elements. If the boundary conditions are properly defined and Consolidation analysis is
conducted, the excess pore water pressure is 0 (zero) where the non-consolidation conditions and drainage
conditions are applied.

▶Consolidation element Assign

Sand = non-consolidating element ‘Non-consolidation
boundary conditions boundary condition’

Assign
‘Draining boundary condition’
Clay = consolidating element

Fully-coupled Stress-Seepage analysis

Analysis that couples the seepage phenomenon and ground stress analysis can be classified in various
ways, depending on the coupling.

The simplest way is to obtain the pore water pressure distribution by conducting seepage analysis
beforehand, and reflecting it in the total stress/effective stress relationship equation of the stress analysis
conducted in the following step. Such analysis is called sequential analysis. This method can be used to
understand the static stress state of the given steady groundwater flow. However, since deformation due to
stress analysis does not influence the seepage phenomenon inversely, there is no two-way coupling.

Fully-coupled Stress-Seepage analysis is the two-way coupled analysis between seepage analysis and
stress analysis. Both analyses are used to solve the coupled equation. It can display the pore water
pressure, stress or deformation changes with time.

The consolidation analysis begins with the assumption that steady state pore water pressure can be
maintained, and is used to see the changes in excess pore water pressure. In other words, this analysis is
used to simulate the phenomenon of how excess pore water pressure changes with the changes in
load/boundary conditions.

Fully-coupled Stress-Seepage analysis does not follow assumption that steady state pore water pressure
is maintained. Hence, it is suitable for simulating the transient seepage phenomenon, stress analysis and
stability in abnormal condition in a fully coupled form. Unlike the consolidation analysis, it is possible to
define the changes in seepage boundary conditions with time, boundary flow rate etc.

In other words, for Fully-coupled Stress-Seepage analysis, it is possible to use all the transient seepage
boundary conditions, structural load and boundary conditions.

This analysis can be applied to the ground stability analysis for rainfall or the large-scale dam stability
analysis for water level change. The seepage boundary conditions (Head/Flux) can all be used to analyze
not only the changes in excess pore water pressure, but also the consolidation analysis that considers the
total change in pore water pressure.

Section 1. Analysis Case | 467

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Seepage analysis

Seepage analysis can be largely divided into two; the steady state analysis and transient analysis.

Steady state flow analysis is where the boundary conditions inside and outside of the ground does not
change with time. Therefore, the inflow is always equal to the outflow within the analysis range. Transient
analysis on the other hand, can display different inflow and outflow with time, even when the same
boundary conditions as the steady state analysis are applied.

A permeable ground layer (aquifer) exists where the groundwater can seep through, and if the head
difference or flux exists at the boundary, the seepage phenomenon occurs.

Seepage flow occurs along the waterway that connects through the empty pores between soil particles.
This flow complies with Darcy’s law. According to this law, the seepage quantity through the soil volume is
equal to the multiplication of permeability coefficient, hydraulic gradient and cross sectional area. Darcy’s
law originally started from the saturated domain, but can also be applied to the unsaturated domain.

The unsaturated domain includes all non-saturated domains, from the fully dried condition to the almost
saturated condition. As the degree of saturation falls below 100% , air bubbles will also exist in the pores
and if the saturation is very low, the water particles will attached between soil particles in a concave form.

Negative pore pressure is referred to as suction pressure. In most cases, suction pressure increases as the
degree of saturation decreases.

Transient analysis is used when the boundary conditions inside or outside of the ground changes according
to time.

The main differences between transient analysis and steady state analysis are that the boundary conditions
change as time passes and the fact that the transient analysis requires volumetric water content. When the
underground water level goes up or down, the influence factors such as the water content in the
unsaturated domain and porosity are needed.

Comparing the water filling of a reservoir between the fully dried initial state and the partially saturated state,
there is significant difference in the time it takes for the seepage in the reservoir body to reach a steady
state. Hence, transient analysis can be used to estimate the time it takes to saturate the interior of the body,
or deduce a more economic design variable by comparing it with the saturated case.

Eigenvalue analysis (Mode analysis)

Eigenvalue analysis is used to analyze the inherent dynamic properties of the ground/structure, and this
can be used to obtain the natural mode(mode shape), natural period (natural frequency), modal
participation factor etc. of the ground/structure. These properties are determined by the mass and stiffness
of the structure. In other words, if a structure is determined, the natural frequency and vibration mode
(natural mode) are also determined and the number of properties are the same as the degree of freedom of
the structure. For real cases, the structure does not vibrate at a single mode shape and multiple modes
overlap to display a complex vibration shape.

Here, the Mass participation factor is a mass percentage factor that represents how much of the structure
participates in the vibration for each vibration mode when the structure is vibrated at a complex vibration
mode. For example, if the first mode mass participation factor is 60%, 60% of the total mass of the structure

468 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

participates in the first mode. Hence, the a mode with a high mass participation factor is considered in the
earthquake wave for analysis.

For general structure, considering only vibration modes with a mass participation factor sum of around 90%
is still regarded as a sufficiently accurate analysis. However, the ground material properties are relatively
smaller that structural properties and it is hard to have a mass participation factor of 90% in Eigenvalue
analysis. The period is also relatively smaller and no specific standard exists.

Natural periods are defined as the time taken for a structure to vibrate from its natural vibration state to the
particular mode shape using a natural value that 1:1 corresponds to the natural mode.

▶Natural mode shapes

▶Natural frequency

sec sec sec

 1  1.87510407  2  4.69409113  3  7.85475744

T1  1.78702 sec T 2  0.28515 sec T 3  0.10184 sec

The General seismic design criteria requires that each mode’s effective model mass included in the
analysis should retain more than 90% of the total mass. This is to include most of the major modes that
influence the result.

Response Spectrum Analysis

The Response spectrum analysis uses and combines the spectrum data, corresponding to the absolute
maximum values of the time response for each mode, using the principle of superposition. Because the
simultaneity of the maximum value occurrence for each mode is not considered and only the absolute
maximum values are combined, it is considered as an approximate solution to the Modal linear time history
analysis. However, the correlation between modes is considered in the mode combination to correct for
simultaneity errors.

Section 1. Analysis Case | 469

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Spectrum data

A spectrum data is the absolute maximum displacement (or velocity, acceleration) values found by fixing
the damping ratio and changing the period (mass, stiffness) of a single DOF system for a time history data.
Because the damping ratio for each mode of the structure can be different, instead of using a spectrum
data for one damping ratio, multiple spectrum data for different damping ratios are created and interpolated
for the damping ratio. The period spacing used to create the spectrum data can be different to the natural
period of the structure and so, interpolation for the natural period is also needed. Both linear interpolation
and logarithmic interpolation are supported. Also, the spectrum data generally uses the design response
spectrum created from the statistical historic earthquake data in the target region, rather than converting a
particular given data. Because a design response spectrum with one damping ratio is generally used,
correction instead of interpolation is applied for this case.

▶Create displacement
response spectrum of
SDOF system

Damping consideration

Damping consideration is essential for accurate dynamic analysis. All real structures cannot vibrate
infinitely and the energy loss at the molecular level, or energy loss in the structure due to interaction
between component elements, applies damping to the system and gradually decreases the vibrations of
the structure.
In particular, for stimulation near the natural frequency region (resonance effect) of the structure, damping
has a dominant effect on the analysis results.

470 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

▶Without damping
▶▶With damping effects

The accurate damping ratio of the structure needs to be determined through experimentation, and the
generally used damping ratios used are as follows.

System Damping ratio

Steel (within elastic region) <1%
Steel structure with joint 3%~7%
Pipe system with small diameter 1%~2%
Pipe system with large diameter 2%~3%
Rubber material ~5%
Prestressed concrete structure 2%~3%
RC structure 4%~7%

The modal damping is most frequently used to express the structural damping for general numerical
analysis. The modal damping determines the damping for each natural frequency in the system and can be
largely divided into proportional and non-proportional damping. Proportional damping can use the mass
proportional type, stiffness proportional type or Rayleigh type damping.
Mass proportional damping expresses the viscous damping due to external factors such as air resistance
and assumes that the damping matrix is proportional to the mass. For stiffness proportional damping, the
dissipation damping effect (vibration energy dissipated to the ground) is hard to express directly and is
assumed to be proportional to the damping stiffness. Hence, the damping can be overestimated at higher
modes.

Rayleigh damping is the stiffness proportional type corrected for the damping constant at higher modes and
can be expressed as the sum of the mass proportional type and stiffness proportional type.

Linear time history analysis (Modal/Direct)

Linear time history analysis calculates the solution to the dynamic equilibrium equation for the structural
behavior (displacement, member force etc.) at an arbitrary time using the dynamic properties of the
structure and applied loading when a dynamic load is applied. The Modal superposition method and Direct
method are used for linear time history analysis.
Because of linear analysis characteristics, nonlinearity is not considered. When using a nonlinear material,
the material is converted to an equivalent linear elastic material for analysis.

The water level can be defined for the linear time history analysis and the effective stress results can be
viewed. Also the drained/undrained effects of the material can be included in the analysis.

Mode superposition method

The mode superposition method assumes the structural displacement as a linear combination of orthogonal
displacements. Using this, a more simplified time integral function can be used to calculate the dynamic
response for a selected mode. The mode superposition method is used in many structural analysis

Section 1. Analysis Case | 471

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

programs and is an effective way to calculate the dynamic response for the linear dynamic analysis of large
structures with little computational cost. However, the accuracy of the total response depends on the
number of used natural modes and so, the number of modes used in the calculation need to be selected
appropriately.

Direct method

The direct method is a time history analysis that uses the DOF of the total analysis area as a variable. The
dynamic equilibrium equation for the total DOF can be integrated gradually with time to find the solution.
The solution is found for each time stage without any form change to the equilibrium equation and various
integration methods can be used. The direct integration method conducts the analysis for all time stages
and the number or time stages is proportional to the analysis time.

Loading in Linear time history analysis

Dynamic loads that change with time can be used in linear time history analysis.

Define time step

The time step for time history analysis is different for the direct method and mode method.
The direct method uses the defined time step to conduct time integration implicitly. Hence, accuracy
difference can occur depending on the time step size. Generally, accurate results can be obtained when a
time step that is smaller than 10% of the minimum period is used. Using large steps create errors in the
time integration and using too small steps create unnecessary computation cost.

The direct method conducts the time integration analytically. Hence, the time step does not affect the
accuracy of the calculated result. The Mode method time step is used to set the time to view the interim
results of the time history.

Comparison between the Direct method and Mode method

The direct method generally takes longer than the mode method for analysis. Hence, if many time steps
are needed or if the model size is large, it is effective to use the mode method. If many natural frequencies
are calculated near the analysis load frequency (for example, the problem of too many active frequencies),
it is better to use the direct method to obtain more accurate results.

Element Direct method Mode method

Analysis time Long analysis time Short analysis time
Details Time step setting is important Number of modes setting is important
Model size Fit for small models Fit for large models
Long analysis time, Accuracy errors can occur depending on
Analysis accuracy
but highly accurate results the selected number of modes
000

Nonlinear time history analysis

Nonlinearity can also be considered for ground and civil structures in time history analysis. Like the
nonlinear static analysis, the material nonlinearity, geometric nonlinearity, load and boundary nonlinearity
can all or selectively be considered in analysis.

472 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Generally, most ground materials have nonlinear properties and so, the dynamic response of the ground
can be accurately simulated using nonlinear time history analysis.

Water level
Nonlinear time history analysis is used to identify the dynamic response in a relatively short time and the
water level for dynamic analysis is assumed to be constant.

Loading in Nonlinear time history analysis

Dynamic loads that change with time can be used in nonlinear time history analysis.

Define time step

Nonlinear time history analysis conducts time integration implicitly. Hence, accuracy difference can occur
depending on the time step size. Generally, accurate results can be obtained when a time step that is
smaller than 10% of the minimum period is used. Using large steps create errors in the time integration and
using too small steps create unnecessary computation cost. In particular for nonlinear analysis, the
converging solution is found using iterative calculations and hence, the time step must be computed
carefully.

2D equivalent linear analysis

The equivalent linear method on the FEA NX is applied to free field analysis and 2D equivalent linear
analysis. The equivalent linear method approximates the ground material nonlinearity as an equivalent
linear material property for linear iterative analysis. It is generally valid for strain sizes of 105 ~ 103 .

For the equivalent linear method, the initial element shear modulus G and initial damping ratio h need to
be set for each layer. Generally, the values when the strain is minimum are used, and the frequency
domain analysis is conducted to calculate the maximum shear strain  max of each layer or element. The
effective shear strain  eff is calculated as 0.65 or using the earthquake magnitude M by multiplying
(M 1) /10 to that value and the shear modulus G and damping ratio h are calculated using the dynamic

material function curve, created from the effective shear strain  eff of each layer or element. This analytical
process is repeated until the G and values h converge, generally determined by the relative error of 5% or
less, then the analysis is complete and the calculated results are output.

Free field analysis finds the ground response to an input earthquake at the in-situ ground stage before
structure construction. Free field analysis is often used to for the determination of design response
spectrum using ground surface vibration estimation, liquefaction assessment using dynamic stress-strain
computation and the determination of earthquake load that causes instability of ground or structures.

2D equivalent linear analysis not only provides analysis for the ground, but also for soil-structure interaction.
To minimize the earthquake damage, the seismic design for underground structures is performed, and the
stability examination needs to be done to the structure that considered seismic safety. If the structure is
built on a soft ground layer such as clay or silt layers, the vibrations in the bedrock due to earthquakes can
be greatly amplified at the surface and hence, the effects on the structure by the soil-structure interaction
due to earthquake vibrations need to be assessed in detail. Because underground structure are different
from ground structures in that the structural response to earthquakes is mostly controlled by the ground
displacement, the dynamic material properties of the ground and modeling method determines the analysis
results. The figure below displays the general information on modeling the actual analysis domain using the
finite element method (FEM) for soil-structure interaction analysis.

Section 1. Analysis Case | 473

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

▶Schematic diagram of Structure

Structure
analysis domain and FEM d
modeling
Ground

Boundary Condition

Boundary Condition
Free Foundation

Free Foundation
Virtual Boundary
FEM Model
D

Reflection Wave Boundary Condition

Elastic half-space

▶Table. FEM model size Boundary Analysis method Model depth Model width
to minimize analysis result conditions
interference cause by the Transfer Frequency domain - D  2d
boundary Viscous Time domain H d D  5d
Symmetric Effective stress D  10d

The main difference between soil-structure interaction problems and normal structural dynamic problems is
the radiation damping effect due to the infinite property of the ground. Normal damping properties come
from material friction etc. that dampens the structural movement, but radiation damping radiates the wave
energy into the infinite ground space to dampen the structural energy. Hence, seismic analysis conducted
using the equivalent linear method to consider the material nonlinearity and use the frequency domain
analysis, that makes the modeling of radiation damping easier.

The analysis method depending on the shear modulus G and shear strain  relationship is shown in
the figure below.

474 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Slope stability analysis (SRM/SAM)

Slope stability for an embankment or excavation is one of the most frequently dealt problems in
geotechnical engineering. The slope always has a self-weight potential energy due to gravity and if external
forces such as pore water pressure, applied load, earthquake, wave force etc. act on the slope, its stability
is greatly affected. Here, slope failure can occur if the internal shear stress due to the self-weight and
external forces is greater than the shear strength of the slope soil. Calculating the safety for this slope
failure due to shear stress and shear force is called Slope stability analysis.

The following slope stability analysis methods can be used on the FEA NX.

 Strength Reduction Method (SRM): Nonlinear FEM-coupled strength reduction method

 Stress Analysis Method (SAM): Method based on Nonlinear FEM and limit equilibrium theory

Strength Reduction Method (SRM)

Slope stability analysis using the finite element method is a numerical analysis method that analyzes the
minimum safety factor and failure behavior using various shapes, loads and boundary conditions. In
particular, the strength reduction method can be used to simulate the failure process without any previous
assumptions(Griffith et. al. 1999; Matsui, 1990). It can also be applied to 3D axis symmetric problems.
The strength reduction method gradually decreases the shear strength and friction angle (c,  ) until the
calculation does not converge, and that point is considered to be the failure point of the slope. The
maximum strength reduction ratio at that point is used to calculate the minimum safety factor of the slope.

Stress Analysis Method based on limit equilibrium theory (SAM)

This method first uses the finite element method to perform stress analysis on the slope and the safety
factor for each various virtual slip surface, created from the assumptions of the limit equilibrium theory, is
calculated based on the stress analysis results. Here, the calculated minimum safety factor of the various
virtual slip surfaces becomes the safety factor, and the critical section is computed. The SAM method can
only be used on the 2D environment.

Nonlinear time history analysis + SRM

Slope stability analysis using the general SRM cannot be used as a factor of safety for the dynamic state.
Since slopes are more vulnerable to dynamic loads such as earthquakes. In a dynamic equilibrium state,
the ground receives stress from not only its self-weight, but also from the inertial force due to vibrations.

FEA NX can conduct such slope stability analysis for the dynamic equilibrium state. The slope stability
analysis is based on the SRM and can be applied to 2D, axis symmetric and 3D problems.
The input time during nonlinear time history analysis can use the stress state of the ground at that point as
the initial values to calculate the slope stability.

Heat Transfer analysis

Heat Transfer analysis can be divided into two: the steady state analysis (state of the model: the
temperature and heat flow rates, is steady) and transient analysis (time dependent). This analysis type can
be used to model the thermal changes in the ground due to environmental changes, or due to the
construction of facilities, such as buildings or pipelines. Heat Transfer is transmission of thermal energy due
to a gradient in temperature.

Section 1. Analysis Case | 475

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Thermal energy is exchanged based on following phenomenological ways:

- Conduction: determines heat transfer from a hot to a cold object, that are in direct contact to each other.
The thermal conductivity of the different objects decides how much heat in which time is being transferred.

- Convection: determines transfer of heat between two areas without physical contact. Convective heat
transfer is the process that removes heat from a surface when that surface is exposed to fluid (liquid or gas)
of a different temperature flowing over it.

After the heat transfer analysis, results such as temperature distribution, temperature gradient, heat flow
direction / size are output. Available under Construction Stage analysis.

Thermal Stress analysis (thermo-mechanical)

Thermal stress analysis can be divided into two: the steady state analysis (state of the model: the
temperature and heat flow rates, is steady) and transient analysis (time dependent). Thermal stress and
thermal deformation due to heat will be calculated as additional to Heat Transfer analysis output. Available
under Construction Stage analysis.

Seepage-Thermal Stress analysis (hydro- thermo-mechanical)

Seepage-Thermal Stress analysis is an analytical type that can use seepage boundary condition. It can
select steady state and transient state type as same as thermal stress analysis. Both structural analysis
results and seepage / heat transfer analysis results are output.

The initial condition used for transient seepage-thermal stress analysis can be interpreted as a steady state
at time = 0 from the seepage boundary condition, or it can be calculated by specifying the water level.

Available under Construction Stage analysis.

476 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Overview
1.3
Analysis Control The basic options, automatic settings and various advanced analysis options can be checked and changed
(Option) depending on the selected analysis type. For construction stage analysis, the options can be defined for
each separate stage. For analysis results, the output result list can be set in terms of element type to
effectively decrease the size and output time of the result file.
For time history dependent analysis, such as transient seepage, consolidation, time history analysis, the
time step for result check and print can be set separately.

Methodology

The figure above is the Analysis control and Result control setting windows.

Section 1. Analysis Case | 477

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

The additional setting control options for each analysis type is shown, and the detailed inputs are listed in
the table below.

▶Table. Static analysis - *Consolidation analysis,

Linear/Nonlinear Construction Seepage Slope stability
Tab *Fully coupled seepage
Analysis control options Static analysis stage (Steady/*Transient) (SRM/SAM)
stress
for each analysis type Water pressure Water pressure Water pressure Maximum negative Water pressure
(Automatic) (Automatic) (Automatic) pore pressure (Automatic)
In-situ analysis In-situ analysis Water level
Initial stage(ko) Saturation
Initial temperature Final calculation Water level
Effects
stage Maximum
Water level Specify restart Saturation Effects negative pore
stage pressure
Restart option Maximum negative pore Undrained
General Saturation Effects
pressure Condition
Maximum negative Initial -
- -
pore pressure temperature
Saturation
Effects
Maximum
Undrained
negative pore - -
Condition
pressure
Initial
Configuration
Geometry Geometry Load steps Load steps
Geometry Nonlinearity
Nonlinearity Nonlinearity (or Time Steps) (or Time Steps)
Load steps Load steps Convergence
Convergence Criteria Convergence Criteria
(or Time Steps) (or Time Steps) Criteria
Convergence Convergence Advanced nonlinear Advanced nonlinear Use arc-length
Nonlinear
Criteria Criteria setting setting method
Use arc-length Advanced Advanced
-
method nonlinear setting nonlinear setting
-
Advanced nonlinear
- - -
setting
Age - Age - - -

Seepage - - - Initial condition -

Geometry
Nonlinearity
Nonlinear
parameter
Slope
stability - - - - Safety factor
(SRM)
Advanced
nonlinear setting
(Use arc-length
method)
<* : Time step setting analysis type >

478 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Construction Stage Construction stage Construction Stage

Tab
Heat Transfer Thermal Stress Seepage Thermal Stress
Water Pressue(Automatic) Water Pressue(Automatic)
Initial stage(K0) Initial stage(K0)
Initial Stress Initial Stress
Initial Temperature Initial Temperature Initial Temperature
Final calculation stage Final calculation stage
General Specify restart stage Specify restart stage
Restart option Restart option
Saturation Effects Saturation Effects
Maximum negative pore Maximum negative pore pressure
pressure
Initial Configuration Initial Configuration
Geometry Nonlinearity Geometry Nonlinearity
Load steps Load steps Load steps
Nonlinear (or Time Steps) (or Time Steps) (or Time Steps)
Convergence Criteria Convergence Criteria Convergence Criteria

Advanced nonlinear setting Advanced nonlinear setting Advanced nonlinear setting

<* : Time step setting analysis type >

Water Pressure (Automatically consider water pressure)

This option considers all free surfaces/edges of the model as an external water pressure. The water
pressure is calculated with reference to the pore pressure acting on the free surface/edge.

 If water level is set, assume constant water pressure with reference to the water pressure.
 If seepage analysis was conducted previously, use the pore water distribution (size) calculated
for each node.
 If the pore pressure is a negative (-) value, water pressure is not considered automatically.

Section 1. Analysis Case | 479

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Caution: If modeling is done for the case where the external water pressure corresponding to pore water
pressure in the model does not exist, this option needs to be canceled. When conducting stress analysis by
specifying the water level line, the pore pressure is calculated by the water level difference between the
free node and corresponding load. Hence, to accurately examine the influence lines of the underground
water level, Seepage-stress coupled analysis is recommended.

▶Application of auto-water
pressure on excavation
surface when excavating
below the water level

In-situ analysis

Include in-situ Analysis with Self-weight

This option resets the stress state of the singular analysis ground. The calculated in-situ stress is in
equilibrium with the self-weight and the same boundary conditions used in singular analysis for analysis.
When considering self-weight in time history analysis, the initial in-situ stress needs to be calculated. If not,
vibrations can occur due to the load addition. In particular, the self-load must be included for nonlinear time
history analysis.

Ko condition consideration

The K 0 method uses the constant K 0 defined by K0   h /  v to calculated the horizontal stress from the
vertical stress to set it as the in-situ stress.

Using this method, the vertical stress  v needs to be found first using self-weight analysis and that value
can be used to compute the horizontal stress using  h  K0 v . Here, the shear stress maintains its value,
calculated from the analysis result.

If the ground surface is horizontal, there are no problems in using this method, but if not, the calculated
stress state and self-weight are not in equilibrium.

If the stress is adjusted without maintaining the equilibrium state, the stress can change to fit the
equilibrium with the external force in future stress analysis, even if there are no external force changes,
causing deformation. Hence, the K 0 method can be applied if the additional stress changes are relatively
small. Generally, the conditions when the stress modification due to the K 0 method can be used are as
follows.
 When the ground shape change in the horizontal direction is small
 When the pore pressure distribution shows no change in the horizontal direction

480 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

 When the horizontal stress can occur due to the horizontal boundary condition of the free
line/face
 When using transversely isotropic materials that have the same material vertical/horizontal
axis

If the K 0 condition is not considered, the stress state obtained from the self-weight analysis is set as the in-
situ stress. If the ground surface is horizontal, this method is the same as the K 0 method when
K0   / (1  ) . If not, a horizontal strain exists and different results than the K 0 method results can be
obtained. Shear stress also occurs.
This method is generally recommended when the ground is sloped. However, because a value larger than
1 cannot be set for the K 0 value, a null stage can be added for re-analysis after using the K 0 method to
calculate the equilibrium stage, without adding extra external conditions when a K 0 value larger than 1 is
needed. However in this case, the final equilibrium state does not satisfy the K 0 condition. Also, the
modified stress is vastly different from the equilibrium point, it can be hard to calculated a converging
solution using nonlinearity.

Estimate Initial Stress of Activated Elements

In order to calculate the initial stress of ground, FEA NX perform Linear Analysis even if nonlinear material
is assigned to the elements. In this case, it can result in, sometimes, over-estimating the soil behavior
(large displacement). Initial Stress Options can eliminate this problem especially for newly activated
elements which are to simulate a fill-up ground such as backfill and embankment.

▶Engineering example

Section 1. Analysis Case | 481

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Clear Displacement/Strain

The displacement reset condition may be needed during analysis. For example, when the displacement
and strain due to self-weight need not be considered in the initial analysis stage, the reset option can be
used to reset the in-situ state displacement and strain to ‘0(zero)’.
Also, the reset can be performed at an arbitrary construction stage, such that the middle stage after
analysis of several stages can be set as the reference state. Displacement/Strain reset is applied at the end
of the specified stage, after the analysis has finished.

Caution: When conducting nonlinear analysis by considering geometry nonlinearity, arbitrarily modifying
the deformation does not guarantee the continuity. Hence, this option is not recommended for geometric
nonlinear analysis of construction stages.

Cut-Off Negative Effective Pressure

When conducting linear static analysis for initial stress of ground, tensile stress can be generated especially
at the ground surface according to the geometry and stiffness differences. In this case, this tensile stress
can take effect on the convergence for the following stage (nonlinear analysis) significantly. If there is
tensile stress generated in in-situ state, software will make it close to Zero to ignore the abnormal stress
distribution. Since this is the basic concept of initial stress of ground, strongly recommended to use for all
staged analysis.

Initial Temperature

This option sets the initial temperature of the single analysis model. If not checked, the initial temperature
defined in the [Analysis Control] is considered. The temperature is used to assess the effects of thermal
load, and the temperature difference with the input temperature load is considered in the analysis.

Water Level

Define water level

Directly input the water level height, or select a water level function that already has a specified water level
to set the water level. The set water level is applied to the total model. When using the water level function,
the input value is multiplied to the function value and applied.

Define water level for mesh set

Define the water level for each mesh set.

If the groundwater layer is surrounded by rocks or an impermeable clay layer (confined aquifer), the
presence/absence of the groundwater level for each ground layer can be set for analysis.
If the total groundwater level is input and a mesh set has a defined groundwater level, the mesh set
groundwater level has priority and the total groundwater level is applied to mesh sets that do not have a
defined level.
If the water level and the function are specified at the same time, the input water level and the function are
multiplied and reflected in the analysis.

482 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Mesh Set – select the mesh set to apply the water level condition.

Water Level Condition – select between Head, Dry, Hydrostatic and User-Defined for applying water
pressure
Head – compute head according to the water level assigned to the mesh set.
Dry – assume there is no pore water pressure applied to the mesh set.
Hydrostatic – assign a non-hydrostatic water pressure to a mesh set.
User-Defined – apply a user-defined pressure gradient to a mesh set

Condition Function – select a condition function for Head, Hydrostatic & User-Defined
 Head
- None – set a single water level for water pressure calculation.
- Water Level Function – assign a function which describes the water level using General Function in
2D and Surface Function in 3D.
 Hydrostatic – not available
- Water Level Function – assign a Non-Hydrostatic Water Pressure function type Hydrostatic to define a
pressure profile to be used to compute the water pressure.

 User Defined
- Water Level Function – assign a Non-Hydrostatic Water Pressure function type User-Defined to apply
a linear pressure profile

Water Level – input water level to be considered for the selected mesh set (only for Head).

Saturation Effects

This option is to conduct accurate analysis when the saturation has a value between the unsaturated state
(Se=0) and the saturated state (Se=1). The partial saturation can be applied in the following two cases.

 Applying the partial saturation to calculated the effective stress-total stress relationship (Use
Bishop’s effective stress relationship equation)
 Consider the partially saturated state in the unit weight calculations for a material, such that the
unit weight when partially saturated has a value between the saturated unit weight and
unsaturated unit weight.
If partial saturation is not considered, Terzaghi’s effective stress formula is used and the unit weight is set
as either the saturated unit weight or the unsaturated unit weight, depending on the pore water pressure
distribution (a value in between is not used.). The saturation is defined as a function of pore water pressure
and if partial saturation is considered, the unsaturated properties of the material need to be defined to
define the saturation function for pore water pressure.

Section 1. Analysis Case | 483

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Maximum negative pore water pressure limit

This option limits the maximum negative pore pressure by the input number. If partial saturation is not
considered, Terzaghi’s effective stress formula is used and the pore stress of the unsaturated state can be
overly reflected in the calculation. Hence, when not considering partial saturation, the negative pore water
pressure needs to be limited to a certain value. Reversely, if the partial saturation is considered, Bishop’s
equation is used and there is no such danger. In other words, the pore stress is limited by the unsaturated
property function and there is no need for a particular limit on the negative pore water pressure.

Construction stage general setting

Initial stage

Specify the construction stage that will be considered as the in-situ condition and check the Ko
consideration. Refer to the ‘Linear analysis’ option for more information on the Ko. The displacement and
strain for the construction stage specified as the initial stage, is reset.

Final calculation stage

The default setting is calculation up to the final stage, but a separate Final calculation stage can be set
when stopping the analysis to check the interim results.

Specify restart stage

When specifying the construction stage, the [Specify restart stage] option can be checked on the Analysis
control for each stage. The checked stage is automatically saved on a separate result file and when the
same model is used for re-analysis, the re-analysis can be performed starting from the next stage of the
result file. It is useful when many construction stages are specified.

Restart option

If the converge standard is not satisfied for non-linear analysis, the reliability can be in question and so, it is
important to check whether the converge standard is satisfied for each stage during construction stage
analysis. In particular, because construction stage analysis can take longer time than single analysis, the [If
not converged, save its previous stage] option is available when a stage does not satisfy the standard. This
option saves the stage before as a result file and the model can be review and modified before restarting.
Also, the [Save all stages] option is available for when the analysis is terminated forcefully, due to the
computer system instability or to check the interim results. However, because saving all analysis results
takes up a large size, the save capacity needs to be secured on the computer.

Initial Configuration

484 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

During construction, the newly activated nodes(elements) can be set to the position considering deformed
shape in the previous stage. Following is the example of staged embankment to compare the settlement
distribution between with and without applying the option.

▶With option
▶▶Without option

Geometry Nonlinearity (Nonlinear static / time-history analysis)

In case of large deformation analysis, the user can check more reasonable behavior with this option. This is
to consider geometric nonlinear effects in stress, fully coupled and slope stability analysis. Analysis can
take into account load nonlinearity which is reflecting the effects of follower loads, where the load direction
changes with the deformation. Depending on the deformed shape, the pore water pressure can be updated
automatically.

▶Directional change of
pressure load due to the
large deformation

Normal pressure Pressure in specified direction

Load steps (or Time Steps)

A static load can be used for nonlinear static analysis. The defined load sum can be applied at once or in
stages, as an increment, cumulatively. If the load increment is too large, it may be hard to calculate the

Section 1. Analysis Case | 485

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

converging solution and if the load increment is too small, unnecessary is spent on calculations. In case of
considering time-dependent material, the user can define Time steps to check the results with time elapse.

Convergence Criteria

Because nonlinear analysis uses iteration methods, the converge condition can be used to determine
whether the solution has converged. The convergence is determined by comparing the displacement,
member force or energy change in the previous calculation with the reference values. If all selected
conditions are satisfied, the iteration is determined to have converged.

Use Arc-Length Method

FEA NX uses the Newton-Raphson method, where the increments are calculated to minimize the error
repeatedly, as a base for calculating the nonlinear analysis solution. The Full Newton-Raphson, which
renews the stiffness matrix for each repeated calculation, is basically used and the Newton-Raphson
method or Initial stiffness method can be used at the renewal point. Also, other various options such as the
line search method to improve the convergence, or arc length method, to calculate the unstable equilibrium
state, can be used (Refer to Chp.5-5 of the Analysis manual for more details). The iterated calculation
method repeats the calculation until a satisfactory solution is obtained. If there is no accurate numerical
basis, the initial setting value is recommended.

Minimum arc-length adjustment ratio

Input the minimum change to the initial arc length to current increment arc length ratio. This prevents the
arc length from becoming infinitely small.

Maximum arc-length adjustment ratio

Input the maximum change to the initial arc length to current increment arc length ratio. This prevents the
arc length from becoming infinitely large.

Maximum arc-length increments

Input the maximum number of increments. Nonlinear analysis using the explicit arc length method is
conducted until the load factor is larger than 1, or when the number of increments reaches the maximum
value. The explicit arc length method may not work, according to the load in the problem, and the number
of maximum allowable load increments is input to prepare for this.

Advanced nonlinear setting

486 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

The basic settings use the nonlinear analysis parameters and the [Use default settings] option is selected
for most problems. The detailed settings are as follows.

Stiffness update scheme parameter

The Full Newton-Raphson, which renews the stiffness matrix for each repeated calculation, and the Initial
stiffness method, which maintains the initial stiffness matrix and has very weak nonlinearity, are available.
Other options such as the Modified Newton-Raphson method or Secant method, which increases the
convergence and efficiency of the Newton-Raphson material properties, can be selected. Refer to Chp.5 of
the Analysis manual for more details on the algorithms. The user can also specify a method to recompose
the stiffness matrix by selecting repetition, semiautomatic and automatic.

Analysis option

[Terminate Analysis on Failed Convergence] : Close analysis when convergence fails. If the option is not
selected, the analysis is continuously conducted even when the values to not converge.
[Max number of Iterations per Increment] : Input the maximum number of iterations for one increment.
[Maximum Bisection level] : Specify the maximum division level.
[Enable Line Search] : Use the line search feature. This feature is helpful for problems with flexible
structures, where the stiffness increases with the load, or if the nonlinear analysis solution converges while
vibrating. It may only increase the analysis time when used on an ineffective problem.
[Max Line Search per Iteration] : Input the maximum number of line search per repeated calculation.
[Line Search Tolerance] : Input the line search tolerance.
[Divergence Threshold] : Specify the number of allowable diversions if the value does not converge. The
modified Newton-Raphson method renews the stiffness matrix at the start of each load increment.

Age

Section 1. Analysis Case | 487

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

In case of construction stage analysis, the user can take Age into account to consider creep / shrinkage
effect generated in the previous stage. For the time-dependent material, the user, in general, can enter the
curing period of concrete.

Initial condition (Seepage)

This option specifies the initial pore water pressure distribution in the ground for transient seepage analysis.
The initial conditions must be set for the transient analysis. The initial condition can be selected by using
the values at time ‘0(zero)’ of the transient time step, using an arbitrarily set water level height, or using the
water level function.

Safety factor (SRM)

Input the initial safety factor and the safety factor increment for each repeated calculation step. The
resolution of safety factor can also be set.
[Resolution of Safety Factor] - Slope analysis using SRM uses the strength reduction method, and the
resolution of safety factor value can be input to specify the accuracy of the safety factor calculation. The
resolution of safety factor is used as a convergence standard for stability analysis. However, if the
resolution of safety factor is entered too low, the analysis time increases greatly and so, the following
guideline needs to be used to input an appropriate value.

Safety factor accuracy Applicability

0.05 Low(Use as initial review)
0.01 Average
0.005 High

*Nonlinear time
▶Table. Dynamic analysis- Eigenvalue, *Linear time history history, *2D equivalent
Tab
Analysis control options Response spectrum (Modal/Direct) * Nonlinear time linear
for each analysis type history +SRM
Water pressure Water pressure
Initial temperature
General (Automatic) (Automatic) -
Water level In-situ analysis In-situ analysis

488 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Eigenvectors Water level Water level

Saturation effects Eigenvectors Saturation effects
Max negative Max negative
Saturation effects
pore pressure pore pressure
Max negative
Undrained condition Undrained condition
pore pressure
Mass parameters Undrained condition Mass parameter

- Mass parameter -

- - -
Geometry Nonlinearity
Converge standard
Nonlinear - - -
Advanced nonlinear
setting
Modal combination Effective shear
Damping definition Damping definition
type strain
Damping definition Convergence
Dynamic
analysis Interpolation of Interpolation
- -
spectral data control

- Mass parameters
Define time
Nonlinear parameters

Slope stability Convergence criteria

- - -
(SRM) Safety factor
Advanced nonlinear
parameters (Use arc -
length method)
<* : Time step setting analysis type >

Eigenvectors

Input the number of natural frequency modes (number of modes) to input and specify the range to search.
The option to check for any omitted eigenvalues can be applied.

Mass parameters

[Coupled Mass Calculation]: Use a mass matrix that considers the coupling between modes. Check to use
a consistent mass matrix, and uncheck to use a lumped mass matrix. It is hard to determine which is more
accurate, but for eigenvalue analysis, using a lumped mass matrix displays a more flexible behavior than
using a consistent mass matrix.

Section 1. Analysis Case | 489

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Modal combination type

If the maximum actual physical quantity is assumed to be the maximum physical quantities (maximum
values for displacement, stress, member force, reaction force etc.) of each mode, the maximum values of
each mode can simply be added. But because there is no guarantee that the maximum values of each
mode occur on the same time step, it is difficult to express the maximum actual physical quantity through
simple linear super positioning.

Hence, a mode combination method to approximate the maximum value is needed. Various mode methods
are suggested, but because no one combination can give the appropriate approximation for all cases, the
characteristics of each mode combination needs to be understood. The modal combination types are as
follows, and refer to Ch.5 of the Analysis manual for more detailed algorithms.

ABS(summation of the Absolute value)

This method assumes that all mode responses occur on the same phase and the maximum value for each
mode is judged to occur on the same time step, giving the most conservative results.

SRSS(Square Root of the Summation of the Squares)

This method provides appropriate results when each mode is sufficiently separated.

NRL(Naval Research Laboratory method)

This method removes one mode( m ) that has the maximum absolute value from the SRSS method, and
like the SRSS method, this method provides appropriate results when each mode is sufficiently separated.

TENP(TEN Percent method)

This method includes effect of adjacent frequency modes in the SRSS. In other words, if two mode
frequencies satisfy the following, the two modes are determined to be adjacent, within 10% of the
frequency.

CQC(Complete Quadratic Combination method)

If the cross-correlation coefficient between modes is 1, it displays the same results as the SRSS method.

Damping definition

490 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Direct modal

The user directly defines the damping ratio of each mode, and the mode response is calculated using that
ratio. The direct modal method is only activated for Response spectrum / Time history (Modal) analysis.

[Damping Ratio for All Modes]

Define the default damping ratio that is applied to all modes, except for the ones defined by the user. The
default damping ratio is applied to all modes that have a lower priority than the specified mode. If the input
damping ratio is different from the damping ratio of the response spectrum function, the spectrum data is
adjusted with reference to the input damping ratio and used for analysis.

[Modal Damping Overrides]

It is used to directly input the damping ratio for each mode. The mode number and mode damping ratio are
input separately and then added.

Section 1. Analysis Case | 491

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Mass Stiffness Proportional

Compute the damping constant for mass proportional attenuation and stiffness proportional attenuation.
The proportional coefficient can be directly input, or automatically calculated from the mode attenuation, for
checked items on the attenuation type.
Input the mode frequency or period and specify the damping ratio to automatically calculate the
proportionality coefficient.
Here, the attenuation for each material, when calculating the mass & stiffness coefficients from the modal
damping, can be reflected in the analysis. The damping ratio of each material, input in the [Show
Coefficients from Material], and the damping coefficient (alpha, beta) of the damping matrix, calculated
using that value, can be checked.

Interpolation of Spectral Ratio

Select the interpolation method for the response spectrum load data. Both linear interpolation or logarithmic
interpolation can be used for the spectrum data period and the default setting is the logarithmic
interpolation method. If multiple damping ratios are in the spectrum data, interpolation of the damping ratio
also follows this option. Spectrum data with one damping ratio cannot be interpolated and is corrected
using the following equation. (1.5/(40xAttenuation+1) + 0.5)

Define Time (Nonlinear time history + SRM)

Specify the time to view the SRM analysis results. Multiple time steps can be specified. The SRM stability
assessment is conducted using the nonlinear time history stress results from the specified time period.

Effective shear strain (2D equivalent linear analysis)

The shear strain of the ground changes with the input seismic motion or vibration load. To apply equivalent
linear analysis, the concept of effective shear strain is introduced, and the material properties are simplified
to have equivalent linear values for calculation.

492 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Frequency domain analysis is analyzed to have a certain shear modulus and damping for each frequency,
and the material nonlinearity cannot be considered. Hence, the 2D equivalent linear analysis uses iterated
calculations, using the changing ground stiffness and damping ratio due to the shear strain calculated in the
previous stage, to consider the nonlinear behavior of the ground. Here, the maximum shear strain used in
the previous stage is multiplied by a certain value(50%~70%) smaller than 1 to define the effective shear
strain. The effective shear strain is used because the maximum shear strain generates a larger strain
energy than the actual behavior.
Generally, an effective shear strain coefficient of 0.65 (65%), or the (M 1) /10 value that uses the
earthquake magnitude M is used. Also, a maximum shear strain calculation method in the time domain is
supported to calculate shear strain more precisely than the maximum shear strain found using the
RMS(root mean square) in the frequency domain.

 max  max t { oct (t )}

1 2
 oct (t )   x (t )   z2 (t )  { x (t )   z (t )}2  6 yz2 (t )  6 xz2 (t )
3

▶Difference between
maximum and effective
strain

There are two methods to calculating the maximum shear strain; the time domain and frequency domain.
The time domain method defines the load (acceleration, force etc.) changes according to time and
composes the structural state as a differential equation. Hence, the structural response (displacement,
velocity, acceleration response) can be calculated by performing the integration for every time interval. The
frequency domain method is useful when determining the relationship and ratio between the load respo nse
and frequency characteristics. Because it is hard to determine this relationship and ratio for irregular waves
such as earthquake response, the wave in the time domain is converted to the frequency domain and used
for analysis.

Interpolation control
Input the frequency range for frequency domain analysis. Interpolation methods are used to efficient
frequency domain analysis and one of the four methods can be selected.

Select [Coupled Mass Calculation] to conduct the analysis for all frequencies and if the interval is specified,
the analysis frequency interval in the frequency domain becomes the set interval.
Overview
1.4
Time Step The time step is specified for result examination with time in Consolidation, Seepage (transient), Dynamic
(linear/nonlinear time history) analysis. The analysis result can be checked at every specified time interval
and for dynamic analysis, the time history result graph is provided.

Section 1. Analysis Case | 493

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Methodology

Consolidation (singular) analysis, Stress seepage-Fully coupled – Loading/Sustain

Specify the applied time step and load factor. In consolidation analysis, the analysis can be simulated using
'Sustain' option without creating the construction stage. User can define loading and leave time separately.
All applied loads including self-weight is used for analysis, according to the input time and load factor. The
analysis is conducted by simulating the dissipation of excess pore water pressure in the lead load stage,
according to the defined time information, after the [Loading] analysis has finished. Because of this, the
load factor in the [Sustain] cannot be input and the time information is added to the final time of the
[Loading].

Construction stage consolidation analysis - Input time and load

For consolidation analysis, the appropriate load application time and load distribution of an added load can
be done by inputting the time and load factor.

▶Initial state
▶▶Embankment load
application
▶▶▶Sustained period

▶Initial state loading loading loading

▶▶Embankment load
1.0 1.0
application :
▶▶▶Sustained period Δ = 1.0

...
0.0
1.0 time 1.0 10.0 time 1 2 4 8 16 ... time

494 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

When using a Modified Cam-clay material model, the in-situ stress needs to be defined. Hence, drainage
analysis is needed to calculate in-situ stress and in this case, the application time is meaningless.

If an additional load is applied, the load is applied over an appropriate total time, as shown in the
‘Embankment load application’ figure above. The figure displays the additional load applied in 10 equal
stages over 10 days. Here, the sum of the load factors is 1.0.
After the embankment has finished, the leave analysis can be conducted where the load is left continuously
without any additional increase. The leave time is defined as shown in the ‘leave period’ figure above.
Because of the characteristics of consolidation analysis, the initial stress change happens rapidly. Hence,
the first time step can start as small and gradually increase with time to pursue both convergence and
analysis speed.

Seepage(Transient analysis) - Define time step

Specify the time step for performing analysis and saving results. The seepage boundary time function value
(heat, flow rate etc.) that corresponds to the set time step is used for analysis, and the results can be
examined. Values outside the time range of the seepage boundary time function can be automatically
applied using linear interpolation.

Dynamic analysis - Define time step

Section 1. Analysis Case | 495

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

It is possible to assign time step using irregular intervals and so, the target time step is assigned a name.

 Time Duration : Insert the time interval

 Time Increment : Input the time interval that will be used for calculation for the entered time
range.
 Intermediate Output : Input the time interval for the output of analysis results. The results are
printed for every time interval x print interval for interim results.

※ At every assigned interval, a result is printed on the result tree. If you need to print out any amount of
data, it might take a considerable amount of time. In case your PC is lack of RAM, the result file might not
be created.

According to the assigned time step, it shows total amount of time elapsed (total amount of time used for
analysis according to the time step), the total number of time step (The total number of time steps used
during the analysis).

Overview
1.5
Output Control Specify the Output type/print option (element result print coordinate system) and for dynamic analysis, the
time history to print. The node result and element results are set as default, depending on the analysis type,
and the desired results in each result column can be selectively saved and printed, allowing efficient
management of analysis result file size and print time etc.

Methodology

It is possible to print out every mesh set used in the analysis, or select only the main mesh set that needs
result confirmation. Check the [Element Corner Results] option to output the calculated results for each
element node on the element result directly. Uncheck this option to view the average output of each node.
The checked result is the same as the legend results when viewed using contours.

If the neutral plane result of shell element is needed, check the [Shell Mid-Plane Results] option.
For a beam element, the number of printed segments can be adjusted.
The results can be printed out at points 1(i, j), 2(i, 1/2, j), 3(i, 1/3, 2/3, j), 4(i, 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, j).
The analyzed result are arranged as a separate text file in the folder in which the model is saved.

496 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Overview
1.6
Analysis Setting Specify the model type (2D/3D) and setup the working environment. The sub menus, such as available
features or elements, are determined by the set environment. Here, the unit system and initial variables of
the analysis model is set, and these values can be modified during the modeling process.

Methodology

[Model Type]
Select the model type. For a 3D model, the gravitational direction can be set as Y or Z and for the 2D or
axis symmetric model, the gravitational direction is fixed in the Y direction.

[Unit System]
Setup project unit for force/length/energy/time. Selected system of unit can be changed anytime during the
modeling process and on the status bar in the lower right-hand corner.

The provided unit systems are as follows.

▶Force/length/energy/time

When importing a geometric shape from an DXF(2D/3D) file, AutoCAD does not have a length unit so, the
imported shape follows the units set on the program. When importing a CAD geometry, the length unit of
the object model can be separately specified by importing the length unit file.

[Initial Parameters]
When converting the mass of dynamic loading and self-load by material’s unit weight or calculating pore
water pressure, unit weight of water and acceleration of gravity is set as variables. Initial temperature is a
variable that is assigned when thermal load is inserted. The difference between set initial temperature and
inserted thermal load would be converted into weight and assigned.

Additional input for thermal analysis is provided:

Section 1. Analysis Case | 497
 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

[Specific Heat of Water] : determines amount of heat (energy) can be stored in the pore water per unit of
mass.
[Conductivity of Water] : determines rate of heat (energy) can be transported in the pore water.
[Conductivity of Ice]: determines rate of heat (energy) can be transported through ice.
[Latent Heat of Water] : amount of energy required for water phase change (from liquid to solid state and
vice versa).

* For 2D analysis, the planar deformation thickness of the ground needs to be directly input to be applied to
the analysis. Generally, the unit width is input, with respect to the set length unit system.

Overview
1.7
Parametric This feature is useful when changing the properties (material) of a particular element in a model and
Analysis conducting the analysis to compare results. The notable example is the Ko parameter analysis. For
example, when conducting the tunnel excavation construction step analysis, comparing the analysis results
by changing the coefficient of earth pressure (Ko) value as 0.5, 1, 1.5 in stages, the model is not separated
and only the property is added for analysis. Changing various conditions, not only ground materials but also
structural characteristics (section characteristics), is possible for iterative calculations and all outcomes can
be compared at once.

Methodology

First, select the base analysis case. Automatically create the parametric analysis case by assigning the
changed characteristic conditions below.

Select the target mesh set and select the target property change (current properties of the selected element)
and changed property sequentially. Select the Add/Edit button to create a parametric analysis case. It is
good to add properties in advance to the parameters for the change property setting.

498 | Section 1.Analysis Case

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Section 2 Analysis
Overview
2.1
Perform/ Conduct analysis on the created analysis case. If multiple analytical cases have been created, select the
Batch Analysis cases to conduct analysis upon and conduct arrangement analysis to analyze multiple models
simultaneously.

Methodology

▶Perform/Batch Analysis

Select the analysis cases to conduct analysis upon. Arrangement analysis is useful when performing
analysis on multiple models. During analysis, the convergence, warning/error can be checked on the output
window. After analysis, the automatically created text file in the saved folder can be used to review the
analysis results, convergence and the warning messages that occurred during analysis.

Section 2. Analysis | 499

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

Section 3 History
Overview
3.1
History Output This operation specifies the function that outputs the results at a particular location in graph form for time
Probes variant analysis cases (Transient seepage, Consolidation, Fully-coupled stress-seepage analysis,
Linear/nonlinear time history analysis, 2D Equivalent linear). Because printing the entire analysis results on
the analysis tree is inefficient in terms of both usability and performance, the user can specify the desired
location effectively and apply it to analysis. In other words, the history result search node must be
registered before conducting analysis.

Methodology

The following process can be performed to output the history result graphs for all time variant analysis
methods. The printable history results include ground deformation, member force and seepage results.

1. Select the Probe type (Analysis > History > History Output Probes > Probe Type) and select the Object
to check the result.

▶History result search and

search type

Probe Type Type Of Result

Displ/Vel/Accel Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration,
Truss/Em Strain, Stress, Force, Seepage,Hinge Force, Hinge Deform
Truss/Geogrid(1D)
Beam/Embedded Beam Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration,
Plane Strain Strain, Stress, Force, Seepage
Plane Stress/Geogrid (2D) Strain, Stress, Force, Seepage
Axisymmetric Strain, Stress, Force
Shell Strain, Stress, Force, Seepage
Solid Strain, Stress, Seepage
Response Spectrum Rel Displacement, Rel Velocity, Abs Acceleration, Pseudo Rel Velocity,
Pseudo Abs Acceleration
Transfer Function Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration,
Nodal Seepage -
Point Spring/Elastic Link Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration,

500 | Section 3. History

User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

This feature can be specified for each search type and the detailed components are selected.

For element results, the results can be output for the selected node center or for each node position.
However, the middle nodes of higher order elements cannot output results. For the
'Displacement/Velocity/Acceleration' type, the results calculated at the [Reference Node] can be used to
deduct relative results.

In case of 'Transfer Function', it has always a relative result, the user must specify the [Reference Node].

[History step] specifies the step at which the results will be output. Select [All Output Step] to output results
at all the time intervals, not just at the output time steps specified in the Analysis case.

Specify the [Frequency] option when printing the results at analysis conducting step/time intervals.
For an example analysis case with an analysis time increment as 0.1,0.2,0.3 sec... and an interim result
output time as 0.3,0.6sec..., specifying 'Step : 2' outputs the results at 0.2, 0.4, 0.6sec... . Entering '0.2sec'
in the 'Time' option can output the results at 0.2, 0.4, 0.6sec... .

※ Be careful not to reflect search types that are not printed in the Analysis case.

2. Analysis > Analysis > General > Output control > Register the history items for result checking, added
from the history tab

▶History result output

setting

Section 3. History | 501

 User Manual Chapter 6. Analysis

3. Result > Special Post > History > Check time history result using graph function

History Probes Graph allows for customizing displayed data for both X and Y axes.

▶History result search

graph

<History result search graph>

502 | Section 3. History

Advanced Nonlinear and
Detail Analysis System

Chapter 7
Results and
Tools

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1. Result

Section 2. General

Section 3. Advanced Function

Section 4. Special Post

Section 5. Etc.

Section 6. Geometry

Section 7. Node/Element

Section 8. Export 3D PDF

Section 9. Flight Simulation

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Section 1 Result
If the analysis has finished properly, check the results and collect, reduce the various numerical data
needed for the actual design. The results, printed using the result combination and user defined formula,
can be linearly combined to create a new result combination set.

Overview
1.1
Combination If the analysis case is linear static analysis, the load sets in the case can be combined with various other
case load sets. The load sets within a case can only be combined when the [Solve Each Load Set
Independently] option is checked, and when both load sets have printed mesh set results.

▶Combination

Methodology

Define the new load set name and designate the analysis set and load results. The scale can be set when
designating the load results.
There are two combination methods; the [Linear Combination] method, which linearly combines the
analysis results, and the [Envelop] method, which depends on the value size. [Envelop] displays the
maximum value, minimum value, maximum absolute value (no sign) and maximum absolute value (sign)
for the analysis results of each load condition.

Section 1. Result | 503

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Overview
1.2
Calculation Create combined results between particular result components.

▶Result calculation

Methodology

Define the set name to create a new set, or perform additional computation on an existing selected file.
The letter case of the operator used in the formula can be mixed. The method of using is the same as that
of a scientific calculator and the operation priority follows the mathematical laws.

Element Description Example use

( Open parenthesis -
) Close parenthesis -
+ Plus -
- Minus -
* Multiply -
/ Divide -
SQRT √ <ex> √2 = SQRT(2)
SIN Sine Unit : Degree
COS Cosine Unit : Degree
TAN Tangent Unit : Degree
ASIN Arc Sine <ex> sin-1 (0.3)=ASIN(0.3)
ACOS Arc Cosine <ex> cos-1 (0.3)=ACOS(0.3)
ATAN Arc Tangent <ex> tan-1 (0.3)=ATAN(0.3)
EXP Exponential <ex> e0.3 =EXP(0.3)
SINH Hyperbolic Sine <ex> sinh(1)=SINH(1)
COSH Hyperbolic Cosine <ex> cosh(1)=COSH(1)
COTAN Cosine / Sine <ex> cotan(1)=COTAN(1)
LN Natural logarithm -
LOG Common logarithm -

504 | Section 1. Result

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Section 2 General
In the General section, the various graphic output processing methods for modeling analysis results, such
as Contour, Vector, Diagram, Deform etc., are set.

Overview
2.1
Contour Display the displacement, reaction force, stress, strain size and direction of an activated element using
contours.

Methodology

Use Contour ON/OFF to decide whether to output the contour on the screen.

▶▶Contour OFF

Contour property

The contours can be overlapped with the graphic display setting function to output more graphic results.

Section 2. General | 505

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Color

Display the color of the selected results as the contour or model mesh color.

▶Contour
▶▶Model(Shading)

[Contour]
Plot the result color as the result contour color.

[Model (Shading)]
Plot the result color as the model mesh color. The analysis color can be displayed as result edge, deformed
shape and fill type line draw, but not contour types.

* Setting the contour line

The show line, color, thickness in the contour properties can be adjusted to clearly express the contour
distribution.

< Show contour line - unchecked>

<Show contour line- checked>

506 | Section 2. General

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Overview
2.2 Display the size and direction of the selected displacement or reaction force component as a vector on
Vector each node.

Details
▶Vector + Contour
▶▶Vector
▶▶▶Slice Plane Vector

[Slice Plane Vector]

The vector plot is displayed on the cutting line/plane. The cutting line/plane definition method is same as
the 'Clipping Plane'.

Section 2. General | 507

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

[Slice Plane Contour]

The contour and vector plot are displayed on the cutting line/plane at the same time.

[Full Model Vector]

The vector plot of cutting line/plane and full model are displayed at the same time.

[Slice Vector Projection]

The vector plot is displayed by the projection of vertical direction on the cutting line/plane.

[Show Uniform (only Solid)]

This option controls display vector density on the screen. This option is model size sensitive - it is
recommended to check dimensions of the model (geometry and/or element size) to insert reasonable input.

508 | Section 2. General

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

* Setting the vector properties

Use vectors to display the analysis results on the work screen. This option can be used to set how the
vectors will be displayed.

 Vector > Scale Factor

Plot the scaled vector results.

<Scale value = 2> <Scale value = 5> <Scale value = 10>

 Vector > Start Position

Determine the arrow position.

<Start position = Start> <Start position = Center> <Start position = End>

 Vector > Plot All Components
When the principal stress vector of an element is output, both the maximum and minimum principal
stresses are output if True.

 Vector > Only Free Face

Only plot the arrows for nodes on the free face.

Section 2. General | 509

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

<Only free face Unchecked(False)> <Only free face checked(True)>

 Head > Type
Determine the vector arrowhead direction. (One direction/ Two direction/ No direction)

<One direction> <Both direction> <No direction>

 Head > Constant Size
Set all vector arrowheads to an equal size. (True/False)

 Head > Scale Factor

Plot the scaled vector arrowhead. (Scale Value)

 Body > Constant Size

Set all vector arrow body lengths to an equal size. (True/False)

 Body > Scale Factor

Plot the scaled vector arrow body length. (Scale Value)

 Body > Line Width

Plot the scaled vector arrow body thickness. (Scale Value)

 Color > User Color

Plot the vector arrow using the user defined positive and negative colors. (True/False)

 Color > Plus Value Color

When setting the user color, determine the positive value vector arrow color.

 Color > Minus Value Color

When setting the user color, determine the negative value vector arrow color.

510 | Section 2. General

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Overview
2.3
Diagram Display the selected 1D element results as a diagram.

* Setting the diagram properties

Specify the display settings for a 1D element result diagram.

 Diagram > Scale Factor

Plot the scaled member force or stress diagram of a 1D element.

 Diagram > Line Width

Plot the scaled Diagram line thickness.

 Diagram > Diagram Type

Select the diagram type that reflects the analysis results, using contours or a single color, and plot.

<Contour> <Single color>

 Diagram > Diagram Color
Define the color for the single color type diagram.

 Diagram > Fill Type

Section 2. General | 511

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Plot the diagram using a fill type; either a line fill or solid fill.

<Line fill> <solid fill>

 Diagram > Reverse

Reverse the direction of the diagram display and plot.

<Reverse(True)> <Revers(False)>

 Diagram > Reference Value

Determine whether to display the diagram using a relative value, with respect to the reference
value.

 Diagram > Result Direction

Set the diagram display direction with reference to the element coordinate axis or GCS, and plot.

512 | Section 2. General

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

<Element X direction> <Element Y direction> <Element Z direction>

<GCS X direction> <GCS Y direction> <GCS Z direction>

 Division
Determine the number of divisions there will be on the diagram for representation.

Overview
2.4
Smooth Display the analysis results using a continuous or fringe contour.

Details

▶Continuous
▶▶Fringe

Continuous
Display the contours of the contour plot smoothly.

Section 2. General | 513

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Fringe
Display the contours of the contour plot using bands for distinction.

Overview
2.5 Determine the contour fill method. The available settings are Draw solid and Draw line.
Fill

Details

▶Draw solid
▶▶Draw line

Draw solid

Display the analysis result contour continuously on a solid.

Draw line

Display the analysis result contour using isogram lines.

* Adjust draw line width

When selecting the Draw line fill, the thickness of the isograms lines can be changed on the contour
settings of the Properties window.
Adjust the line thickness using Properties > Contour > Line Width.

514 | Section 2. General

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Overview
2.6
Edge Type Define the mesh set display type of an activated analysis result graphic element.

Details

▶No Edge
▶▶Mesh Edge

▶Feature Edge
▶▶Free-Face Mesh
Edge

No Edge
The mesh is not drawn.

Mesh Edge
Draw the mesh edge.

Feature Edge
Draw the feature edge of the mesh.

Free-Face Mesh Edge

Draw the mesh as a wireframe.

Section 2. General | 515

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Overview
2.7
Deform Determine the graphic processing of graphically represented results, with reference to the selected
deformed shape.

Details

▶Undeformed shape
▶▶Deformed shape

▶Deformed +
Undeformed (Wire)
▶▶Deformed +
Undeformed (Feature)

▶Deform + Undeformed
(Shading)

Undeformed
The deformed shape is not drawn. In other words, the original shape before deformation is graphically
expressed.

Deformed
Output the deformed shape.

516 | Section 2. General

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Deformed + Undeformed (Wire)

Output both the deformed shape and un-deformed shape (as a Wire).

Deformed + Undeformed (Feature)

Output both the deformed shape and un-deformed shape (as a Feature boundary line).

Deformed + Undeformed (Shading)

Output both the deformed shape and un-deformed shape (using the geometry shape colors).

Deformed + Undeformed (Transparent)

Output both the deformed shape and un-deformed shape (using the geometry shape colors under the
transparency condition).

Deform Properties
Specify the detailed properties for graphic processing of deformed shapes.

▶ Undeformed (Dotted
Line)

[Deform]
 Shape Type
Graphically display the results with reference to the selected deformed shape.
 Factor
Input the scale value used when displaying the deformed shape on the screen.
 Actual Deformation
Checked: Express the actual deformation.
UnChecked: The program scales the displacement using an arbitrary scale to easily determine
the deformed shape (Scale the maximum displacement to 1/20 size of the entire model).

[Undeformed/Deformed shape]
Specify the method used to display both the deformed shape and un-deformed shape simultaneously on
the screen. It is used when applying Deformed + Undeformed (Wire) or Deformed + Undeformed (Feature).
 Line Color
Specify the color of the line used to display the un-deformed/deformed shape.
 Line Width
Specify the thickness of the line used to express the un-deformed/deformed shape.
 Dotted Line
Switches to dotted type of the line used to display the un-deformed/deformed shape.

[Relative Deformation]

Section 2. General | 517

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

 Relative Deformation
Express the node selected from the node number as a relative deformation.
 Node number
Select the reference point of the relative deformation.

* Relative deformation usage

The standard for relative displacement examination can be selected to examine the deformed
shape.

<Relative deformation based on bottom> <Relative deformation based on top>

<Original> <based on Node 5232> <based on Node 58361>

518 | Section 2. General

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Overview
2.8
No Results Determine the representation method for a target object with no results.

* Property setting for no results

Specify the display settings for no result entities.

 Color Type
Determine whether to display the specified color of the no result entity as a mesh set or user
defined. When using the user defined method, the set shading color or no result color is displayed
on the screen, depending on the display mode.
 No Result Element Width
When displaying the no result entity as a wireframe, specify the wireframe width.
 No Result Entity
Minimum value: Display a no result entity as the minimum result value in the contour process.
Maximum value: Display a no result entity as the maximum result value in the contour process.
Zero value: Display a no result entity as 0 in the contour process.
Exclude: Exclude a no result entity from the contour process.
Wireframe: Display the no result entity as a wireframe on the screen during the contour process.
Feature edge: Display the no result entity as a feature edge on the screen during the contour
process.
Shading (Wireframe): Display the no result entity as a ‘shading’ that includes a wireframe on the
screen during the contour process.
Shading (Feature edge): Display the no result entity as a ‘shading’ that includes a feature edge on
the screen during the contour process.

Section 2. General | 519

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Section 3 Advanced Function

Various result outcome forms are provided for the results of a particular node or an element, such as result
checking, extraction of result values, diagram etc. For data extraction, a MS-EXCEL compatible result table
is provided to ease the result check for each stage.

Overview
3.1
Probe Display the results by attaching a result tag on the desired node or element.

▶Probe result

Methodology

Select the node or element on the screen to create a probe. The user can edit the tag color, text color, tag
type etc.
The information and values of a node/element, where the maximum, minimum, maximum absolute values
are generated, on the current result can be checked, and the minimum, maximum values of each mesh set
can be checked.

520 | Section 3. Advanced Function

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Overview
3.2
Multi Step Simultaneously display the iso-surfaces obtained from multiple analysis steps.
Iso Surface
▶ Multi step iso surface

Methodology

Select the analysis condition to display the iso-surface on and specify the result type, result value and step.
Input the iso-value. The iso-value can be selected using the bar between the maximum/minimum values of
the total result.

Section 3. Advanced Function | 521

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Overview
3.3
Extract Extract the user desired data from the analysis result.

▶Extract Results

Methodology

Select the analysis conditions and result type of the extraction target, and specify the results.
The result types differ, depending on the analysis model setting (2D/3D) and material property (Plain strain,
Plate, Solid etc.).

[Step: Results]
Specify the result extraction target step from the results. To select all steps in the list, click the [Select All]
button. To deselect all selected steps, click the [Unselect All] button.

The Order are [Step] or [Node].

For [Step], the extracted result values are listed on a table in the order of affiliated step. For [Node], the
extracted result values are listed on a table in the order of node coordinates for nodes, and the center of
mass coordinates for elements.

The nodes, from which the result values will be extracted, can be selected by directly entering the node ID
number or selecting the nodes on the screen. It is possible to extract only the maximum, minimum and
absolute minimum values. Checking [Only Show Node/Element] extracts the maximum/minimum value
within a node/element displayed on the screen.

The element extraction location, where the result values will be extracted, can be directly specified for a 1D
element.

522 | Section 3. Advanced Function

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Overview
3.4
Local Direction Calculate the force sum on an arbitrary section of a Solid or Plate element.
Force Sum
▶Local direction force
sum

Methodology

Select the analysis case and analysis step, and create the section plane to calculate the local direction
member force sum.
Check [With text] and click the [Plot] button to output the section force component at the calculated centroid
of the section as a text file, and to display the define plane on the screen.

The Local Direction Force Sum is a useful function that can automatically calculate the section force of
a Solid or Plate element. This function calculates the internal force sum in each direction at the
centroid of an arbitrary plane on a Solid or Plate element, using the internal force of each node on the
plane. The Local Direction Force Sum is useful when computing the member forces to be applied in
structural design, after detailed analysis on a particular section of the structure.

The arbitrary section is determined from the intersection between the structure, composed of a Plate
or Solid element, and the infinite plane created by selecting 3 arbitrary points. The centroid is
automatically calculated for this determined section and the section force, in the same direction as the
frame result, is calculated using the stress results of that analysis step.
If a structure that is not a considered exists in the specified plane, the mesh set corresponding to that
structure needs to be deactivated before specifying the plane.

Section 3. Advanced Function | 523

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Overview
3.5
Cutting Diagram Specify an arbitrary line or plane to check the on-surface analysis results as a diagram.

▶ Cutting diagram

Methodology

The diagram setting method can be specified as [Line] or [Surface], and the results can be displayed as a
diagram.

[Cutting Line]: Select a 2-point line or edge when defining the position.
For the 2-point line, select the coordinates directly on the screen or input the coordinates of the 2 points.
Then, specify the direction of the diagram and input the number of samples to divide the diagram by that
number and display on the screen.
The diagram direction follows the GCS and the default direction is the (+) direction. To draw the diagram in
the opposite direction, check the [Reverse] option. For the edge, select [Only On Node] to draw the
diagram on that node position. Only one edge can be selected.
The arbitrary line diagram is useful when assessing the relative settlement conditions of a geotechnical
structure for 2D models.

[Cutting Plane]: Select a 3-point face or plane when defining the position.
For the 3-point face, select the coordinates directly on the screen or input the coordinates of the three
points.
The diagram direction can be selected in the [Plane Surface] or [Plane Normal] direction, and the [Reverse]
option can be checked to draw the diagram in the opposite direction.
The sample number is the number of diagram divisions displayed on the screen.
The arbitrary plane diagram is useful when checking the member force distribution in a particular section of
a 3D model (ex. Lining transitional section model).

524 | Section 3. Advanced Function

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

The specified arbitrary line diagram is registered on the left Works tree > Result tab and the check
button can be used to show/hide on the screen. The right mouse click can be used for editing.

Overview
3.6
Others- Print different element result types on the screen.
Element Contour
Plot

▶Element contour plot

Methodology

Specify the result set and step, and select the element type and element results to print.

▶Simultaneous
representation of ground
stress and plate stress

Overview
3.7
Others- Display the reaction force sum on a table. The table can be checked for all analysis that has the reaction
Summation of forces as its result output.
Reaction

Section 3. Advanced Function | 525

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

▶Load/Reaction force
sum

Methodology

Specify the analyzed analysis case and step, and click Update Load sum/Reaction force sum to
automatically calculate and display the Load/Reaction force sums on a table.

Overview
3.8 Convert the displacement, velocity and acceleration to Decibel (dB) form and display it as a table.
Others-Convert to
Decibel

▶Decibel conversion

Methodology

Select the node after specifying the analysis set/step/result and input the reference value to convert the
displacement, velocity and acceleration at that node to Decibels (dB).

𝑋
𝑁 (𝑑𝐵 ) = 20 𝑙𝑜𝑔10 ( )
𝑋𝑟𝑒𝑓

526 | Section 3. Advanced Function

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

2
Vibration levels generally use g (acceleration) or g values, while the dB (decibel) is widely used. This
is because when noise or vibration occurs, the physical quantity range humans can feel is very wide
and so, it is inappropriate to express this physical quantity using a linear scale.
The decibel (dB) is expressed using a ratio between the physical quantity X and the reference physical
quantity Xref, plotted as a common log function.
Here, when the reference physical quantity is 20μPa for sound pressure, the acceleration is in μm/s2
(KS, JIS). The 20μPa is a subjective reference that is expressed as “the minimum sound pressure an
average healthy human can hear”

[Decibel Reference Levels(ISO R 1683)]

Quantity Definition Ref. level
-6 2
Vibratory Acc. Level La = 20 log10 (a/a0) dB a0 = 10 m/s
Amplitude -9
Vibratory Vel. Level Lv = 20 log10 (v/v0) dB v0 = 10 m/s
Rations -12
Vibratory Dis. level LF = 20 log10 (d/d0) dB d0 = 10 m
000

Overview
3.9
Others- When checking the results after 3D analysis, use the cut section & clipping function to check the arbitrary
3D-2D Wizard section result contours. Here, for the cut arbitrary section, the analysis results such as the minimum,
maximum, absolute maximum value etc. can be checked along with the position. Because all results from
the FEM analysis is calculated with reference to the element nodes, when a cut arbitrary section passes
through the interior of the solid element, the results from nearby nodes are automatically interpolated and
output.

▶3D-2D Wizard
(Result output on arbitrary
section)

Methodology

The result tag from the specified arbitrary section is output following the process outlined below.

1. Add the arbitrary section where the results will be checked, from Additional view control toolset > View
cut model (Cut section & Clipping). As many cut sections as desired can be added in the GCS axis
direction, or in the arbitrary section direction.

Section 3. Advanced Function | 527

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

▶Cut section & Clipping

(Specify arbitrary section)

2. Choose Result analysis > Advanced > Others > 3D-2D Wizard.
Check the [Show Points] option to display all nodes on an arbitrary section where the results can be output.
Like the result value tag, select the nodes or elements to check the numerical value, along with the
positions of the minimum, maximum, absolute maximum values on the viewed section.

528 | Section 3. Advanced Function

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Overview
3.10
Others- The results of multi-step are drawn by graph type based on the selected nodes/elements. Analysis set,
Multi Step Graph result type, results, step and nodes/elements will be selected to draw graph. In the ‘Define Graph’, ‘Axis’ is
the coordinate of selected nodes/elements, and it is placed at the Y axis of graph. The value of selected
nodes/elements is placed at the X axis of graph.

Section 3. Advanced Function | 529

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Section 4 Special Post

Seepage analysis result (Flow Quantity/ Flow Path), Slope stability analysis (SAM) result, Time variant
hysteresis graphs can be identified.

Overview
4.1
Seepage Identify the flow path and flow quantity values obtained from the Seepage analysis results.

▶Flow Path
▶▶Flow Quantity

Flow Path

Methodology

Specify the analyzed analysis case and step, and then input the coordinates of the flow path display
position (an arbitrary point on the flow path). Snap option can be used to input the coordinate values.

The flow path can be displayed as a line or pipe. For a line, the line thickness and for a pipe, Scale can be
used to adjust the size.

The flow path color can be selected between Single color and Contour.

The arrow grid option is an indicator that represents the flow direction of the flow path. The scale value and
number can be used to adjust the arrow size and number of arrows.

If the [Leave Previous Flow Path] option is checked, a flow path is displayed for every clicked position on
the screen. If this option is unchecked, a flow path is displayed only on the last clicked position.
If the [Sensitive] option is checked, the flow net is displayed on the screen immediately. If this option is
unchecked, the [Apply] button needs to be pressed in order to display the flow net.

530 | Section 4. Special Post

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

▶Flow path

Flow Quantity

Methodology

Specify the analyzed analysis case and step, and then select the nodes where the flow quantity will be
calculated.
The nodes can be selected and specified on the screen, or [User Input Mode] can be checked to input the
node ID if the node number is known.
Press the Calculate button to automatically calculate the flow quantity at the nodes, and the calculated flow
quantity value is expressed on the dialog.

The flow quantity at each node is made up of the flow rate value sum, and (+) indicates inflow while (-)
indicates outflow.
The node selection method (Node Mode), line/plane definition method (Cutting Mode) and Arbitrary Type
are supported.
Nodes/Cutting Mode - returns the flow rate by summing the flow rates calculated at the nodes by direct
selection or input of the nodal points where the outflow or inflow occurs.
Arbitrary type - calculates the flow of elements through any line or plane.

Section 4. Special Post | 531

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

There are ‘Cutting Line’ and ‘Cutting Plane‘ option in the ‘Cutting Mode’. The ‘Cutting Line’ option calculates
flow quantity from nodes within the 'Search Tolerance' by defining ‘2-Points Line’ directly or selecting ‘Edge’.
The ‘Cutting Plane‘ option calculates flow quantity from nodes within the 'Search Tolerance' by defining ‘3-
Points Plane’ directly or selecting ‘Plane’. The ‘3-Points Plane’ type calculates flow quantity from the infinite
plane consisting of three points or the plane only consisting of them with the 'Limited Plane' option.

Once the information for calculating flow quantity is created in the ‘Define Information’ dialogue box, it will
be registered in the ‘Define List’. Flow quantity can be calculated by duplicate selecting a number of
information registered in the ‘Define List’ and they can be modified or deleted as well. The node information
included in the checked ‘Define List’ is displayed in the ‘Node ID’ and duplicated same nodes of a number
of information will be treated as one.

Overview
4.2
Slope Stability Output the Slope stability analysis results that incorporate the limit equilibrium method indicators.
(SAM) Result

532 | Section 4. Special Post

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Methodology

Specify the analyzed analysis case and analysis step to check the results on the virtual fracture plane
defined in the stage. Check [Boundary Set Label] and specify the Boundary set to identify the boundary
conditions of the virtual fracture plane specified on the screen.
Use Min, Max to check the area where the maximum/minimum values occur, and use the Drawing option to
modify the thickness, safety factor, size and color of the fracture plane at that point.

▶SAM result

Section 4. Special Post | 533

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Overview
4.3
History Identify the results at particular positions for a time-existing analysis case, using a time variant graph or plot
the results for each time period on the work screen.

▶History result

Graph

Methodology

Select the analysis case for result output and function type for each analysis type. The function type is
possible for analysis cases with time (Transient seepage, Consolidation, Fully coupled stress-seepage,
Linear/nonlinear time history analysis, 2D equivalent linear).
The probe type can select the specified results from Analysis > Special Post > History, and the results for
each probe type are as follows.
※Be aware not to include a search type that is not output in the analysis case.

Probe type Result type

Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, Relative displacement,
Displacement/Velocity/Acceleration
Relative velocity, Relative acceleration
Strain, Stress, Member force, Seepage, Hinge Force, Hinge
Truss/ Embedded truss/ Geo-grid(1D)
Deform
Strain, Stress, Member force, Seepage, Hinge Force, Hinge
Beam
Deform
Plane strain Strain, Stress, Member force, Seepage
Plane stress/Geo-grid (2D) Strain, Stress, Member force, Seepage
Axis symmetric Strain, Stress, Seepage
Shell Strain, Stress, Member force, Seepage
Solid Strain, Stress, Seepage
Relative displacement, Relative velocity, Relative pseudo-
Response spectrum
velocity, Absolute acceleration, Absolute pseudo-velocity
Transfer function Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration
Seepage node results Total head, Pressure head, Flow rate
Point Spring/Elastic Link Strain, Stress,Member Force, Hinge Force, Hinge Deform

534 | Section 4. Special Post

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

The output function used on the vertical axis of the result graph is selected on the Y axis. This function
must be defined in advance using Analysis > Search time history result.

The name of the graph, X axis and Y axis of the time history graph can be defined using Define graph, and
the values can be expressed in exponential form.
The axis settings for the X axis and Y axis can be set in detail using the Graph option. The max/min value
can be determined, and line shape, line width, line form can be set. It can also be expressed using a log
scale.

The generated graph is displayed in the dialog window, and can be output in various forms using Print
image file, Print image word file and Print excel file.

Plot

Methodology

Select the analysis case for result check and specify the time step. The number of created time steps is
determined from the number of total time steps defined in Analysis > Analysis setting.
Selecting the analysis result output type and results automatically displays a contour on the screen.
The time history function reflected in the analysis case can be checked in the [Input Function]. The
specified time of the time step can be checked on the input function, and the output results reflect the
selected time on the time step.
The [Output Function] can be specified in Search time history analysis, and the output result function can
be checked. The specified time of the time step can be checked on the input function, and the output
results reflect the selected time on the time step.
Check the [Sensitive] option to immediately output the results from the selected time step on the screen.

Section 4. Special Post | 535

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Section 5 Etc.

Overview
5.1
Image File Output the finished analysis results as an image file, or a word file that contains an image file.

▶Image file

Methodology

Check the desired article on the component tree menu and determine the image save format.

[Consider All Steps]: Function which allows to Select/Unselect Stage/Step/Result/Component level at the
same time. If this option is unchecked, it will Select/Unselect individually.
All the subordinate components are checked for all stages when the result level is selected.
Only components are checked for all stages when the component level is selected.

FEA NX supports PNG, JPG, BMP image file formats.

Select the Post style. The Post style can be used to conveniently identify different result data, after the
current post-processing graphic display options are saved on the Result tree.
Call up the Context menu on the left Works tree by right mouse click, and use the [Add New Post Style]
menu to save the current graphic display settings. Double click the saved post-processing style to apply
that post style.

536 | Section 5. Etc.

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Post styles from a different model file can be imported by using the [Import Post Style] on the Context menu.
Also, the [Export Post Style (All)] menu can be used to save the set Post style on the current model file
separately.
The View point is provided to easily determine the model direction when capturing the screen.
The results can be saved as an image file or a word file using the Output form, and specifying the output
location saves the image or word file on that location.
The File name prefix is the prefix that is automatically assigned in front of the file name during save.

Overview
5.2
Initialize Reset the post to the basic post-processing condition set by the program.

Methodology

Clicking Reset post resets all post-processed results to the basic post-processing condition. The default
Initial value is a Continuous contour, the Result edge a Feature edge and the Deformed shape an
Underformed shape.

▶Before initialized
▶▶Initialized

Section 5. Etc. | 537

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Section 6 Geometry
Overview
6.1
Change Color Edit the color of a Geometry/Mesh/Material/Property.

Methodology

Specify the color and object, and click the Apply button. The color of Geometry/Mesh/Material/Property can
be changed easily by this function. Also the color can be edited by using property window.

[User Defined Color]: User can define the color of selected object.
[Geometry Type Color]: Change color to geometry type color.
[Random Color]: Apply random color to selected object.
[Display ID]: Check to see Material/Property ID.

538 | Section 6. Geometry Shape

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Overview
6.2
Color Type Display the face or solid geometry shape or mesh set shape in the shape color or material color on the
screen.

Methodology

Select the shape color or material color.

This function can be used to check what types of material properties are assigned after modeling.

Overview
6.3
Random Color Assign a random color to a Face/Solid geometry shape or Mesh set.

Methodology

The program automatically assigns a color to the geometry shape or Mesh set.

A random color can be assigned to a geometry shape or Mesh set by clicking the Geometry shape ( )

or Mesh set ( ) on the [View toolbar] on the top of the work screen.

Section 6. Geometry Shape | 539

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Section 7 Node/Element
Overview
7.1
Query Check the Node or Element information.

Methodology

Specify the Query type (Node or Element) of the target and input the Node number or Element number.
The particular Node or Element can be directly selected on the work screen. If the Query type is a Node, its
coordinates and adjacent elements to that node are printed on the Output window. If the Query type is an
Element, the type and shape, volume, aspect ratio, property/material and node connection information are
printed.

▶Node information

▶Element information

540 | Section 7. Node/Element

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Section 8 Export 3D PDF

Overview
8.1
Export to 3D PDF Save the model information before analysis and the result information after analysis as a 3-dimensional
PDF document. Adjusting the 3D view on the PDF document and checking the cross-section information,
similar to the operations in the program, is possible. Hence, the 3D model/analysis result information can all
be checked on one PDF document without the model/result files.

▶Before analysis (Model

information)
▶3D PDFanalysis (Result
▶▶After
information)

Methodology

Export all the information on a model such as table for input parameters, geometry and mesh before
analysis as a PDF file. Specify the output direction, path, file name and select the OK button to create a
PDF document as shown above.
Because this operation has model tree/view tools etc. similar to the program, basic show/hide, rotation,
move operations are available and can be used to check the 3D model information.
In particular, the model dimension lines and comments can be added and for 3D models, the arbitrary
cross-section information can also be checked.

After analysis, the result images and animation can be saved and the output results can be selected on the
tree structure and composed as a PDF document.

Section 8. Export 3D PDF | 541

 User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

Section 9 Flight Simulation

Overview
9.1
Flight Simulation The Perspective view function from the View toolset below can be used to check the interior inform ation
and results of a 3D model.

For the Perspective view function, the checking positions need to be checked directly using a mouse, but to
automatically simulate it along a particular guideline, the 'Flight simulation' function can be used.
The guideline can be selected from a line or repeating line(wire), and the model interior can be checked
along the selected line. This function is available for both before/after analysis.

▶ Flight simulation

Methodology

Select the guideline. Directly draw the path in the model interior, or select a sub-shape line of an existing
geometry shape.
Selecting the line instantly displays an arrow in the processing direction, and the direction can be changed
using the opposite direction option.

The simulation operates using Start, Stop, End buttons and selecting the Record button saves the
simulation as a video file.

[Control]
Control the process speed using a scroll bar.

542 | Section 9. Flight Simulation

User Manual Chapter 7. Result and Tools

In particular, the (Progress/Rewind) button is activated at the Stop state and the model interior results can
be checked by moving back and forth along the guide line. The currently viewed model can also be zoomed
in/out.

[Rotate]
The view perspective can be rotated Left/Right/Top/Bottom as it moves along the guideline and can be
moved (offset) with respect to the guideline. Hence, the information can still be checked when the guideline
position is different from the target position by using the rotate/move operations.

All buttons during the flight simulation can be used as the following shortcut keys, and can be checked from
the Tooltips of each button.

Shortcut Key List

A View left
D View right
S View bottom
W View top
1 Rotate to original position
← Move center to the left
→ Move center to the right
↑ Move center to the top
↓ Move center to the bottom
2 Move center to original position
R Proceed from stop state(Only available at Stop state)
F Rewind from stop state(Only available at Stop state)

Section 9. Flight Simulation | 543